Mark

Mark front

Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1–13)
2. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)
3. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)
4. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)
5. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)
6. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)
7. Jesus’ last days and death (14:1–15:47)
8. Jesus’ resurrection (16:1–8)

What is the book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about what Jesus did and how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles. Many Christians believe that this Gospel was the first one to be written.

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel According to Mark.” Or they may choose a different title, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark Wrote.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Who wrote the book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark, also known as John Mark. This Mark did not know Jesus during his life on earth, and he did not witness the events that he writes about in this Gospel. However, he was a close friend of the Apostle Peter. Most likely, Mark recorded what Peter said about Jesus and then wrote this Gospel based on that eyewitness testimony.

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What does the phrase “the kingdom of God” mean?

Mark refers to “the kingdom of God” 14 times. This phrase is both important and difficult to translate. In general, the word “kingdom” refers to a monarch ruling over a group of people in a specific area. In various contexts, the word can primarily emphasize the area, the people, or the ruling. However, the term usually refers to all three of these elements, even if one is emphasized more than the others. Consider how you might express the idea of “kingdom” in your language. Some translations emphasize the idea of ruling and express the idea with a clause like “God ruling as king” or “God’s reign.” Other translations emphasize the idea of the people who are ruled and express the idea with a clause like “belonging to God’s people.” However, both of these options do not fully express the idea of “kingdom.” If you have a word or phrase that describes a situation in which a king rules over people in a specific area, you could use it here. Since that word in English is “kingdom,” the ULT and UST both use “kingdom.” (See: kingdom and kingdom of God, kingdom of heaven)

What were “disciples” in Jesus’ culture?

In both Jewish culture and in Greco-Roman culture, teachers had “disciples” who learned from them and were committed to them. Sometimes these disciples would go wherever their teacher went and imitate what the teacher did. Jesus’ disciples similarly were committed to him and learned from him. Some of his closest disciples traveled and lived with Jesus, particularly those whom Mark refers to as The Twelve. Other disciples would go to see Jesus and learn from him, but they did not always travel or live with him. Consider how you might refer to these kinds of relationships in your language. The ULT expresses the idea with the word “disciple,” and the UST uses the word “apprentice.” (See: disciple)

Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase can express two primary ideas:

1. It can refer to someone who is a human. This meaning for the phrase appears frequently in the book of Ezekiel (for example, see Ezekiel 2:1 or Ezekiel 47:6). So, Jesus uses the phrase to refer to himself in the third person while identifying himself as a human being.
2. It can refer more specifically to a specific person who appears in Daniel 7:13–14. This person approaches God, who gives him dominion and authority. So, when he uses the phrase, Jesus is identifying himself with this person. Scholars are not sure whether people in Jesus’ culture used the title “Son of Man” to refer to the Messiah. However, Jesus is probably using the title to implicitly claim a special role, perhaps that of the Messiah.

There are three primary issues to consider when translating the phrase “the Son of Man”:

1. When Jesus uses the phrase, he is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would not understand this, you may need to express the idea in the first person. See the notes on the phrase “the Son of Man” throughout the book for ways to do this.
2. The phrase figuratively refers to someone who is human by identifying that person’s father as a “man.” If that figure of speech does not make sense in your language, you could refer to someone who is human in another way. Some translations use a phrase like “the human one” to express the idea.
3. The phrase refers to the specific figure from the book of Daniel. If you have a translation of the book of Daniel, you could translate the phrase as it is expressed there. If you do not have a translation of the book of Daniel, you could consider translating the phrase as a title that refers to a special person, implicitly the Messiah. You could make this clear by capitalizing the phrase (for example, “the Human One”) or by using a different form that indicates that this is a title (for example, “the one called Son of Man”).

A note related to translating the idea of “Son of Man” appears at its first occurrence. After that, if possible express the idea consistently throughout the rest of the book. Notes providing translation options for expressing the idea in first person instead of third person appear at every occurrence. (See: Son of Man, son of man)

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. The ULT represents these parallels by using the same words whenever the parallel passages are exactly the same. When the parallel passages are slightly different, the ULT represents the differences as much as possible by using different words. Make sure that your translation represents these similarities and differences as closely as possible.

Why does Mark use the word “immediately” so frequently?

Mark uses the word “immediately” 42 times. Most likely, he does this to make his narration more exciting and vivid. It is not always clear how close together events connected by the word “immediately” are. Because of that, it is best to use a general word or phrase that indicates that something happens soon after something else. If possible, express the idea with the same word or phrase throughout the book. The UST often expresses the idea with the phrase “as soon as.”

When is “you” singular, and when is “you” plural?

As he is telling his story, Mark uses both singular and plural forms of “you.” These were distinct in his language, but in English both singular and plural are expressed with the word “you.” So, in the introduction to each chapter, there is a section stating whether Mark uses the singular or plural form of “you” more frequently in that chapter. Then, notes throughout the chapter will indicate whenever Mark uses the less frequent form of “you.” Look for this section in each chapter introduction if your language distinguishes between singular and plural forms of “you.” (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Why does Mark uses present tense verbs for actions that happened in the past?

Throughout this book, Mark often uses present tense verbs to refer to actions that happened in the past. Sometimes he uses a present tense verb in the same sentence with past tense verbs. He does this particularly frequently with verbs that introduce speech. Scholars debate why Mark uses these present tense verbs. Most likely, he included them to highlight or call attention to the action that they describe. In other words, when Mark uses a present tense verb in past narration, he probably does so in order to make his readers pay attention. If present tense verbs in past narration would not accomplish this goal in your language, you could use past tense verbs in your translation and draw the attention of your readers in another way. Since Mark uses these present tense verbs frequently, there are not translation notes at each occurrence. Instead, each chapter introduction lists the verses in which Mark uses present tense verbs in this way. Make sure that your translation deals with this issue consistently. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

What are the major issues in the text of the book of Mark?

Some versions of the Bible include some verses in Matthew that other versions do not include. This is because some ancient manuscripts include these verses. However, the best ancient manuscripts do not include them. Here are the verses:

• “If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear” (7:16).
• “where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched” (9:44).
• “where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched” (9:44).
• “But if you do not forgive, neither will your Father in the heavens forgive your trespasses” (11:26).
• “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, “And he was counted with lawless ones’” (15:28).

It is recommended that you do not include these passages. However, if in your region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, you may include them. If they are included, they should be put in footnotes or inside square brackets to indicate that they were probably not originally part of Matthew.

Further, the manuscripts that scholars consider to be the most reliable do not include the words in 16:9–20. So, the ULT and UST put these words in brackets, and there are no translation notes on these verses. It is recommended that you also indicate in some way that Mark probably did not write these words. See the introduction to chapter 16 for more information.

Finally, in the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations with which your readers may be familiar to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: Textual Variants)

• “Jesus Christ, the Son of God” (1:1). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Jesus Christ.”
• “having had compassion” (1:41). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “having become angry.”
• “he appointed 12, whom he also named apostles” (3:14). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he appointed 12.”
• “And he appointed the Twelve, and he added” (3:16). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “And he added.”
• “guilty of an eternal sin” (3:29). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “deserving of eternal judgment.”
• “your brothers” (3:32). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “your brothers and your sisters.”
• “Gerasenes” (5:1). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Gadarenes.” Other manuscripts have this: “Gergesenes.”
• “for a testimony against them” (6:11). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “for a testimony against them. Truly I say to you, it will be more tolerable for Sodom and Gomorrah in the day of judgment than for that city.”
• “they were saying” (6:14). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he was saying.”
• “he was much perplexed” (6:20). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he was doing many things.”
• “his daughter, of Herodias” (6:22). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the daughter of Herodias herself.”
• “copper vessels” (7:4). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “copper vessels and beds.”
• “the tradition of men” (7:8). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the tradition of men, washings of pitchers and cups and many other similar such things you do.”
• “you may keep” (7:9). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “you may establish.”
• “enter into the town” (8:26). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “enter into the town nor speak to anyone in the town.”
• “prayer and fasting” (9:29). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “prayer.”
• “in your name” (9:38). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “in your name, who does not follow us.”
• “into Gehenna” (9:45). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “into Gehenna, into the unquenchable fire.”
• “salted with fire” (9:49). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “salted with fire, and every sacrifice will be salted with salt here.”
• “will leave his father and mother” (10:7). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “will leave his father and mother and will be joined to his wife.”
• “follow me” (10:21). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “follow me, having taken up the cross.”
• “how hard it is” (10:24). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “how hard it is for the ones trusting in riches.”
• “saying to him” (10:26). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “saying to themselves.”
• “he sends it back” (11:3). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he sends it.”
• “under your feet” (12:36). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “as a footstool of your feet.”
• “famines” (13:8). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “famines and troubles.”
• “Stay awake and pray” (13:33). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Stay awake.”
• “blood of the covenant” (14:24). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “blood of the new covenant.”
• “into the forecourt” (14:68). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “into the forecourt, and a rooster crowed.”
• “having come up” (15:8). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “having cried out.”
• “I do {with the one} you call the King of the Jews” (15:12). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “I do {with} the King of the Jews.”
• “he expired in this way” (15:37). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “crying out in this way he expired.”

Mark 1

Mark 1 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Introduction (1:1–13)
   • Opening (1:1–3)
   • The ministry of John the Baptist (1:4–8)
   • Jesus is baptized and tempted (1:9–13)
2. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)
   • Jesus calls four disciples (1:14–20)
   • Jesus teaches and casts out a demon (1:21–28)
   • Jesus heals Simon’s mother-in-law and many others (1:29–34)
   • Jesus teaches and heals people throughout Galilee (1:35–39)
   • Jesus heals a leper (1:40–45)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2–3, which is made up of quotations from Malachi 3:1 and Isaiah 40:3.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Baptism

The word “baptism” refers to a ritual washing, usually with water. John’s baptism is similar to Christian baptism, but it does not mean exactly the same thing (see Acts 18:24–26). Mark writes that John’s baptism is “of repentance” (see 1:4). Most likely, it symbolized the removal of the sins that people were repenting of and the beginning of a new way of living. However, even Jesus received this baptism despite the fact that he did not need to repent of any sins. In this case, the baptism may symbolize complete dedication to God. Consider how you might refer to this kind of ritual washing in your language.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in speeches that John the Baptist delivers to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 38, 40, 41, and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 1:1-4

The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God … Just as it has been written in Isaiah the prophet, Behold, I am sending my messenger before your face, who will prepare your way … a voice of one calling out in the wilderness, Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight … John came

Quote: ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ & καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ: ἰδοὺ, ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου πρὸ προσώπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου & φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ & ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet and the quotation that follows could go with: (1) verse 1: The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God. In this case, Mark means that thegospel had its beginning just as Isaiah prophesied. Alternate translation: “The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God, happened just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, “Behold, I am sending my messenger before your face, who will prepare your way; a voice crying out in the wilderness, ‘Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight.’” And so John came” (2) verse 4: John came. In this case, Mark means that John came as Isaiah had prophesied. Alternate translation: “This is the beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God. Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, “Behold, I am sending my messenger before your face, who will prepare your way; a voice crying out in the wilderness, ‘Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight,’” John came”

Mark 1:1

The beginning of the gospel

Quote: ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of beginning, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Here begins the gospel”

of the gospel of Jesus Christ

Quote: τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a gospel that is about Jesus Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of the gospel concerning Jesus Christ”

the Son of God

Quote: Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Son of God is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.

the Son of God

Quote: Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts include the phrase the Son of God. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 1:2

Just as it has been written in Isaiah the prophet

Quote: καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

In Mark’s culture, Just as it has been written in Isaiah the prophet is a normal way to introduce quotations from important texts, in this case, the Old Testament books written by the prophet Malachi and by Isaiah the prophet (see Malachi 3:1 and Isaiah 40:3). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from important texts. Alternate translation: “Just as you can read in what Isaiah the prophet wrote” or “Just as it says in the Scriptures connected with Isaiah the prophet”

Just as it has been written in Isaiah the prophet

Quote: καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote”

in Isaiah the prophet

Quote: ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, Isaiah the prophet represents the book written by Isaiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the scroll of Isaiah the prophet”

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “See” or “Pay attention”

before your face

Quote: πρὸ προσώπου σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase before your face means before or in front of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in front of you” or “before I send you”

will prepare your way

Quote: κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the author of the quotation speaks of helping people to get ready for the coming of the Messiah as if it were preparing the way or road for the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will help people get ready for you to arrive”

Mark 1:3

a voice of one calling out

Quote: φωνὴ βοῶντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The author of the quotation is using voice to represent a person speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person calling out” or “someone calling out”

of one calling out in the wilderness

Quote: βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “of one calling out in the wilderness and saying” or “of one calling out in the wilderness, declaring”

in the wilderness, Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. If you do, you will need to delete the single quotation mark at the end of this quotation. Alternate translation: “the wilderness that people must make ready the way of the Lord, that they must make his paths straight”

Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight

Quote: ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a connecting word in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Make ready the way of the Lord, yes, make his paths straight”

Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight

Quote: ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the author of the quotation speaks as if people should build or maintain roads for the Lord to travel on as he comes to visit his people. He means that people need to be living and acting in proper ways when the Lord appears to his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the metaphor in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Live and behave in a way that pleases God, as if you were making a road ready for him to travel on”

Make ready … make

Quote: ἑτοιμάσατε & ποιεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the person who is crying out is speaking to many people, the commands Make ready and make are plural.

Mark 1:4

John came, the one baptizing in the wilderness and preaching

Quote: ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης, ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καὶ κηρύσσων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase translated the one baptizing could be: (1) a description of what John did, in parallel with the word preaching. Alternate translation: “John came. He was baptizing in the wilderness and preaching” (2) a title (“the Baptist”) that people called John. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist came in the wilderness, preaching”

John came

Quote: ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

This phrase introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “There was a man named John” or “A man called John appeared”

preaching a baptism of repentance for forgiveness of sins

Quote: κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “preaching, ‘Receive a baptism of repentance for forgiveness of sins.’”

preaching a baptism of repentance

Quote: κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that John was preaching that people should undergo a baptism of repentance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “preaching that people should receive a baptism of repentance” or “preaching that people should ask to receive a baptism of repentance”

a baptism of repentance for forgiveness of sins

Quote: βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind repentance and forgiveness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that people should be baptized to show that they had repented, so that their sins would be forgiven”

a baptism of repentance

Quote: βάπτισμα μετανοίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a baptism that shows or expresses repentance. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a baptism that expresses repentance” or “a baptism that demonstrates repentance”

for forgiveness of sins

Quote: εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Here, the phrase for the forgiveness of sins indicates the goal of the baptism of repentance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that indicates the goal of an action. Alternate translation: “that would lead to forgiveness of sins”

Mark 1:5

all the Judea region and all the Jerusalemites

Quote: πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark twice writes all as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most of the Judea region and most of the Jerusalemites”

all the Judea region

Quote: πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here, the phrase all the Judea region represents the people who live in that area. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the inhabitants of the Judea region”

were going out

Quote: ἐξεπορεύετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “were coming out”

were being baptized by him in the Jordan River, confessing their sins

Quote: ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

Here the people were confessing their sins before they were being baptized. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements so that these events are in sequential order, or you could use another form to indicate the sequence. Alternate translation: “confessing their sins, they were being baptized by him in the Jordan River” or “were being baptized by him in the Jordan River after they confessed their sins”

were being baptized by him

Quote: ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was baptizing them”

confessing

Quote: ἐξομολογούμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here it is the people who are confessing, not John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as they confessed”

Mark 1:6

And John

Quote: καὶ & ὁ Ἰωάννης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark uses the word And to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. The word does not introduce another event in the story. This background information is found in 1:6–8. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Concerning this John, he”

was clothed with

Quote: ἦν & ἐνδεδυμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “clothed himself with”

was clothed with camel hair

Quote: ἦν & ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that John wore clothes made from camel hair. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “wore clothing made from the hair of camels”

a leather belt

Quote: ζώνην δερματίνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A leather belt is a thin strap made from animal skin that holds clothing in place. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of clothing, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “an animal skin strap” or “a band made from animal skin”

Mark 1:7

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

is coming after me

Quote: ἔρχεται & ὀπίσω μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here John speaks as if someone is walking behind him. He means that soon someone will continue what he has started doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will preach after I have preached”

is coming

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here John uses the present tense to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will come”

I am not worthy, stooping down, to untie the strap of his sandals

Quote: οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, to untie the strap of someone’s sandals was a duty of a slave. John means that he is not worthy to be a slave to this person who is coming after him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am not worthy to be the slave who, stooping down, unties the strap of his sandals” or “I am not worthy to act as his slave”

worthy, stooping down, to untie

Quote: ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression stooping down contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “worthy to untie”

to untie the strap of his sandals

Quote: λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In Jesus’ culture, people wore sandals on their feet by tying them on with a strap. To take off the sandals, someone had to untie the strap. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what it means to untie the strap, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to help him remove his sandals by untying the strap” or “to remove his sandals”

Mark 1:8

baptized

Quote: ἐβάπτισα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here John could be using the past tense: (1) to refer generally to how he baptizes people. Alternate translation: “always baptize” (2) to refer specifically to how he just baptized some people. Alternate translation: “I have baptized”

you … you

Quote: ὑμᾶς (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since John is speaking to many people, the word you is plural throughout this verse.

but he will baptize you with the Holy Spirit

Quote: αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here John indicates that the one coming after him will cause people to experience the Holy Spirit, just as John caused people to experience water in baptism. If possible, preserve the baptism metaphor or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “but he will baptize you, as it were, with the Holy Spirit” or “and he also will perform something like baptism, but he will use the Holy Spirit”

but

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word but introduces what the one coming after John will use for baptism in contrast to what John uses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “and, in contrast,”

Mark 1:9

And it happened that

Quote: καὶ ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

The phrase And it happened that marks the beginning of a new event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “Next,”

in those days

Quote: ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, Matthew uses the term days to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that identifies a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “during that time”

in those days

Quote: ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase those days refers to the time period when John was preaching and baptizing people at the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “John was preaching and baptizing people when”

came

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went”

he was baptized by John

Quote: ἐβαπτίσθη & ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John baptized him”

Mark 1:10

immediately, coming up out of the water, he saw

Quote: εὐθὺς ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος, εἶδεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word immediately indicates that as soon as John baptized Jesus, Jesus saw the heavens being split open as he was coming up out of the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “right away, as he was coming up out of the water, he saw”

coming up out of the water

Quote: ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus was in the Jordan River when he was baptized. Afterwards, he came up out of the river. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “leaving the water of the river” or “stepping out of the river”

coming up … coming down

Quote: ἀναβαίνων & καταβαῖνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In contexts such as these, your language might say “going” instead of coming. Alternate translation: “going up … going down”

he saw the heavens being split open and

Quote: εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to a phenomenon in which heaven and earth are connected in a special way so that someone or something can move from one place to the other. Jesus was able to see this happening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what it means for the heavens to be split open. Alternate translation: “he could see the heavens being split open to connect heaven and earth, and he saw” or “he saw the entrance to the heavens opening and”

the heavens being split open

Quote: σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the heavens splitting open” or “God splitting the heavens open”

the Spirit coming down on him like a dove

Quote: τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

The phrase like a dove could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he was coming down upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down on him, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down on him as a dove comes down to earth”

coming down on him

Quote: καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the Spirit came down from the heavens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “coming down on him from the heavens”

Mark 1:11

a voice came

Quote: φωνὴ ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is using voice to represent the person who is speaking, which is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person spoke” or “God the Father spoke”

my beloved Son

Quote: ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Son is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.

beloved Son

Quote: ὁ Υἱός & ὁ ἀγαπητός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Son, whom I love”

With you, I am well pleased

Quote: ἐν σοὶ εὐδόκησα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You please me”

Mark 1:12

And immediately

Quote: καὶ εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And immediately introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”

casts him out

Quote: αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Mark speaks as if the Spirit physically picked up Jesus and casts him out into the wilderness. He means that the Spirit compelled Jesus to go to the wilderness, although he did not force Jesus to go against his will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “compels him to go” or “leads him out”

Mark 1:13

being tempted by Satan

Quote: πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Satan was tempting him”

he was with the wild animals

Quote: ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων (1)

Alternate translation: “Jesus was living among the wild animals”

Mark 1:14

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word But introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”

after John was handed over

Quote: μετὰ & τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context (see 6:17–29) that it was the soldiers of King Herod Antipas, the ruler of Galilee. Alternate translation: “after soldiers handed John over to the authorities” or “after the king of Galilee arrested John”

came to Galilee

Quote: ἦλθεν & εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus was going back to Galilee, since he had originally come from there to meet John (see 1:9). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came to Galilee again” or “returned to Galilee”

came

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went”

the gospel of God

Quote: τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a gospel that relates to God. More specifically, the gospel could: (1) come from God. Alternate translation: “the gospel that came from God” (2) be about God. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God”

Mark 1:15

and saying

Quote: καὶ λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

The time has been fulfilled

Quote: πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

When time has been fulfilled, that means that it is now the moment that God has appointed for something to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The time that God appointed has arrived” or “The time is right”

The time has been fulfilled

Quote: πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The time has come” or “The time is here”

has come near

Quote: ἤγγικεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Matthew uses this phrase in the sense of near in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “is about to begin” or “is about to happen”

Repent … believe

Quote: μετανοεῖτε & πιστεύετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since Jesus is speaking to many people, the commands Repent and believe are plural.

Mark 1:16

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “One time,”

Simon and Andrew, the brother of Simon, net-casting into the sea, for they were fishermen

Quote: Σίμωνα καὶ Ἀνδρέαν, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Σίμωνος, ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ; ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces two new characters into the story. Consider how you might introduce new characters into a story, and follow that form here. You may need to rearrange some elements of the sentence to do so. Alternate translation: “two fishermen who were net-casting into the sea. They were Simon and Andrew, Simon’s brother”

the brother of Simon

Quote: τὸν ἀδελφὸν Σίμωνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

Mark never says whether Simon or Andrew was older, but he mentions Simon first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that Andrew was younger. Alternate translation: “the younger brother of Simon”

net-casting into the sea

Quote: ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they were net-casting in order to catch fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “net-casting into the sea to catch fish”

net-casting into

Quote: ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Some cultures use a net to catch fish. A net is a mesh or network of cords or ropes which fishermen throw into the water to trap fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to how people catch fish in your culture, or you could use a general phrase. Alternate translation: “fishing in” or “trying to catch fish in”

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why Simon and Andrew were net-casting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces this kind of background information. Alternate translation: “which they did because” or “since”

Mark 1:17

Come after me

Quote: δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase Come after me is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be my disciples” or “Travel with me as my students”

Come … you

Quote: δεῦτε & ὑμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since Jesus is speaking to Simon and Andrew, the command Come and the word you are plural.

I will make you to become fishers of men

Quote: ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of preaching the gospel and helping people believe in Jesus as if it were fishing. He means that, just as fishermen catch many fish, so Simon and Andrew will help many people believe. If possible, preserve the metaphor here, since it relates directly to what Simon and Andrew were doing when Jesus saw them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea as a simile. Alternate translation: “I will make you to become people who collect men for me, just as you now collect fish”

of men

Quote: ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of men and women”

Mark 1:18

having left the nets

Quote: ἀφέντες τὰ δίκτυα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you expressed the idea of “net-casting” in 1:16. Alternate translation: “having stopped fishing”

they followed him

Quote: ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase they followed him indicates that they traveled with Jesus and were his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they became his disciples” or “they traveled with him as his students”

Mark 1:19

having gone on a little farther

Quote: προβὰς ὀλίγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus walked a short distance beside the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having gone a short way along the shore”

James, the {son} of Zebedee, and John, his brother, and they {were} mending the nets in the boat

Quote: Ἰάκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, καὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces two more new characters into the story. Consider how you might introduce new characters into a story, and follow that form here. You may need to rearrange some elements of the sentence to do so. Alternate translation: “two men who were in a boat, mending their nets. They were James, the son of Zebedee, and his brother John”

his brother

Quote: τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

Mark never says whether James or John was older, but he mentions James first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that John was younger. Alternate translation: “his younger brother”

the nets

Quote: τὰ δίκτυα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Translate the word nets as you did in 1:18. Alternate translation: “the tools they used for fishing”

Mark 1:20

he called them

Quote: ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus called them to “come after him,” that is, to travel with him and be his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he called them to come after him” or “he called them to travel with him as his students”

they went away after him

Quote: ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ (1)

See how you expressed the similar clause “they followed him” in 1:18. Alternate translation: “they became his disciples” or “they traveled with him as his students”

they went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, they refers to James and John. It does not refer to the servants, who stayed in the boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to James and John more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John went away”

Mark 1:21

they enter

Quote: εἰσπορεύονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Jesus and the four disciples he just called to follow him: Simon, Andrew, James, and John. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples enter”

on the Sabbaths

Quote: τοῖς Σάββασιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Mark uses the phrase on the Sabbaths to indicate that this event occurred on one specific Sabbath day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on one of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”

Mark 1:22

And they were astonished at his teaching, for he was teaching them as having authority and not as the scribes

Quote: καὶ ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ; ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And he was teaching them as having authority and not as the scribes. So, they were astonished at his teaching”

they were astonished at his teaching

Quote: ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “his teaching astonished them”

they were astonished

Quote: ἐξεπλήσσοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the people who in the “synagogue” (see 1:21). If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “those who were in the synagogue were astonished”

at his teaching

Quote: ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of teaching, you could express the same idea in another way. Mark could be focusing primarily on: (1) the way in which Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “at how he taught” (2) what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “at what he taught”

having authority

Quote: ἐξουσίαν ἔχων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “one having been authorized”

and not as the scribes

Quote: καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to put a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and he was not teaching them as the scribes were teaching them”

Mark 1:23

there was in their synagogue a man with an unclean spirit

Quote: ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark is introducing this man as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man in their synagogue. He had an unclean spirit”

their synagogue

Quote: τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people living in this region. Mark means that this is the same synagogue that Jesus was teaching in. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “that Jewish synagogue” or “that synagogue”

a man with an unclean spirit

Quote: ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that an unclean spirit, or demon, was possessing or controlling this man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a demon-possessed man” or “a man controlled by an unclean spirit”

Mark 1:24

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he asked”

What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth

Quote: τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The demon is using the question form to confront Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth!”

What to us and to you

Quote: τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the question What to us and to you asks whether you and us have anything in common or have any reason to be together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What do you and we have in common” or “What reason do you have to get involved with us”

to us … us

Quote: ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In both places, the pronoun us could refer to: (1) the demon and other demons like it. Alternate translation: “to us demons … all of us demons” (2) the multiple demons controlling the man. Alternate translation: “to us who control this man … us who control this man”

Have you come to destroy us

Quote: ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

This sentence could be: (1) a rhetorical question. In this case, the demon uses the question form to indicate what it thinks Jesus has come to do. Alternate translation: “I know that you have come to destroy us!” or “You have come to destroy us.” (2) a true question. In this case, the demon is asking Jesus whether his mission includes destroying the demons. Alternate translation: “Tell me, have you come to destroy us?”

the Holy One of God

Quote: ὁ Ἅγιος τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the demon could be using the possessive form to describe a Holy One: (1) whom God has made holy in a special way. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has made holy in a special way” (2) whom God sent. Alternate translation: “the Holy One from God” or “the Holy One whom God sent”

Mark 1:25

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he commanded”

Be silenced

Quote: φιμώθητι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Stop speaking” or “Keep quiet”

come out from him

Quote: ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is commanding the demon to stop possessing or controlling the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “stop controlling him” or “cease possessing him”

Mark 1:26

having convulsed him

Quote: σπαράξαν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having caused him to have a seizure”

having cried out with a loud voice

Quote: φωνῆσαν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase cried out with a loud voice means that the demon raised the volume of its voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”

went out from him

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated the similar phrase in 1:25. Alternate translation: “stopped controlling him” or “ceased possessing him”

Mark 1:27

they all were amazed

Quote: ἐθαμβήθησαν ἅπαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus did and taught. Alternate translation: “what they saw and heard amazed all of them”

saying

Quote: λέγοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they asked”

What is this

Quote: τί ἐστιν τοῦτο? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The people in the synagogue are using the question form to express their surprise and amazement. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We are impressed.” or “This is amazing!”

A new teaching according to authority! And he commands the unclean spirits

Quote: διδαχὴ καινή κατ’ ἐξουσίαν! καὶ τοῖς πνεύμασι τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις ἐπιτάσσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here, the phrase according to authority could go with: (1) A new teaching. Alternate translation: “A new teaching, one according to authority! And he commands the unclean spirits” (2) And he commands the unclean spirits. Alternate translation: “A new teaching! According to authority he commands even the unclean spirits”

according to authority

Quote: κατ’ ἐξουσίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from one having been authorized” or “that sounds authoritative”

Mark 1:28

And the hearing of him immediately went out everywhere into the whole surrounding region of Galilee

Quote: καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

This sentence marks the end of this story by describing how people in the area responded. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. Alternate translation: “After that, the hearing of him immediately went out everywhere into the whole surrounding region of Galilee”

the hearing of him immediately went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Mark speaks of the hearing of him as if it were something that could go out actively by itself. This expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who then told even more people about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people immediately spread the hearing of him”

went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “came out”

the hearing of him

Quote: ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe what people were hearing about Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what people were hearing about Jesus” or “the news about him”

the whole surrounding region of Galilee

Quote: ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark could be using the possessive form to describe a surrounding region that is: (1) the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “the whole surrounding region, which is Galilee” (2) the area within Galilee that is near Capernaum. Alternate translation: “all the regions of Galilee that surround Capernaum” (3) made up of the regions that border on Galilee. Alternate translation: “all the regions that surround Galilee”

Mark 1:29

And immediately

Quote: καὶ εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And immediately introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”

having come out

Quote: ἐξελθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone out”

they came into the house of Simon and Andrew, along with James and John

Quote: ἦλθον εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Σίμωνος καὶ Ἀνδρέου, μετὰ Ἰακώβου καὶ Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus and his four disciples (Simon, Andrew, James, and John) together went to the house of Simon and Andrew. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus went with Simon and Andrew into their home, and James and John went with them”

they came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went”

Mark 1:30

Now the mother-in-law of Simon was lying down, being sick with a fever, and immediately

Quote: ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα καὶ εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “While all that was happening, the mother-in-law of Simon was sick with a fever and was lying down in the house. Immediately”

Now the mother-in-law of Simon was lying down, being sick with a fever

Quote: ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces the mother-in-law of Simon as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Now the mother-in-law of Simon was in the house. She was lying down, being sick with a fever”

the mother-in-law

Quote: ἡ & πενθερὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

The word mother-in-law refers to the mother of Simon’s wife. In your translation, you could use the term or expression in your own language for this relationship.

being sick with a fever

Quote: πυρέσσουσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A fever is a symptom of an illness in which the temperature of the body temporarily increases. People with fevers feel sick and weak. If your reader would not be familiar with fevers, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate Translation: “having a high body temperature” or “being ill with an elevated temperature”

they speak

Quote: λέγουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people who were in the house of Simon and Andrew. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these people. Alternate translation: “some people who were in the house speak”

Mark 1:31

he raised her up, having taken hold of her hand

Quote: ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause describes what Jesus did before what the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “having taken hold of her hand, he raised her up”

the fever left her

Quote: ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here Mark speaks of the fever as if it were a person that left her. He means that she was no longer sick with the fever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “she was no longer sick with a fever” or “her fever was gone”

the fever

Quote: ὁ πυρετός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated fever in 1:30. Alternate translation: “the high body temperature” or “the elevated temperature”

she was serving them

Quote: διηκόνει αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that she took food and offered it to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “she was giving them food”

Mark 1:32

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word Now introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”

after the sun {had} set

Quote: ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the people waited until the sun set because that marked the end of the Sabbath, and they could then do the work of bringing the sick to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “after the sun set and the Sabbath had ended”

they were bringing

Quote: ἔφερον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “other people were bringing”

all

Quote: πάντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large group of”

the ones having sickness

Quote: τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sickness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sick people”

the ones possessed by demons

Quote: τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom demons possessed”

Mark 1:33

the whole city

Quote: ὅλη ἡ πόλις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word city represents the people who lived in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone in the city”

whole

Quote: ὅλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark says whole here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “majority of”

was gathered together

Quote: ἦν & ἐπισυνηγμένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” or “came together”

at the door

Quote: πρὸς τὴν θύραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the door is the entrance to house where Simon and Andrew lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the door of the house of Simon and Andrew” or “at the door of the house where Jesus was”

Mark 1:34

having sickness

Quote: κακῶς ἔχοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sickness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “men and women who were ill”

he was not permitting the demons to speak, because they knew him

Quote: οὐκ ἤφιεν λαλεῖν τὰ δαιμόνια, ὅτι ᾔδεισαν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because the demons knew him, he was not permitting them to speak”

they knew him

Quote: ᾔδεισαν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the demons knew that Jesus was the Christ, the Son of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they knew who he really was” or “they knew that he was the Christ”

Mark 1:35

in the morning, {while it was} still very dark

Quote: πρωῒ ἔννυχα λείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to a time early in morning before the sun rose. Consider how you might naturally refer to this time period in your language. Alternate translation: “early the next day, before dawn”

he went out and went away to a desolate place

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν καὶ ἀπῆλθεν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus went out of Simon and Andrew’s house and then went away from the town of Capernaum into a desolate place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he went out of Simon and Andrew’s house and went away from the town of Capernaum to a desolate area”

he went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came out”

Mark 1:36

the ones with him

Quote: οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to other people who were there with Simon in the house, including Andrew, James, and John and probably other people who were staying there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer more explicitly to people who were staying at the house of Simon. Alternate translation: “the other people staying in his house”

pursued

Quote: κατεδίωξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here Mark speaks as if Simon and the ones with him were hunting Jesus down or trying to capture him. He uses the word pursued as an overstatement to emphasize how urgently they were looking for Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “looked everywhere” or “diligently looked”

Mark 1:37

All are seeking you

Quote: πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the disciples imply that they think that Jesus should come back with them to All the people who are seeking him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “All are seeking you! Will you come back with us?”

All

Quote: πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective All as a noun to mean all the people in Capernaum. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “All people”

All

Quote: πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Simon and those with him say All here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “Very many”

Mark 1:38

Let us go elsewhere, into the surrounding towns, so that I may preach there also, because for this I went out

Quote: ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις, ἵνα καὶ ἐκεῖ κηρύξω; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Because I went out to preach in many places, let us go elsewhere, into the surrounding towns, so that I may preach there also”

Let us go elsewhere

Quote: ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that he will not go back to Capernaum to meet all the people who were looking for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Instead of going back to Capernaum, let us go elsewhere”

I went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Here Jesus does not start where he went out from. He may be referring to how he left Capernaum, or he may be referring to how he came to the world as a human being, or he may be implying to both of these meanings. If possible, do not indicate where Jesus went out from. Alternate translation: “I came” or “I went here”

I went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “I came out”

for this

Quote: εἰς τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun this refers to Jesus preaching in the surrounding towns. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to that action more directly. Alternate translation: “to do that very thing” or “to preach in many places”

Mark 1:39

he went in all Galilee, preaching

Quote: ἦλθεν κηρύσσων & εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. However, it was only Jesus who was preaching and casting out demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went in all Galilee, and he was preaching”

he went

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he went”

their synagogues

Quote: τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people living in Galilee. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish synagogues” or “the synagogues in that area”

Mark 1:40

a leper comes to him

Quote: ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτὸν λεπρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a leper as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man who was a leper. He comes to Jesus”

comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “goes”

kneeling down

Quote: γονυπετῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In this man’s culture, kneeling down before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what kneeling down means. Alternate translation: “prostrating himself before him” or “bowing down to him in respect”

you are able to make me clean

Quote: δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

The man is using this statement to make a request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in request form. Alternate translation: “please make me clean”

to make me clean

Quote: με καθαρίσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The man talks about becoming clean ceremonially, but it is implicit that he has become unclean because of his leprosy, so he is primarily asking Jesus to heal him of this disease. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to heal my disease”

Mark 1:41

having had compassion

Quote: σπλαγχνισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of compassion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having sympathized with him”

having had compassion

Quote: σπλαγχνισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read having had compassion. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts read “having become angry.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

I am willing

Quote: θέλω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that he is willing to cleanse or heal the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am willing to cleanse you”

Mark 1:42

the leprosy departed from him

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here, Mark speaks of the man’s leprosy as if it were a person who departed from him. He means that the man no longer had leprosy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his leprosy was gone” or “he was no longer a leper”

he was made clean

Quote: ἐκαθερίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “he was clean” or “Jesus had made him clean”

Mark 1:43-44

But having strictly warned him, he immediately sent him away … And he says to him, “See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them

Quote: καὶ ἐμβριμησάμενος αὐτῷ, εὐθὺς ἐξέβαλεν αὐτόν & καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, ὅρα μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς; ἀλλὰ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

Jesus strictly warned the man using the words recorded in 1:44 before he sent him away. It might be helpful to make it clear that Jesus strictly warned the man before he sent him away. Alternate translation: “While he was immediately sending him away, he strictly warned him by saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’” or “He immediately sent him away. Before he went, Jesus strictly warned him, saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’”

Mark 1:44

you say nothing to anyone

Quote: μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the man is not to tell anyone that Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you tell no one that I healed you”

you say nothing to anyone

Quote: μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated nothing and anyone are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “you certainly do not say anything to anyone”

show yourself to the priest

Quote: σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus told the man to show himself to the priest so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest for inspection if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “ask to be inspected by the priest” or “let yourself be examined by the priest”

offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded

Quote: προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus assumes that the man will know that the law required a person who had been healed from a skin disease to make a specific sacrifice. This made the person ceremonially clean, and they could participate once again in community religious activities. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “offer the sacrifice that Moses commanded so that you could become ceremonially clean once again”

for a testimony to them

Quote: εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that the man should show himself to the priest and offer the gift to prove or provide testimony that he had been healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for a testimony to them that you have been cleansed”

for a testimony to them

Quote: εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimony, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that it testifies to them”

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them could refer to: (1) Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “to people” (2) the priests specifically. Alternate translation: “to the priests”

Mark 1:45

having gone out

Quote: ἐξελθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come out”

to proclaim much and to report the word

Quote: κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The phrases to proclaim often and to report the word mean similar things. Mark is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “to proclaim the word much” or “to report the word much”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents what the man said about how Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus had done for him”

so that he was able no longer to enter into a town openly

Quote: ὥστε μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασθαι φανερῶς εἰς πόλιν εἰσελθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus was able no longer to enter into a town openly because people who had heard about him would crowd around him so much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that, because so many people would crowd around him, he was able no longer to enter into a town openly”

they were coming

Quote: ἤρχοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of coming. Alternate translation: “they were going”

from all sides

Quote: πάντοθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

The phrase from all sides is an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” or “from very many places”

Mark 2

Mark 2 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)
   • Jesus heals a paralytic (2:1–12)
   • Jesus calls Levi and dines at his house (2:13–17)
   • Jesus brings something new (2:18–22)
   • Picking heads of grain on the Sabbath (2:22–28)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“Sinners”

When Mark uses the word “sinners,” he is describing a group of people whom many Jewish religious groups would have considered to be living in ways that were improper for those who were part of God’s people. Some of these people may have committed significant sins, while others may have disagreed with many of the Jewish religious groups about how Jews could properly behave. If possible, use a word or phrase that identifies people who are not living as many religious groups think that people should live. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Fasting and feasting

In Jesus’ culture, people would “fast,” or abstain from eating for a period of time, in order to honor God or to repent of their sins. They would “feast,” or eat a lot of food, when they were celebrating some important event, such as a wedding. Consider how you will refer to these behaviors in 2:15–22, in which Jesus feasts and teaches about why he and his disciples do not fast. (See: fast, fasting)

The Sabbath

In the law that God gave to Moses, God commanded the Israelites to rest on the seventh day, which was called the Sabbath. The Jewish religious leaders disagreed with each other about what kinds of things a person could do on the Sabbath and still rest as God had commanded. In 2:22–28, the Pharisees and Jesus engage in these kinds of debates about the Sabbath. Jesus disagrees with how the Pharisees understand the Sabbath, and he argues for a different view. If your readers may not understand what the Sabbath is and why Jesus and the Pharisees are debating about it, you may need to include some information in a footnote. (See: Sabbath)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

The short parables in 2:19–22

In these verses, Jesus gives three short parables that emphasize how certain things do not go well together. Fasting does not happen during a wedding celebration. An unshrunk piece of cloth does not make a good patch for an old garment. Old wineskins do not make good containers for fresh wine that still needs to ferment. Jesus tells these parables to illustrate how his ministry and preaching do not match well with how people had previously done things. In other words, Jesus wants people to expect what he does to be new, and this may require thinking and doing many new things. You should preserve these parables, since they are not direct metaphors. If necessary, you could introduce them in such a way that your readers recognize that they are parables or illustrations. See the notes on each verse for possible translation options. (See: Parables)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 17, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 2:1

after {some} days

Quote: δι’ ἡμερῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase after {some} days indicates that the events Mark is about to narrate occurred a few, but not very many, days after the event he just narrated, the healing of the leper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that indicates that a few days passed between the previous event and this event. Alternate translation: “a few days later”

it was heard

Quote: ἠκούσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was people who were in Capernaum. Alternate translation: “the people there heard”

in a house

Quote: ἐν οἴκῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that this house was Jesus’ home while he was in Capernaum. This house could belong to: (1) Simon and Andrew, since he stayed at their house previously (see 1:29). Alternate translation: “in Simon and Andrew’s house” (2) Jesus and his relatives, who may have moved to Capernaum. Alternate translation: “in his house”

Mark 2:2

many

Quote: πολλοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”

were gathered

Quote: συνήχθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered” or “came together”

it could no longer receive

Quote: μηκέτι χωρεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the clause it could no longer receive means that the house was so full that no one else could fit inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was no space left” or “no one else could fit”

not even the {areas} at the door

Quote: μηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that there were so many people even outside the house that no one could get near the door. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and no one could even get to the door” or “and there was no space even at the door into the house”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Mark is using the term word to mean the gospel, that Jesus preached using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

Mark 2:3

they come bringing to him a paralytic, being carried by four men

Quote: ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν, αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that: (1) more than four people came, but only four of them were carrying the paralytic. Alternate translation: “people come bringing to him a paralytic, being carried by four of them” (2) four people came and were carrying the paralytic. Alternate translation: “four men come bringing to him a paralytic, whom they were carrying”

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go”

a paralytic

Quote: παραλυτικὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A paralytic is someone who is not able to use or control some or all of his or her arms and legs because of injury or sickness. If your readers would not be familiar with this sickness, you could use the name of something like this in your language, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a paralyzed person” or “a person who could not move his limbs”

being carried by four men

Quote: αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom four men were carrying”

being carried

Quote: αἰρόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

As the next verse states, the four men carried the paralytic on a “mat.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea explicit here. Alternate translation: “being carried on a mat”

Mark 2:4

not being able to bring {him} to him because of the crowd

Quote: μὴ δυνάμενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when, because of the crowd, they were not able to bring to him”

to bring {him} to him

Quote: προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they were not able to bring the paralytic to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to bring the paralytic to Jesus”

they removed the roof where he was, and having dug {it} out, they lower

Quote: ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In the region where Jesus lived, houses usually had flat roofs that could be reached by staircases on the outside of the houses. These roofs were usually made of wooden beams, branches, and packed dirt or clay. Here Mark describes how these people dug through the branches and clay to create a hole in the roof through which they could lower the paralytic on his mat. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of roof, you could use descriptive phrases, or you could use more general terms. Alternate translation: “they demolished the part of the flat roof above where he was, and having dug a hole in it, they lower” or “they cut a hole in the roof and lower through it”

having dug {it} out

Quote: ἐξορύξαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

Here Mark uses the phrase having dug {it} out to indicate that they finished making a hole before they lowered the man down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this sequence more explicitly. Alternate translation: “once they had dug it out” or “after digging it out”

they removed the roof where he was

Quote: ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they first climbed up onto the roof before they removed it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they climbed onto the roof of the house where he was and removed it”

mat

Quote: κράβαττον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A mat was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bed, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a stretcher”

the paralytic

Quote: ὁ παραλυτικὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word paralytic in 2:3. Alternate translation: “the paralyzed person” or “the person who could not move his limbs”

Mark 2:5

having seen their faith

Quote: ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having recognized that they were convinced that he could heal the paralytic”

their faith

Quote: τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how they trusted”

to the paralytic

Quote: τῷ παραλυτικῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word paralytic in 2:3. Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”

Child

Quote: τέκνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus calls the paralytic Child to indicate that he cares for him. The word also implies that the paralytic was younger than Jesus. The paralytic was not actually Jesus’ son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that an older person would use to show that they care for a younger person. Alternate translation: “My friend” or “Young one”

your sins are forgiven

Quote: ἀφέωνται σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is Jesus. Alternate translation: “I forgive your sins”

Mark 2:6

But

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces something that was happening while Jesus was speaking to the paralytic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happened at the same time as something that has already been narrated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “While that was happening,”

in their hearts

Quote: ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In Mark’s culture, hearts are the places where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate hearts by referring to the places where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in their heads” or “within themselves”

Mark 2:7

Why does this one speak in this way

Quote: τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The scribes are using the question form to show that they disapprove of how Jesus was speaking. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not right for this one to speak in this way.” or “This one should not be speaking in this way!”

Who is able to forgive sins except one, God

Quote: τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that the scribes were making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Only one, God, is able to forgive sins, right?” or “Who is able to forgive sins? It is only God, right?”

Who is able to forgive sins except one, God

Quote: τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The scribes are using the question form to indicate that they are confident that only God can forgive sins. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one is able to forgive sins except one, God.” or “No one can ever forgive sins except one, God!”

Mark 2:8

Jesus, having known in his spirit

Quote: ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus knew what the scribes were thinking even though they did not say it out loud. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having known in his spirit their thoughts,”

in his spirit

Quote: τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word spirit refers to inner parts of Jesus, the parts where he thought and willed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the inner part of Jesus or to Jesus more generally. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “in himself”

Why are you debating these things in your hearts

Quote: τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the scribes. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “What you are debating in your hearts is wrong.” or “Stop debating in your hearts whether I am blaspheming!”

are you debating … your

Quote: διαλογίζεσθε & ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the words you and your are plural.

in your hearts

Quote: ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

See how you translated hearts in 2:1. Alternate translation: “in your heads” or “within yourselves”

Mark 2:9

Which is easier to say to the paralytic, ‘Your sins are forgiven’ or to say, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk

Quote: τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to show the scribes which of these things is easier to say. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. He could mean: (1) that saying Your sins are forgiven is easier than saying Get up and take up your mat and walk. This is because it is easy to show that someone is lying when they try to heal a paralytic, but it is not easy to show that someone is lying when they claim to forgive sins. Alternate translation: “It is easier to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven,’ than to say, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk.’” (2) that both things are equally easy to say. Alternate translation: “Saying ‘Your sins are forgiven’ is just as easy as saying, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk.’”

to say to the paralytic, ‘Your sins are forgiven’ or to say, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk

Quote: εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this sentence so that there are no quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to say to the paralytic that his sins are forgiven or to tell him to get up and take up his mat and walk”

to the paralytic

Quote: τῷ παραλυτικῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word paralytic in 2:3. Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”

Your sins are forgiven

Quote: ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven your sins”

your mat

Quote: τὸν κράβαττόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated mat in 2:4. Alternate translation: “your stretcher”

Mark 2:10

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces a slight contrast with the comparison in the previous verse. Jesus now shows that he will both forgive and heal the paralytic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a slight contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” or “Leaving that aside,”

in order that you may know that the Son of Man has authority on the earth to forgive sins,”—he says to the paralytic

Quote: ἵνα & εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, (λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ) (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Here, the phrase in order that introduces the purpose for which Jesus says to the paralytic the commands that he gives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that provides the stated purpose for which a person performs an action. Alternate translation: “here is what I will do so that you might know that the Son of Man has authority on the earth to forgive sins.’ Then he says to the paralytic,”

you may know

Quote: εἰδῆτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the word you is plural.

the Son of Man has

Quote: ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, have”

the Son of Man

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus for the first time in Mark uses the title Son of Man to refer to himself. He is using the title to refer to himself, a human, and also to implicitly identify himself with the important and powerful figure named “the son of man” in the Old Testament book of Daniel (see Daniel 7:13–14). See the book introduction for more information about this title. Consider how you might best translate this title here and throughout the rest of Mark. Alternate translation: “the Human One” or “the one called Son of Man”

has authority

Quote: ἐξουσίαν ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has been authorized”

to the paralytic

Quote: τῷ παραλυτικῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word paralytic in 2:3. Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”

Mark 2:11

your mat

Quote: τὸν κράβαττόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

See how you translated mat in 2:4. Alternate translation: “your stretcher”

Mark 2:12

having gotten up and immediately having taken up the mat, he went out

Quote: ἠγέρθη, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον, ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having been healed, he got up, immediately took up the mat, went out”

the mat

Quote: τὸν κράβαττον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated mat in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the stretcher”

he went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came out”

all, … all

Quote: πάντων & πάντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

In both places, Mark is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the people who were there. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “all the people there … all those people”

were amazed

Quote: ἐξίστασθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “marveled”

saying, “We never saw thus

Quote: λέγοντας, ὅτι οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδομεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying that they had never seen thus”

saying

Quote: λέγοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

Mark 2:13

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

he went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came out”

was coming

Quote: ἤρχετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of coming. Alternate translation: “was going”

Mark 2:14

he saw Levi the {son} of Alphaeus sitting at the tax collector’s office

Quote: εἶδεν Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ Ἁλφαίου, καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a tax collector named Levi as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “he saw a man who was called Levi, the son of Alphaeus. Levi was sitting at the tax collector’s office”

of Alphaeus

Quote: Ἁλφαίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Alphaeus is the name of a man.

sitting at the tax collector’s office

Quote: καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Levi worked as a tax collector. He would sit at the tax collector’s office and make sure that people paid their taxes to the Roman empire, who had control over this area. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who worked to collect taxes for the Romans at the tax collection office”

Follow me.” … he followed him

Quote: ἀκολούθει μοι & ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase Follow me is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciple. Similarly, the phrase he followed him indicates that Levi did travel with Jesus and become his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be my disciple … he was his disciple” or “Come with me as my student … he went with him as his student”

Mark 2:15

And it happens {that

Quote: καὶ γίνεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase And it happens {that} introduces something that happened soon after what Mark previously narrated. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that introduces an event that came soon after the previous event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”

reclined to eat

Quote: κατακεῖσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “was sitting down to eat” or “was eating”

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word for introduces an explanation that gives further information about the people who were dining with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave for untranslated. Alternate translation: “and indeed”

they were many

Quote: ἦσαν & πολλοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they could refer to: (1) the tax collectors and sinners who were dining with Jesus. Alternate translation: “the tax collectors and sinners were many” (2) Jesus’ disciples. Alternate translation: “his disciples were many”

they were following him

Quote: ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase they were following him indicates that these people were traveling with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were his disciples” or “they were traveling with him as his students”

Mark 2:16

the scribes of the Pharisees

Quote: οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe scribes who were also Pharisees. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the scribes, ones who were Pharisees” or “some scribes, who were also Pharisees”

Does he eat with the tax collectors and sinners

Quote: ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The scribes of the Pharisees are using the question form to criticize what Jesus is doing. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “He has no reason to eat with tax collectors and sinners.” or “He should by no means eat with tax collectors and sinners!”

Mark 2:17

The ones being healthy do not have need of a physician, but the ones having sickness

Quote: οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs

Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so sinners need to see Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the following sentence, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you could translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor, but people who are unwell do”

the ones having sickness

Quote: οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones having sickness have need of a physician”

the ones having sickness

Quote: οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sickness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who are sick”

I did not come

Quote: οὐκ ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word come refers to Jesus entering this world as a human to do what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I did not come to this world” or “I am not acting”

the righteous

Quote: δικαίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective righteous as a noun to mean righteous people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “righteous people”

but sinners

Quote: ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners”

Mark 2:18

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,”

the disciples of John and the Pharisees were fasting, and

Quote: ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες & καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark introduces background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “it happened that the disciples of John and the Pharisees were fasting. And”

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to some people who asked Jesus this question. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people without identifying who they are. Alternate translation: “certain people come”

For what reason do the disciples of John and the disciples of the Pharisees fast, but your disciples do not fast

Quote: διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων νηστεύουσιν, οἱ δὲ σοὶ μαθηταὶ οὐ νηστεύουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this sentence into two sentences, one giving the reason for the question, and the other asking the question. Alternate translation: “The disciples of John and the disciples of the Pharisees fast. For what reason do your disciples not fast?”

Mark 2:19-20

The sons of the bridal chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? As much time as they have the bridegroom with them, they are not able to fast … But days will come when the bridegroom will be taken away from them, and in those days, then they will fast

Quote: μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? ὅσον χρόνον ἔχουσιν τὸν νυμφίον μετ’ αὐτῶν, οὐ δύνανται νηστεύειν & ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ τότε νηστεύσουσιν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To help the people who asked him the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers a brief illustration. He wants them to think of him as if he were a bridegroom and of his disciples as if they were the sons of the bridal chamber. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Jesus is like the bridegroom, and his disciples are like the sons of the bridal chamber. Alternate translation: “The sons of the bridal chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? As much time as they have the bridegroom with them, they are not able to fast. But days will come when the bridegroom will be taken away from them, and in those days, then they will fast. I am like the bridegroom, and my disciples are like the sons of the bridal chamber.”

Mark 2:19

The sons of the bridal chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they

Quote: μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to teach the people who asked him the question. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The sons of the bridal chamber are certainly not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them.” or “The sons of bridal chamber cannot fast while the bridegroom is still with them!”

The sons of the bridal chamber

Quote: οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression sons of describes people who share the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The groom’s attendants”

Mark 2:20

days will come when … in those days

Quote: ἐλεύσονται & ἡμέραι ὅταν & ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Jesus is using the word days to refer to a particular time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a time will come when … in that time” or “there will be a time when … at that time”

the bridegroom will be taken away

Quote: ἀπαρθῇ & ὁ νυμφίος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone will take the bridegroom away”

in those days, then

Quote: τότε & ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression in those days, then contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “in those days”

Mark 2:21

No one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment, but if not, the patch tears away from it, the new from the old, and a worse tear happens

Quote: οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν; εἰ δὲ μή αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To help the people who asked the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers another brief illustration. He wants them to think of the new things that he teaches and does as a patch of unshrunk cloth and of the current ways of doing things as if they were an old garment. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that what Jesus does and teaches is like the patch of unshrunk cloth, and the normal way of doing things is like an old garment. Alternate translation: “no one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment, but if not, the patch tears away from it, the new from the old, and a worse tear happens. What I say and do is like the unshrunk cloth, and the normal way of doing things is like an old garment.”

No one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment

Quote: οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus refers to the practice of patching a hole or tear in a garment by sewing or attaching a patch to the garment to cover the hole or tear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “no one patches an old garment with a patch of unshrunk cloth”

but if not

Quote: εἰ δὲ μή (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “but if someone actually did” or “but were a person to do that”

the patch tears away from it

Quote: αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the patch will tear away when the garment is washed, because the patch will shrink and rip the old garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when the garment is washed, the patch shrinks and tears away from it”

the new from the old

Quote: τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjectives new and old as nouns to mean new and old cloth. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the new patch from the old garment”

Mark 2:22

And no one puts new wine into old wineskins, but if not, the wine will burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins are destroyed, but new wine into new wineskins

Quote: καὶ οὐδεὶς βάλλει οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς; εἰ δὲ μή ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί; ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To help the people who asked the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers another brief illustration. He wants them to think of the new things that he teaches and does as new wine and of the current ways of doing things as if they were old wineskins. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that what Jesus does and teaches is like the new wine, and the normal way of doing things is like old wineskins. Alternate translation: “And no one puts new wine into old wineskins, but if not, the wine will burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins are destroyed, but new wine into new wineskins. What I say and do is like the new wine, and the normal way of doing things is like the old wineskins.”

but if not, the wine will burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins are destroyed

Quote: εἰ δὲ μή ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “but if someone actually did, the wine would burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins would be destroyed” or “but were a person to do that, the wine would burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins would be destroyed”

the wine will burst the wineskins

Quote: ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the new wine, when it ferments, will expand and burst the wineskins, which are old and so no longer able to stretch. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when the wine ferments, the wineskins cannot stretch and will burst”

the wine and the wineskins are destroyed

Quote: ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wine and the wineskins become useless” or “this destroys the wine and the wineskins”

but new wine into new wineskins

Quote: ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but people put new wine into new wineskins”

Mark 2:23

And it happened {that

Quote: καὶ ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And it happened {that} introduces the next event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,” or “One time,”

on the Sabbaths

Quote: ἐν τοῖς Σάββασιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Mark uses the phrase on the Sabbaths to indicate that this event occurred on one specific Sabbath day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on one of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”

he was passing

Quote: αὐτὸν & παραπορεύεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, was passing”

the grainfields

Quote: τῶν σπορίμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word grainfields refers to places where grain is grown and harvested. This grain is usually ground and made into bread. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of field, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “fields where grain is grown”

began to make a way

Quote: ἤρξαντο ὁδὸν ποιεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase to make a way means that the disciples were traveling or walking along. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “also began to travel along” or “started to go with him”

picking the heads of grain

Quote: τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the disciples ate the heads of grain after picking them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “picking and eating the heads of grain”

the heads of grain

Quote: τοὺς στάχυας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The heads are the topmost part of the grain plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant, which are the parts that people eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the tops of the grain plants” or “the edible parts of the grain plants”

Mark 2:24

Behold

Quote: ἴδε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks the person to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “See” or “Listen:”

why are they doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths

Quote: τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The Pharisees are using the question form to confront Jesus about the behavior of his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “they are doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths.” or “they should certainly not be doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths!”

are they doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths

Quote: ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Pharisees considered even the small action of picking heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. This kind of work was prohibited on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “are they harvesting grain, which is work that is not lawful to do on the Sabbaths”

on the Sabbaths

Quote: τοῖς Σάββασιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated this phrase in 2:23. Alternate translation: “on any of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”

Mark 2:25-26

Have you never read what David did when he had need and was hungry, he and the ones with him … how he went into the house of God in the time of Abiathar the high priest and ate the loaves of the presence, which is not lawful to eat except for the priests, and he also gave to the ones being with him

Quote: οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ & πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς; καὶ ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὐτῷ οὖσιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to show the Pharisees that they should have learned a principle from the story about David that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have not understood what you have read about what David did when he had need and was hungry, he and the ones with him—how he went into the house of God in the time of Abiathar the high priest and ate the loaves of the presence, which is not lawful to eat except for the priests, and he also gave to the ones being with him.”

Have you never read what David did when he had need and was hungry, he and the ones with him … how he went into the house of God in the time of Abiathar the high priest and ate the loaves of the presence, which is not lawful to eat except for the priests, and he also gave to the ones being with him

Quote: οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ & πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς; καὶ ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὐτῷ οὖσιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus refers to a story about David before he became king. The current king, Saul was trying to kill David. So, David ran away to the priest who was serving God at the time, Abiathar. David and the men who ran away with him were very hungry, so they asked the Abiathar for food. Abiathar gave them the special bread that was laid out in God’s presence every day, and David and his men ate this bread. You can read this story in 1 Samuel 21:1–6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some extra information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Have you never read what David did when he had need and was hungry after he and the ones with him escaped from King Saul, who wanted to kill him? He visited the high priest Abiathar, went into the house of God, and ate the loaves of the presence, which was not lawful to eat except for the priests. He also gave some of it to the ones being with him.”

Mark 2:25

Have you never read

Quote: οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the word you is plural.

he had need

Quote: χρείαν ἔσχεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is implying that David did not have everything that he needed, especially food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he had need of something to eat”

Mark 2:26

he went

Quote: εἰσῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came”

the house of God

Quote: τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus uses the phrase the house of God to refer to the tabernacle, the place where God’s presence was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” or “the sanctuary”

the loaves of the presence

Quote: τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase the loaves of the presence refers to loaves of bread that were placed every day on a table in the tabernacle or temple as an offering to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the loaves that were presented to God” or “the loaves of bread that were placed in God’s presence every morning”

which is not lawful to eat except for the priests

Quote: οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “which is lawful for only the priests to eat”

Mark 2:27

The Sabbath was made for man, and not man for the Sabbath

Quote: τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο, καὶ οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs

Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that God set up the Sabbath for the sake of people. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Humans were made first, and then the Sabbath was set up because of them. It is not true that the Sabbath was set up first, and then humans were made because of it”

The Sabbath was made for man

Quote: τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for man”

man, … man

Quote: τὸν ἄνθρωπον & ὁ ἄνθρωπος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The word man represents men and women in general, not one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people … people”

not man for the Sabbath

Quote: οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “man was made not for the Sabbath” or “it is not that God made man for the Sabbath”

Mark 2:28

Therefore

Quote: ὥστε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word Therefore introduces a conclusion or inference that Jesus draws from what he just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “In the end, then”

the Son of Man is

Quote: ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am”

Lord, even of the Sabbath

Quote: Κύριός & καὶ τοῦ Σαββάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a Lord who rules over the Sabbath. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has authority over even the Sabbath” or “rules over even the Sabbath”

Mark 3

Mark 3 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ early ministry (1:14–3:6)
   • Healing a man on the Sabbath
2. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)
   • Jesus ministers to many people (3:7–12)
   • Jesus appoints the twelve apostles (3:13–19)
   • Jesus and his family, part one (3:20–21)
   • Jesus and the scribes debate whether he has a demon (3:22–30)
   • Jesus and his family, part two (3:31–35)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Sabbath

In this chapter, just as in chapter 2, the Pharisees and Jesus are in conflict about the Sabbath. For more information about the Sabbath, see the General Notes to chapter 2.

Blaspheming against the Spirit

In 3:29, Jesus speaks about blaspheming against the Spirit. He indicates that God will forgive all kinds of sins, but he will not forgive people who blaspheme against the Holy Spirit. Jesus says these things because the Pharisees said that he cast out demons by the power of Beelzebul. Jesus implies that he actually cast out demons by the power of the Holy Spirit. So, since the Pharisees have called the Holy Spirit Beelzebul, they have blasphemed or spoken against the Spirit. Christians debate what counts as this kind of blasphemy and why God will not forgive people for it. In your translation, you should not be more specific than Jesus is. (See: blasphemy, blaspheme, blasphemous and Holy Spirit, Spirit of God, Spirit of the Lord, Spirit)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

The parable about the strong man

In 3:27, Jesus describes how thieves must subdue and tie up a strong man before they can steal things from his house. Jesus does not directly state how to apply this proverb. However, most Christians think that Satan is like the strong man, and the demons that Jesus casts out are like the strong man’s things. In this case, Jesus is like the thieves who tie up the strong man. Jesus is saying that, since he can cast out demons, it proves that he has subdued and conquered Satan, just as thieves can only steal things after they have subdued the strong man. You should not include this extra information in your translation, but if it would be helpful for your readers, you could include it in a footnote. (See: Parables)

Jesus’ mother and brothers

In 3:31–35, Jesus’ mother and brothers arrive and want to talk with Jesus. In response, Jesus says that his disciples, those who do God’s will, are his mother and brother and sister. In other words, Jesus calls his disciples, who are those who do God’s will, his family members. He means that they are as close and important to him as his own family. This is an important metaphor that appears throughout the Bible, so preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

The 12 disciples

The following are the lists of the 12 disciples in Matthew, Mark, and Luke:

In Matthew 10:2–4:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark 3:16–19:

Simon (Peter), James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Andrew, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke 6:14:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, Judas son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

These lists do not always follow the same order or use the same names for the disciples. In that culture, people often had two or three names. For example, it is likely that that Thaddaeus was also named Judas or Jude. So, do not harmonize these lists by using the same sequence or names in each case. You should translate Mark’s list as Mark presents it.

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 3, 4, 5, 13, 20, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 3:1

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

into a synagogue again

Quote: πάλιν εἰς συναγωγήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that this is a synagogue that Jesus has already visited, most likely the one in Capernaum (see 1:21). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “again into the synagogue in Capernaum”

there was a man there having a withered hand

Quote: ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a man with a withered hand as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man was in the synagogue, and he had a withered hand”

having a withered hand

Quote: ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Use a word or phrase that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “having a shriveled hand” or “whose hand was atrophied”

Mark 3:2

they were watching him closely, if he will heal him on the Sabbaths, so that they might accuse him

Quote: παρετήρουν αὐτὸν, εἰ τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύσει αὐτόν, ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first and second clauses describe. Alternate translation: “And they wanted to accuse him. So, they were watching him closely, if he will heal him on the Sabbaths”

they were watching him closely, … they might accuse

Quote: παρετήρουν αὐτὸν & κατηγορήσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns they and they refer to the Pharisees who were there, as 3:6 shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees were watching him closely … they might accuse”

on the Sabbaths

Quote: τοῖς Σάββασιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated this phrase in 2:23. Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day” or “during a Sabbath day”

they might accuse him

Quote: κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they would accuse Jesus of breaking the Sabbath commandments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might accuse him of wrongdoing” or “they might accuse him of breaking the law of Moses”

Mark 3:3

having the withered hand

Quote: τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἔχοντι ξηράν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you expressed this idea in 3:1. Alternate translation: “having the shriveled hand” or “whose hand was atrophied”

Get up in the midst

Quote: ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the implication is that Jesus wanted this man to stand where everyone could see him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up where everyone can see you”

Mark 3:4

to them, “… they

Quote: αὐτοῖς & οἱ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Just as in 3:2, the pronouns them and they refer to the Pharisees who were there, as 3:6 shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to the Pharisees … they”

Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good or to do harm; to save a life or to kill

Quote: ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Pharisees. He knows that they would agree with what his question implies. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you realize that it is lawful on the Sabbaths to do good and not to do harm; to save a life and not to kill.” or “Surely you know that it is lawful on the Sabbaths to do good and not to do harm; to save a life and not to kill!”

on the Sabbaths

Quote: τοῖς Σάββασιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated this phrase in 2:23. Alternate translation: “on any of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”

to do good or to do harm

Quote: ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι (1)

Alternate translation: “to help people or to hurt people”

to save a life or to kill

Quote: ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “is it lawful on the Sabbaths to save a life or to kill”

to save a life

Quote: ψυχὴν σῶσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase save a life refers to preventing a person from dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to rescue from death” or “to keep people from dying”

Mark 3:5

with anger

Quote: μετ’ ὀργῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of anger, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in an angry way”

being grieved by the hardness of their heart

Quote: συνλυπούμενος ἐπὶ τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what caused the action, it is clear from the context that it was the hardness of their heart. Alternate translation: “the hardness of their heart grieving him”

the hardness of their heart

Quote: τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hardness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how hard their heart was”

the hardness of their heart

Quote: τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus is speaking of the Pharisees’ heart as if it were characterized by hardness. He means that the Pharisees are stubborn and refuse to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their stubbornness” or “their unwillingness to listen”

of their heart

Quote: τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one heart, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “of their hearts”

Stretch out your hand

Quote: ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρα σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I heal you. Now stretch out your hand!”

his hand was restored

Quote: ἀπεκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored his hand” or “his hand became healthy”

Mark 3:6

having gone out

Quote: ἐξελθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come out”

were making counsel with the Herodians against him

Quote: μετὰ τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν συμβούλιον ἐποίουν κατ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The Herodians were a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a short phrase to describe them. Alternate translation: “were making counsel against him with people who wanted King Herod to continue to rule”

were making counsel with the Herodians against him

Quote: μετὰ τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν συμβούλιον ἐποίουν κατ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase were making counsel with the Herodians against him indicates that the Pharisees were working together with the Herodians to figure out ways to harm Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were making plans with the Herodians concerning Jesus” or “were coming up with ideas with the Herodians about how they could harm Jesus”

Mark 3:7-8

and a great multitude followed from Galilee. And from Judea … and from Jerusalem and from Idumea and beyond the Jordan and around Tyre and Sidon a great multitude, hearing how much he was doing, came to him

Quote: καὶ πολὺ πλῆθος ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἠκολούθησεν, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας & καὶ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰδουμαίας, καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου, καὶ περὶ Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνα; πλῆθος πολύ ἀκούοντες ὅσα ἐποίει, ἦλθον πρὸς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here Mark twice uses the phrase a great multitude. He could be: (1) distinguishing between two groups, one group from Galilee who followed Jesus to the Sea of Galilee, and one group from all the other areas who traveled to meet Jesus by the Sea of Galilee. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to create a verse bridge for these two verses. Alternate translation: “and a great multitude followed from Galilee. And hearing how much he was doing, a great multitude from Judea and from Jerusalem and from Idumea and beyond the Jordan and around Tyre and Sidon came to him” (2) referring twice to the same group of people, who came from all these areas. Alternate translation: “and a great multitude followed from Galilee and from Judea and from Jerusalem and from Idumea and beyond the Jordan and around Tyre and Sidon. That great multitude, hearing how much he was doing, came to him”

Mark 3:8

beyond the Jordan

Quote: πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase beyond the Jordan refers to regions to the east of the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the areas on the east side of the Jordan River”

how much he was doing

Quote: ὅσα ἐποίει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark refers to the powerful and amazing things that Jesus was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the amazing things that he was doing” or “about all the miracles he was doing”

came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went”

Mark 3:9-10

And he spoke to his disciples so that a small boat might be ready for him because of the crowd, so that they might not press against him … For he healed many, so that as many as had afflictions pressed against him so that they might touch him

Quote: καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν & πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 3:9 and 3:10 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason why Jesus wants to get into a boat before he gives his disciples instructions about the boat. Alternate translation: “And he healed many, so that as many as had afflictions pressed against him so that they might touch him. So, because of the crowd, he spoke to his disciples so that a small boat might be ready for him, so that the crowd might not press against him”

Mark 3:9

he spoke to his disciples so that a small boat might be ready for him because of the crowd, so that they might not press against him

Quote: εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, ‘Make sure that a small boat is waiting for me because of the crowd, so that they do not press against me.’”

a small boat might be ready for him because of the crowd

Quote: πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus plans to get into this small boat to get away from the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a small boat might be ready for him to embark on to get away from the crowd”

they might not press against him

Quote: μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus is concerned that the crowd will press against him and crush or injure him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might not press against him and injure him” or “they might not hurt him”

Mark 3:10

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why Jesus was concerned about people pressing against him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is why Jesus wanted a boat:” or “Indeed,”

many

Quote: πολλοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”

had afflictions

Quote: εἶχον μάστιγας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of afflictions, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “were afflicted”

pressed against him

Quote: ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the people in the crowd pressed against each other, or were shoving and pushing each other, in order to get to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “pressed against each other to reach him” or “shoved each other around”

so that they might touch him

Quote: ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they wanted to touch Jesus because they thought that touching him would heal them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that they might touch him and be healed”

Mark 3:11

they were falling down before him and crying out, saying

Quote: προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the unclean spirits forced the people whom they were possessing to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were making the people they possessed fall down before him and cry out, saying”

they were falling down before him

Quote: προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Mark’s culture, the phrase falling down before him refers to kneeling down and putting one’s face close to the ground in front of someone. This was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they were throwing themselves on the ground before him” or “they were lying down before him to show respect”

saying

Quote: λέγοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

the Son of God

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Son of God is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.

Mark 3:12

them much so that they might not make him known

Quote: πολλὰ & αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them much, ‘Do not make me known.’”

they might not make him known

Quote: μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase make him known refers to telling people who Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might not say who he was” or “they might not speak about him”

Mark 3:13

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

he goes up

Quote: ἀναβαίνει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “comes” instead of goes. Alternate translation: “he comes up”

the mountain

Quote: τὸ ὄρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Mark does not clarify what mountain this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain”

Mark 3:14

12

Quote: δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the number 12 as a noun to mean 12 men. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “12 people”

whom he also named apostles

Quote: οὓς καὶ ἀποστόλους ὠνόμασεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read whom he also named apostles. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

they might be with him

Quote: ὦσιν μετ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that these 12 men would go wherever Jesus went, listen to what he said, and spend much time with him as his closest disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might go everywhere with him” or “they might always follow him”

Mark 3:15

to have authority

Quote: ἔχειν ἐξουσίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be authorized”

Mark 3:16

And he appointed the Twelve,and

Quote: καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark repeats a phrase that he already used in 3:14. He does not mean that Jesus appointed the Twelve again. Rather, he is using this phrase to introduce who these Twelve were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Here are the names of the Twelve that he appointed:”

And he appointed the Twelve

Quote: καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read And he appointed the Twelve. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

the Twelve

Quote: τοὺς δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective Twelve as a noun to refer to Jesus’ closest disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”

and he gave to Simon the name Peter

Quote: καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark introduces the first person in the list of the Twelve, and he clarifies that Jesus gave a new name to Simon: Peter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates both that Simon is the first in the list of twelve men and that Jesus named him Peter. Alternate translation: “and they were Simon, to whom he gave the name Peter”

Mark 3:17

the brother of James

Quote: τὸν ἀδελφὸν τοῦ Ἰακώβου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

Mark never says whether James or John was older, but he mentions James first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that John was younger. Alternate translation: “the younger brother of James”

Boanerges

Quote: Βοανηργές (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Boanerges is a Hebrew word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.

Sons of Thunder

Quote: υἱοὶ βροντῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The expression Sons of describes people who shares the qualities of something. In this case, the name indicates that James and John share the qualities of Thunder. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “People Like Thunder” or “Thunder-Like”

Mark 3:18

Thaddaeus

Quote: Θαδδαῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Thaddaeus is the name of a man.

the Cananaios

Quote: τὸν Καναναῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

Cananaios is a word borrowed from Aramaic that describes someone as a “zealot,” that is, someone who is very zealous about something. You will need to decide if you will also borrow this word into your language or if you will translate the meaning. If you borrow the word, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then put the translation in a footnote. If you translate the word’s meaning, Cananaios could be: (1) a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the Patriot” (2) a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the Passionate One”

Mark 3:19

who also handed him over

Quote: ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark writes who also handed him over to provide some extra information about what Judas did to Jesus later. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “who would later also hand him over”

Mark 3:20

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

he comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, comes”

he comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “he goes”

a house

Quote: οἶκον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This is probably the same house that Mark mentioned in 2:1. See how you expressed the idea there. Alternate translation: “Simon and Andrew’s house” or “his house”

they were not able even to eat bread

Quote: μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the crowd was so large that Jesus and his disciples did not have time, or perhaps even space, to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were so busy that they could not even eat bread” or “they had no opportunity even to eat bread”

to eat bread

Quote: ἄρτον φαγεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is using bread to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat anything”

Mark 3:21

the ones from him

Quote: οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the phrase the ones from him could refer to: (1) Jesus’ relatives, most specifically his mother and brothers, who are the ones who arrive at the house in 3:31. Alternate translation: “his family” (2) Jesus’ friends from his hometown, Nazareth. Alternate translation: “his friends”

went out to seize him, for they were saying, “He is out of his mind

Quote: ἐξῆλθον κρατῆσαι αὐτόν; ἔλεγον γὰρ, ὅτι ἐξέστη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “were saying, ‘He is out of his mind.’ Therefore, they went out to seize him”

went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “came out”

to seize him

Quote: κρατῆσαι αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the ones from him intend to compel Jesus to return with them in their custody or control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to take him into their custody” or “to restrain him”

they were saying, “He is out of his mind

Quote: ἔλεγον & ὅτι ἐξέστη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that he was out of his mind”

they were saying

Quote: ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they could refer to: (1) the ones from him. Alternate translation: “the ones from him were saying” or “these ones were saying” (2) people in general. Alternate translation: “people were saying”

He is out of his mind

Quote: ἐξέστη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the clause He is out of his mind means that these people think that Jesus is insane, that is, acting irrationally. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” or “He is acting irrationally”

Mark 3:22

the scribes having come down from Jerusalem were saying

Quote: οἱ γραμματεῖς, οἱ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων καταβάντες ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish

Here Mark uses the phrase having come down from Jerusalem to distinguish these scribes from any other scribes. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “the scribes, the ones having come down from Jerusalem, were saying”

having come down

Quote: καταβάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone down”

were saying, “He has Beelzebul” and “By the ruler of the demons he casts out the demons

Quote: ἔλεγον, ὅτι Βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει; καὶ, ὅτι ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων, ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “were saying that he had Beelzebul and that by the ruler of the demons he was casting out the demons.”

He has Beelzebul

Quote: Βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the scribes mean that Jesus is possessed or controlled by Beelzebul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is possessed by Beelzebul” or “Beelzebul possesses him”

By the ruler of the demons

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the scribes mean that Jesus has power from the ruler of the demons to cast out demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “By the power of the ruler of the demons” or “As he is empowered by the ruler of the demons”

the ruler of the demons

Quote: τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase the ruler of the demons refers to the devil, that is, Beelzebul. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Beelzebul, the ruler of the demons,”

Mark 3:23

them

Quote: αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the scribes and the people who were nearby. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the scribes and the rest of the people” or “the people who were nearby”

How is Satan able to cast out Satan

Quote: πῶς δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the scribes. The question shows that it does not make any sense for Satan to cast out Satan. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Satan cannot cast out Satan.” or “It makes no sense for Satan to cast out Satan!”

is Satan able to cast out Satan

Quote: δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

In both places, Satan represents people who act by the power of Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are Satan’s followers able to cast out Satan’s followers” or “are those who act by Satan’s power able to cast out others who also act by Satan’s power”

Mark 3:24

And if a kingdom has been divided against itself, that kingdom is not able to stand

Quote: καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the people, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: If a kingdom has been divided against itself, that kingdom is not able to stand”

if a kingdom has been divided against itself, that kingdom is not able to stand

Quote: ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if a kingdom were divided against itself. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine a kingdom that has been divided against itself. That kingdom is not able to stand”

a kingdom has been divided against itself

Quote: βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word kingdom represents the people who live in that kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people in one kingdom have been divided against each other”

has been divided against itself

Quote: ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacks itself”

is not able to stand

Quote: οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the phrase is not able to stand means that the kingdom will not exist much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fall” or “will no longer exist”

Mark 3:25

And if a house has been divided against itself, that house will not be able to stand

Quote: καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the people, Jesus offers a second story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to another illustration: If a house has been divided against itself, that house will not be able to stand”

if a house has been divided against itself, that house will not be able to stand

Quote: ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if a house were divided against itself. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine a house that has been divided against itself. That house will not be able to stand”

a house has been divided against itself

Quote: οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word house represents the people who live in that house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people in one house have been divided against each other”

has been divided against itself

Quote: ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacks itself”

will not be able to stand

Quote: οὐ δυνήσεται & σταθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the phrase will not be able to stand means that the house will not exist much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fall” or “will no longer exist”

Mark 3:26

if Satan rose up against himself and was divided, he is not able to stand, but he has an end

Quote: εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη, οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if Satan rose up against himself and was divided. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine that Satan rose up against himself and was divided. In that case, he would not be able to stand, but he would have an end”

Satan rose up against himself and was divided

Quote: ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Jesus is using Satan to represent Satan and his demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Satan and the demons that obey him rose up against themselves and were divided”

rose up against himself and was divided

Quote: ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The phrases rose up against himself and was divided mean similar things. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “was divided against himself”

was divided

Quote: ἐμερίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacked himself”

he is not able to stand, but he has an end

Quote: οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The clauses he is not able to stand and he has an end mean similar things. The first clause states the meaning negatively, and the second clause states the meaning positively. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than and in order to show that the second clause is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses. Alternate translation: “he is not able to stand; yes, he has an end” or “he has his end”

he is not able to stand

Quote: οὐ δύναται στῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the phrase is not able to stand means that Satan will not have authority or power much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will no longer have power” or “he will not remain in control”

he has an end

Quote: τέλος ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word end refers to a time when Satan no longer has power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his rule ends” or “his authority fails”

Mark 3:27

But no one is able

Quote: ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the people, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But listen to this story: No one is able”

But

Quote: ἀλλ’ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what is true in contrast to the hypothetical situations he has been using to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces what is true in contrast to a hypothetical situation, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “However, as it really is,”

no one is able, having entered into the house of the strong man, to steal his possessions if he has not first bound the strong man

Quote: οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “no one, unless he has first bound the strong man, is able, entering into the house of that strong man, to steal his belongings”

he has not first bound … he will plunder

Quote: μὴ πρῶτον & δήσῃ & διαρπάσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

Although the term he in both these places is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that person has not first bound … that person will plunder”

he will plunder his

Quote: αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the word he refers to the person who is stealing. The word his refers to the strong man. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the thief will plunder the strong man’s”

Mark 3:28-29

all the sins and the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven the sons of men … but whoever blasphemes against the Holy Spirit

Quote: πάντα ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν & ὃς δ’ ἂν βλασφημήσῃ εἰς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only sin or blasphemy that will not be forgiven the sons of men is the blasphemy against the Holy Spirit. Whoever does that” or “most sins and blasphemies, as much as they blaspheme, will be forgiven the sons of men, but the blasphemy against the Spirit will not be forgiven. Whoever has done that”

Mark 3:28

to you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the crowd, the word you is singular.

all the sins and the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven the sons of men

Quote: πάντα ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sons of men for all the sins and the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme”

all the sins and the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven

Quote: πάντα ἀφεθήσεται & τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is indicating that God forgives all kinds of sins and blasphemies, not that God will forgive every single sin or blasphemy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all sins and blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, can be forgiven” or “all kinds of sins and blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven men”

all the sins and the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven

Quote: πάντα ἀφεθήσεται & τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sins and blasphemies, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “all sinful and blasphemous things, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven” or “whenever anyone sins or blasphemes in any way, it will be forgiven”

the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven

Quote: ἀφεθήσεται & αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression whatever they may blaspheme contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “all the blasphemies will be forgiven”

the sons of men

Quote: τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the sons of men refers to people in general, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men and women” or “humans”

Mark 3:29

does not have forgiveness

Quote: οὐκ ἔχει ἄφεσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of forgiveness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will not be forgiven”

to eternity

Quote: εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase to eternity means that something lasts forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “forever”

guilty of an eternal sin

Quote: ἔνοχός & αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read guilty of an eternal sin. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “deserving of eternal judgment.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

of an eternal sin

Quote: αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that the sin has eternal consequences. In other words, the person who commits this sin will always be guilty for it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a sin with eternal consequences” or “eternally of this sin”

Mark 3:30

because

Quote: ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word because introduces a reason why Jesus gave the teaching that Mark quotes in 3:23–29. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of reason. Alternate translation: “which things he said because” or “and the reason for his teaching was that”

they were saying, “He has an unclean spirit

Quote: ἔλεγον, πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that he had an unclean spirit”

He has an unclean spirit

Quote: πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the scribes meant that they thought that Jesus was possessed or controlled by an unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is possessed by an unclean spirit” or “An unclean spirit possesses him”

Mark 3:31

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

his brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

These were Jesus' younger brothers. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you could use it here.

come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “go”

standing outside

Quote: ἔξω στήκοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they are standing outside the house that Jesus is in, most likely the house mentioned in 3:20. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “standing outside the house” or “standing outside the place where Jesus was teaching”

they sent to him, calling him

Quote: ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς αὐτὸν καλοῦντες αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus’ mother and brothers sent a person to Jesus to ask him to come out and meet them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they sent a messenger to him to summon him” or “they had someone go in and tell him to come out”

Mark 3:32

they say to him, “Behold, your mother and your brothers seek you outside

Quote: λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου, ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they say to him that his mother and his mothers were seeking him outside”

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold is intended to draw the attention of Jesus and to ask him to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Excuse me”

your brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοί σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

See how you translated brothers in 3:31.

your brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοί σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read your brothers. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “your brothers and your sisters.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

seek you outside

Quote: ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε (1)

Alternate translation: “want to see you outside” or “are outside, and they want to talk with you”

Mark 3:33

Who are my mother and my brothers

Quote: τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to teach his audience about whom he considers to be part of his family. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Since Jesus answers the question in 3:34–35, you should not include an implied answer here. Alternate translation: “I will inform you about whom I call my mother and my brothers.” or “Let me tell you whom I love as if they were my mother or my brothers.”

my brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοί μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

See how you translated brothers in 3:31.

Mark 3:34

Behold, my mother

Quote: ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word Behold indicates that the audience should look where Jesus looked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Consider these people to be my mother” or “These are my mother”

my mother and my brothers

Quote: ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of the ones sitting in a circle around him as if they were his mother and brothers. He means that he considers them to be part of his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning of the metaphor more explicitly. Alternate translation: “those whom I call my mother and my brothers” or “the people I love as if they were my mother and my brothers”

my brothers

Quote: οἱ ἀδελφοί μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

See how you translated brothers in 3:31.

Mark 3:35

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an explanation concerning why Jesus can call the people who are sitting around him his mother and brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “I say that because”

the will of God

Quote: τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God desires”

this is my brother and sister and mother

Quote: οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of everyone who does God’s will as if they were his brother and sister and mother. He means that he considers them to be part of his family. Express the idea as you did in the previous verse (3:34). Alternate translation: “I call this one my brother and sister and mother” or “this is a person whom I love as if he or she were my brother and sister and mother”

Mark 4

Mark 4 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)
   • The parable of the sower (4:1–9)
   • Jesus explains the parable of the sower (4:10–20)
   • Jesus teaches about secrets and knowledge (4:21–25)
   • The parable of the seeds growing by themselves (4:26–29)
   • The parable of the mustard seed (4:30–32)
   • Summary statement (4:33–34)
   • Jesus calms a storm (4:35–41)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which is a quotation from Isaiah 6:9–10.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Farming

Jesus refers to several different farming practices in this chapter. In his culture, farmers often threw seeds over their fields, a process called sowing. After throwing the seeds, they would use a tool called a plow to cover the seeds with dirt. Then, they would water and take care of the seeds until they sprouted and grew. Finally, when the plants produced grain or other kinds of crops, they would cut down the plants, separate the edible parts from the inedible parts, and store the edible parts in a safe place. See the notes on the verses in which Jesus discusses farming practices for specific information and translation options.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Parables

Throughout this chapter, Jesus uses several parables to teach the crowds and his disciples. Each parable is a short story that includes a specific lesson. Jesus uses parables to teach so that people who already know his message will learn more but people who do not know his message will not learn anything (see 4:11–12). Jesus explains one of the parables, but he does not explain any of the others. Possible explanations for each parable are included below, but only for help in translation. Your translation should not directly explain the meaning of any parable more than Jesus does. (See: Parables)

• The parable of the sower—In 4:3–9, Jesus tells a story about a man who sows seed and about what happens to the seed. Jesus explains this parable in 4:14–20. Even with this explanation, Christians debate who the sower is, what the seed represents, and what the different areas in the field represent. The sower could be Jesus himself, God, or anyone who preaches the gospel. The seed could be the gospel or the person who hears the gospel. The different areas in the field could be regions or areas where people hear the gospel, different kinds of people, or different ways of responding to the gospel. Most likely, the seed and the area in the field together describe what happens when people respond to the gospel in these four ways.

• The parable of the seeds growing by themselves—In 4:26–29, Jesus tells a story about a farmer who sows seed. The seed sprouts, grows, and produces a crop all by itself, and the farmer does not know how it happens. However, when the crop is ready, he harvests it. Most likely, Jesus is describing how God’s kingdom grows and expands, even without help from people. By the time God judges everyone, which is like a harvest, the kingdom will be very large and productive, even though people do not always know how that happens.

• The parable of the mustard seed—In 4:30–32, Jesus tells a story about how a very small seed (a mustard seed) grows into a very large plant. Most likely, he is describing how his group of followers was very small but will eventually become very large. Jesus mentions that birds nest in the shadow of this large plant. Some people think that Jesus is referring to passages like Ezekiel 17:23, which could suggest that the birds represent Gentiles who become part of God’s kingdom. Others think that the detail about the birds simply illustrates how large the plant is. If possible, your translation should allow for all of these interpretations.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Most of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in teaching that Jesus gives to his disciples and to the crowds. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 4:1

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “One day,”

the largest crowd

Quote: ὄχλος πλεῖστος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark says the largest crowd here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “a huge crowd” or “an enormous crowd”

is gathered to him

Quote: συνάγεται πρὸς αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered to him” or “came to listen to him”

sat down on the sea

Quote: καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, teachers usually sat down when they were going to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sat down on the sea to instruct them” or “sat down on the sea as a teacher does”

on the sea

Quote: ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus sat down in the boat, which was floating on the sea. Jesus did not sit directly on top of the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the boat as it was on the sea” or “in it”

on the land beside the sea

Quote: πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (1)

Alternate translation: “on the shore”

Mark 4:2

he was saying to them in his teaching

Quote: ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “here is what he taught:”

Mark 4:3

Listen! Behold, the sower went out

Quote: ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the people in the crowd, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: Behold, the sower went out”

Listen! Behold

Quote: ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

Here, the words Listen and Behold draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these words with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Picture this:” or “Pay attention to this:”

the sower went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Jesus introduces a sower as a character in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a sower. He went out”

Mark 4:4

And it happened that

Quote: καὶ ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the phrase And it happened that introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next action, or you could leave And it happened that untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”

as he sowed

Quote: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

While there are many ways to sow or plant seeds, here Jesus is describing a practice in which farmers pick up handfuls of seed and throw them so that they are scattered all over the top of the soil. This method is a quick and easy way to plant seeds in large fields, but some seeds land on ground that is not good for them to grow in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit what kind of sowing this is. Alternate translation: “as he threw the seeds over the ground” or “as he scattered the seeds over the field”

some fell beside the road, and the birds came and devoured it

Quote: ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, καὶ ἦλθεν τὰ πετεινὰ καὶ κατέφαγεν αὐτό (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the seeds that fall beside the road do not sink into the ground. Instead, they just sit on top of the hard-packed dirt by the road and are unprotected from birds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “some fell on the hard ground beside the road, and the birds came and easily devoured them”

some

Quote: ὃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective some as a noun to mean some of the seeds. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some seed”

the birds

Quote: τὰ πετεινὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The phrase the birds represents any birds, not particular birds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “birds”

it

Quote: αὐτό (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, although the pronoun it is singular, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “them”

Mark 4:5

other

Quote: ἄλλο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective other as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seed that did not fall beside the road. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seed”

the rocky ground, where it did not have much soil

Quote: τὸ πετρῶδες, ὅπου οὐκ εἶχεν γῆν πολλήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus describes an area that has a thin layer of soil on top of a layer of rocks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes this kind of area. Alternate translation: “a thin layer of soil on top of rocks” or “a rocky area, where there was very little soil”

other … it did not have … it sprang up, … it did not have

Quote: ἄλλο & οὐκ εἶχεν & ἐξανέτειλεν & τὸ μὴ ἔχειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

In this verse, the word other and the word it throughout the verse are singular in form, but they refer to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “others … they did not have … they sprang up … they did not have”

immediately it sprang up, because it did not have deep soil

Quote: εὐθὺς ἐξανέτειλεν διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν βάθος γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because it did not have deep soil, immediately it sprang up”

it sprang up

Quote: ἐξανέτειλεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase sprang up refers to how plants sprout or begin to grow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “it came up” or “it began to grow”

Mark 4:6

the sun rose

Quote: ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the sun rose refers to the sun coming up over the horizon in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sun came up” or “the sun began to shine in the morning”

it was scorched, … it had no root, it withered

Quote: ἐκαυματίσθη & τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν ἐξηράνθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, although the pronoun it is singular throughout the verse, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed in 4:5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “they were scorched … they had no root, they withered”

it was scorched

Quote: ἐκαυματίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the sun. Alternate translation: “the sun scorched it”

it had no root

Quote: τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus says no root here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it had almost no root” or “it had very small roots”

Mark 4:7

other … it, … it did not give

Quote: ἄλλο & αὐτό & οὐκ ἔδωκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

In this verse, the word other and the word it throughout the verse are singular in form, but they refer to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “others … them … they did not produce”

other

Quote: ἄλλο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective other as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seed that did not fall beside the road or on rocky soil. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated the word in 4:5. Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seed”

the thorns grew up and choked it

Quote: ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ συνέπνιξαν αὐτό (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that the thorns grew quickly and took all the nutrients, water, and sunlight, so the farmer’s plants could not grow well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the thorns grew very large and crowded it out” or “the thorns grew faster and kept it from growing well”

it did not give fruit

Quote: καρπὸν οὐκ ἔδωκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the word fruit refers to the crop that the plants that grew from the seeds should have produced. Since the farmer is sowing wheat seeds, this crop would have been more wheat seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it did not produce more seeds” or “when it sprouted it did not produce a harvest”

fruit

Quote: καρπὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Here, the word fruit is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”

Mark 4:8

others

Quote: ἄλλα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective others as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seeds that did not fall beside the road, on rocky soil, or onto thorns. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seeds”

it was giving fruit, growing up and being increased

Quote: ἐδίδου καρπὸν, ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ αὐξανόμενα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the phrases growing up and being increased describe something that happened before what the phrase it was giving fruit describes. Alternate translation: “growing up and being increased, it was giving fruit”

it was giving fruit

Quote: ἐδίδου καρπὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the word fruit refers to the crop that the plants that grew from the seeds produced. Since the farmer is sowing wheat seeds, this crop would be more seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it was producing more seeds” or “it sprouted and produced a harvest”

it was giving

Quote: ἐδίδου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, although the pronoun it is singular, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “they were giving”

fruit

Quote: καρπὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Here, the word fruit is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”

growing up and being increased

Quote: ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ αὐξανόμενα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms growing up and being increased mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “growing very large” or “quickly increasing in size”

being increased

Quote: αὐξανόμενα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “increasing”

one was bearing 30, and one, 60, and one, 100

Quote: ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that each of the plants produced either 30, 60, or 100 new seeds. Jesus does not mean that there were only three plants. Scholars estimate that these numbers of seeds are very good in Jesus’ time period, although not impossible or unheard of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “some plants were producing 30 seeds, and some plants were producing 60 seeds, and other plants were producing 100 seeds” or “they were bearing many times more than the farmer planted: one group of plants 30 times more, and one group of plants 60 times more, and one group of plants 100 times more”

one was bearing 30, and one, 60, and one, 100

Quote: ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the number one as a noun to mean one of the plants. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one plant was bearing 30, and one plant, 60, and one plant, 100”

one, 60, and one, 100

Quote: ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one was bearing 60, and one was bearing 100”

Mark 4:9

Whoever has ears to hear, let him hear

Quote: ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the phrase ears to hear represents the willingness to understand and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Whoever wishes to understand, let him understand and obey” or “Whoever can listen to me should pay attention”

Whoever has ears to hear, let him hear

Quote: ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, not about other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person plural here. Alternate translation: “You who have ears to hear should hear” or “If you have ears to hear, then hear”

let him hear

Quote: ἀκουέτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he should hear”

let him hear

Quote: ἀκουέτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term him is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “let that person hear”

Mark 4:10

when he was alone

Quote: ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase he was alone does not mean that there was no one at all with Jesus. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone, and Jesus was only with the 12 disciples and some of his other close followers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the crowds left” or “when the crowds were gone”

the ones around him

Quote: οἱ περὶ αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the ones around him refers to disciples who were near Jesus at the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the disciples who were near him”

the Twelve

Quote: τοῖς δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”

were asking him about the parables

Quote: ἠρώτων αὐτὸν & τὰς παραβολάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “were asking him, ‘Please tell us about the parables’”

Mark 4:11

has been given

Quote: δέδοται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has given”

the mystery of the kingdom of God

Quote: τὸ μυστήριον & τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the mystery that is about the kingdom of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the mystery concerning the kingdom of God”

to those, the ones outside

Quote: ἐκείνοις & τοῖς ἔξω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of people who are not his disciples as if they were outside. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those, the ones who are not my disciples”

everything is in parables

Quote: ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that everything is what is he teaches, and he only teaches in parables. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I teach is in parables” or “I use parables whenever I teach anything”

Mark 4:12

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Here, the phrase so that introduces the purpose for which Jesus uses parables when teaching people who are not his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “which is true in order that” or “and that is so that”

so that, Looking, they may look but may not see, and hearing, they may hear but may not understand, lest they might turn back, and it might be forgiven to them

Quote: ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν; μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν καὶ ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “so that, as the Scriptures say, looking, they may look but may not see, and hearing, they may hear but may not understand, lest they might turn back, and it might be forgiven to them”

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Isaiah 6:9–10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that, in the words of one of the prophets,” or “so that, as Isaiah the prophet wrote in the Scriptures,”

Looking, they may look … hearing, they may hear

Quote: βλέποντες, βλέπωσι & ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the author of the quotation repeats the words look and hear in order to emphasize that the people really do look and hear. If your language can repeat words for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use that construction here in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “They will certainly look … they will certainly hear” or “They will indeed look … they will indeed hear”

they might turn back

Quote: ἐπιστρέψωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The author of the quotation is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. So, to turn back would be to start listening to and obeying God again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might start obeying God again”

it might be forgiven to them

Quote: ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “they might receive forgiveness” or “God might give them forgiveness”

Mark 4:13

Do you not understand this parable? And how will you understand all the parables

Quote: οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You do not understand this parable. Because of that, you will not understand all the parables.” or “If you do not understand this parable, you cannot understand all the parables!”

Mark 4:14

The sower sows the word

Quote: ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks about what the word as if it were what the sower sows in the parable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what the sower sows is like the word”

sows the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον σπείρει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated “sow” in 4:4. Alternate translation: “throws the word like seeds over the ground” or “scatters the word like seeds over the field”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using the term word to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

Mark 4:15

Now

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word Now introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next topic, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,”

these are the ones beside the road

Quote: οὗτοι & εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown beside the road. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happens to some people is like what happened to the seeds that were sown beside the road”

the word is being sown, … that was sown

Quote: σπείρεται ὁ λόγος & τὸν ἐσπαρμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the actions, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone is sowing the word … that someone sowed”

the word … the word

Quote: ὁ λόγος & τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Just as in 4:14, Jesus is using the term word to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel … the gospel”

Satan immediately comes and takes away the word that was sown in them

Quote: εὐθὺς ἔρχεται ὁ Σατανᾶς, καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐσπαρμένον εἰς αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks about the gospel as if it were seeds that had been sown in people. He speaks of Satan as if he were a bird that swoops down and takes away the seeds. Since these figures of speech connect to the parable that Jesus told, if possible you should preserve them or express the ideas in simile form. Alternate translation: “Satan immediately comes like a bird and takes away the word, which had been sown like seeds in them”

Mark 4:16

And similarly

Quote: καὶ & ὁμοίως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the phrase And similarly indicates that Jesus is about to describe what happens to other people and that what happens is similar to what happened to the people he described in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a similar event or experience. Alternate translation: “Likewise” or “In a similar way”

these are the ones being sown on the rocky ground, who

Quote: οὗτοί εἰσιν & οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι; οἳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown on the rocky ground. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “what happened to the seeds having been sown on the rocky ground is like what happens to those who”

being sown

Quote: σπειρόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”

the rocky ground

Quote: τὰ πετρώδη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, just as in 4:5, Jesus refers to an area that has a thin layer of soil on top of a layer of rocks. Express the idea as you did in that verse. Alternate translation: “a thin layer of soil on top of rocks” or “a rocky area”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Just as in 4:14, Jesus is using the term word to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

with joy

Quote: μετὰ χαρᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “joyfully”

Mark 4:17

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces what happens to these people in contrast with how they at first received the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”

they have no root in themselves, but are temporary

Quote: οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιροί εἰσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks about these people as if they were the plants in the parable that had no root and were only temporary since they withered when the sun rose. Since this figure of speech connects to the parable that Jesus told, if possible you should preserve it or express the ideas in simile form. Alternate translation: “they are like plants with no roots that do not live for long”

no root

Quote: οὐκ & ῥίζαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here, just as in 4:6, Jesus says no root as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “almost no root” or “very small roots”

tribulation or persecution having happened

Quote: γενομένης θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of tribulation and persecution, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “when they are afflicted or persecuted”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Just as in 4:14, Jesus is using the term word to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

they are caused to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλίζονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they stumble”

they are caused to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλίζονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus speaks of ceasing to believe the gospel as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the stop believing” or “they cease to trust the good news”

Mark 4:18

others are the ones being sown into the thorns

Quote: ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown into the thorns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happened to the seeds having been sown into the thorns is like what happens to others”

being sown

Quote: σπειρόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Just as in 4:14, Jesus is using the term word to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

Mark 4:19

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces what happens to these people in contrast with how they received the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”

the worries of the age and the deceitfulness of riches and the desires concerning other things

Quote: αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου, καὶ αἱ περὶ τὰ λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of worries, deceitfulness, and desires, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they worry about this age and are deceived by riches and desire other things. These things”

the worries of the age

Quote: αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe worries that are related to this age. In other words, the worries are about things and problems that exist in this age or world. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worries about things in this age” or “the worries about what happens in this age”

the deceitfulness of riches

Quote: ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe riches that are characterized by deceitfulness. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “deceitful riches” or “riches that deceive”

entering in

Quote: εἰσπορευόμεναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here Jesus speaks as if the worries of the age and the deceitfulness of riches and the desires concerning other things were people who could be entering in a place. He means that these things begin to be part of these people’s lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which these people start to experience” or “which characterize these people’s lives”

choke the word, and it becomes unfruitful

Quote: συνπνίγουσιν τὸν λόγον καὶ ἄκαρπος γίνεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus continues to speak about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown into the thorns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “prevent the word from being effective, just as the thorns choked the seeds and made them unfruitful”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Just as in 4:14, Jesus is using the term word to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

Mark 4:20

those are the ones sown on the good soil, who hear the word and receive it and bear fruit—one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100

Quote: ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες; οἵτινες ἀκούουσιν τὸν λόγον καὶ παραδέχονται καὶ καρποφοροῦσιν, ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks about what happens to this person as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown on the good soil and produced crops of various sizes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happened to the seeds sown on the good soil is like what happens to the one hearing the word and receiving it. That person will be like a seed that bears fruit—one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100”

sown

Quote: σπαρέντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Just as in 4:14, Jesus is using the term word to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

bear fruit

Quote: καρποφοροῦσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Here, the word fruit is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “bear fruits”

one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100

Quote: ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that each of the plants produced either 30, 60, or 100 new seeds. Jesus does not mean that there were only three plants. Scholars estimate that these numbers of seeds are very good in Jesus’ time period, although not impossible or unheard of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. See how you expressed the idea in 4:8. Alternate translation: “some producing 30 seeds, and some producing 60 seeds, and some producing 100 seeds”

one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100

Quote: ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one was bearing 30, and one was bearing 60, and one was bearing 100”

one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100

Quote: ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the number one as a noun to mean one of the plants. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one plant, 30, and one plant, 60, and one plant, 100”

Mark 4:21

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them could refer to: (1) all the people who were nearby, including both the disciples and the crowds. Alternate translation: “to the disciples and the crowds” or “everyone who was with him” (2) just the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”

The lamp does not come so that it might be put under the basket or under the bed, does it? Is it not so that it might be put on the lampstand

Quote: μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν τεθῇ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “The lamp does not come so that it might be put under a basket or under the bed but so that it might be put on the lampstand.” or “The lamp certainly does not come so that it might be put under a basket or under the bed! No, it comes so that it might be put on the lampstand!”

The lamp does not come so that it might be put under the basket or under the bed, does it? Is it not so that it might be put on the lampstand

Quote: μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν τεθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The words The lamp, the basket, the bed, and the lampstand represent lamps, baskets, beds, and lampstands in general, not one particular lamp, basket, bed, or lampstand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Lamps do not come so that they might be put under baskets or under beds, do they? Is it not so that they might be put on lampstands”

The lamp does not come … does it

Quote: μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here Jesus speaks as if the lamp were a person who could come. He means that someone lights the lamp and brings it into a house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The lamp is not lit … is it” or “The lamp is not brought into a house … is it”

it might be put … Is it not so that it might be put

Quote: τεθῇ & οὐχ ἵνα & τεθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone might put it … Is it not so that someone might put it”

under the basket

Quote: ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A basket is a large circular container that stores food or other items. If someone put a lamp under this kind of container, it would completely hide the light from the lamp. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in a box” or “under a container that hides its light”

under the bed

Quote: ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A bed is a piece of furniture that people would lie on when they were eating or sleeping. Most likely, this kind of bed had short legs that raised it off the floor. If someone put a lamp under this kind of furniture, it would hide the light from the lamp. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “under a couch” or “under furniture”

on the lampstand

Quote: ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the lamp can illuminate a large area when it is on a lampstand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the lampstand to that it illuminates the whole room” or “on the lampstand where it lights up the area”

Mark 4:22

For

Quote: γάρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an explanation of the illustration that Jesus gave in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “And so,”

it is not hidden except so that it might be revealed, nor has it become secret except so that it might come into visibility

Quote: οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs

Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that things that are hidden or secret only in order that they might be revealed or come into visibility. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “things are not hidden except so that they might be revealed. Things have not become secret except so that they might come into visibility”

it is not hidden except so that it might be revealed, nor has it become secret except so that it might come into visibility

Quote: οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses into one. Alternate translation: “it is not hidden except so that it might be revealed; yes, it has not become secret except so that it might come into visibility” or “it is not hidden except so that it will come into visibility”

it is not hidden except so that it might be revealed, nor has it become secret except so that it might come into visibility

Quote: οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making statements here and then contradicting them, you could reword this sentence to avoid using exception clauses. Alternate translation: “it is only hidden so that it might be revealed, and it has only become secret so that it might come into visibility”

it is not hidden except so that it might be revealed, nor has it become secret except so that it might come into visibility

Quote: οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the actions, you could: (1) use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “they do not hide it except so that they might reveal it, nor do they make it secret except so that they might bring it into visibility” (2) indicate that God did them. Alternate translation: “God has not hidden it except so that he might reveal it, nor has he made it secret except so that he might bring it into visibility”

it is not … nor has it become

Quote: οὐ & ἐστιν & οὐδὲ ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun it in both places refers generally to anything. Jesus may more specifically have in mind the meaning of his preaching or the kingdom of God. However, since Jesus uses a general proverb form, if possible you also should use a general form that could refer to many things. Alternate translation: “nothing is … nothing has become” or “something is not … nor has something become”

it might come into visibility

Quote: ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of visibility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “it might become visible”

it might come into visibility

Quote: ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase it will come into visibility means that something will be revealed or become known. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it will be known”

Mark 4:23

If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear

Quote: εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω (1)

See how you translated the similar sentence in 4:9.

Mark 4:24

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, just as in 4:21, the pronoun them could refer to: (1) all the people who were nearby, including both the disciples and the crowds. Alternate translation: “to the disciples and the crowds” or “everyone who was with him” (2) just the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”

Watch

Quote: βλέπετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if people who Watch things that they hear. He means that they need to pay attention to what they hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to”

With the measure by which you measure, it will be measured to you, and it will be added to you

Quote: ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs

Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb. He could be using it to teach: (1) that people learn and understand only whatever they chose to listen carefully to. Alternate translation: “Whatever you pay attention to is what you will learn and know” or “How you listen shows what you will know and understand” (2) that people eventually experience for themselves how they have treated other people. Alternate translation: “what you give to others is what you will get and acquire in return” or “what you do to others will be done to you”

With the measure by which you measure

Quote: ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of measure, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you measure”

it will be measured to you, and it will be added to you

Quote: μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will measure it to you, and he will add it to you”

it will be measured to you, and it will be added to you

Quote: μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In both places, the word it refers to what you measure. Jesus is speaking in general about anything that people measure, so you should avoid making the phrase specific. Alternate translation: “the same thing will be measured to you, and it will be added to you” or “that very thing will be measured to you, and it will be added to you”

it will be added to you

Quote: προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Jesus uses the phrase will be added to you to indicate that God will give all what is measured. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it will be given to you”

Mark 4:25

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Jesus said in the previous verse about paying careful attention to what one hears. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is what I mean:” or “To put it another way,”

he who has, it will be given to him, and he who does not have, even what he has will be taken away from him

Quote: ὃς & ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ; καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs

Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that people who have something usually gain more of it, while people who have very little usually lose everything. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “people who have things receive more, and people who do not have things lose what they used to have”

he who has, it will be given to him, and he who does not have, even what he has will be taken away from him

Quote: ὃς & ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ; καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that what the person has or does not have is knowledge or understanding about the good news that Jesus proclaims. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he who has understanding, it will be given to him, and he who does not have understanding, even what he has will be taken away from him” or “he who has knowledge about the gospel, more will be given to him, and he who does not have knowledge about the gospel, even what knowledge he has will be taken away from him”

it will be given … will be taken away

Quote: δοθήσεται & ἀρθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will give … God will take away”

he who … to him, … he who does not have, … he has … him

Quote: ὃς & αὐτῷ & ὃς οὐκ ἔχει & ἔχει & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms he and him are masculine in this verse, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “the person who … to that person … the person who does not have … that person … him or her”

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces a person who does not have in contrast to the person who has. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”

he who does not have

Quote: ὃς οὐκ ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus says he who does not have here as a generalization for emphasis. It is clear in the second half of the sentence that the person did have something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “he who has almost nothing” or “he who does not have much”

Mark 4:26

Thus is the kingdom of God: As a man throws the seed on the ground

Quote: οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach his audience, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story. Thus is the kingdom of God: As a man throws seed on the ground”

Thus is the kingdom of God: As a man

Quote: οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Jesus is saying that the kingdom of God is like a man who throws seed on the ground. The following verses will give further information about this comparison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces this kind of comparison. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God is like a man who”

a man

Quote: ἄνθρωπος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Here and in the following verses, Jesus tells a story about a specific man. It is not important for the story whether the person is a man or a woman. If you have a form that refers to any person without identifying a gender, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could identify the person as a man, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “a person”

throws the seed on the ground

Quote: βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

While there are many ways to sow or plant seeds, here Jesus is describing a practice in which a farmer picks up handfuls of seed and throws them so that they are scattered all over the top of the soil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what the man is doing. Alternate translation: “sows the seed on the earth” or “scatters the seeds over the field”

the seed

Quote: τὸν σπόρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Here, the word seed is singular in form, but it refers to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “the seeds”

Mark 4:27

he sleeps and gets up, night and day

Quote: καθεύδῃ καὶ ἐγείρηται, νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Jesus means that the farmer sleeps at night and gets up when it is day. This indicates that the farmer lives a normal life and does what he normally does over a period of many days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he sleeps at night and gets up in the morning each day” or “he lives a normal life over the next days”

the seed

Quote: ὁ σπόρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

See how you translated the seed in 4:26. Alternate translation: “the seeds”

how

Quote: ὡς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the farmer does not understand the process by which the seed sprouts and grows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “how the seed does that” or “the way in which that happens”

himself

Quote: αὐτός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Jesus uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that the farmer does not know. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “he indeed”

Mark 4:28

The soil produces a crop

Quote: ἡ γῆ καρποφορεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here, Jesus speaks of The soil as if it were a person who could produce a crop. He means that the plants grow out of the soil and produce a crop. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The crop grows from the soil” or “Each plant sprouts out of the soil to produce a crop”

of its own accord

Quote: αὐτομάτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase of its own accord indicates that the soil produced the crop without help or assistance from anyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by itself” or “without any help”

a blade

Quote: χόρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word blade refers to a leaf of the grain plant. This is the first part of the plant that comes up through the soil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a leaf” or “a sprout”

a head, … the head

Quote: στάχυν & τῷ στάχυϊ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The head is the topmost part of the grain plant. The head holds the mature grain or seeds of the plant, which are the parts that people eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the top of the grain plant … the top of the grain plant” or “the edible part of the grain plant … the edible part of the grain plant”

a mature grain

Quote: πλήρης σῖτον (1)

Alternate translation: “full-grown grain” or “grain that is ready to eat”

Mark 4:29

the fruit hands over

Quote: παραδοῖ ὁ καρπός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

Here, the word fruit is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits, or seeds of grain, as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “grain seeds hand over”

the fruit hands over

Quote: παραδοῖ ὁ καρπός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the clause the fruit hands over means that the crop of grain is ripe and ready to be used for food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the fruit is ripe” or “the fruit is ready”

he immediately sends the sickle, because the harvest has come

Quote: εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέπανον, ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because the harvest has come, he immediately sends the sickle”

the sickle

Quote: τὸ δρέπανον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the sickle represents workers who use sickles to harvest the grain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people with sickles” or “workers who use sickles to harvest the crop”

sickle

Quote: δρέπανον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A sickle is a tool with a curved blade that agricultural workers use to cut down standing crops in order to harvest them. If your readers would not be familiar with what a sickle is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “sharp harvesting tool”

the harvest has come

Quote: παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the clause the harvest has come means that it is the right time for the harvest to begin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is harvest time” or “it is the right time for the harvest”

Mark 4:30

How will we compare the kingdom of God, or in what parable will we put it

Quote: πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to introduce what he is about to teach. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We will now compare the kingdom of God to something. We will put it in a parable.”

How will we compare the kingdom of God, or in what parable will we put it

Quote: πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, Jesus means himself and his audience, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Jesus uses this form because he wants his audience to be involved in thinking about how parables can help explain the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “What would be a good comparison for us to use for the kingdom of God, or what parable could we use for it”

or

Quote: ἢ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word or introduces another similar question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related question, or you could leave or untranslated. Alternate translation: “and” or “or again,”

in what parable will we put it

Quote: ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if the kingdom of God were an object that he could put in a parable, which he speaks about as if it were a container. He means that he can explain the kingdom of God by using a parable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what parable will we describe it” or “what parable can we use to explain it”

Mark 4:31

It is} like a mustard seed

Quote: ὡς κόκκῳ σινάπεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach his audience, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: It is like a mustard seed”

a mustard seed

Quote: κόκκῳ σινάπεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A mustard seed is a very small seed that grows into a large plant. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of seed, in your translation you could use the name of another seed like it, or you could use a general phrase. Alternate translation: “a very small seed”

Mark 4:31-32

which, when it has been sown in the soil, being the smallest of all the seeds on the earth … and when it has been sown, it grows

Quote: ὃς ὅταν σπαρῇ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, μικρότερον ὂν πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς & καὶ ὅταν σπαρῇ, ἀναβαίνει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here Jesus repeats the clause when it has been sown. This was a natural way in his language to describe the seed and the action. If repeating this clause would be redundant in your language, you could rearrange the clauses and only include the repeated clause once. Alternate translation: “which, being the smallest of all the seeds on the earth, when it has been sown, grows”

Mark 4:31

it has been sown

Quote: σπαρῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “a person has sown it” or “they have sown it”

the smallest of all the seeds

Quote: μικρότερον & πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus says smallest of all the seeds here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “one of the smallest seeds” or “smaller than most seeds”

Mark 4:32

it has been sown

Quote: σπαρῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. See how you expressed the idea in 4:31. Alternate translation: “a person has sown it” or “they have sown it”

all the vegetable plants

Quote: πάντων τῶν λαχάνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The phrase vegetable plants refers to plants that people grow so that they can eat them or parts of them. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “all the other plants that people grow to eat” or “all the plants that people have in their gardens”

it makes large branches

Quote: ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους (1)

Alternate translation: “it grows large branches”

the birds of the sky

Quote: τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

In your language, it might seem that this phrase expresses unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the birds”

to nest

Quote: κατασκηνοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word nest could indicate that: (1) the birds are building nests in the shadow of the mustard plant. Alternate translation: “build nests” (2) the birds are perching or resting in the shadow of the mustard plant. Alternate translation: “perch” or “roost”

in its shadow

Quote: ὑπὸ τὴν σκιὰν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase in its shadow could imply that the birds are nesting: (1) in the lower branches of the plant, which are in the shadow of the higher branches. Alternate translation: “in its shadow in the lower branches” (2) on the ground that is in the shadow of the plant. Alternate translation: “in its shadow on the ground”

Mark 4:33-34

And with many such parables he was speaking the word to them, just as they were able to hear … but he was not speaking to them without a parable, but by himself he was explaining everything to his own disciples

Quote: καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν & χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς, κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς ἰδίοις μαθηταῖς, ἐπέλυεν πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

This sentence marks the end of Jesus’ teaching by summarizing how Jesus taught the crowds. Use a natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a speech. Alternate translation: “Before he stopped teaching them, he used many such parables to speak the word to them, just as they were able to hear; but he did not speak to them without a parable, but by himself he explained everything to his own disciples”

Mark 4:33

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Mark is using the term word to mean the gospel, which Jesus preached using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the people who were there with him, not just the disciples. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “to the crowds” or “to the people who were near him”

just as they were able to hear

Quote: καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could mean that: (1) Jesus told his audience as much as he knew that they could hear. Alternate translation: “teaching them all the things that they were able to hear” (2) Jesus spoke to his audience in a way that he knew they could hear. Alternate translation: “teaching them in a way that they could hear”

to hear

Quote: ἀκούειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark uses the word hear to refer to both hearing and understanding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to realize what he meant”

Mark 4:34

he was not speaking to them without a parable

Quote: χωρὶς & παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word not and the negative preposition without. Alternate translation: “he was only speaking to them with a parable”

everything

Quote: πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word everything refers to every parable that Jesus spoke to the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every parable”

Mark 4:35

to the other side

Quote: εἰς τὸ πέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that he wants to go with the disciples to the other side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”

Mark 4:36

they take him with {them

Quote: παραλαμβάνουσιν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they took Jesus across the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they take him across the lake with them”

as he was, in the boat

Quote: ὡς ἦν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus was already in the boat, so they could leave right away (see 4:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as he was already in the boat” or “using the boat he was sitting in”

other boats were with him

Quote: ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that other people got into boats and sailed with Jesus and his disciples across the lake. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “many people got into other boats to sail with him”

Mark 4:37

were breaking into

Quote: ἐπέβαλλεν εἰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

When waves are breaking into a boat, they are high enough that they come over the side of the boat and splash water into it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were coming over the sides into”

the boat was already filled

Quote: ἤδη γεμίζεσθαι τὸ πλοῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the waves. Alternate translation: “the waves were already filling the boat”

Mark 4:38

he himself was

Quote: αὐτὸς ἦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Mark uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that Jesus was in the stern, sleeping. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “as for Jesus, he was”

the stern

Quote: τῇ πρύμνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word stern is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back end of the boat”

the cushion

Quote: τὸ προσκεφάλαιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A cushion is a soft object that person would lie or rest on. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of object, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the sleeping pad” or “a soft surface”

is it not a concern to you that we are perishing

Quote: οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The disciples are using the question form to show Jesus that they are afraid and to convince him to do something to help them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “it should be a concern to you that we are perishing.” or “it is clearly not a concern to you that we are perishing!”

is it not a concern to you

Quote: οὐ μέλει σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of concern, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “does it not concern you”

to you

Quote: σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the word you here is singular.

we are perishing

Quote: ἀπολλύμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, the word we includes both Jesus and the disciples. Your language may require you to mark this form.

Mark 4:39

Be silent! Be still

Quote: σιώπα, πεφίμωσο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms Be silent and Be still mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Be very calm!” or “Be completely still!”

Be silent! Be still

Quote: σιώπα, πεφίμωσο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the sea, the commands Be silent and Be still are singular.

there was a great calm

Quote: ἐγένετο γαλήνη μεγάλη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of calm, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sea became very calm”

Mark 4:40

Why are you cowardly? Do you not yet have faith

Quote: τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples for being cowardly and for not yet having faith. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “You should not be cowardly. I am disappointed that you do not have more faith.” or “Do not be cowardly! You should already have faith!”

Do you not yet have faith

Quote: οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Jesus could be implying that this faith is in: (1) God. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet believe God” (2) himself. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet trust me”

Mark 4:41

they feared a great fear

Quote: ἐφοβήθησαν φόβον μέγαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase feared a great fear means that they were extremely afraid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were extremely afraid” or “they were terrified”

Who then is this, that even the wind and the sea obey him

Quote: τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this into two sentences, one asking the question, and the other giving the reason for the question. Alternate translation: “Who then is this? Even the wind and the sea obey him!”

Who then is this, that even the wind and the sea obey him

Quote: τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ (1)

This is a genuine question, not a statement in question form. The disciples are looking for information about what kind of person Jesus could be if he can do these things. Alternate translation: “Who then is this person, for even the wind and the sea obey him”

Who then

Quote: τίς ἄρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word then indicates that the disciples ask this question in response to what Jesus has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “So then, who” or “Given what he just did, who”

Mark 5

Mark 5 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)
   • Casting demons out of a man (5:1–20)
   • Healing a woman and resurrecting a girl (5:21–43)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Resurrecting the dead

In 5:21–24 and 5:35–43, Mark narrates how Jesus raised a girl from the dead. While Jesus describes her as only “sleeping,” he uses this word to indicate that the girl will “wake up” from being dead. The story clearly indicates that the girl had died and that Jesus raises her from the dead by touching her.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

How to refer to the demons and the demon-possessed man

In 5:1–20, Jesus encounters a man whom demons had possessed. As Jesus interacts with this man, it becomes clear that there are three different entities who are involved. First, there is the man himself, but what he says and does is only what the demons want him to do. Second, there is a specific demon who seems to act as the spokesperson or leader for multiple demons. Third, there are the other demons, of whom there are so many that the man is called “Legion.” As Mark narrates the story, he sometimes refers to the man, sometimes to the individual demon, and sometimes to all the demons. Further, it is not always clear which of these three entities speaks and is spoken to by Jesus. Consider how you might refer to a demon-possessed person in this situation. If possible, preserve Mark’s switches between singular and plural, since learning that there are many demons is an important part of the story. Further, Mark implies that the man and the demons are so closely connected that referring to what the man did is the same as referring to what the demons did, and vice versa.

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 15, 19, 22, 23, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 5:1

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

they came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they came”

of the Gerasenes

Quote: τῶν Γερασηνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The name Gerasenes refers to the people who lived in and near the town of Gerasa.

of the Gerasenes

Quote: τῶν Γερασηνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read Gerasenes. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “Gadarenes,” and other ancient manuscripts read “Gergesenes.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 5:2

having gone out

Quote: ἐξελθόντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come out”

a man with an unclean spirit met him from the tombs

Quote: ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν μνημείων ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a man with an unclean spirit as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man came from the tombs to meet him. This man had an unclean spirit”

Mark 5:3

who had his dwelling in the tombs

Quote: ὃς τὴν κατοίκησιν εἶχεν ἐν τοῖς μνήμασιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. This background information continues in 5:4 and 5:5. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “and here is what that man was like. He had his dwelling in the tombs”

Mark 5:3-4

and no one was able to bind him anymore, not even with a chain … because he had often been bound with shackles and chains, and the chains had been torn apart by him and the shackles had been shattered, and no one was strong enough to subdue him

Quote: καὶ οὐδὲ ἁλύσει οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι & διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 5:3 and 5:4 into a verse bridge in order to include the basis for the claim that no one was able to bind him anymore before the claim. Alternate translation: “and he had often been bound with shackles and chains, and the chains had been torn apart by him and the shackles had been shattered. So, no one was strong enough to subdue him or to bind him anymore, not even with a chain”

Mark 5:3

no one was able to bind him anymore

Quote: οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that people tried to bind this man to keep him from hurting people and breaking things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “no one was able to bind him anymore to keep him from hurting others” or “no one was able to use bonds to restrain him anymore”

no one was able … anymore

Quote: οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated no one and anymore are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “people were able … no longer”

with a chain

Quote: ἁλύσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A chain is a long, flexible fastener that is made from multiple rings of metal connected together. Chains are usually used to secure objects or bind things together. If your readers would not be familiar with chains, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with metal links connected together”

Mark 5:4

he had often been bound

Quote: αὐτὸν πολλάκις & δεδέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who lived nearby. Alternate translation: “the people who lived there had often bound him”

with shackles … the shackles

Quote: πέδαις & τὰς πέδας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word shackles refers to pieces of metal that are fastened around the ankles of prisoners. These pieces of metal are connected together by ropes or chains, which prevent the prisoners from moving quickly or far. If your readers would not be familiar with shackles, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with leg irons … the leg irons” or “with strong restraints … the restraints”

chains, … the chains

Quote: ἁλύσεσι & τὰς ἁλύσεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word chains in 5:3. Alternate translation: “metal links connected together … the metal links”

and

Quote: καὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces what the demon-possessed man did in contrast to what the people who tied him up wanted him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”

the chains had been torn apart by him and the shackles had been shattered

Quote: διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had torn apart the chains and had shattered the shackles”

Mark 5:5

throughout every night and day

Quote: διὰ παντὸς νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase throughout every night and day indicates that this man was crying out and cutting himself with stones during both the day and the night. This means that he was doing those things very often every day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “during every day and every night”

Mark 5:6

And having seen Jesus from a distance

Quote: καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark stops giving background information and returns to the events in the story that he is telling. He implies that the man saw Jesus when he arrived in the boat from the other side of the Sea of Galilee (see 5:1–2). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Now, having seen Jesus from a distance when he got out of the boat”

bowed down to him

Quote: προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In the Jesus’ culture, bowing down to a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what bowing down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated himself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”

Mark 5:7-8

And crying out with a loud voice, he says, “What to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God? I make you swear by God, do not torment me … For he was saying to him, “Come out from the man, unclean spirit

Quote: καὶ κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ λέγει, τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν, μή με βασανίσῃς & ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ, ἔξελθε, τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἀκάθαρτον ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 5:7 and 5:8 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason why the man cried out as he did before stating that the man cried out. Alternate translation: “And Jesus was saying to him, ‘Come out from the man, unclean spirit.’ So, crying out with a loud voice, he says, ‘What to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God? I make you swear by God, do not torment me.’”

Mark 5:7

crying out with a loud voice

Quote: κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase crying out with a loud voice means that the demon raised the volume of its voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”

What to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God

Quote: τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The man, controlled by the demon, is using the question form to insist on something urgently. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God!”

What to me and to you

Quote: τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the question What to me and to you asks whether you and me have anything in common or have any reason to be together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What do you and I have in common” or “What reason do you have to get involved with me”

Son of the Most High God

Quote: Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Son of the Most High God is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.

I make you swear by God

Quote: ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula

Here the man, controlled by the demon, puts Jesus under oath, or makes him swear by God that he will not torment him. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I make you swear before God” or “I require that you solemnly promise God”

Mark 5:8

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why the man, controlled by the demon, acted as he did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “He said that because” or “That was because”

Mark 5:9

My name {is} Legion, for we are many

Quote: Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “We are many, so my name is Legion”

is} Legion

Quote: Λεγιὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

A Legion is the name of a group of about 6,000 soldiers. So, translate the word Legion with a word in your language that refers to a large number of soldiers. You could show that this was the name of the man by using the convention in your language for proper names. Alternate translation: “is Army” or “is Battalion” or “is Brigade”

we are many

Quote: πολλοί ἐσμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the demon indicates that he is speaking for many demons who are together controlling the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I and the other demons with me are many”

Mark 5:10

much that he would not send them out of the region

Quote: πολλὰ, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “much, ‘Do not send us demons out of this region’” or “much, ‘Do not send the legion of demons out of this region’”

Mark 5:11

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark uses the word But to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. It does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “At the same time,”

Mark 5:12

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

Send us into the pigs

Quote: πέμψον ἡμᾶς εἰς τοὺς χοίρους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the demons imply that they want Jesus to Send them into the pigs when Jesus casts them out of the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Whenever you cast us out of this man, send us into the pigs”

Send

Quote: πέμψον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you send”

us … we might enter

Quote: ἡμᾶς & εἰσέλθωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, the words us and we refer only to the demons, not to Jesus or any of his disciples. Your language may require you to mark this form.

we might enter into them

Quote: εἰς αὐτοὺς εἰσέλθωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the demons speak of wanting to enter into the herd of pigs. They mean that they want to enter and control the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we might enter into them and possess them”

Mark 5:13

he permitted them

Quote: ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus permitted the demons to enter into the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he permitted them to enter into the pigs”

he permitted them

Quote: ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he told them, ‘You may do so’”

having come out

Quote: ἐξελθόντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the demons came out of the man whom they had been controlling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come out of the man whom they had been possessing”

having come out

Quote: ἐξελθόντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone out”

entered into the pigs

Quote: εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated the similar phrase in 5:12. Alternate translation: “entered into the pigs and possessed them”

about 2, 000

Quote: ὡς δισχίλιοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark indicates that the herd was made up of about 2,000 pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which was made up of about 2,000 pigs” or “about 2,000 pigs in all”

were drowned

Quote: ἐπνίγοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “died by drowning”

Mark 5:14

And the ones feeding them ran away

Quote: καὶ οἱ βόσκοντες αὐτοὺς ἔφυγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces the ones feeding them as new characters in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing new characters. Alternate translation: “And the ones feeding them were there. They ran away”

the ones feeding them

Quote: οἱ βόσκοντες αὐτοὺς (1)

Alternate translation: “the ones who were herding the pigs”

in the city and in the countryside

Quote: εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Here, Mark is referring to that whole region by naming its two primary parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “throughout the whole area”

in the city and in the countryside

Quote: εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the city is most likely Gerasa, since Jesus got out of the boat near this town (see 5:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the town of Gerasa and in the countryside around it”

they went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the people who were living in the city and in the countryside. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in those places went out”

they went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “they came out”

Mark 5:15

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go”

the one being demon-possessed

Quote: τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the man who had been demon-possessed until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the one who used to be demon-possessed”

the one being demon-possessed

Quote: τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the demons possessed”

clothed and being sound-minded

Quote: ἱματισμένον καὶ σωφρονοῦντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “wearing clothes and having a sound mind”

being sound-minded

Quote: σωφρονοῦντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase being sound-minded means that the man was acting rationally and thinking like a normal person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “thinking sanely” or “acting rationally”

the one that had had the legion

Quote: τὸν ἐσχηκότα τὸν λεγεῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Mark means that the man had been possessed or controlled by the legion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one that had been possessed by the legion” or “the one whom the legion had possessed”

the legion

Quote: τὸν λεγεῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word legion in Mark 5:9. Here, however, the word is a not a name, so use the appropriate form to refer to a large number of demons. Alternate translation: “the army” or “the battalion” or “the brigade”

they were afraid

Quote: ἐφοβήθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that they were afraid of what else such a powerful person as Jesus might do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of what else Jesus might do, since they recognized what great power he had”

Mark 5:16

the ones having seen

Quote: οἱ ἰδόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that these people saw what happened to the man and the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those who had seen what had happened”

to the one being demon-possessed

Quote: τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the man who had been demon-possessed until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar phrase in 5:15. Alternate translation: “to the one who used to be demon-possessed”

to the one being demon-possessed

Quote: τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom the demons possessed”

Mark 5:17

him to depart from their region

Quote: αὐτὸν ἀπελθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please depart from our region’”

Mark 5:18

the one having been demon-possessed

Quote: ὁ δαιμονισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the man who had been demon-possessed until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar phrase in 5:15. Alternate translation: “the one who used to be demon-possessed”

the one having been demon-possessed

Quote: ὁ δαιμονισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the demons had possessed”

him so that he might be with him

Quote: αὐτὸν & ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please let me be with you!’”

he might be with him

Quote: μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Mark means that the man wanted to go wherever Jesus went, listen to what he said, and spend much time with him as a disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he might go with him” or “he might follow him”

Mark 5:19

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man wanted him to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But”

your {people

Quote: τοὺς σούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase translated your {people} could refer to: (1) the man’s family, relatives, and friends. Alternate translation: “the people you know” (2) just the man’s family. Alternate translation: “your family”

as much as the Lord has done for you and had mercy on you

Quote: ὅσα ὁ Κύριός σοι πεποίηκεν, καὶ ἠλέησέν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The phrases has done for you and had mercy on you mean similar things. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “as much as the Lord has done for you; yes, as much as he has had mercy on you” or “as much as the Lord has mercifully done for you”

the Lord has done

Quote: ὁ Κύριός & πεποίηκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase the Lord could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord, has done” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “I, the Lord, have done”

had mercy on you

Quote: ἠλέησέν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mercy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “been merciful to you”

Mark 5:20

the Decapolis

Quote: τῇ Δεκαπόλει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Decapolis is a name for a region to the southeast of Galilee. The nadaughtersans “the Ten Towns.”

all

Quote: πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the people who heard what the man proclaimed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all the people who listened to him”

Mark 5:21

And Jesus having crossed over again to the other side in the boat, a great crowd was gathered around him, and he was beside the sea

Quote: καὶ διαπεράσαντος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ πάλιν εἰς τὸ πέραν, συνήχθη ὄχλος πολὺς ἐπ’ αὐτόν, καὶ ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

This verse introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “At that time, Jesus crossed over again to the other side in the boat. When he arrived, a great crowd was gathered around him, and he was beside the sea.”

Jesus having crossed over

Quote: διαπεράσαντος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, along with his disciples, having crossed over”

to the other side

Quote: εἰς τὸ πέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus crossed over to the other side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”

was gathered

Quote: συνήχθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered” or “came together”

Mark 5:22

behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “picture this” or “suddenly”

one of the synagogue rulers, Jairus by name, comes

Quote: ἔρχεται εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων ὀνόματι Ἰάειρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces the synagogue ruler as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “a man comes. He was one of the synagogue rulers, Jairus by name”

Jairus

Quote: Ἰάειρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Jairus is the name of a man.

comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “goes”

he falls at his feet

Quote: πίπτει πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, falling at someone’s feet was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “he throws himself on the ground” or “he falls at his feet to show respect”

Mark 5:23

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

is having {her} end

Quote: ἐσχάτως ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Jairus is using the phrase is having {her} end to indicate that his daughter is about to die. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is on her deathbed” or “will soon breath her last” or “will die soon”

so that, coming, you might lay your hands on her

Quote: ἵνα ἐλθὼν, ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the phrase so that introduces what Jairus wants Jesus to do in response to what Jairus has told him about his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduce a desired response to a situation. Alternate translation: “so I ask that you, coming, lay your hands on her” or “and so, coming, I wish that you will lay your hands on her”

coming

Quote: ἐλθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of coming. Alternate translation: “going”

she might be saved

Quote: σωθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. Alternate translation: “you might heal her”

Mark 5:24

he went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went away”

Mark 5:25

a woman, being with a flow of blood for 12 years

Quote: γυνὴ οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ἔτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces this woman as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a woman there. She had been with a flow of blood for 12 years”

being with a flow of blood

Quote: οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Mark uses the phrase a flow of blood to refer discreetly to her condition or illness. She was probably experiencing menstrual bleeding at many times, even when it was not the normal time for that. If your language has a polite way of referring to this condition, you could use that expression here, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffering from abnormal menstruation” or “suffering from frequent menstrual bleeding”

Mark 5:26

and having suffered much from many physicians

Quote: καὶ πολλὰ παθοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. This background information continues in the first part of 5:27. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “and in the past having suffered much from many physicians”

having suffered much from many physicians

Quote: πολλὰ παθοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could mean that the woman: (1) suffered from the treatments that the physicians used. Alternate translation: “having suffered much from the physicians’ treatments” or “being made to suffer by many physicians” (2) suffering while being treated by the physicians. Alternate translation: “having suffered much as physicians tried to treat her”

having spent everything {that was} from herself

Quote: δαπανήσασα τὰ παρ’ ἑαυτῆς πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that she spent everything {that was} from herself to pay the physicians to treat her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having spent everything that was from herself to pay for her treatments”

everything {that was} from herself

Quote: τὰ παρ’ ἑαυτῆς πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase everything {that was} from herself refers to all the money and belongings that the woman had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that she had” or “all her money and possessions”

having come to the worse

Quote: εἰς τὸ χεῖρον ἐλθοῦσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase having come to the worse means that the woman’s situation was getting worse. In other words, she was becoming more sick. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “getting worse” or “worsening”

Mark 5:27-28

having heard the things about Jesus, having come up behind him in the crowd, touched his cloak … For she was saying, “If I touch just his clothes, I will be saved

Quote: ἀκούσασα τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ἐλθοῦσα ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ὄπισθεν, ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ & ἔλεγεν γὰρ, ὅτι ἐὰν ἅψωμαι κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 5:27 and 5:28 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include what the woman is thinking before she acts based on what she is thinking. Alternate translation: “heard the things about Jesus. She was saying, ‘If I touch just his clothes, I will be saved.’ So, having come up behind him in the crowd, she touched his cloak.”

Mark 5:27

the things about Jesus

Quote: τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the woman heard the things that Jesus had done to heal people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that Jesus had healed people”

having come up

Quote: ἐλθοῦσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone up”

touched his cloak

Quote: ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Here Mark does not explain why she touched the edge of his cloak. Since Mark does explain it in the next verse, you should not explain its meaning here.

Mark 5:28

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why the woman touched Jesus’ clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for an action, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is why she did that:” or “She did that because”

she was saying, “If I touch just his clothes, I will be saved

Quote: ἔλεγεν & ὅτι ἐὰν ἅψωμαι κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “she was saying that if she could touch just his clothes, she would be saved”

she was saying

Quote: ἔλεγεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the woman was saying these things to herself or that she was thinking these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “she was saying to herself” or “she was thinking”

I touch just

Quote: ἅψωμαι κἂν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word just indicates that the woman thinks that, to be healed, she does not need to do anything more than touch Jesus’ clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all I do is touch” or “I can just touch”

I will be saved

Quote: σωθήσομαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could indicate that is God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God will save me” or “he will save me”

Mark 5:29

was dried up

Quote: ἐξηράνθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “dried up” or “ceased”

she had been healed from the affliction

Quote: ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could indicate that is God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God had healed her from the disease” or “Jesus had healed her from the disease”

from the affliction

Quote: ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of affliction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how she was afflicted”

Mark 5:30

having realized in himself

Quote: ἐπιγνοὺς ἐν ἑαυτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus realized that power had gone out from him because of something inside him, not because he saw or felt what the woman had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having sensed” or “having felt inside”

the power having gone out from him

Quote: τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt the power going out from him to heal her. However, this does not mean that Jesus no longer had that power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the power from him effecting somebody else” or “the power from him healing someone”

the power having gone out from him

Quote: τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that something powerful had happened because of him” or “that how powerful he was had accomplished something”

Mark 5:31

You see the crowd pressing around you

Quote: βλέπεις τὸν ὄχλον συνθλίβοντά σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

By saying this, the disciples were implying that anyone could have touched Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You see the crowd pressing around you, so any one of them might have touched you”

and you say, ‘Who touched me

Quote: καὶ λέγεις, τίς μου ἥψατο? (1)

Here, the disciples could be: (1) making a statement that quotes Jesus’ question. Alternate translation: “and you are asking, ‘Who touched me?’” (2) asking a rhetorical question that implies that Jesus’ question is unreasonable. Alternate translation: “so why do you say, ‘Who touched me?’”

and

Quote: καὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces what Jesus asked in contrast to the situation that he was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but” or “yet”

you say, ‘Who touched me

Quote: λέγεις, τίς μου ἥψατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you ask who touched you.”

you say

Quote: λέγεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Here the disciples repeat what Jesus said to show that they think this is an unreasonable or silly question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you still say” or “for some reason you say”

Mark 5:32

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces what Jesus did in contrast to what the disciples suggested he do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “Despite that,”

having done this

Quote: τοῦτο ποιήσασαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun this refers to touching Jesus’ clothing. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to this action more directly. Alternate translation: “having touched his robe” or “having done the touching”

Mark 5:33

having become afraid and trembling, having known what had happened to her, came

Quote: φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα, εἰδυῖα ὃ γέγονεν αὐτῇ, ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the phrase having known what had happened to her gives a reason for why the woman behaved as she did. It could most specifically give the reason for why: (1) she came to Jesus. Alternate translation: “having become afraid and trembling, came because she knew what had happened to her” (2) she was afraid and trembling. Alternate translation: “having become afraid and trembling because she knew what had happened to her, came”

having become afraid and trembling

Quote: φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with and. The word trembling tells how the woman physically experienced being afraid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “trembling with fear” or “trembling fearfully”

came

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went”

fell down before him

Quote: προσέπεσεν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In the Jesus’ culture, falling down before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what falling down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated herself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”

told him the whole truth

Quote: εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “truthfully told him everything”

the whole truth

Quote: πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the woman told the whole truth about what she had done and what happened to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the whole truth about what she had done” or “the whole truth about the events that had just occurred”

Mark 5:34

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

Daughter

Quote: θυγάτηρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus calls the woman Daughter to indicate that he cares for her. The word also implies that the woman was younger than Jesus. The woman was not actually Jesus’ daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that an older person would use to show that they care for a younger person. Alternate translation: “My friend” or “Dear woman”

your faith has saved you

Quote: ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you believed, and that has caused you to be saved”

your faith has saved you

Quote: ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Jesus speaks of the woman’s faith as if it had actively saved her. He means that her faith was the necessary condition for the healing that she received from God. Alternate translation: “because of your faith, you have been saved”

Depart in peace

Quote: ὕπαγε εἰς εἰρήνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

This is a way of saying goodbye and giving a blessing at the same time. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “As you go, do not worry anymore,”

in peace

Quote: εἰς εἰρήνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “peacefully”

be healed from your affliction

Quote: ἴσθι ὑγιὴς ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγός σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no longer have your affliction” or “be healthy, without your affliction”

from your affliction

Quote: ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγός σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of affliction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how you were afflicted”

Mark 5:35

He still speaking

Quote: ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus was still saying what Mark recorded in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He still saying those things” or “He still speaking to the woman”

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go”

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to people who were at Jairus’ house. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “people come”

from the synagogue ruler

Quote: ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the synagogue ruler represents the house of the synagogue ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the synagogue ruler’s home”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

Why trouble the teacher further

Quote: τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The people from Jairus’ house are using the question form to suggest how Jairus should behave. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is no need to bother the teacher further.” or “It is useless to bother the teacher further!”

Why trouble the teacher further

Quote: τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This question implies that Jesus will not be able to do anything to help, since the girl is dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Since there is nothing more that Jesus can do for you, why make him come to your house”

Mark 5:36

having overheard

Quote: παρακούσας (1)

Here, the word translated having overheard could mean that Jesus: (1) listened in on the conversation between the messengers and Jairus. Alternate translation: “having listened in on” (2) ignored what the messengers told Jairus. Alternate translation: “having ignored” or “having disregarded”

the word being spoken

Quote: τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents what the messengers said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they spoke” or “the news they brought”

being spoken

Quote: λαλούμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who came from Jairus’ house. Alternate translation: “that those people spoke”

believe

Quote: πίστευε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that Jairus, the synagogue ruler, should believe in Jesus, specifically that Jesus can help his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “believe in me” or “believe that I can save your daughter”

Mark 5:37

he did not allow anyone to accompany him except Peter and James and John the brother of James

Quote: οὐκ ἀφῆκεν οὐδένα μετ’ αὐτοῦ συνακολουθῆσαι, εἰ μὴ τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he allowed only Peter and James and John the brother of James to accompany him”

him

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jairus, the synagogue ruler, went with Jesus as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “him and the synagogue ruler” or “him and Jairus”

the brother of James

Quote: τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

Mark never says whether James or John was older, but he mentions James first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that John was younger. See how you expressed the idea in 1:19. Alternate translation: “the younger brother of James”

Mark 5:38

he comes

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Peter, James, John, and Jairus were traveling with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they come” or “Jesus, Jairus, and the three disciples come”

he comes

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “he goes”

a commotion and weeping and much wailing

Quote: θόρυβον, καὶ κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with and. The phrase weeping and much wailing explains what actions created the commotion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “a commotion, including weeping and much wailing” or “a commotion caused by weeping and much wailing”

weeping and much wailing

Quote: κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms weeping and much wailing mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “very much mourning” or “a great deal of weeping”

Mark 5:39

Why are you being disturbed and weeping? The child did not die but is sleeping

Quote: τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “The child did not die but is sleeping. So, why are you being disturbed and weeping?”

Why are you being disturbed and weeping

Quote: τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were at the house. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Stop being disturbed and weeping.” or “This is not a time to be disturbed and weeping!”

are you being disturbed

Quote: θορυβεῖσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are you making a commotion” or “are you being noisy”

are you being disturbed

Quote: θορυβεῖσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to many people in the house, the word you is plural.

The child

Quote: τὸ παιδίον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word child refers to a very young woman. Mark clarifies in 5:42 that she was about 12 years old. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to a girl who is about this age. Alternate translation: “The young girl”

Mark 5:40

the ones with him

Quote: τοὺς μετ’ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the three disciples (Peter, James, and John) whom Jesus took with him (see 5:37). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the three disciples”

Mark 5:41

Talitha, koum!” which is translated: “Little girl, I say to you, arise

Quote: ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ! ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον τὸ κοράσιον, σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε! (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The phrase Talitha, koum is an Aramaic phrase. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he explained what it meant: Little girl, I say to you, arise. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “‘Talitha, koum!’ which is Aramaic for, ‘Little girl, I say to you, arise.’”

which is translated

Quote: ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which we translate as,”

Mark 5:42

And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking (for she was 12 years), and they were immediately astonished with great amazement

Quote: καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα & καὶ ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

In this verse, Mark introduces some extra information about the little girl: she was 12 years old. Consider where you might include this information and how you might introduce it. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl, who was 12 years, rose up and was walking, and they were immediately astonished with great amazement” or “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking, and they were immediately astonished with great amazement. Now the little girl was 12 years.”

rose up

Quote: ἀνέστη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase rose up indicates both that the girl came back to life and that she stood up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came back to life and got up”

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word for introduces an explanation that indicates that the little girl was old enough to walk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave for untranslated. Alternate translation: “she was able to walk because” or “as a matter of act,”

she was 12 years

Quote: ἦν & ἐτῶν δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Mark means that the little girl was 12 years old. Use whatever form your language commonly uses to indicate how old someone is. Alternate translation: “she had lived 12 years” or “she was 12 years of age”

they were immediately astonished

Quote: ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they immediately marveled”

they were immediately astonished with great amazement

Quote: ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase astonished with great amazement means that they were extremely astonished. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were immediately extremely astonished” or “they were immediately totally amazed”

with great amazement

Quote: ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of amazement, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and greatly amazed”

Mark 5:43

them much that no one might know this

Quote: αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἵνα μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them much, ‘No one must know about this’”

no one might know this

Quote: μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο (1)

Alternate translation: “they should let no one know about this”

he said that something should be given to her to eat

Quote: εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said, ‘Something should be given to her to eat’”

that something should be given to her

Quote: δοθῆναι αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that would be the girl’s parents. Alternate translation: “her parents should give her something”

Mark 6

Mark 6 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus teaches and performs miracles (3:7–6:6)
   • Jesus teaches in his hometown (6:1–6)
2. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)
   • Jesus sends out the Twelve (6:7–13)
   • Herod hears about Jesus (6:14–16)
   • Flashback: Herod executes John the Baptist (6:17–29)
   • Jesus feeds 5,000 men (6:30–44)
   • Jesus walks on water (6:45–52)
   • Jesus heals people in the region of Gennesaret (6:53–56)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Jesus’ instructions on how to travel

Jesus instructs the disciples not to bring money, food, or extra clothing with them when they travel and preach the good news. Instead, he wants the disciples to rely on the hospitality of people they visit. Make sure that your translation indicates that the disciples should not pack money, food, or extra clothing because they will be staying with people who welcome and provide for them.

Herod and Herodias

The man named “King Herod” (6:14) ruled over the area to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee, which is where Jesus spent much of his ministry. Herodias was married to Herod’s brother Philip, and the two of them had a daughter. However, Herodias divorced Philip and married Herod, who had also divorced his previous wife. Since the Jewish law condemned anyone who married his brother’s wife while his brother was still alive (see Leviticus 20:21), John the Baptist rebuked Herod for doing this. It was in response to this rebuke that Herod had John the Baptist put in prison and eventually executed. Make sure that your translation accurately refers to the relationships between Herod, Herodias, and Herodias’ daughter.

The miracle of multiplying food

In 6:30–44, Mark tells a story in which Jesus provides 5,000 men with food. They were in a place where no people lived, and all the food that Jesus and his disciples had were five loaves of bread and two fish. Despite that, Jesus used the five loaves of bread and the two fish to feed everyone who was there. Mark does not tell us exactly how Jesus did this, but he does say that there were more leftovers than what they started with. Your translation should not explain how Jesus multiplied the food, but it should be clear that he did a miracle.

The miracle of walking on water

In 6:45–52, Mark tells a story in which Jesus walks on top of the Sea of Galilee, even though there was a storm. When Jesus climbs into the boat that the disciples were in, the storm miraculously stops. Your translation should not explain exactly how Jesus walked on the water, but it should be clear that Jesus walking on the water and the storm stopping were both miracles.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

The flashback to John’s death

In this chapter, Mark includes a story that happened before the stories that appear before and after it in his narrative. Previously, Mark narrates how Jesus sent out the Twelve (6:7–13). Then, he describes how people, and especially Herod Antipas, respond to Jesus (see 6:14–16). Then, to explain how Herod responded to Jesus, Mark includes a story that happened earlier. This type of storytelling is called a flashback. Here, the flashback tells about how John the Baptist died (see 6:17–29). In 6:30, Mark returns to the main narrative and tells what happened after the events recorded in 6:7–13. Make sure that you use a form that shows your readers that 6:17–29 is a flashback that describes something that happened previously, and 6:30 continues with the main narrative. (See: Background Information)

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to his disciples. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, and 50. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 6:1

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,” or “Then”

he went out … comes

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν & ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went or “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “he came out … goes”

from there

Quote: ἐκεῖθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word there refers to the house of Jairus, the synagogue ruler. His house was in the town of Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from Jairus’ house” or “from Capernaum”

his hometown

Quote: τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase his hometown refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his hometown, Nazareth”

Mark 6:2

the many ones hearing him were astonished, saying

Quote: οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus and what he said and did. Alternate translation: “he astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying” or “what he said astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying”

the many ones hearing him

Quote: οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase translated the many ones hearing him could refer to: (1) the many people who were hearing him. In this case, all of the many people were astonished. Alternate translation: “all the many people hearing him” (2) many of the people who were hearing him. In this case, not all of the people were astonished. Alternate translation: “many of the ones hearing him”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

From where to this one {are} these things, and what {is} the wisdom that has been given to this one, and such miracles happening by his hands

Quote: πόθεν τούτῳ ταῦτα, καὶ τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τοιαῦται διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ γινόμεναι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The people in Jesus’ hometown are using the question form to express their surprise that Jesus has wisdom and can do miracles. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We are surprised to see this one doing these things, and we are surprised that this one has been given the wisdom and such miracles happening by his hands.” or “We have no idea where these things that this one does are from, and we do not know what the wisdom that has been given to this one is, and such miracles happening by his hands!”

From where to this one {are} these things

Quote: πόθεν τούτῳ ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase From where to this one {are} these things asks about the source from which this one, Jesus, was able to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What is the source of these things for this one” or “How is this one able to do these things”

what {is} the wisdom that has been given to this one, and such miracles

Quote: τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τοιαῦται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wisdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how is he as wise as he has been enabled to be, and what are these miracles”

that has been given to this one

Quote: ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that someone has given to this one”

by his hands

Quote: διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

These people are using hands to represent Jesus acting powerfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by him” or “through his actions”

Mark 6:3

Is this not the carpenter, the son of Mary and a brother of James and Joses and Judas and Simon? And are his sisters not here with us

Quote: οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The people are using the question form to show that they know Jesus and his family. They mean that Jesus is just an ordinary person. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “He is only a carpenter, the son of Mary and a brother of James, Joseph, Judas, and Simon. His sisters are here with us.” or “He is only a carpenter! He is the son of Mary a brother of James and Joseph and Judas and Simon! His sisters are right here with us!”

the carpenter

Quote: ὁ τέκτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word carpenter refers to someone who builds things with wood. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of worker, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the man who builds with wood” or “the construction worker”

a brother

Quote: ἀδελφὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

Jesus was the older brother of these men. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, Jesus was actually their half-brother. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “older brother,” you could use it here.

Joses … Judas … Simon

Quote: Ἰωσῆτος & Ἰούδα & Σίμωνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Joses, Judas, and Simon are the names of men.

his sisters

Quote: αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

These were Jesus' younger sisters. They were daughteres of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-sisters. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger sister,” you could use it here.

they were being caused to stumble on him

Quote: ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Mark speaks as if Jesus were a lump or rock that the people in Jesus’ hometown were stumbling on. He means that these people were offended by him and rejected him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were offended by him” or “they did not listen to him”

they were being caused to stumble on him

Quote: ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they were stumbling on him”

Mark 6:4

A prophet is not without honor, except

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “A prophet is only without honor”

is not without honor

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν & ἄτιμος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative preposition without. Alternate translation: “has honor” or “is always honored”

without honor

Quote: ἄτιμος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of honor, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonored” or “treated dishonorably”

in his hometown and among his relatives and in his house

Quote: ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

Here Jesus uses three terms that refer to people who know the prophet well. The list starts with the broadest category (hometown) and ends with the most specific category (his house). If you have three terms that refer to different groups of people who know a person, you could use them here. Alternatively, if it would be clearer for your readers, you could use one or two terms. Alternate translation: “except among his relatives” or “in his hometown and among his family”

in his house

Quote: ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus uses the phrase in his house to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “among his father, mother, or siblings”

Mark 6:5

he was not able to do any miracle there, except, having laid his hands on a few sick people, he healed {them

Quote: οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἐκεῖ ποιῆσαι οὐδεμίαν δύναμιν, εἰ μὴ ὀλίγοις ἀρρώστοις, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας, ἐθεράπευσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only miracles he was able to do there were healing some sick people, having laid his hands on them”

he was not able to do any miracle there

Quote: οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἐκεῖ ποιῆσαι οὐδεμίαν δύναμιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated not and any are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “he was able to do not even one miracle there”

Mark 6:6-7

And he was amazed because of their unbelief. … he was going around the villages in a circle teaching … And he calls the Twelve and began to send them out two by two, and he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits

Quote: καὶ ἐθαύμασεν διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν. καὶ περιῆγεν τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ διδάσκων & καὶ προσκαλεῖται τοὺς δώδεκα, καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν δύο δύο, καὶ ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here, the clause he was going around the villages teaching could be: (1) the end of the story about Jesus visiting his hometown. Alternate translation: “And he was amazed because of their unbelief, and he was going around the villages in a circle teaching. And he calls the Twelve and began to send them out two by two, and he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits” (2) the beginning of the story about how Jesus sent out the twelve disciples. Alternate translation: “And he was amazed because of their unbelief. And he was going around the villages in a circle teaching, and he calls the Twelve and began to send them out two by two, and he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits”

Mark 6:6

he was amazed because of their unbelief

Quote: ἐθαύμασεν διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was their unbelief. Alternate translation: “their unbelief amazed him”

because of their unbelief

Quote: διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of unbelief, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they did not believe”

the villages

Quote: τὰς κώμας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the villages in a specific area. He probably means the area near Nazareth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these villages are in a specific region. Alternate translation: “the villages of that region”

the villages in a circle

Quote: τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase in a circle indicates that Jesus went from village to village in the general pattern of a circle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the villages in a circular pattern” or “around the villages, one by one,”

Mark 6:7

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

began to send them out

Quote: ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase began to send them out indicates that Jesus prepared them for when he would send them out. The Twelve do not actually leave on their mission until 5:12. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “prepared to send them out” or “began to get them ready to send them out”

two by two

Quote: δύο δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase two by two means that Jesus sent out the Twelve in six groups with two disciples in each group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in pairs” or “in sets of two”

he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits

Quote: ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he was empowering them to control the unclean spirits”

Mark 6:8-9

and he commanded them that they should take nothing for the road except only a staff—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt … but having put on sandals, and, “You may not wear two tunics

Quote: καὶ παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον, μὴ ἄρτον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ εἰς τὴν ζώνην χαλκόν & ἀλλὰ ὑποδεδεμένους σανδάλια, καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 6:8 and 6:9 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to put all the negative and positive commands together. Alternate translation: “and he commanded them that they should take nothing for the road—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt—and, ‘You may not wear two tunics.’ However, he allowed them to take a staff and to put on sandals.”

them that they should take nothing for the road except only a staff—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt … but having put on sandals, and, “You may not wear two tunics

Quote: αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον, μὴ ἄρτον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ εἰς τὴν ζώνην χαλκόν & ἀλλὰ ὑποδεδεμένους σανδάλια, καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation for all these commands. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Take nothing for the road except only a staff—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt—but having put on sandals, and you may not wear two tunics.’”

Mark 6:8

they should take nothing for the road except only a staff

Quote: μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only thing they should take for the road was a staff”

the road

Quote: ὁδὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, road represents a journey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the journey”

no bread

Quote: μὴ ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is using bread to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nothing to eat”

bag

Quote: πήραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term bag means something a traveler would use to carry things that were needed on a journey. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “knapsack”

in the belt

Quote: εἰς τὴν ζώνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In Jesus’ culture, people would often wrap their money up in long strips of cloth and then tie them around their waists as belts. This was a way to keep the money safe while the people were traveling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in their money bag” or “to have with you as you travel”

the belt

Quote: τὴν ζώνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The word belt represents belts in general, not one particular belt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their belts”

Mark 6:9

and, “You may not wear two tunics

Quote: καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

If you preserved the indirect quotation in the previous clauses, it may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here also. Alternate translation: “and not wearing two tunics”

two tunics

Quote: δύο χιτῶνας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that they should bring only one tunic instead of two. In other words, they should not bring an extra one in case they needed it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second tunic” or “a spare tunic”

Mark 6:10

you enter into a house

Quote: εἰσέλθητε εἰς οἰκίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that they enter this house as a guest who has been invited to stay there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you enter into a house as a guest” or “you are invited to stay at a house”

from there

Quote: ἐκεῖθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word there refers to the city or village that the house is in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from that city or village”

Mark 6:11

whatever place does not receive

Quote: ὃς ἂν τόπος μὴ δέξηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, place represents represents the people who live in that place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when the people in any place do not receive”

going out

Quote: ἐκπορευόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “coming out”

shake off the dust that {is} under your feet

Quote: ἐκτινάξατε τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

This action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a house or city to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider referring to it here, or you could explain the meaning of the action. Alternate translation: “wash the dirt of that place off your hands” or “shake off the dust that is under your feet to sever your relationship with that place and”

for a testimony against them

Quote: εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the testimony indicates that these people are in danger of being punished by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for a testimony that they will be punished”

for a testimony

Quote: εἰς μαρτύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimony, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to testify”

for a testimony against them

Quote: εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Most ancient manuscripts end the verse with the words for a testimony against them. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts include another sentence after these words: “Truly I say to you, it will be more tolerable for the land of Sodom and Gomorrah in the day of judgment than for that city.” This sentence was probably added from Matthew 10:15. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 6:12

having gone out

Quote: ἐξελθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come out”

they proclaimed that they should repent

Quote: ἐκήρυξαν ἵνα μετανοῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they proclaimed, ‘You should repent’”

they should repent

Quote: μετανοῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “everyone should repent” or “men and women should repent”

Mark 6:13

anointing many sick {people} with oil

Quote: ἤλειφον ἐλαίῳ πολλοὺς ἀρρώστους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, anointing people with oil was both a simple medical treatment and also a way to ask God to show favor to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what anointing people with oil means. Alternate translation: “anointing many sick people with oil to help them” or “anointing many sick people with oil to show God’s blessing”

Mark 6:14

And King Herod heard

Quote: καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces King Herod as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Now the ruler over that area was King Herod. And he heard about Jesus”

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” or “Sometime later,”

King Herod heard, for his name became known

Quote: ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης, φανερὸν γὰρ ἐγένετο τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because his name became known, King Herod heard about him”

his name

Quote: τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents the person or news about that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he” or “stories about him”

they were saying,John the Baptist has been raised from the dead, and because of this the powers work in him

Quote: ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that John the Baptist had been raised from the dead, and because of this the powers worked in him”

they were saying

Quote: ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “many were saying” or “people were saying”

they were saying

Quote: ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read they were saying. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “he was saying.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

John the Baptist has been raised from the dead

Quote: Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

These people are implying that Jesus is actually John the Baptist, who has been raised from the dead and now goes by the name Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This man Jesus is actually John the Baptist raised from the dead” or “John the Baptist has been raised from the dead and is now called Jesus”

John the Baptist has been raised

Quote: Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word raised refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist has been restored to life”

John the Baptist has been raised

Quote: Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, these people could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God has raised John the Baptist” (2) John himself did it. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist has risen”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

These people are using the adjective dead as a noun in order to refer to all people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people” or “from the corpses”

because of this

Quote: διὰ τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the phrase because of this introduces the result of what these people think about John being raised from the dead. They think that Jesus has powers because he has already been raised from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he has been raised,”

the powers work in him

Quote: ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here these people speak as if the powers were people that could work in Jesus. They mean that Jesus is powerful and can do powerful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has his powers” or “he is very powerful”

Mark 6:15

But others were saying, “He is Elijah.” But others were saying, “A prophet, like one of the prophets

Quote: ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν; ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι προφήτης, ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “But others were saying that he was Elijah. But others were saying that he was a prophet, like one of the prophets”

A prophet

Quote: προφήτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

These people are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a prophet”

one of the prophets

Quote: εἷς τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here these people are referring to the famous prophets who lived many years earlier. There are many stories in the Old Testament about the amazing things these prophets did and said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these specific prophets more explicitly. Alternate translation: “one of the famous prophets from the Scriptures” or “one of the ancient prophets”

Mark 6:16

The one} whom I beheaded, John, this one has been raised

Quote: ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα, Ἰωάννην οὗτος ἠγέρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here, the phrase this one refers directly back to {The one} whom I beheaded, John. Herod expresses the idea in this way to introduce the person he is talking about and then explain what he thinks has happened to that person. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the phrase this one would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “The one whom I beheaded, John, has been raised”

The one} whom I beheaded, John, this one has been raised

Quote: ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα, Ἰωάννην οὗτος ἠγέρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Herod is implying that Jesus is actually John, who has been raised and now goes by the name Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This man Jesus is actually the one whom I beheaded, John, who has been raised” or “The one whom I beheaded, John, this one has been raised and is now called Jesus”

I beheaded

Quote: ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Herod implies that he had his soldiers behead John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “my soldiers beheaded” or “I had my soldiers behead”

this one has been raised

Quote: οὗτος ἠγέρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you expressed the similar phrase in 6:14. Alternate translation: “has been restored to life”

this one has been raised

Quote: οὗτος ἠγέρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Herod could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God has raised this one” (2) John himself did it. Alternate translation: “this one has risen”

Mark 6:17-18

For Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison because of Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her … For John was saying to Herod, “It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother

Quote: αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ διὰ Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν & ἔλεγεν γὰρ ὁ Ἰωάννης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 6:17 and 6:18 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reasons why Herod seized John and bound him in prison before stating that he did those things. Alternate translation: “For Herod had married Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip. Then, John was saying to Herod, ‘It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother.’ So, because of Herodias, Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison.”

Mark 6:17

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background

Here, the word For introduces background information that tells about how John died. This background information continues in 6:18–29. In your translation, present this information in a way that makes it clear that this is background information, not the next event in the story. Alternate translation: “Now sometime earlier,” or “By this time, John had already died. Here is what happened:”

For Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison because of Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her

Quote: αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ διὰ Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these elements, since the second half of the verse gives reasons for the result that the first half of the verse describes. Alternate translation: “Herod married Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip. Because of her, Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison”

Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison

Quote: αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Herod sent his soldiers to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Herod himself, having sent his soldiers, had them seize John and bind him in prison”

Herod himself

Quote: αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Mark uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that Herod was the one did these things. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “it was Herod who” or “indeed Herod”

Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her

Quote: Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces Herodias as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a woman named Herodias, who was the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her”

the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her

Quote: τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Matthew implies that Herod married Herodias after she divorced Philip, Herod’s brother. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whom he married after she divorced his brother Philip” or “who had been the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her after she divorced Philip”

of his brother Philip

Quote: Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Philip is the name of a man. This is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples.

his brother

Quote: τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

It is not certain whether Philip was older or younger than Herod, but it is slightly more likely that he was older. So, if you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that Philip was older. Alternate translation: “his older brother”

Mark 6:18

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why Herod put John in prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “He did that because”

to Herod, “It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother

Quote: τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Herod that it was not lawful for him to have the wife of his brother”

for you … your

Quote: σοι & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because John is speaking to Herod, the words you and your are singular.

of your brother

Quote: ἀδελφοῦ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship

See how you translated brother in 6:17. Alternate translation: “of your older brother”

Mark 6:19-20

But Herodias was angry with him and was wanting to kill him, and she was not able … for Herod was fearing John, knowing him {to be} a righteous and holy man, and he was keeping him safe, and having heard him, he was much perplexed,and he was listening to him gladly

Quote: ἡ δὲ Ἡρῳδιὰς ἐνεῖχεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο & ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης ἐφοβεῖτο τὸν Ἰωάννην, εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον, καὶ συνετήρει αὐτόν; καὶ ἀκούσας αὐτοῦ, πολλὰ ἠπόρει, καὶ ἡδέως αὐτοῦ ἤκουεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 6:19 and 6:20 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reasons why Herodias was not able to kill John before stating that she was not able to kill him. Alternate translation: “But Herodias was angry with him and was wanting to kill him. But Herod was fearing John, knowing him {to be} a righteous and holy man, and he was keeping him safe, and having heard him, he was much perplexed, yet he was listening to him gladly. So, Herodias was not able to kill him”

Mark 6:19

was wanting to kill him

Quote: ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here Mark implies that Herodias wanted to send someone to kill John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “was wanting to have him killed” or “was wanting to have Herod’s soldiers kill him”

and

Quote: καὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces Herodias could actually do in contrast with what she wanted to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”

she was not able

Quote: οὐκ ἠδύνατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “she was not able to kill him”

Mark 6:20

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why Herodias was not able to kill John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “which was because” or “since”

he was keeping him safe

Quote: συνετήρει αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Herod kept John safe while he was in jail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he was keeping him safe in prison”

he was much perplexed

Quote: πολλὰ ἠπόρει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read he was much perplexed. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “he was doing many things.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

he was much perplexed

Quote: πολλὰ ἠπόρει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what John said. Alternate translation: “what John said perplexed him much”

and

Quote: καὶ (4)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces how Herod listened to John in contrast with how he was perplexed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “yet”

Mark 6:21

an opportune day having come

Quote: γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that it was an opportune day for Herodias to convince Herod to have John executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a good opportunity for Herodias to kill John having come” or “a day having come when it was a good time for Herodias to have Herod execute John”

made a dinner

Quote: δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Herod had his servants make a dinner. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had his servants make a dinner”

for his birthday

Quote: τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In some cultures, people celebrate a birthday, the day that someone was born. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of celebration, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “for his birthday celebration” or “for celebrations on the anniversary of his birth”

for his great ones

Quote: τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase his great ones refers to the important people in Herod’s court. They were probably high-ranking officials who served under Herod. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his high-ranking courtiers” or “the important people in his court”

for the first of Galilee

Quote: τοῖς πρώτοις τῆς Γαλιλαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Mark refers to important or respected people as if they were first. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the respected of Galilee” or “the significant ones of Galilee”

for the first

Quote: τοῖς πρώτοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective first as a noun to mean first people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the first people” or “for the people who were first”

Mark 6:22

and his daughter, of Herodias,having entered and having danced and having pleased Herod and the ones reclining to eat with {him}, the king

Quote: καὶ εἰσελθούσης τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος, καὶ ὀρχησαμένης καὶ ἀρεσάσης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ καὶ τοῖς συνανακειμένοις & ὁ βασιλεὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces Herod’s daughter as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “a young woman entered. She was his daughter, of Herodias. She danced and pleased Herod and the ones reclining to eat with him, so the king”

his daughter, of Herodias

Quote: τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read his daughter, of Herodias. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the daughter of Herodias herself.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

his daughter, of Herodias

Quote: τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase translated his daughter, of Herodias could indicate that: (1) the young woman, who is not named, was the daughter of Herodias and so also Herod’s stepdaughter. Alternate translation: “the daughter of Herodias, Herod’s stepdaughter” (2) the young woman, named Herodias, was the daughter of Herod. She had the same name as the woman Herod had married. Alternate translation: “Herod’s daughter Herodias”

the ones reclining to eat with {him

Quote: τοῖς συνανακειμένοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Herod’s culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, at a table when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “the ones sitting down to eat with him” or “the ones eating with him”

said to the girl, “Ask me whatever you desire, and I will give {it} to you

Quote: εἶπεν & τῷ κορασίῳ, αἴτησόν με ὃ ἐὰν θέλῃς, καὶ δώσω σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “told the girl that she should him whatever she desired, and he would give it to her”

to the girl

Quote: τῷ κορασίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word girl refers to a woman who has reached puberty but who is still young, probably between 12 and 20 years old. Use a word in your language that refers generally to a young woman who has reached puberty. Alternate translation: “to the young lady”

Ask … you desire, … to you

Quote: αἴτησόν & θέλῃς & σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Herod is speaking to the girl, the command Ask and the word you throughout this verse are singular.

Mark 6:23

to her, “If you ask me, I will give {it} to you, up to half of my kingdom

Quote: αὐτῇ, ὅτι ἐάν με αἰτήσῃς, δώσω σοι, ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “her that if she asked him, he would give it to her, up to half of his kingdom”

you ask … to you

Quote: αἰτήσῃς & σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Herod is speaking to the girl, the word you is singular throughout this verse.

up to half of my kingdom

Quote: ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Herod says up to half of my kingdom here as an overstatement for emphasis. He means that he will definitely give the young woman what she asks for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Herod is making an overstatement, or you could express the idea more generally. Alternate translation: “even if it were up to half of my kingdom” or “no matter how valuable” or “even if it is very difficult to give”

Mark 6:24

having gone out

Quote: ἐξελθοῦσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come out”

she said to her mother, “What should I ask?” And she said, “The head of John the Baptist

Quote: εἶπεν τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς, τί αἰτήσωμαι? ἡ δὲ εἶπεν, τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “she asked her mother what she should ask. And her mother said that she should ask for the head of John the Baptist”

to her mother

Quote: τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that her mother is Herodias, Herod’s wife. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to Herodias, her mother”

The head of John the Baptist

Quote: τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The mother is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “You should ask for the head of John the Baptist”

The head of John the Baptist

Quote: τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the mother is implying that the daughter should ask King Herod to behead John the Baptist and then present his severed head to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “The head of John Baptist after he has been beheaded” or “The head of John the Baptist severed from his body”

Mark 6:25

with haste

Quote: μετὰ σπουδῆς (1)

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of haste, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “quickly” or “hurriedly”

saying

Quote: λέγουσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and she said”

I desire that you would give me at once the head of John the Baptist on a platter

Quote: θέλω ἵνα ἐξαυτῆς δῷς μοι ἐπὶ πίνακι τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the woman implies that she wants Herod to have John killed by having his head cut off and brought to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I desire that you would have one of your soldiers at once behead John the Baptist and then give me his head here on a platter”

you would give

Quote: δῷς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the girl is speaking to Herod, the word you is singular.

a platter

Quote: πίνακι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A platter is a large, flat serving dish. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of dish, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a tray” or “a large serving plate”

Mark 6:26

having become deeply grieved

Quote: περίλυπος γενόμενος (1)

Alternate translation: “feeling very sorry”

because of his oaths and the ones reclining to eat with him

Quote: διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark indicates two reasons why Herod kept his word. First, he had made oaths that he did not want to break. Second, he had promised in front of the ones reclining to eat with him, and it would be embarrassing and shameful to break his promise when everyone had heard it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these reasons more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he had used oaths and because the ones reclining to eat with him had heard what he promised”

the ones reclining to eat with him

Quote: τοὺς συνανακειμένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, at a table when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. See how you translated this phrase in 6:22. Alternate translation: “the ones sitting down to eat with him” or “the ones eating with him”

did not want to refuse her

Quote: οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἀθετῆσαι αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb refuse. Alternate translation: “had to allow it” or “was compelled to do what she asked”

Mark 6:27

having sent an executioner, commanded {him} to bring his head

Quote: ἀποστείλας & σπεκουλάτορα, ἐπέταξεν ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause describes what the king commanded before he sent the executioner. Alternate translation: “having commanded an executioner to bring his head, sent him off”

an executioner

Quote: σπεκουλάτορα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

An executioner is a soldier who executes people for his commander. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of soldier, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “one of his soldiers”

to bring his head

Quote: ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Herod commanded the executioner to cut off John’s head and then bring it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to behead John Baptist and then to bring his head” or “to bring the head of John the Baptist severed from his body”

Mark 6:28

a platter

Quote: πίνακι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word platter in 6:25. Alternate translation: “a tray” or “a large serving plate”

to the girl, … the girl

Quote: τῷ κορασίῳ & τὸ κοράσιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated girl in 6:22. Alternate translation: “to the young lady … the young lady”

Mark 6:29

came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that John’s disciples went to the jail where John had been imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came to the place where John had been imprisoned”

came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went”

Mark 6:30

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. This event continues the story about how Jesus sent the twelve apostles out to drive out demons and to preach (see 6:7–13). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Make sure that it is clear that Mark is continuing the story from earlier in the chapter. Alternate translation: “Now to return to the story,” or “Now”

are gathered together

Quote: συνάγονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gather together” or “assemble”

everything, as much as they did and as much as they taught

Quote: πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησαν καὶ ὅσα ἐδίδαξαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression everything, as much as they did and as much as they taught contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “as much as they did and taught”

Mark 6:31

And he says to them, “You yourselves, come by yourselves to a desolate place and rest a little while.” For the ones coming and the ones going were many, and they were not even having opportunity to eat

Quote: καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, δεῦτε ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ κατ’ ἰδίαν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, καὶ ἀναπαύσασθε ὀλίγον & ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες πολλοί, καὶ οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “And the ones coming and the ones going were many, and they were not even having opportunity to eat. Therefore, he says to them, ‘You yourselves, come by yourselves to a desolate place and rest a little while.’”

You yourselves

Quote: ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Jesus uses the word yourselves to emphasize that he wants the disciples to come with him. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “As for you”

the ones coming and the ones going

Quote: οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that many people were visiting the place where Jesus and the disciples were. Many people were visiting and many others were leaving all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the people visiting that place and then leaving” or “the people who were there”

they were not even having opportunity to eat

Quote: οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of opportunity, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they could not even find time to eat” or “they were so busy that they could not eat”

Mark 6:32

they went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “they came away”

the boat

Quote: τῷ πλοίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

Here, the phrase the boat could refer to: (1) a boat, without specifying which one. Alternate translation: “a certain boat” (2) the same boat that Jesus and his disciples used in 5:21. Alternate translation: “the same boat they had used earlier”

Mark 6:33

they saw them leaving, and many knew

Quote: εἶδον αὐτοὺς ὑπάγοντας, καὶ ἐπέγνωσαν πολλοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word many could go with: (1) just knew. Alternate translation: “people saw them leaving, and many people knew” (2) both saw and knew. Alternate translation: “many saw them leaving and knew”

they saw

Quote: εἶδον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “some saw” or “people who were there saw”

many

Quote: πολλοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many people”

knew

Quote: ἐπέγνωσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that they knew: (1) that Jesus and his disciples were the ones who were leaving. Alternate translation: “recognized them” (2) where Jesus and disciples were going. Alternate translation: “realized where they were going”

they ran there together on foot

Quote: πεζῇ & συνέδραμον ἐκεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression on foot contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “they ran there together”

from all the cities

Quote: ἀπὸ πασῶν τῶν πόλεων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Matthew refers to the cities near where Jesus and the disciples had been. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from all the cities in that region” or “from all the nearby cities”

Mark 6:34

having come out

Quote: ἐξελθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus came out of the boat in which he and the disciples were sailing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come out of the boat” or “having disembarked”

having come out

Quote: ἐξελθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone out”

he had compassion on them because they were like sheep not having a shepherd

Quote: ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὅτι ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because they were like sheep not having a shepherd, he had compassion on them”

he had compassion on

Quote: ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ’ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of compassion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he sympathized with”

because they were like sheep not having a shepherd

Quote: ὅτι ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Here Mark compares the people who were there to sheep who do not have a shepherd. Just as sheep without a shepherd have no one to lead and take care of them, so the people have no one to lead and take care of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of the simile more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because, like sheep without a shepherd, they did not know what to do or where to go”

Mark 6:35

the hour already having become much, … the hour {is} already much

Quote: ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης & ἤδη ὥρα πολλή (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

When Mark says that an hour is much, he means that it is a time later in the day, probably soon before sunset. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the late afternoon having already arrived … the late afternoon is already here” or “the evening having almost come … the evening is almost here”

having come

Quote: προσελθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

Mark 6:36

Send them away

Quote: ἀπόλυσον αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the command Send them away is singular.

Send them away

Quote: ἀπόλυσον αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you send them away”

the surrounding countryside and villages

Quote: τοὺς κύκλῳ ἀγροὺς καὶ κώμας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Here, Mark is referring to that whole region by naming its two primary parts, the countryside and the villages. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the whole surrounding area”

Mark 6:37

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

Having gone away, might we buy loaves of 200 denarii and give {them} to them to eat

Quote: ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The disciples are using the question form to show that Jesus’ command is absurd or impossible. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We cannot go away and buy loaves of 200 denarii and give them to them to eat.” or “We could not go away and buy enough loaves to give to them to eat even if we had 200 denarii!”

loaves of 200 denarii

Quote: δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the disciples are using the possessive form to describe loaves that are worth 200 denarii. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “loaves worth 200 denarii” or “loaves with 200 denarii”

of 200 denarii

Quote: δηναρίων διακοσίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney

The word denarii refers to silver coins, each equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “of 200 silver coins” or “of 200 days’ wages”

Mark 6:38

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples just implied about how impossible it would be for them to feed everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

loaves

Quote: ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word loaves refers to loaves of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bread, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”

Go. See

Quote: ὑπάγετε, ἴδετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus commands to the disciples to Go to where they kept their food and See how much they have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Check your supplies and note what you have” or “Go to where you keep your food and see what is there”

having known

Quote: γνόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they knew how many loaves of bread they had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having known how many loaves they had”

Five, and two fish

Quote: πέντε καὶ δύο ἰχθύας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We have five loaves, and we also have two fish”

Mark 6:39

he commanded them all to recline

Quote: ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς ἀνακλῖναι πάντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them could refer to: (1) all the people who were there. In this case, Jesus directly commanded the crowd to recline. Alternate translation: “he commanded the whole crowd to recline” (2) the disciples, who them told all the people who were there to recline. In this case, Jesus commands the disciples, who command the crowd. Alternate translation: “he commanded the disciples to have all the people recline”

them all to recline group by group on the green grass

Quote: αὐτοῖς ἀνακλῖναι πάντας, συμπόσια συμπόσια ἐπὶ τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them all, ‘Recline group by group on the green grass’”

to recline

Quote: ἀνακλῖναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “to sit down to eat” or “to get ready to eat”

group by group

Quote: συμπόσια συμπόσια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase group by group indicates that the people were supposed to sit down in many smaller groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in many smaller groups” or “in separate groups”

the green grass

Quote: τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Mark describes the grass as green because it was growing and healthy. If your readers would not be familiar with green grass, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the growing grass” or “the healthy grass”

Mark 6:40

they reclined

Quote: ἀνέπεσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated “recline” in 6:39. Alternate translation: “they sat down to eat” or “they got ready to eat”

group by group according to hundreds and according to fifties

Quote: πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ, κατὰ ἑκατὸν καὶ κατὰ πεντήκοντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase according to hundreds and according to fifties refers to the number of people in each of the groups. In other words, some groups had a hundred people in them, and other groups had fifty people in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in groups of 100 people and in groups of 50 people” or “group by group, some with 100 people and some with 50 people”

group by group

Quote: πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

See how you translated group by group in 6:39. Alternate translation: “in many smaller groups” or “in separate groups”

Mark 6:41

loaves … the loaves

Quote: ἄρτους & τοὺς ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated loaves in 6:38. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread … the large chunks of bread”

having looked up to heaven

Quote: ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, most people thought that heaven was up above the earth. Looking up towards heaven was a common posture for someone who was praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a common posture for prayer in your culture, or you could explain the meaning of this posture. Alternate translation: “having raised his arms in prayer” or “having looked up to heaven to pray”

he blessed

Quote: εὐλόγησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that Jesus blessed: (1) God for providing the food. Alternate translation: “he blessed God” or “he praised God” (2) the food. Alternate translation: “he blessed the food” or “he asked God to make the food holy”

broke the loaves into pieces

Quote: κατέκλασεν τοὺς ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus broke the loaves of bread in pieces so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “divided the loaves into servings” or “broke the loaves into smaller pieces”

he divided the two fish among all

Quote: τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἐμέρισεν πᾶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus divided the two fish as he had divided the loaves among everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the same way he divided the two fish among all” or “he broke the two fish and gave them to his disciples so that they might set them also before all”

among all

Quote: πᾶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the people who were there. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “among all of them”

Mark 6:42

they all ate

Quote: ἔφαγον πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they in the phrase they all ate refers to the crowds who were there. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the crowds all ate” or “all the groups of people ate”

and were satisfied

Quote: καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages. Alternative translation: “until they were full”

Mark 6:43

the broken pieces, the fillings of 12 baskets, and from the fish

Quote: κλάσματα δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰχθύων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that they filled the baskets with the leftovers from the meal, including broken pieces of bread and pieces from the fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the broken pieces of bread and parts of fish, the fillings of 12 baskets” or “the leftover pieces of bread and fish, the fillings of 12 baskets”

the fillings of 12 baskets

Quote: δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe fillings that consisted of baskets that were stuffed with broken pieces. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enough to fill 12 baskets” or “which filled up 12 baskets”

the fillings of 12 baskets

Quote: δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fillings, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “12 baskets full”

of 12 baskets

Quote: δώδεκα κοφίνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word baskets refers to large circular containers that store food or other items. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “of 12 boxes” or “of 12 containers”

Mark 6:44

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark uses the word And to introduce background information that helps the readers understand how amazing what Jesus did was. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for how many people were there,” or “In the end,”

the loaves

Quote: τοὺς ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated loaves in 6:38. Alternate translation: “the large chunks of bread”

the loaves

Quote: τοὺς ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is using loaves to represent all the food that they ate, including the bread and the fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the food” or “the loaves and the fish”

were 5,000 men

Quote: ἦσαν & πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark indicates that 5,000 men ate the food that Jesus provided. He does not state whether there were other people there. If possible, use a phrase that refers to 5,000 men without implying whether other people were there. If you must imply or state whether other people were there, you could: (1) indicate that there were women and children there who were not counted. Alternate translation: “were 5,000 men, and there were women and children there too” (2) indicate that only these men ate the food. Alternate translation: “were the 5,000 men who were there”

Mark 6:45

And immediately

Quote: καὶ εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And immediately introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”

to the other side

Quote: εἰς τὸ πέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the disciples are sailing to the other side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “across the sea to the opposite side”

Bethsaida

Quote: Βηθσαϊδάν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Bethsaida is the name of a town. It was located on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee.

Mark 6:46

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them could refer to: (1) the crowd that had eaten the bread and fish. Alternate translation: “to the crowd” (2) the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”

the mountain

Quote: τὸ ὄρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Mark does not clarify what mountain this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain”

Mark 6:47

evening having come

Quote: ὀψίας γενομένης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Mark indicated that it was late in the day earlier in the story (see 6:35). Here, he uses a similar phrase but implies that it was later on in the evening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes a time later than the time described in 6:35. Alternate translation: “when it was even later in the evening” or “further into the evening”

the boat

Quote: τὸ πλοῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the boat has the disciples in it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the boat with the disciples inside”

Mark 6:48

them being tormented as they rowed—for the wind was against them—and

Quote: αὐτοὺς βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν, ἦν γὰρ ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς; καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “that the wind was against them and so they were being tormented as they rowed,”

them being tormented

Quote: αὐτοὺς βασανιζομένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the wind. Alternate translation: “the wind tormenting them”

being tormented

Quote: βασανιζομένους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Mark refers to how hard the disciples were working to row the boat against the wind as if they were being tormented. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “working very hard” or “making almost no progress”

as they rowed

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

When people row a boat, they stick long, flat pieces of wood, called oars, into the water and push or pull so that the boat moves. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of making a boat move, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “as they pushed the boat along with oars” or “as they worked to move the boat”

the wind was against them

Quote: ἦν & ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Whenwind is against people in a boat, that means that it is blowing directly opposite to the direction in which the boat is traveling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the wind was opposite to the direction they were sailing” or “the wind was blowing directly against them”

about the fourth watch of the night

Quote: περὶ τετάρτην φυλακὴν τῆς νυκτὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the phrase about the fourth watch of the night refers to the period of time between 3:00 AM and 6:00 AM. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to this period of time. Alternate translation: “in the last part of the night” or “shortly before dawn”

he comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “he goes”

walking on the sea

Quote: περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus was miraculously walking on the surface of the sea. He did not sink into the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “walking on the surface of the sea” or “miraculously walking on top of the sea”

he was wishing to pass by them

Quote: ἤθελεν παρελθεῖν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the clause he was wishing to pass by them could indicate that: (1) Jesus intended to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he intended to pass them by” (2) it looked like Jesus was going to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he was about to pass by them” or “it looked like he was going to pass by them”

Mark 6:49-50

But they, having seen him walking on the sea, thought that he is a ghost, and they cried out … for they all saw him and were troubled. But immediately he spoke with them and says to them, “Take courage! It is I! Do not be afraid

Quote: οἱ, δὲ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπατοῦντα, ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάντασμά ἐστιν, καὶ ἀνέκραξαν & πάντες γὰρ αὐτὸν εἶδον, καὶ ἐταράχθησαν & ὁ δὲ εὐθὺς ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, θαρσεῖτε, ἐγώ εἰμι; μὴ φοβεῖσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 6:49 and 6:50 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to give all the reasons why the disciples cried out before stating that they cried out. Alternate translation: “But they, having seen him walking on the sea, thought that he is a ghost. In fact, they all saw him and were troubled. So, they cried out. But immediately he spoke with them and says to them, ‘Take courage! It is I! Do not be afraid!’”

Mark 6:49

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

walking on the sea

Quote: ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπατοῦντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated this phrase in 6:48. Alternate translation: “walking on the surface of the sea” or “miraculously walking on top of the sea”

thought that he is a ghost

Quote: ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάντασμά ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “thought, ‘He is a ghost,’”

a ghost

Quote: φάντασμά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word ghost refers to a spiritual or supernatural being that people see. In Jesus’ culture, when people saw a ghost, they usually assumed that something bad was going to happen. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of unusual experience, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “an apparition” or “some powerful and dangerous being”

Mark 6:50

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why the disciples cried out (see 6:49). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “because” or “which they did because”

were troubled

Quote: ἐταράχθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were very nervous” or “were very anxious”

spoke with them and says to them

Quote: ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression spoke with them and says to them contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “says to them” or “spoke to them”

Take courage

Quote: θαρσεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of courage, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous”

Mark 6:51

they were very amazed within themselves

Quote: λείαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression they were very amazed within themselves contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “they were very amazed”

they were very amazed

Quote: λείαν & ἐξίσταντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they marveled very much”

Mark 6:52

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an explanation about why the disciples reacted the way they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “They were so amazed because” or “They responded like that since”

they did not understand about the loaves

Quote: οὐ & συνῆκαν ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they did not understand what Jesus’ miracle with the loaves indicated about him. In other words, when Jesus fed many people with just five loaves, it meant that he was a very powerful, special person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what it meant when Jesus fed many people with the five loaves” or “they did not realize the significance of the miracle Jesus had performed with the loaves”

the loaves

Quote: τοῖς ἄρτοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated loaves in 6:38. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”

the loaves, but

Quote: τοῖς ἄρτοις ἀλλ’ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word but introduces what was true about the disciples (they had hard hearts) in contrast with what they should have done (understand about the loaves). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave but untranslated. Alternate translation: “the loaves; instead,”

their heart was having been hardened

Quote: ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Mark is speaking of the disciples’ heart as if it were having been hardened. He means that the disciples were stubborn and refused to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were being stubborn” or “they were unwilling to pay attention”

their heart was having been hardened

Quote: ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that it was the disciples themselves. Alternate translation: “their hearts had become hard” or “they had hardened their hearts”

their heart

Quote: αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one heart, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “their hearts”

Mark 6:53

having crossed over

Quote: διαπεράσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Mark implies that they crossed over the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having crossed over the lake”

they came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went”

Gennesaret

Quote: Γεννησαρὲτ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Gennesaret could refer to: (1) a region on the northwest side of the Sea of Galilee. Alternate translation: “the area called Gennesaret” (2) a small town on the northwest side of the Sea of Galilee. Alternate translation: “the village of Gennesaret”

anchored there

Quote: προσωρμίσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

When people anchor a boat, they fasten it securely to something solid so that it cannot float away. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of action, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “pulled the boat up on the shore” or “tied the boat to something on the shore” or “secured the boat there”

Mark 6:54

having come out

Quote: ἐξελθόντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone out”

Mark 6:55

they ran throughout … they began … they were hearing

Quote: περιέδραμον & ἤρξαντο & ἤκουον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they in the phrase they ran refers to the people who recognized Jesus. The pronoun they in the phrases they began and they were hearing refer to people who lived throughout that whole region. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people there ran throughout … those who lived in that region began … they were hearing”

their mats

Quote: τοῖς κραβάττοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word mats refers to portable beds that could also be used to transport a person. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bed, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. See how you translated this word in 2:4. Alternate translation: “their stretchers”

on their mats the ones having sickness

Quote: ἐπὶ τοῖς κραβάττοις τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun their refers to the ones having sickness. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the ones having sickness on their mats”

the ones having sickness

Quote: τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sickness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sick people”

where they were hearing that he is

Quote: ὅπου ἤκουον ὅτι ἐστίν (1)

Alternate translation: “wherever they were hearing that Jesus had gone”

they were hearing that he is

Quote: ἤκουον ὅτι ἐστίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were hearing, ‘He is there’”

Mark 6:56

into villages or into cities or into fields

Quote: εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς (1)

Alternate translation: “into little towns or into big towns or into rural areas”

they were placing

Quote: ἐτίθεσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “men and women were placing”

the marketplaces

Quote: ταῖς ἀγοραῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word marketplaces refers to large, open-air areas where people buy and sell goods. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of area, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the town squares” or “the parks”

they were begging … they might … touch

Quote: παρεκάλουν & ἅψωνται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they in the phrase they might touch refers to the ones being sick. The pronoun they in the phrase they were begging could refer to: (1) the ones being sick. Alternate translation: “these sick people were begging … they might touch” (2) the people who were placing the ones being sick in the marketplaces. Alternate translation: “the people who placed the sick people there were begging … the sick people might touch”

him so that they might even touch the edge of his garment, and

Quote: αὐτὸν ἵνα κἂν τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται; καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please let us even touch the edge of your garment.’ And”

they might even touch

Quote: κἂν & ἅψωνται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word even indicates that these people think that, to be healed, they do not need to do anything more than touch Jesus’ garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all they might do is touch” or “they could only touch”

as many as touched it were being healed

Quote: ὅσοι ἂν ἥψαντο αὐτοῦ ἐσῴζοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that was God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God was healing as many as touched it” or “Jesus was healing as many as touched it”

it

Quote: αὐτοῦ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the word translated it could: (1) refer to a thing, in this case the edge of Jesus’ garment. Alternate translation: “the edge of his garment” (2) refer to a person, in this case Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “him”

Mark 7

Mark 7 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)
   • Argument with the Pharisees and scribes about washing hands (7:1–13)
   • Jesus teaches about what defiles people (7:14–23)
   • Jesus meets a Canaanite woman (7:24–30)
   • Jesus heals a man who is deaf and can barely speak (7:31–37)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6–7, which is a quote from Isaiah 29:13.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The “tradition of the elders”

The “tradition of the elders” included interpretations of Moses’ law that Jewish religious leaders had developed and passed down to their disciples, and they to their disciples. These interpretations explained what specific laws meant and how to obey them. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for specific interpretations of the law that he disagreed with. In this chapter, Jesus and the Pharisees argue about washing hands, honoring parents, and giving gifts to God. When you translate the phrase “tradition of the elders,” use a form that refers to teachings that teachers pass down to their students. (See: tradition and elder, older, old)

Washing hands before eating

In 7:5, the scribes and Pharisees rebuke Jesus for failing to have his disciples wash their hands before eating. One of the traditions that the Pharisees followed was a requirement that people wash their hands before eating. They did this to make their hands ceremonially clean, not primarily to clean off dirt. Make sure that your translation indicates that Jesus and the Pharisees are debating about ceremonial or ritual washing, not washing off dirt.

The gift for God

In 7:10–13, Jesus rebukes the Pharisees for allowing people to promise to give something to God instead of using it to help their parents. Jesus is not saying that giving things to God is wrong. Instead, he is saying that honoring one’s parents is one of the most important commandments that God gave, and no tradition should prevent people from honoring their parents. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Things that go in and out of people

In 7:14–23, Jesus speaks about things that are outside people and that go into them, and he speaks about things that are inside people and come out of them. When he speaks about things that are outside people and go into them, he is referring more specifically to food and drink. He teaches that these things do not make people unclean. When he speaks about things that are inside people and go out of them, he is referring more specifically to people’s thoughts and desires that lead to actions. He teaches that these things do make people unclean. Since Jesus explains what he means when he refers to things going in and out of people, if possible preserve the movement and location language.

Feeding little dogs

In 7:27, Jesus tells the Canaanite woman that it is not right to give food that is meant for children to little dogs. In 7:28, the woman responds that little dogs eat the little bits of food that fall down from what the children are eating. The children represent Jews, and the little dogs represent non-Jews. The food represents things that Jesus does for people. What Jesus means is that he is supposed to do things for Jews first, before he does things for non-Jews. What the woman means is that what she is asking Jesus to do is unimportant enough that he can do it without taking away from what he does for Jews. If possible, do not directly express the meaning of what Jesus and the woman say about little dogs, but make sure that your translation can naturally imply this meaning.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 5, 18, 28, 32, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Verse 16

Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for 7:16. Some early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words: “If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear.” Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: Textual Variants)

Mark 7:1-2

And the Pharisees and some of the scribes, having come from Jerusalem, are being gathered to him … And having seen some of his disciples, that they eat loaves with defiled hands, that is, unwashed

Quote: καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων & καὶ ἰδόντες τινὰς τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ὅτι κοιναῖς χερσίν, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις, ἐσθίουσιν τοὺς ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here, verse 2 could: (1) begin a sentence that continues in verse 5, after being interrupted by explanatory information in verses 3–4. See the ULT. (2) end the sentence that began in verse 1. In this case, the explanatory information in verses 3–4 stands by itself, and a new sentence begins in verse 5. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to delete the dash at the end of verse 4 and start a new sentence at the beginning of verse 5. Alternate translation: “And the Pharisees and some of the scribes are being gathered to him, having come from Jerusalem and having seen some of his disciples, that they eat bread with defiled hands, that is, unwashed.” (3) be a sentence fragment that stands by itself, with the implication being that the Pharisees disapproved of what they saw. In this case, the explanatory information in verses 3–4 stands by itself, and a new sentence begins in verse 5. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to delete the dash at the end of verse 4 and start a new sentence at the beginning of verse 5. Alternate translation: “And the Pharisees and some of the scribes, having come from Jerusalem, are being gathered to him. And having seen some of his disciples, that they eat loaves with defiled hands, that is, unwashed, they disapproved of that.”

Mark 7:1

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”

the Pharisees and some of the scribes, having come from Jerusalem, are being gathered to him

Quote: συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that: (1) both the Pharisees and the scribes came from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “having come from Jerusalem, the Pharisees and some of the scribes are being gathered to him” (2) only the scribes came from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees and some of the scribes who came from Jerusalem are being gathered to him”

having come

Quote: ἐλθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

are being gathered

Quote: συνάγονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are gathering” or “are coming together”

Mark 7:2

having seen some of his disciples, that they eat

Quote: ἰδόντες τινὰς τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ὅτι & ἐσθίουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here, the phrase that they eat refers directly back to the phrase some of his disciples. Mark expresses the idea in this way to introduce whom the Pharisees and scribes saw and then explain what they saw them doing. If referring to who were seen and then referring back to them with the phrase that they eat would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “having seen some of his disciples eating”

they eat loaves

Quote: ἐσθίουσιν τοὺς ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The Pharisees and scribes are using loaves to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they eat their meals”

with defiled hands, that is, unwashed

Quote: κοιναῖς χερσίν, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark explains that defiled hands are hands that are unwashed. Consider how you might include an explanation like this. Alternate translation: “with unwashed hands, which are defiled” or “with defiled—that is to say, unwashed—hands”

Mark 7:3

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark introduces background information that will help readers understand why the Pharisees and scribes are interested in whether Jesus’ disciples wash their hands. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “that was important to them because” or “now you should know that”

the Pharisees and all the Jews

Quote: οἱ & Φαρισαῖοι καὶ πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark mentions the Pharisees separately because they follow this tradition particularly strictly. He does not mean that the Pharisees are not Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees and all the rest of the Jews” or “especially the Pharisees, but also all the Jews,”

all the Jews

Quote: πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark says all here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most of the Jews” or “very many Jews”

do not eat unless they would wash their hands with a fist

Quote: ἐὰν μὴ πυγμῇ νίψωνται τὰς χεῖρας οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only eat if they have washed their hands with a fist”

with a fist

Quote: πυγμῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the phrase with a fist refers to a specific way of washing one’s hands. It could refer to the position of the hands during washing, how much of the hands were washed, or how much water was used. Since scholars are not sure exactly what the phrase indicates, you could use a general term that indicates that this was a special washing for ceremonial or ritual purposes. Alternate translation: “ceremonially” or “in the proper way”

the tradition of the elders

Quote: τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the Pharisees and scribes are using the possessive form to describe a tradition that came from the elders. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the tradition given to us by the elders” or “the tradition handed down to us by the elders”

the tradition of the elders

Quote: τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tradition, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what the elders taught them”

of the elders

Quote: τῶν πρεσβυτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word elders refers to respected ancestors whose teaching is trusted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the ancestral teachers” or “of our respected forefathers”

Mark 7:4

from a marketplace, they do not eat unless they baptize

Quote: ἀπ’ ἀγορᾶς ἐὰν μὴ βαπτίσωνται οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be indicating that the Pharisees and other Jews: (1) do not eat anything unless they baptize themselves when they return home from the marketplace. Alternate translation: “returning from the marketplace, they do not eat unless they baptize themselves” (2) do not eat what they brought home from the marketplace unless they baptize it first. Alternate translation: “they do not eat anything from the marketplace unless they baptize it”

a marketplace

Quote: ἀγορᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated marketplace in 6:56. Alternate translation: “a town square” or “a park”

they do not eat unless they baptize

Quote: ἐὰν μὴ βαπτίσωνται οὐκ ἐσθίουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only eat if they have baptized”

there are many other things which they received to hold to

Quote: ἄλλα πολλά ἐστιν ἃ παρέλαβον κρατεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to many other traditions that the Pharisees and other Jews received from the elders and hold to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “there are many other traditions that they received from the elders and that they hold to”

of cups and pitchers and copper vessels

Quote: ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms cups, pitchers, and copper vessels all refer to containers that people would use for making, serving, and storing food. Mark is using the three terms together to refer to many different kinds of containers like these. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could refer to many different kinds of containers by using only one or two terms. Alternate translation: “of various dishes” or “of pots and pans”

pitchers

Quote: ξεστῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A pitcher is a container for holding liquids. This specific type of container could hold about half a liter, or about one pint. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “jugs”

copper vessels

Quote: χαλκίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word translated as copper vessels refers to any household container made from copper or copper alloys such as brass or bronze. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “metal serving dishes” or “bronze pots”

copper vessels

Quote: χαλκίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts do not include any other items after the copper vessels. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the phrase “and beds” after the words copper vessels. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 7:5

also the Pharisees and the scribes ask him

Quote: καὶ ἐπερωτῶσιν αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to express the relationship between this verse, the explanatory information in verses 3–4, and the statement in verse 2. See the note at the beginning of this chapter on verses 1–2.

Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat bread with defiled hands

Quote: διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ κοιναῖς χερσὶν ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The Pharisees and the scribes are using the question form to rebuke Jesus for what his disciples are doing. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Your disciples should walk according to the tradition of the elders, and they should not eat bread with unwashed hands.” or “We are shocked that your disciples do not walk according to the tradition of the elders, instead eating bread with unwashed hands!”

do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders

Quote: οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the Pharisees and the scribes speak of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do your disciples not behave according to the tradition of the elders” or “do your disciples not live according to the tradition of the elders”

your

Quote: σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the Pharisees and the scribes are talking to Jesus, the word your is singular.

the tradition of the elders

Quote: τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

See how you translated this phrase in 7:3. Alternate translation: “the tradition given to us by the ancestral teachers” or “what the respected forefathers taught us”

but

Quote: ἀλλὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word but introduces what the disciples actually did in contrast with what the Pharisees and the scribes thought that they should have done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave but untranslated. Alternate translation: “but instead”

they eat bread

Quote: ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The Pharisees and scribes are using bread to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they eat their meals”

Mark 7:6

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

well

Quote: καλῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word well indicates that what Isaiah prophesied accurately describes the scribes and the Pharisees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “accurately” or “truly”

Mark 7:6-7

As it is written, This people honors me with their lips, but their heart is far away from me … But they worship me in vain, teaching as doctrines commandments of men

Quote: ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ & μάτην δὲ σέβονταί με, διδάσκοντες διδασκαλίας ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “As it is written, God said that this people honors him with their lips, but their heart is far away from him. But they worship him in vain, teaching as doctrines commandments of men.”

Mark 7:6

As it is written

Quote: ὡς γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus introduces a quotation from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Isaiah 29:13. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a quotation from an important text, and you could include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “He wrote in the book of Isaiah” or “As he said”

This people

Quote: οὗτος ὁ λαὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase This people refers to the Israelites about whom Isaiah was speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “The Israelites honor” or “These Jewish people”

me … me

Quote: με & ἐμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, both uses of the word me refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to him more directly. Alternate translation: “me, their God, … me”

with their lips

Quote: τοῖς χείλεσίν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, lips represent someone speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with their speech” or “with their words”

their heart is far away from me

Quote: ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Isaiah speaks as if the Israelites’ heart were far away from God. He means that they do not think about God or want to obey him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if their hearts were far away from me” or “they do not want to serve me”

their heart is far away

Quote: ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one heart, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “their hearts are far away”

their heart

Quote: ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In the author’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “their mind” or “their thinking”

Mark 7:7

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next idea in the quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,”

teaching

Quote: διδάσκοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word teaching introduces a reason why their worship is in vain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “since they teach”

as doctrines commandments of men

Quote: διδασκαλίας ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of doctrines and commandments, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as authoritative what men have commanded”

commandments of men

Quote: ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Isaiah is using the possessive form to describe commandments that are given by men. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “things commanded by men”

of men

Quote: ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Isaiah is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of people”

Mark 7:8

Having left

Quote: ἀφέντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if the commandment of God were a place that the scribes and Pharisees could leave. He means that they have stopped obeying the commandment of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Having abandoned” or “Having stopped obeying”

the commandment of God

Quote: τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a commandment that came from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the commandment given by God” or “the commandment we received from God”

the commandment of God

Quote: τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of commandment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded us”

the tradition of men

Quote: τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a tradition that came from men. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the tradition handed down by men” or “the tradition you received from men”

the tradition of men

Quote: τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tradition, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men teach”

of men

Quote: τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of people”

of men

Quote: τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts do not include any words in this verse after the phrase of men. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the words “washings of pitchers and cups and many other similar such things you do” after the words of men. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 7:9

Well do you reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition

Quote: καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Here Jesus says that the scribes and Pharisees do something well when he thinks that they are actually doing something wrong. He speaks in this way in order to make a point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It is wrong for you reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition” or “you should not reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition”

the commandment of God … your tradition

Quote: τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ & τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of commandment and tradition, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded us … what you were taught”

the commandment of God

Quote: τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a commandment that came from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the commandment given by God” or “the commandment we received from God”

you may keep

Quote: τηρήσητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read you may keep. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “you may establish.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 7:10

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an explanation of how the scribes and Pharisees reject God’s law. This explanation continues in 7:11–13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is how you do that:” or “What I mean is that”

Moses said

Quote: Μωϋσῆς & εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures. The first quotation could be from Exodus 20:12 or Deuteronomy 5:16. The second quotation could be from Exodus 21:17 or Leviticus 20:9. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a quotation from an important text, and you could include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote in the law” or “as you can read in the Scriptures, Moses said”

said, ‘Honor your father and your mother,’ and, ‘The one speaking evil of his father or mother, let him end in death

Quote: εἶπεν, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου; καί, ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that all people should honor their father and their mother and that everyone speaking evil of his father or mother should end in death.”

Honor your … your

Quote: τίμα & σου & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the command Honor and the words your and your are singular.

The one speaking evil of his father or mother, let him end in death

Quote: ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one speaking evil of his father or mother, he should end in death” or “Anyone who speaks evil of his father or mother must end in death”

The one speaking evil of

Quote: ὁ κακολογῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evil, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The one saying evil things about”

his father or mother, let him end

Quote: πατέρα ἢ μητέρα & τελευτάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms his and him are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of one’s own father or mother, let that person end”

let him end in death

Quote: θανάτῳ τελευτάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase end in death means that the person is killed or executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him be put to death” or “let him be killed”

Mark 7:11-12

But you say, ‘If a man says to his father or his mother, “Whatever you might have benefited from me {is} Corban”’ (that is, a gift … you no longer permit him to do anything for his father or his mother

Quote: ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ἐὰν εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, κορβᾶν, (ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον), ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς & οὐκέτι ἀφίετε αὐτὸν οὐδὲν ποιῆσαι τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Jesus quotes the scribes and Pharisees using a hypothetical or imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if a man says to his father or his mother that anything he might have given them is Corban. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical or imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “But you say, ‘Suppose that a man says to his father or his mother, “Whatever you might have benefited from me is Corban”’ (that is, a gift). In that case, you no longer permit him to do anything for his father or his mother”

Mark 7:11

But you say, ‘If a man says to his father or his mother, “Whatever you might have benefited from me {is} Corban”’ (that is, a gift

Quote: ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ἐὰν εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, κορβᾶν, (ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον), ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς, (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within quotations. Alternate translation: “But you say that whoever says to his father or his mother that whatever they might have benefited from him is Corban (that is, a gift)”

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what the scribes and Pharisees allow in contrast to what God commanded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “Despite that,”

a man says to his father or his mother

Quote: εἴπῃ ἄνθρωπος τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms man, his, and his are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “a person says to his or her father or mother”

Whatever you might have benefited from me

Quote: ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase Whatever you might have benefited from me refers to money or goods that children might give to their parents when they need help. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Whatever I might have given to help you” or “Anything you might have received from me”

you might have benefited

Quote: ὠφεληθῇς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the man are talking to his father or his mother, the word you is singular.

is} Corban

Quote: κορβᾶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Corban is a Hebrew word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.

is} Corban”’ (that is, a gift

Quote: κορβᾶν & ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark provides an explanation of what Corban means. Use a form that shows that Mark is explaining what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “is Corban’”—which means a gift—” or “is Corban’” (which can be translated as “gift”)”

a gift

Quote: δῶρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the person is giving something as a gift to God. Because of that, the person will not give it to his or her parents. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a gift for God” or “a gift to God only”

Mark 7:12

you no longer permit him to do anything

Quote: οὐκέτι ἀφίετε αὐτὸν οὐδὲν ποιῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated no longer and anything are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “you permit him to do nothing any longer” or “you certainly do not permit him to do anything any longer”

him … for his father or his mother

Quote: αὐτὸν & τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms him, his, and his are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that person … for his or her father or mother”

Mark 7:13

setting aside

Quote: ἀκυροῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if the word of God were an object that people could set aside. He means that they are ignoring the word of God and treating it like it is not important. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nullifying” or “ignoring”

the word of God

Quote: τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using the term word to refer to the commands that God gave using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God said” or “God’s command”

by your tradition

Quote: τῇ παραδόσει ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tradition, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by what you received”

you handed down

Quote: παρεδώκατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if the tradition were a physical object that the scribes and Pharisees had handed down to others. He means that they taught people to observe the tradition. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you instructed” or “you told to other people”

Mark 7:15

nothing from outside the man, entering into him

Quote: οὐδέν & ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to food and drink, which are outside the man and enter into him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Since the disciples ask about the meaning of this saying in 7:17, include as little implied information as possible. Alternate translation: “no food or drink, entering into him” or “nothing outside the man, being eaten by him”

the man, … him, … him; … the man … the man

Quote: τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & αὐτὸν & αὐτόν & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms man and him throughout the verse are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person … him or her … him or her … the person … the person”

the man, … the man … the man

Quote: τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The phrase the man throughout this verse represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person … a person … that person”

the things that come out from the man

Quote: τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to words and deeds, which are what come out from people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Since the disciples ask about the meaning of this saying in 7:17, include as little implied information as possible. Alternate translation: “the words and deeds that come out from the man” or “the things that the man says and does”

that come out

Quote: ἐκπορευόμενά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “that go out”

Mark 7:16

If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear

Quote: Εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The note below discusses translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.

If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear

Quote: Εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω (1)

See how you translated the similar sentence in 4:9.

Mark 7:17

he entered

Quote: εἰσῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, entered”

from the crowd

Quote: ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that when Jesus entered into a house, he was avoiding or getting away from the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “where they were not with the crowd” or “to avoid the crowd”

the parable

Quote: τὴν παραβολήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here the disciples ask Jesus to explain the parable about things that go into and out of a person (see 7:15). Alternate translation: “the parable about what goes into a person”

Mark 7:18

Are you also thus without understanding

Quote: οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples for how they still do not understand what he is saying. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I can tell that you also are without understanding.” or “I am amazed that you also do not understand!”

Mark 7:18-19

Do you not understand that everything that enters into the man from outside is not able to defile him … because it does not go into his heart, but into the stomach, and passes out into the latrine

Quote: οὐ νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὐ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι & ὅτι οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν, καὶ εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to remind his disciples about what happens to the food that people eat. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should already understand that everything that enters into the man from outside is not able to defile him, because it does not go into his heart, but into the stomach, and passes out into the latrine (making all foods clean).” or “You already know that everything that enters into the man from outside is not able to defile him, because it does not go into his heart, but into the stomach, and passes out into the latrine (making all foods clean)!”

Mark 7:18

everything that enters into the man from outside

Quote: πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to food and drink, which are outside a person and enter into the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in 7:15. Alternate translation: “all food and drink, entering into him,” or “everything outside the man, being eaten by him,”

the man … him

Quote: τὸν ἄνθρωπον & αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms man and him are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person … him or her”

the man

Quote: τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The phrase the man represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person”

Mark 7:19

because

Quote: ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word because introduces an explanation about why nothing from outside a person can defile that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave because untranslated. Alternate translation: “for” or “and that is because”

it does not go

Quote: οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of go. Alternate translation: “it does not come”

into his heart, but into the stomach

Quote: αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The phrases his heart and the stomach represent people’s hearts and stomachs in general, not one particular heart and stomach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “into a person’s heart but into a person’s stomach”

into … heart

Quote: εἰς τὴν καρδίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In Jesus’ culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “into his head” or “into his mind”

his

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term his is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her”

passes out into the latrine

Quote: εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Jesus is referring to the process of expelling and removing feces and urine in a polite way by using the phrase passes out into the latrine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “is evacuated from the bowels” or “passes out of the body as waste”

the latrine

Quote: τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A latrine is a place where people expel and remove feces and urine. If your readers would not be familiar with this word, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the bathroom” or “the water closet”

the latrine (cleansing all foods

Quote: τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα & καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase cleansing all foods is Mark’s explanation of the implication of what Jesus has said. He means that Jesus’ teaching indicates that all foods are clean. If it would be helpful in your language, you make that idea more explicit. Make sure that you use a form that shows that this phrase is not part of what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “the latrine?’ So, Jesus cleansed all foods.” or “the latrine?’ Now that implies that all foods are clean.”

Mark 7:20

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” or “After that,”

What is coming out from the man, that

Quote: τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον, ἐκεῖνο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here, the word that refers directly back to What is coming out from the man. Jesus expresses the idea in this way to introduce the topic he is sepaking about and then explain what he wants to say about that topic. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the word that would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “What is coming out from the man”

What is coming out from the man

Quote: τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to words and deeds, which are what is coming out from people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in 7:15. Alternate translation: “The words and deeds that come out from the man” or “The things that the man says and does”

is coming out

Quote: ἐκπορευόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of coming. Alternate translation: “is going out”

the man, … the man

Quote: τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term man is masculine throughout this verse, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person … the person”

the man, … the man

Quote: τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The phrase the man throughout this verse represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person … that person”

Mark 7:21

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces a basis for the claim that Jesus made in the previous verse about how what comes out from a person is what defiles that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a basis for a claim, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “I say that because”

from the heart of men

Quote: ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In Jesus’ culture, the heart is the place where humans think, feel, and desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think, feel, and desire in your culture, or you could express the idea plainly. See how you translated heart in 7:19. Alternate translation: “from the head of men” or “from the mind of men” or “from what men think and desire”

the heart

Quote: τῆς καρδίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one heart, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts”

of men

Quote: τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans”

come out

Quote: ἐκπορεύονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “go out”

come out

Quote: ἐκπορεύονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if evil deeds and desires go out from the inside of a person. He means that these evil deeds and desires have their origin from the person, not from anything outside the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spring” or “originate”

Mark 7:21-22

evil thoughts, sexual immorality, thefts, murders … adultery, coveting, wickedness, deceit, sensuality, an evil eye, blasphemy, pride, {and} folly

Quote: οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ & πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, φόνοι & μοιχεῖαι, πλεονεξίαι, πονηρίαι, δόλος, ἀσέλγεια, ὀφθαλμὸς, πονηρός, βλασφημία, ὑπερηφανία, ἀφροσύνη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use nouns for some or all of the ideas in this list, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things that people do, including evil thinking, acting in sexually immoral ways, stealing things, murdering, acting in adulterous ways, desiring what others have, doing what is wicked, deceiving people, acting in sensual ways, having an evil eye, blaspheming, being prideful, and being foolish”

Mark 7:22

sensuality

Quote: ἀσέλγεια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word sensuality describes behavior that is unrestrained and that is unacceptable according to common standards. Often, this word refers especially to the act of indulging in unacceptable sexual behavior. If your readers would not be familiar with this category, you could use the name of a similar category in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “sexual self-indulgence” or “shameful sexual behavior”

an evil eye

Quote: ὀφθαλμὸς, πονηρός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase an evil eye describes someone who is jealous or envious. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “jealousy” or “envy”

Mark 7:23

All these evils come out from within

Quote: πάντα ταῦτα τὰ πονηρὰ ἔσωθεν ἐκπορεύεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evils, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “People do all these evil things because of what is within”

come out

Quote: ἐκπορεύεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “go out”

come out

Quote: ἐκπορεύεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if evil deeds and desires go out from within a person. He means that these evil deeds and desires have their origin from the person, not from anything outside the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in 7:21. Alternate translation: “spring” or “originate”

from within

Quote: ἔσωθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “from within a person”

the man

Quote: τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term man is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the person”

the man

Quote: τὸν ἄνθρωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The word the man represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a person”

Mark 7:24

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word Now introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

from there

Quote: ἐκεῖθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word there refers to the region of Gennesaret (see 6:53), which is where Jesus was teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from where he was” or “from Gennesaret”

he went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went away”

he went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came away”

having entered into a house

Quote: εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus entered this house as a guest who had been invited to stay there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having entered into a house as a guest” or “having been invited to stay at a house”

to know {it

Quote: γνῶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus did not want people to know that he was staying in this specific house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to know that he was there”

Mark 7:25-26

But immediately having heard about him, a woman, of whom her little daughter had an unclean spirit, having come, fell down at his feet … Now the woman was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent, and she was asking him that he would cast out the demon from her daughter

Quote: ἀλλ’ εὐθὺς ἀκούσασα γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἐλθοῦσα, προσέπεσεν πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ & ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει, καὶ ἠρώτα αὐτὸν ἵνα τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐκβάλῃ ἐκ τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 7:25 and 7:26 into a verse bridge in order to include all the information about the woman before narrating what the woman did. Alternate translation: “But immediately a woman heard about him. She was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent. Her little daughter had an unclean spirit. She, having come, fell down at his feet. She was asking him that he would cast out the demon from her daughter.”

Mark 7:25

But

Quote: ἀλλ’ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what a woman did in contrast to what Jesus wanted people to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead,”

immediately having heard about him, a woman, of whom her little daughter had an unclean spirit, having come, fell down at his feet

Quote: εὐθὺς ἀκούσασα γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἐλθοῦσα, προσέπεσεν πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a woman heard about him. Her little daughter had an unclean spirit. Immediately, having come, she fell down at his feet”

immediately having heard about him, a woman, of whom her little daughter had an unclean spirit, having come

Quote: εὐθὺς ἀκούσασα γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἐλθοῦσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word immediately could go with: (1) having heard. Alternate translation: “having heard about him immediately, a woman, of whom her little daughter had an unclean spirit, having come” (2) having come. Alternate translation: “having heard about him, a woman, of whom her little daughter had an unclean spirit, immediately having come”

having come

Quote: ἐλθοῦσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

fell down at his feet

Quote: προσέπεσεν πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In the woman’s culture, falling down at someone’s feet was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what falling down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated herself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”

Mark 7:26

Now the woman was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent, and she was asking

Quote: ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει, καὶ ἠρώτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “By the way, the woman was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent. She was asking”

a Syrophoenician

Quote: Συροφοινίκισσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Syrophoenician identifies the woman as someone who was native to the region of Syrophoenicia. This region was a smaller portion of Syria that was known as Phoenicia. Phoenicia was the area where the cities of Tyre and Sidon were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some explanation of this word. Alternate translation: “from that region, called Syrophoenicia,” or “from the region of Phoenicia within the province of Syria”

she was asking him that he would cast out the demon from her daughter

Quote: ἠρώτα αὐτὸν ἵνα τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐκβάλῃ ἐκ τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “she was asking him, ‘Please cast out the demon from my daughter’”

Mark 7:27

Permit the children first to be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw {it} to the little dogs

Quote: ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “It is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs, so permit the children first to be fed”

Permit the children first to be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw {it} to the little dogs

Quote: ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To answer the woman, Jesus offers a story or illustration. In the story, the children represent the Jewish people, the little dogs represent non-Jewish people, and the bread represents the help that Jesus gives to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is a story with a specific message, or you could explain what the parable means. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: Permit the children first to be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs” or “Permit the children first to be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs. That is why I am helping my fellow Jews before I help you”

Permit

Quote: ἄφες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the woman, the command Permit is singular.

the children first to be fed

Quote: πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “the children first to receive food” or “someone to feed the children first”

the bread of the children

Quote: τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe bread that was prepared for the children to eat. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the food prepared for the children” or “the food that the children were going to eat”

the bread

Quote: τὸν ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Jesus is using bread to represent food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the meals”

to throw {it} to the little dogs

Quote: τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, Jesus implies that the bread is thrown to the little dogs so that they can eat it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to throw it to the little dogs for them to eat”

to the little dogs

Quote: τοῖς κυναρίοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the phrase little dogs could describe: (1) domesticated animals that eat pests and can protect houses and families. You could use the name of a similar animal in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to the domesticated animals” or “to the guard animals” (2) scavenging animals that were generally considered unclean and dirty. You could use the name of a similar animal in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to the scavenging animals” or “to the dirty animals”

Mark 7:28

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what the woman says in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” or “Yet”

Yes

Quote: ναί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the woman uses the word Yes to indicate that she understands and agrees with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Yes, I agree” or “Yes, that is true”

and

Quote: καὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces the woman’s further explanation of what Jesus said about children and little dogs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave and untranslated. Alternate translation: “but it is also true” or “yet even further,”

the little dogs under the table eat from the crumbs of the children

Quote: τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκάτω τῆς τραπέζης ἐσθίουσιν ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν παιδίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To ask Jesus to help her, the woman offers a story or illustration based on the parable that Jesus told in 7:27. In the story, the little dogs represent non-Jewish people, and the crumbs represent the help that Jesus gives to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is a story with a specific message, or you could explain what the parable means. Alternate translation: “here is a similar story: the little dogs under the table eat from the crumbs of the children” or “the little dogs under the table eat from the crumbs of the children. That is what helping me would be like”

the little dogs

Quote: τὰ κυνάρια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See you how you translated this phrase in 7:27. Alternate translation: “to the domesticated animals” or “to the scavenging animals”

the little dogs under the table

Quote: τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκάτω τῆς τραπέζης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The woman means that the little dogs are where the children are eating the food. In her culture, they would lie under the table where the food was served. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the little dogs near the food” or “the little dogs that are nearby when the food is served”

the crumbs of the children

Quote: τῶν ψιχίων τῶν παιδίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the woman is using the possessive form to describe crumbs that fall from the food that the children are eating. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the crumbs from what the children are eating” or “crumbs that fall from the children’s meals”

Mark 7:29

this word

Quote: τοῦτον τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using the term word to mean what the woman said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this answer” or “how you responded”

go

Quote: ὕπαγε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

When Jesus tells the woman to go, he implies that he will do what she asked. In other words, he sends her away because he wants her to see that he has cast out the demon. Alternate translation: “go, for I have done what you asked” or “I will help you. So go”

go! … your

Quote: ὕπαγε & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the woman, the command go and the word your are singular.

The demon has gone out from your daughter

Quote: ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the demon left the daughter because Jesus himself commanded it to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I have caused the demon to go out from your daughter” or “The demon has gone out from your daughter as you requested”

has gone out

Quote: ἐξελήλυθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “has come out”

Mark 7:30

the child having been put on the bed

Quote: τὸ παιδίον βεβλημένον ἐπὶ τὴν κλίνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that the child was having been put on the bed because: (1) she had been healed and could sleep and rest normally. Alternate translation: “the child having been put on the bed, sleeping normally” or “the child lying peacefully on the bed” (2) the demon had exhausted her when it left her. Alternate translation: “the child having been thrown on the bed” or “the child lying exhausted on the bed”

the child having been put

Quote: τὸ παιδίον βεβλημένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the child lying” or “the child had lain down”

Mark 7:31

And again

Quote: καὶ πάλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And again introduces the next major event in the story. The word again implies that Jesus has already gone out from a location recently (see 7:24, where he left for Tyre and Sidon). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And again untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Later on,”

having gone out … he went

Quote: ἐξελθὼν & ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” and “came” instead of gone and went. Alternate translation: “having come out … he came”

he went

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went”

of the Decapolis

Quote: Δεκαπόλεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Decapolis is a name for a region to the southeast of Galilee. The name means “the Ten Towns.” See how you translated this name in 5:20.

Mark 7:32

they bring to him {one} deaf and barely able to speak

Quote: φέρουσιν αὐτῷ κωφὸν καὶ μογιλάλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a man who is deaf and barely able to speak as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man there who was deaf and barely able to speak. They bring him to Jesus” or “they bring to him a man. He was deaf and barely able to speak”

they bring … they beg

Quote: φέρουσιν & παρακαλοῦσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “certain people bring … they beg”

him that he would lay his hand on him

Quote: αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please lay your hand on him’”

he would lay his hand on him

Quote: ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people are implying that they want Jesus to lay his hand on him to heal the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he would lay his hand on him and heal” or “he, by laying his hand on him, would heal him”

Mark 7:33

he put his fingers into his ears

Quote: ἔβαλεν τοὺς δακτύλους αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰ ὦτα αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus put one finger from one of his hands into one of the man’s ears, and he put one finger from the other hand into the man’s other ear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he put a finger in both of the man’s ears”

having spit

Quote: πτύσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Here Mark does not state where Jesus spit. He may have spit on the ground, on his own fingers, or on the man’s tongue. If possible, do not state where exactly Jesus spit. Alternate translation: “having spit saliva”

Mark 7:34

having looked up to heaven

Quote: ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, most people thought that heaven was up above the earth. Looking up towards heaven was a common posture for someone who was praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a common posture for prayer in your culture, or you could explain the meaning of this posture. Alternate translation: “having raised his arms in prayer” or “having looked up to heaven to pray”

he sighed

Quote: ἐστέναξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

When Jesus sighed, it could indicate that he was praying deeply, that he felt compassion for the man, or that healing the man required much energy or power. If possible, use a general word or phrase that refers to someone breathing deeply in or out. Alternate translation: “he breathed deeply” or “he exhaled loudly”

Ephphatha!” (that is, “Be opened

Quote: ἐφφαθά, ὅ ἐστιν, διανοίχθητι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark provides an explanation of what Ephphatha means. Use a form that shows that Mark is explaining what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “‘Ephphatha!’—that is, ‘Be opened.’” or “‘Ephphatha!’ That is translated, ‘Be opened!’”

Ephphatha

Quote: ἐφφαθά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Ephphatha is an Aramaic word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.

Be opened

Quote: διανοίχθητι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Open” or “Become open”

Be opened

Quote: διανοίχθητι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the man, the command Be opened is singular.

Mark 7:35

his ears were opened, and the bond of his tongue was loosed

Quote: ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί, καὶ ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “his ears opened, and the bond of his tongue loosened” or “Jesus opened his ears, and he loosed the bond of his tongue”

his ears were opened

Quote: ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Mark speaks as if the man could not hear because something was blocking his ears. When Jesus healed him, it was as if his ears were opened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his ears were repaired” or “his ears began to work properly”

the bond of his tongue was loosed

Quote: ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Mark speaks as if the man’s inability to speak clearly was because of a bond that restricted or restrained his tongue. When Jesus healed the man, it was as if that bond was loosed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his mouth was repaired” or “what kept him from speaking clearly was removed”

the bond of his tongue

Quote: ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a bond that binds or restricts the man’s tongue. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the bond that held his tongue” or “the bond that restrained his tongue”

Mark 7:36

them … they would tell {it} … them, … they

Quote: αὐτοῖς & λέγωσιν & αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns them and they throughout this refer to the people who saw that Jesus had healed the man. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who saw what he had done … they would tell it … them … they” or “those who knew about the healing … they would tell it … them … they”

them so that they would tell {it} to no one

Quote: αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Tell it to no one’”

he commanded them, … they

Quote: αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Here Mark implies that Jesus ordered them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he ordered them to tell it to no one”

Mark 7:37

they were extremely astonished, saying

Quote: ὑπέρπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus and what he had done. Alternate translation: “what he had done extremely astonished them, and they said” or “this story about Jesus astonished them extremely, and they said”

they were extremely astonished

Quote: ὑπέρπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to everyone who witnessed or heard about how Jesus healed the man. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “everyone who knew about what Jesus had done was extremely astonished” or “all the people were extremely astonished”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

He has done all things well

Quote: καλῶς πάντα πεποίηκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people are referring to all things that Jesus had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Everything that he has done, he has done well” or “He has done all his deeds well”

the deaf … the mute

Quote: τοὺς κωφοὺς & ἀλάλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjectives deaf and mute as nouns to mean people who are deaf and mute. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people”

Mark 8

Mark 8 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus expands his ministry and encounters opposition (6:7–8:21)
   • Jesus feeds 4,000 people (8:1–10)
   • The Pharisees test Jesus (8:11–13)
   • The yeast of the Pharisees and Herod (8:14–21)
2. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)
   • Jesus heals a blind man (8:22–26)
   • Who Jesus really is (8:27–30)
   • What Jesus and his disciples must do (8:31–9:1)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The miracle of multiplying food

In 8:1–10, Mark tells a story in which Jesus provides 4,000 people with food. All these people were in a place where no people lived, and all the food that Jesus and his disciples had were seven loaves of bread and a few fish. Despite that, Jesus used the seven loaves of bread and the few fish to feed everyone who was there. Mark does not tell us exactly how Jesus did this, but he does say that there were more leftovers than what they started with. Your translation should not explain how Jesus multiplied the food, but it should be clear that he did a miracle. Mark told a similar story about how Jesus fed 5,000 men in 6:30–44, so see how you expressed the ideas there.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

The yeast of the Pharisees and the yeast of Herod

In 8:14–21, Jesus tells his disciples to watch out for the “yeast” of the Pharisees and the “yeast” of Herod. The disciples misunderstand him and think that he is saying something about bread, which they forgot to bring with them. In response, Jesus reminds them that he is not talking about lack of bread, since he has proved twice that he can multiply food. He implies that “yeast” refers to what the Pharisees and Herod teach and do. Since the disciples misunderstanding “yeast” is an important part of this passage, and since Jesus never directly explains what “yeast” means, if possible you should avoid making that idea more explicit. If you do explain what “yeast” means, if possible only do so after Jesus has made it clear that he is not speaking about literal yeast. (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to his disciples. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29, and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 8:1

In those days

Quote: ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase In those days introduces the next major event in the story. It does not indicate how soon after the previous event this new event occurred. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Later during those days” or “During one of those days”

In those days

Quote: ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, Mark uses the term days to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that identifies a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “During that time”

In those days

Quote: ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase those days refers to the time period when Jesus in the region of the Decapolis, on the southeastern side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was in the region of the Decapolis”

Mark 8:2

I have compassion on the crowd because they are remaining with me already three days and do not have anything {that} they might eat

Quote: σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “The crowd is remaining with me already three days and does not have anything that they might eat, so I have compassion on them”

I have compassion on

Quote: σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of compassion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I sympathize with”

Mark 8:3

if I would send them away to their home hungry, they will faint on the way

Quote: ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if he sent the people away to their home hungry. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine that I were to send them away to their home hungry. In that case, they would faint on the way”

their home

Quote: οἶκον αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one home, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “their homes”

they will faint

Quote: ἐκλυθήσονται (1)

Alternate translation: “they will become weary” or “they will lose their strength”

on the way

Quote: ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, Jesus implies that the people would be walking on the way to their homes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the way to their homes” or “while they going home”

and some of them

Quote: καί τινες αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces something that makes the situation even more difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that intensifies the situation. Alternate translation: “and even worse, some of them” or “and that is especially true for those who”

Mark 8:4

From where will anyone be able to satisfy these {people} with loaves here in a desolate place

Quote: πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The disciples are using the question form to tell Jesus that they will not be able to find enough food for the crowd. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for anyone here in a desolate place to satisfy these people with loaves.” or “There is certainly nowhere here in this desolate place where anyone is able to get enough loaves to satisfy these people!”

with loaves

Quote: ἄρτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

The disciples are using loaves to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with food”

Mark 8:5

he asked them, “How many loaves do you have?” And they said, “Seven

Quote: ἠρώτα αὐτούς, πόσους ἔχετε ἄρτους? οἱ δὲ εἶπαν, ἑπτά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “he asked them how many loaves they had. And they said that they had seven”

loaves

Quote: ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated loaves in 6:38. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”

Seven

Quote: ἑπτά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We have seven loaves”

Mark 8:6

to recline on the ground

Quote: ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “to get ready to eat on the ground”

loaves

Quote: ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated loaves in 6:38. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”

he broke {them} and was giving {them

Quote: ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Jesus broke the loaves of bread in pieces so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar words in 6:41. Alternate translation: “he divided the loaves into servings and was giving them” or “he broke the loaves into smaller pieces and was giving the pieces”

so that they might set {them} before {them}, and they set {them} before the crowd

Quote: ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν, καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The clauses so that they might set {them} before {them}, and they set {them} before the crowd contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “so that they set them before the crowd” or “and they were setting them before crowd”

Mark 8:7

he said to set these also before {them

Quote: εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said, ‘Set these also before them’”

Mark 8:8

they ate … they took up

Quote: ἔφαγον & ἦραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they in the phrase they ate refers to the crowds. The pronoun they in the phrase they took up refers to the disciples. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the crowds ate … the disciples took up”

and were satisfied

Quote: καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages. Alternative translation: “until they were full”

the remaining of the broken pieces

Quote: περισσεύματα κλασμάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the remaining refers to what was left after everyone ate. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leftovers” or “what was left of the broken pieces”

seven baskets

Quote: ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “seven baskets full” or “filling up seven baskets”

baskets

Quote: σπυρίδας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word baskets refers to large circular containers that store food or other items. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers”

Mark 8:9

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark uses the word Now to introduce background information that helps the readers understand how amazing what Jesus did was. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for how many people were there,” or “In the end,”

4,000

Quote: τετρακισχίλιοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the number 4,000 as a noun to mean 4,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “4,000 individuals”

Mark 8:10

And immediately, having gotten into the boat with his disciples, he went into the regions of Dalmanutha

Quote: καὶ εὐθὺς ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory

Here Mark concludes the story about how Jesus fed 4,000 people. He concludes the story by indicating that Jesus left the area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing this conclusion. Alternate translation: “The, after feeding all those people, Jesus immediately got into the boat with his disciples and left. He went into the regions of Dalmanutha”

the boat

Quote: τὸ πλοῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

Here, the phrase the boat could refer to: (1) a boat, without specifying which one. Alternate translation: “a certain boat” (2) the same boat that Jesus and his disciples used earlier. Alternate translation: “the same boat they had used earlier”

he went

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came”

of Dalmanutha

Quote: Δαλμανουθά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Dalmanutha is the name of an area. Its location is unknown, but it may have been on the northwestern side of the Sea of Galilee.

Mark 8:11

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “While he was there,”

came out

Quote: ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the Pharisees came out from wherever they were and went to where Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “departed to Jesus” or “left where they were and went to where Jesus was”

came out

Quote: ἐξῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went out”

seeking from him a sign from heaven, testing him

Quote: ζητοῦντες παρ’ αὐτοῦ σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, πειράζοντες αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asking him, ‘Give us a sign from heaven,’ testing him”

a sign from heaven

Quote: σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that the Pharisees wanted Jesus to do a miracle to prove that his authority came from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a sign from heaven that proved that his authority was from God”

from heaven

Quote: ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase from heaven indicates that the sign originates in heaven, where God rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from heaven, where God rules” or “that comes from the place where God is”

testing him

Quote: πειράζοντες αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Here, the word testing introduces the purpose for which the Pharisees came to Jesus and were seeking a sign from heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to him”

Mark 8:12

having sighed greatly in his spirit

Quote: ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ (1)

When Jesus sighed greatly, it indicated that he was sad and upset about what the Pharisees had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to how people in your culture express sadness or frustration nonverbally, or you could explain the meaning of what Jesus did. Alternate translation: “having breathed out loudly” or “having shown that he was upset by sighing greatly”

in his spirit

Quote: τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word spirit refers to the nonphysical part of people. Mark means that Jesus sighed inwardly, to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in his heart” or “within himself”

Why does this generation seek a sign? Truly I say to you, if a sign will be given to this generation

Quote: τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking about his audience in the third person instead of directly addressing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person here instead. Alternate translation: “Why do you who are of this generation seek a sign? Truly I say to you, if a sign will be given to you who are of this generation …”

Why does this generation seek a sign

Quote: τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Pharisees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “This generation has no reason to seek a sign.” or “I am surprised that this generation seeks a sign!”

does this generation seek … to this generation

Quote: ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ & τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, generation represents the people who are part of the generation, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do today’s people seek … to today’s people” or “do the people of this generation seek … to the people of this generation”

a sign? … a sign

Quote: σημεῖον (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, just as in 8:11, the implication is that the sign is a miracle that proves that Jesus’ authority comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a sign that shows that my authority is from God … such a sign”

if a sign will be given to this generation

Quote: εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary

Here Jesus uses the word if to introduce a statement that he knows will not be true. What the form means is that a sign will definitely not be given to this generation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “A sign will never be given to this generation!”

if a sign will be given to this generation

Quote: εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula

The phrase if a sign will be given to this generation is an oath formula. This kind of oath does not complete the condition, but it implies that something bad will happen to the speaker if the condition actually happens. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I will be accursed if a sign will be given to this generation!” or “I swear that a sign will not be given to this generation!”

a sign will be given

Quote: δοθήσεται & σημεῖον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it could be: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “I will give a sign” (2) God the Father. Alternate translation: “God will give a sign”

Mark 8:13

he went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went away”

he went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came away”

to the other side

Quote: εἰς τὸ πέραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus went away to the other side of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”

Mark 8:14

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark uses the word And to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for the disciples,” or “As it happened,”

loaves

Quote: ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Mark is using loaves to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “anything to eat”

except for one loaf, they did not have {any} with them in the boat

Quote: εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶχον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only had one loaf with them in the boat”

loaf

Quote: ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated this word in 6:38. Alternate translation: “large chunk of bread”

Mark 8:15

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

See, watch out for

Quote: ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε ἀπὸ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms See and watch out for similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Carefully watch out for” or “Keep away from”

See, watch out

Quote: ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word See means that the disciples need to make sure that something happens or does not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Make sure that you watch out”

the yeast of the Pharisees and the yeast of Herod

Quote: τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe yeast that the Pharisees and Herod have or use. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the yeast that the Pharisees and Sadducees have”

the yeast of the Pharisees and the yeast of Herod

Quote: τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, yeast is a metaphor that refers to what the Pharisees and Herod teach and do. However, the disciples did not immediately understand that Jesus was using a metaphor; instead, Jesus has to explain it to them in the following verses. So, you should preserve the metaphor here without explaining its meaning, since Jesus provides an explanation in the following verses.

Mark 8:16

each other that they have no loaves

Quote: ἀλλήλους, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “each other, ‘We have no loaves’”

that

Quote: ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word translated that could introduce: (1) what the disciples were reasoning. Alternate translation: “and saying that” (2) what the disciples think might be the reason for why Jesus said what he did about yeast. Alternate translation: “that Jesus had said that because”

no loaves

Quote: ἄρτους οὐκ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

See how you translated loaves in 8:14. Alternate translation: “nothing to eat”

no loaves

Quote: ἄρτους οὐκ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark says no here as an overstatement for emphasis. The disciples do have one loaf of bread (see 8:14) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “almost no loaves” or “only one loaf of bread”

Mark 8:17

Why are you reasoning that you do not have loaves? Do you not yet perceive, nor understand? Has your heart become hardened

Quote: τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “It is wrong for you to be reasoning that you do not have loaves. You do not yet perceive nor understand. Your hearts have become hardened.” or “Do not reason that you do not have loaves! I am disappointed that you do not yet perceive nor understand! Your hearts have become hardened!”

Do you not yet perceive, nor understand

Quote: οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms perceive and understand mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet know” or “Do you not yet perceive”

Do you not yet perceive, nor understand

Quote: οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is implying that the disciples do not perceive or understand who Jesus is and what he can do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet perceive who I am, nor understand what I can do”

Has your heart become hardened

Quote: πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus is speaking of the disciples’ heart as if it had become hardened. He means that the disciples are stubborn and refuse to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Have you become stubborn” or “Have you become unwilling to pay attention”

Has your heart become hardened

Quote: πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that it was the disciples themselves. Alternate translation: “Has your heart become hard” or “Have you hardened your heart”

Has your heart

Quote: ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one heart, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “Have your hearts”

your heart

Quote: τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In Jesus’ culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “your head” or “your mind”

Mark 8:18

Having eyes, do you not see? And having ears, do you not hear? And do you not remember

Quote: ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε? καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Having eyes, you do not see. And having ears, you do not hear. And you do not remember.” or “Surely you have eyes, yet you do not see! Surely you have ears, yet you do not hear! And you certainly do not remember!”

Having eyes, do you not see? And having ears, do you not hear

Quote: ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the sentences with a word other than and in order to show that the second sentence is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two sentences. Alternate translation: “Having eyes, do you not see? Indeed, having ears, do you not hear” or “Having eyes and ears, do you not see and hear”

Having eyes, do you not see? And having ears, do you not hear

Quote: ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is implying that the disciples have eyes to look at things and ears to hear things, but they do not really pay attention to what they see and hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Having eyes, do you fail to pay attention to what you see? And having ears, do you fail to pay attention to what you see” or “Having eyes to see with, do you not see properly? And having ears to hear with, do you not hear properly”

Mark 8:18-19

And do you not remember … When I broke the five loaves for the 5, 000, how many baskets full of broken pieces did you take up

Quote: καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε & ὅτε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους ἔκλασα εἰς τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους, πόσους κοφίνους κλασμάτων πλήρεις ἤρατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here, the clause And do you not remember could: (1) stand alone as a question. See the ULT. (2) begin the question that is found in verse 19. Alternate translation: “And do you not remember, when I broke the five loaves among the 5,000, how many baskets full of broken pieces did you take up” or “And do you not remember when I broke the five loaves among the 5,000? How many baskets full of broken pieces did you take up”

Mark 8:18

do you not remember

Quote: οὐ μνημονεύετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the disciples should remember what it is that he has done. As the next verses will show, Jesus is thinking specifically of how he has fed 5,000 and 4,000 people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “do you not remember my miracles”

Mark 8:19

I broke the five loaves

Quote: τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους ἔκλασα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus refers to how he broke the loaves of bread in pieces so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:41. Alternate translation: “I divided the five loaves into servings” or “I broke the five loaves into smaller pieces”

loaves

Quote: ἄρτους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated loaves in 6:38. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”

the 5, 000

Quote: τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the number 5,000 as a noun to mean 5,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 5,000 men”

baskets full of broken pieces did you take up

Quote: κοφίνους κλασμάτων πλήρεις ἤρατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that the disciples filled the baskets with the leftovers from the meal, including broken pieces of bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “baskets full of broken pieces of bread did you collect” or “baskets full of leftover pieces of bread did you take up”

baskets

Quote: κοφίνους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated baskets in 6:43. Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers”

12

Quote: δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We took up 12 baskets full”

Mark 8:20

And when

Quote: ὅτε καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus is speaking again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Then he said, ‘And when”

the seven for the 4, 000

Quote: τοὺς ἑπτὰ εἰς τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I broke the seven for the 4,000”

the seven

Quote: τοὺς ἑπτὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the number seven as a noun to mean seven loaves. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the seven loaves”

the 4, 000

Quote: τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the number 4,000 as a noun to mean 4,000 people. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 4,000 individuals”

the fillings of how many baskets of broken pieces

Quote: πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα κλασμάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe fillings that consisted of baskets that were stuffed with broken pieces. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets containing broken pieces” or “how many baskets, each one filled with broken pieces,”

the fillings of how many baskets

Quote: πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fillings, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many baskets full”

baskets

Quote: σπυρίδων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated baskets in 8:8. Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers”

of broken pieces

Quote: κλασμάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to broken pieces of bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of broken pieces of bread” or “of broken pieces of leftover bread”

Seven

Quote: ἑπτά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We took up seven baskets full”

Mark 8:21

How do you not yet understand

Quote: πῶς οὔπω συνίετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. See how you expressed the similar rhetorical question in 8:17. Alternate translation: “You should understand by now.” or “I am disappointed that you do not yet understand!”

How do you not yet understand

Quote: πῶς οὔπω συνίετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is implying that the disciples do not understand who Jesus is and what he can do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar idea in 8:17. Alternate translation: “How do you not yet understand who I am and what I can do”

Mark 8:22

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go”

Bethsaida

Quote: Βηθσαϊδάν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Bethsaida is the name of a town. It was located on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you referred to this town in 6:45.

they bring

Quote: φέρουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “certain people bring” or “some people bring”

and they bring to him a blind {man} and beg him

Quote: καὶ φέρουσιν αὐτῷ τυφλὸν, καὶ παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a man who is blind as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “and there was a blind man there. People bring him to Jesus and beg him”

him that he would touch him

Quote: αὐτὸν ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please touch him’”

he would touch him

Quote: αὐτοῦ ἅψηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people are implying that they want Jesus to touch the man to heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he would touch him and heal him” or “he, by touching him, would heal him”

Mark 8:23

having laid his hands on him

Quote: ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

As 8:25 makes clear, Jesus laid his hands on the man’s eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that more explicit here. Alternate translation: “having laid his hands on the man’s eyes”

he was asking him, “Do you see anything

Quote: ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν, εἴ τι βλέπεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was asking him if he saw anything.”

Do you see

Quote: βλέπεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the blind man, the word you is singular.

Mark 8:24

having looked up

Quote: ἀναβλέψας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word translated having looked up could mean that: (1) the man raised his head and looked around him. Alternate translation: “having looked at what was around him” (2) the man began to be able to see again. Alternate translation: “having begun to see again”

men

Quote: τοὺς ἀνθρώπους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, the man is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans”

for

Quote: ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word for could introduce: (1) a further explanation of what the man saw. Alternate translation: “and more specifically,” or “and in fact” (2) a reason why the man knew that he was seeing men. Alternate translation: “since” or “which I know because”

I see {them} like trees walking

Quote: ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

The man is saying that the people he sees look like trees. This means that he cannot see them clearly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I see them walking, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees”

Mark 8:25

he looked intently and was restored, and he was seeing everything clearly

Quote: διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη καὶ ἐνέβλεπεν τηλαυγῶς ἅπαντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange these clauses so that when the man looks and what the man sees are more closely connected. Alternate translation: “he was restored, and he looked intently, and he was seeing everything clearly” or “he looked intently and was seeing everything clearly, and he was restored”

was restored

Quote: ἀπεκατέστη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus had restored him” or “became healthy”

Mark 8:26

And he sent him away to his home, saying, “You may not even enter into the town

Quote: καὶ ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν εἰς οἶκον αὐτοῦ λέγων, μηδὲ εἰς τὴν κώμην εἰσέλθῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to make everything that Jesus commands in this verse a direct quotation or an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told him, ‘Go to your home. You may not even enter into the town’” or “And he sent him away to his home, telling him that he might not even enter into the town”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

You may not even enter

Quote: μηδὲ & εἰσέλθῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the man who was blind, the word You is singular.

into the town

Quote: εἰς τὴν κώμην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words in this verse after the phrase into the town. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “nor speak to anyone in the town” after the phrase into the town. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 8:27

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”

went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “came out”

the villages of Caesarea Philippi

Quote: τὰς κώμας Καισαρείας τῆς Φιλίππου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe villages that are near the larger city of Caesarea Philippi. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the villages that belonged to Caesarea Philippi” or “the villages that surrounded Caesarea Philippi”

saying to them

Quote: λέγων αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said to them” or “and he asked them”

men

Quote: οἱ ἄνθρωποι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “men and women”

Mark 8:28

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they answered”

John the Baptist, and others, Elijah, but others, one of the prophets

Quote: ὅτι Ἰωάννην τὸν Βαπτιστήν, καὶ ἄλλοι Ἠλείαν, ἄλλοι δὲ ὅτι εἷς τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Some say John the Baptist; and others say Elijah; but others say one of the prophets”

John the Baptist, and others, Elijah, but others, one of the prophets

Quote: Ἰωάννην τὸν Βαπτιστήν, καὶ ἄλλοι Ἠλείαν, ἄλλοι δὲ ὅτι εἷς τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Since all these people and prophets had died before the disciples answered this question, the disciples are implying that people think that Jesus is one of these people who has come back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist come back to life; and others, Elijah come back to life; but others, one of the prophets come back to life”

others, … others

Quote: ἄλλοι (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The disciples are using the adjectives others and others as nouns to mean various groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “others among the people … others among the people”

one of the prophets

Quote: εἷς τῶν προφητῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the disciples are not excluding John the Baptist or Elijah from the group of the prophets. Instead, they are referring to the many other prophets that God had sent. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “another one of the prophets”

Mark 8:29

you … You

Quote: ὑμεῖς & σὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word you in the phrase who do you say is plural. Because Peter is speaking to Jesus, the word You in the clause You are the Christ is singular.

Mark 8:30

he strongly warned them that they might tell no one about him

Quote: ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he strongly warned them, ‘Tell no one about me’”

about him

Quote: περὶ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus warned the disciples to tell no one about who he really was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that he was the Christ” or “about his true identity”

Mark 8:31

them that it is necessary for the Son of Man to suffer many things and to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes and to be killed and to rise up after three days

Quote: αὐτοὺς ὅτι δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν, καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘It is necessary for the Son of Man to suffer many things and to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes and to be killed and to rise up after three days’”

the Son of Man

Quote: τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to himself as the Son of Man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “him, who is the Son of Man,”

to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes

Quote: ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to experience rejection from the elders and the chief priests and the scribes”

to be killed

Quote: ἀποκτανθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “to die” or “to allow someone to kill him”

to rise up

Quote: ἀναστῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase rise up refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be restored to life” or “to resurrect”

after three days

Quote: μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase after three days refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from now”

Mark 8:32

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents what Jesus said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he had just said” or “that teaching”

with openness

Quote: παρρησίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of openness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “openly”

Mark 8:33

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus did in contrast to what Peter wanted him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

his disciples

Quote: τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus looked at all the other disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the rest of his disciples”

rebuked Peter and says

Quote: ἐπετίμησεν Πέτρῳ καὶ λέγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word says indicates how Jesus rebuked Peter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “rebuked Peter by saying”

Get behind me, Satan! For you are not considering the things of God, but the things of men

Quote: ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ, ὅτι οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “You are not considering the things of God, but the things of men. So, get behind me, Satan!”

Get behind me

Quote: ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if he wants Peter to Get behind him. He means that Peter should not rebuke him but should instead accept what Jesus says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not stand in my way” or “Do not rebuke me”

Get … you are not considering

Quote: ὕπαγε & οὐ φρονεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to Peter, the command Get and the word you are singular.

Satan

Quote: Σατανᾶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus calls Peter Satan because Peter is asking like Satan by tempting Jesus to disobey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or explain the metaphor. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like Satan” or “for you are tempting me as Satan does”

you are not considering the things of God, but the things of men

Quote: οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “you are considering the things of men, not the things of God”

but the things

Quote: ἀλλὰ τὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but you are considering the things”

of men

Quote: τῶν ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people”

Mark 8:34

If anyone wants

Quote: εἴ τις θέλει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical

Here Jesus uses the conditional form to refer to anyone who wants to follow after him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form naturally introduces anyone who wants to follow Jesus. Alternate translation: “Anyone who wants” or “When someone wants”

to follow after me, … follow me

Quote: ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν & ἀκολουθείτω μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrases follow after me and follow me refer to traveling with Jesus and being his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be my disciples … be my disciple” or “to travel with me as my students … travel with me as my student”

let him deny himself and take up his cross and follow me

Quote: ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν, καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use third-person imperatives in this way, you could state these in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he should deny himself and take up his cross and follow me”

let him deny himself … his

Quote: ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms him, himself, and his are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “let that person deny himself or herself … his or her”

let him deny himself

Quote: ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase deny himself refers to a person choosing not to do what they would naturally do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him exercise self-control” or “let him choose not to do what he naturally desires”

take up his cross

Quote: ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus assumes that the disciples will know that the Romans executed some criminals by nailing them to a wooden beam with crossbar that was set upright so that the criminals would slowly suffocate. Jesus also assumes that the disciples will know that the Romans made these criminals carry these wooden crosses through the streets to the place where they were going to be executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some of this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “take up the wooden cross on which he will be executed”

take up his cross

Quote: ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of taking up a cross in order to describe people who are ready and willing to suffer and even die because they follow Jesus. Because this figure of speech is connected to how Jesus himself died on a cross, if possible you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “be ready to suffer, which is like taking up his cross,” or “take up his cross, ready to suffer or die,”

Mark 8:35

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a basis for what Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “I say that because” or “In fact,”

whoever wants to save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for the sake of me and of the gospel will save it

Quote: ὃς & ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus speaks of how people’s attitudes toward their current lives affects their eternal lives after they resurrect. He means that those who want to save their current lives will lose their eternal, resurrection lives, and that those who have lost their current lives will save their eternal, resurrection lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whoever wants to save his current life will lose it forever, but whoever loses his current life for the sake of me and of the gospel will save it forever”

wants to save his life will lose it

Quote: θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of trying to preserve one’s life as if it were saving it. He speaks of dying as if it were losing one’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wants to preserve his life will die”

his … his

Quote: αὐτοῦ (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term his is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her”

but whoever loses his life for the sake of me and of the gospel will save it

Quote: ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of dying or being willing to die as losing one’s life. He speaks of experiencing eternal life as if it were saving one’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but whoever has died for the sake of me and of the gospel will have eternal life”

for the sake of me and of the gospel

Quote: ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

When Jesus says for the sake of me and of the gospel, he means that some people will lose their lives because they are his disciples and because they believe the gospel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he is my disciple and believes the gospel” or “because he believes in me and in the gospel”

Mark 8:36

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces another basis for what Jesus said in 8:34. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Another reason I say that is because” or “Even further,”

what does it benefit a man to gain the whole world and to forfeit his life

Quote: τί & ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “a man benefits nothing if he gains the whole world and forfeits his life.” or “a man never benefits anything if he gains the whole world and forfeits his life!”

what does it benefit a man to gain the whole world and to forfeit his life

Quote: τί & ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to show that forfeiting one’s life is bad enough that gaining anything else cannot make up for it. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “image a man who gained the whole world but forfeited his life. What does that man benefit”

a man … his

Quote: ἄνθρωπον & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms man and his are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “a person … his or her”

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces something bad that happens in contrast to gaining the whole world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”

his life

Quote: τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ (1)

Alternate translation: “his soul”

Mark 8:37

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what Jesus said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Even further,”

what might a man give in exchange for his life

Quote: τί & δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “a man can give nothing in exchange for his life.” or “a man cannot give anything in exchange for his life!”

a man … his

Quote: ἄνθρωπος & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms man and his are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “a person … his or her”

in exchange for his life

Quote: ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus could be implying: (1) that there is nothing that is worth as much as a person’s life. Alternate translation: “that is as worth as much as his life” (2) that there is nothing that is valuable enough to redeem one’s life when it has been forfeited. Alternate translation: “that can buy back his life”

his life

Quote: τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ (1)

Alternate translation: “his soul”

Mark 8:38

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a basis for what Jesus has said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave For untranslated. More specifically, the word For could introduce the basis for: (1) what Jesus has said in 8:34–37. Alternate translation: “I have said all those things because” (2) Jesus’ command to follow him in 8:34. Alternate translation: “You should follow me as I have commanded because”

whoever is ashamed of me and of my words

Quote: ὃς & ἐὰν ἐπαισχυνθῇ με καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whoever finds me and my words shameful” or “whoever worries that I and my words will shame them”

of my words

Quote: τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using the term words to describe the things he teaches by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of my teaching”

in this adulterous and sinful generation

Quote: ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, generation represents the people who are part of the generation, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. See how you translated the similar expression in 8:12. Alternate translation: “among today’s people, who are adulterous and sinful” or “among the adulterous and sinful people of this generation”

adulterous

Quote: μοιχαλίδι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of people who do not fully trust and obey God as if they were adulterous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unfaithful” or “disobedient”

the Son of Man will also be ashamed of him

Quote: καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐπαισχυνθήσεται αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man will also find him shameful” or “the Son of Man knows that such a person will also shame him”

the Son of Man … he comes … his

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & ἔλθῃ & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, … I come … my”

when he comes

Quote: ὅταν ἔλθῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that he, the Son of Man, will come back to this world at some point in the future. He is also implying that he will leave this world before he comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some or all of those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he comes back to this world” or “when, after leaving this world, he comes back”

in the glory of his Father with the holy angels

Quote: ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with the holy angels in a way that his Father has made glorious” or “with the holy angels as one who is as great as his Father”

of his Father

Quote: τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Father is an important title that describe the relationship between God the Father and Jesus his Son.

Mark 9

Mark 9 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)
   • What Jesus and his disciples must do (8:31–9:1)
   • Jesus is transfigured (9:2–8)
   • Jesus and the disciples discuss Elijah (9:9–13)
   • Jesus heals a demon-possessed boy (9:14–29)
   • Jesus predicts his suffering and death (9:30–32)
   • Jesus teaches about how his disciples should behave (9:33–50)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

“transfigured”

In 9:1–8, Mark describes how Jesus was “transfigured.” This word indicates that Jesus looked very different to the disciples. Mark does not tell us all the ways in which Jesus looked different, but he does say that Jesus’ clothes became extremely white. What this means is that the disciples were able to see some of the glory and majesty that Jesus has as God’s Son. Make sure that your translation shows that Jesus looked great and glorious.

Elijah

When Jesus was transfigured, the disciples saw Moses and Elijah talking with him. Later, they ask Jesus about Elijah. They refer specifically to what the scribes say about a prophecy in Malachi 4:5–6, which indicates that God will send “Elijah” to prepare the way before God comes to judge his enemies and reward his people. Malachi is referring to a prophet who lived even earlier. This prophet, named Elijah, performed many miracles and spoke messages from God (see 1 Kings 17–19 and 2 Kings 2:1–17). The disciples ask about whether this Elijah is supposed to come before the Messiah does. Jesus says that this is true, and he talks about this “Elijah” in a way that shows the disciples that John the Baptist was “Elijah.” He means that John fulfills the prophecy in Malachi that someone like the prophet Elijah will prepare the way before God comes to judge and reward people. If your readers would not know the prophecy in Malachi or the stories about the prophet Elijah, you may need to include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. (See: Elijah)

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Hyperbole

In 9:43–48, Jesus commands his disciples to cut off or throw out body parts that cause them to sin. He uses this extreme example of resisting sin in order to show his disciples how serious sin really is. He does not mean that believers should always cut off body parts when they sin. Jesus intends his commands to be shocking, however, so you should preserve the extreme language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Jesus’ commands are extreme language.

Stumbling

In 9:42–47, Jesus discusses people and things that cause “stumbling”. He uses this term to refer to sinning. See the notes on these verses for translation options.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Most of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in conversations, and many of the conversations are with one person. Because of this, the majority of the forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. So, you should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 5, 19, and 35. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

The allusion to Isaiah 66:24 in verse 48

In verse 48, Jesus uses words that are very similar to words in Isaiah 66:24. However, Jesus does not introduce his words as a quotation. So, Jesus is not directly quoting from Isaiah, but he intended his audience to think of Isaiah 66:24 when they heard what he said. If your readers would not think of Isaiah 66:24, you could refer to it in a footnote.

Verses 44 and 46

Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for 9:44 and 9:46. Some early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words in each verse: “where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched.” Since these words also appear in all of the manuscripts in 9:48, it is likely that people who copied the manuscripts accidentally or intentionally added these words earlier as verses 44 and 46. Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: Textual Variants)

Mark 9:1

he was saying to them

Quote: ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun he refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state who he refers to in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying to them”

to you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to everyone who was there, the word you here is plural.

who will certainly not taste death

Quote: οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not experience death”

who will certainly not taste death

Quote: οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun death by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die”

certainly not

Quote: οὐ μὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”

the kingdom of God having come

Quote: τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus speaks as if the kingdom of God were a person who could come. He means that God will establish or begin his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God having been inaugurated” or “the kingdom of God having begun”

with power

Quote: ἐν δυνάμει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a powerful way”

Mark 9:2

And after six days

Quote: καὶ μετὰ ἡμέρας ἓξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And after six days introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Then, after six days had passed” or “Six days after those things happened”

by themselves, alone

Quote: κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms by themselves and alone mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “completely alone” or “totally by themselves”

he was transfigured

Quote: μετεμορφώθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word transfigured means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “his appearance was changed” or “he began to look different”

he was transfigured

Quote: μετεμορφώθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Mark could be implying that: (1) Jesus did the action. Alternate translation: “he transfigured himself” (2) God did the action. Alternate translation: “God transfigured him”

before them

Quote: ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν (1)

Alternate translation: “in front of them” or “as they watched”

Mark 9:3

such as no launderer on the earth is able thus to make them white

Quote: οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word launderer refers to a person who worked with cloth to clean and bleach cloth and clothing. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of the word launderer, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who washed cloth could make them”

Mark 9:4

Elijah with Moses were seen by them

Quote: ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they saw Elijah with Moses”

by them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the word them refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “by Peter, James, and John”

they were talking with

Quote: ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the word they refers to Elijah and Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with”

Mark 9:5

answering

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word answering indicates that Peter was responding to what he saw. He was not answering a question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response to seeing those things”

for us

Quote: ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Peter could mean: (1) everyone who was there, including himself, the other two disciples, Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “for us all” (2) just himself and the other two disciples. Alternate translation: “for us disciples”

let us make

Quote: ποιήσωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Peter here means himself and the other two disciples, not Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. So, use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

tents

Quote: σκηνάς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term tents means simple, temporary places in which to sit or sleep. Peter probably had in mind that they would build them from the materials available on the mountain such as tree branches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of temporary shelter. Alternate translation: “booths”

Mark 9:6

For he did not know what he should answer, for they were terrified

Quote: οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now as a matter of fact, he did not know what he should answer, for they were terrified”

he did not know what he should answer, for they were terrified

Quote: οὐ & ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because they were terrified, he did not know what he should answer”

they were terrified

Quote: ἔκφοβοι & ἐγένοντο (1)

Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”

Mark 9:7

overshadowing

Quote: ἐπισκιάζουσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that: (1) the cloud enveloped or surrounded them. Alternate translation: “enveloping” or “surrounding” (2) the cloud cast a shadow on them. Alternate translation: “casting a shadow on”

them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them could refer to: (1) the three disciples, Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “them all” (2) just Jesus, Moses, and Elijah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Moses, and Elijah”

there was a voice

Quote: ἐγένετο φωνὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Mark is using voice to represent the person who is speaking, which is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person was speaking” or “God the Father spoke”

my beloved Son

Quote: ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

The word Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God.

my beloved Son

Quote: ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my Son, whom I love”

Listen

Quote: ἀκούετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the voice is speaking to the three disciples, the command Listen is plural.

Mark 9:8

suddenly, having looked around, they no longer saw anyone

Quote: ἐξάπινα περιβλεψάμενοι, οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here, the word suddenly could go with: (1) saw. Alternate translation: “having looked around, suddenly they no longer saw anyone” (2) having looked around. Alternate translation: “having suddenly looked around, they no longer saw anyone”

they no longer saw anyone with them, but only Jesus

Quote: οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If it would in appear your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “they only saw Jesus with them any longer”

Mark 9:9

they

Quote: αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The first occurrence of the word they in this verse refers to Jesus and Peter and James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Peter, James, and John”

coming down

Quote: καταβαινόντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of coming. Alternate translation: “going down”

them so that they would relate to no one what they had seen, until the Son of Man had risen from the dead

Quote: αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται, εἰ μὴ ὅταν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Relate to no one what you have seen, until the Son of Man has risen from the dead’”

he ordered them so that they would relate to no one what they had seen

Quote: διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun them and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun they all refer to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen”

the Son of Man

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to himself as the Son of Man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he, who was the Son of Man,”

had risen from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase risen from the dead refers to people who had died then coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “had been restored to life” or “had resurrected”

the dead

Quote: νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses”

Mark 9:10

they kept the word to themselves, discussing together

Quote: τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς, συνζητοῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could mean that: (1) the disciples kept the word to themselves, which means they kept it secret (see the following note). Further, they were discussing together what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “they kept the word to themselves, and they were discussing together” (2) the disciples kept the word, which means that they did what Jesus said. Further, they were discussing among themselves what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “they kept the word, discussing among themselves” or “they obeyed what Jesus said, discussing with each other” (3) the disciples kept the word, which means that they focused on it. Further, they were discussing among themselves what the word meant. Alternate translation: “they seized on the word, discussing among themselves”

they kept the word to themselves

Quote: τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

When people have kept something to themselves, it means that they have not talked about it with anyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they kept the word secret” or “they did not speak to anyone else about the word”

the word

Quote: τὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents an event that could be narrated using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the event” or “the things that they had seen”

discussing together what it is “to rise from the dead

Quote: συνζητοῦντες τί ἐστιν τὸ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “discussing together, ‘What is it “to rise from the dead”?’”

what it is “to rise from the dead

Quote: τί ἐστιν τὸ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the disciples are discussing together what Jesus said about rising from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what Jesus meant when he said, ‘rise from the dead’”

to rise from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι (1)

See how you translated the phrase “risen from the dead” in 9:9.

Mark 9:11

they were questioning

Quote: ἐπηρώτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they asked”

it is necessary for Elijah to come

Quote: Ἠλείαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the disciples are referring to a prophecy in Malachi 4:5–6. This prophecy states that God will send Elijah before the day of the Lord arrives, and he will prepare people. Elijah was a prophet who did many powerful things a long time before Malachi wrote down this prophecy. The scribes teach that this means that Elijah must come before the Messiah does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for Elijah, who was a prophet long ago, to come” or “the Scriptures indicate that it is necessary for Elijah the prophet to come”

to come

Quote: ἐλθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word come refers to Elijah appearing in the world and doing what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to appear” or “to do what he is predicted to do”

first

Quote: πρῶτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the disciples imply that Elijah comes first because he comes before the Messiah does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “first, before the Messiah comes”

Mark 9:12

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

Elijah, having come first, restores all things

Quote: Ἠλείας μὲν ἐλθὼν πρῶτον ἀποκατιστάνει πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe something that is generally true. He does not necessarily mean that Elijah is currently doing these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form is natural for stating a general truth. Alternate translation: “Elijah, having come first, will restore all things”

having come first

Quote: ἐλθὼν πρῶτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated “come first” in 9:11. Alternate translation: “having appeared first, before the Messiah does”

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces something further that Jesus wants the disciples to think about. What he asks about at first appears to contrast with what he has said about Elijah. However, in the following verse Jesus will show how these things actually go together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further, potentially contrasting idea. Alternate translation: “Beyond that, though,” or “And yet,”

how has it been written about the Son of Man that he would suffer many things and be despised

Quote: πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the Son of Man must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised.”

has it been written

Quote: γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through prophets. Alternate translation: “did the prophets say” or “did God have the prophets write”

the Son of Man that he would suffer

Quote: τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα & πάθῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, who am the Son of Man, that I would suffer”

be despised

Quote: ἐξουδενηθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that many would despise him” or “that they would despise him”

Mark 9:13

But

Quote: ἀλλὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces more information about Elijah that contrasts with what Jesus said in the previous verse about Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “And yet” or “Now”

to you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the three disciples, the word you here is plural.

has come

Quote: ἐλήλυθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated come in 9:11. Alternate translation: “has appeared” or “has done what he was predicted to do”

they did … they were wanting

Quote: ἐποίησαν & ἤθελον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns they and they could refer to: (1) people in general who mistreated Elijah. Alternate translation: “certain ones did … they were wanting” (2) the Jewish religious leaders. Alternate translation: “the religious leaders did … they were wanting”

whatever they were wanting

Quote: ὅσα ἤθελον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that whatever they wanted was to mistreat and harm this Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whatever harmful things they were wanting to do” or “any evil things they were wanting to do”

it is written

Quote: γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through prophets. Alternate translation: “the prophets said” or “God had the prophets write”

Mark 9:14

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

having come to the disciples

Quote: ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the rest of the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the rest of the disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain”

having come

Quote: ἐλθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

them … them

Quote: αὐτοὺς & αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, both occurrences of the pronoun them refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John.

Mark 9:15

the whole crowd, having seen him, were amazed

Quote: πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐξεθαμβήθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd saw him, which amazed them”

him, … running up to {him}, … him

Quote: αὐτὸν & προστρέχοντες & αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

All three occurrences of the pronoun him in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus … running to him … him”

Mark 9:16

them, “What are you arguing with them about

Quote: αὐτούς, τί συνζητεῖτε πρὸς αὑτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “them what they were arguing with them about.”

them, “… with them

Quote: αὐτούς & πρὸς αὑτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun them could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun them refers to the scribes. Alternate translation: “his disciples … with the scribes” (2) the scribes. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “the scribes … with my disciples” (3) the people in the crowd. In this case, the second occurrence of the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd … with my disciples”

are you arguing with them about

Quote: συνζητεῖτε πρὸς αὑτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to a group of people (see the previous note), the word you here is plural.

Mark 9:17

I brought my son to you, having a mute spirit

Quote: ἤνεγκα τὸν υἱόν μου πρὸς σέ, ἔχοντα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the man implies that he brought his son so that Jesus would cast out the demon and heal his son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I brought my son to you, having a mute spirit, so that you could cast the spirit out”

having a mute spirit

Quote: ἔχοντα πνεῦμα ἄλαλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the man mean that his son was possessed or controlled by a mute spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being possessed by a mute spirit” or “because a mute spirit possesses him”

a mute spirit

Quote: πνεῦμα ἄλαλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the man implies that the spirit makes his son mute, that is, unable to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a spirit that makes him mute”

Mark 9:18

it might seize him

Quote: αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase seize him refers to when the demon forces a person to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might begin to control him” or “it might force him to do something”

he foams at the mouth

Quote: ἀφρίζει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

When people are having convulsions, they can have trouble breathing or swallowing. This causes white foam to form around their mouths. If your readers would not be familiar with this symptom, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “foam comes out of his mouth” or “he cannot swallow properly”

he becomes stiff

Quote: ξηραίνεται (1)

Alternate translation: “his body stiffens up” or “he cannot move”

I spoke to your disciples so that they would cast it out, and

Quote: εἶπα τοῖς μαθηταῖς σου, ἵνα αὐτὸ ἐκβάλωσιν, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “I asked your disciples, ‘Please cast it out,’ and”

and

Quote: καὶ (6)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces what the disciples were not able to do in contrast to what the man wanted them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”

they were not able

Quote: οὐκ ἴσχυσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The man is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they were not able to cast it out”

Mark 9:19

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

answering them

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Here, the pronoun them is plural, so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly to whom them refers. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here, them probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “answering all of them” or “addressing them all” or “addressing everyone present”

O unbelieving generation, until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you

Quote: ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe

Jesus is speaking to something that he knows cannot hear him. He is addressing the entire generation of people who were living at that time, and they are not all present to hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about this generation. He is actually speaking to the people who were there and who could hear him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to the people who were there, since they are included in the generation that Jesus is addressing. Alternate translation: “You who are part of this unbelieving generation, until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you?”

O unbelieving generation

Quote: ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, generation represents the people who are part of the generation, which means that they are adults who are currently alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “O today’s people who are unbelieving” or “O unbelieving people of this generation”

until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you

Quote: ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were there and to show how frustrated he is by them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “I do not want to be with you for long. I do not want to bear with you for long.” or “I want to leave you! I want to stop bearing with you!”

until when … Until when

Quote: ἕως πότε (-1)

Alternate translation: “how long … How long”

until when will I be with you? Until when will I bear with you

Quote: ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The question until when will I be with you and the question Until when will I bear with you have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “until when will I be with you and endure your unbelief”

you? … with you

Quote: ὑμᾶς & ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the people who are part of the generation, the words you and you here are plural.

will I bear with you

Quote: ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase bear with refers to being charitable or kind to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “will I be charitable to you” or “will I act kindly with you”

Bring

Quote: φέρετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to some people who were there, the command Bring is plural.

him

Quote: αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun him refers to the man’s son. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to him more directly. Alternate translation: “the man’s son” or “the one who has the mute spirit”

Mark 9:20

And they brought him to him, and having seen him, the spirit immediately shook him with convulsions

Quote: καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν & καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In this verse the first and fourth occurrences of the pronoun him refer to the man’s “son”, who was possessed by a mute spirit and was mentioned in Mark 9:17. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions”

And they brought him to him, and having seen him, the spirit immediately shook him with convulsions

Quote: καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν & καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun him refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions”

shook him with convulsions

Quote: συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “caused him to have a seizure”

foaming at the mouth

Quote: ἀφρίζων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the similar phrase in 9:18. Alternate translation: “foam coming out of his mouth” or “not being able to swallow properly”

Mark 9:21

he asked his father, “How much time is it while this has been happening to him?” And he said, “From childhood

Quote: ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “he asked his father how much time it was while this had been happening to him. And he said that it was from childhood.”

How much time is it while this has been happening to him

Quote: πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ (1)

Alternate translation: “For how much time has this been happening to him” or “This has been happening to him for how long of a time”

From childhood

Quote: ἐκ παιδιόθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The father is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “This has been happening to him from childhood”

From childhood

Quote: ἐκ παιδιόθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of childhood, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Since he was very young”

Mark 9:22

but

Quote: ἀλλ’ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word but introduces what the man wants Jesus to do in contrast with what his son is experiencing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave but untranslated. Alternate translation: “and so”

help us, having compassion on us

Quote: βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since Jesus would have compassion on them before he would help them. Alternate translation: “having compassion on us, help us”

help us

Quote: βοήθησον ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you help us”

us, … us

Quote: ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, the man means himself and his son but not Jesus, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

having compassion

Quote: σπλαγχνισθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of compassion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sympathizing with”

Mark 9:23

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “In response,”

If you are able

Quote: εἰ δύνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

With the phrase If you are able, Jesus is repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Why did you say, ‘If you are able’” or “For what reason did you use the words, ‘If you are able’”

If you are able

Quote: τὸ εἰ δύνῃ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the man. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have said, ‘If you are able.’” or “Do not say, ‘If you are able’!”

If you are able

Quote: τὸ εἰ δύνῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Did you speak about whether I was able”

All things are possible for the one believing

Quote: πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus could be stating that All things: (1) can can be done for the one believing. Alternate translation: “All things can be done for the one believing” (2) can be done by the one believing. Alternate translation: “All things can be done by the one believing”

are possible for the one believing

Quote: δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus could be implying that: (1) God can do anything for the one believing in him. Alternate translation: “are possible for God to do for the one believing in him” (2) Jesus can do anything for the one believing in him. Alternate translation: “are possible for me to do for the one believing in me”

Mark 9:24

I believe

Quote: πιστεύω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the man could be implying that he believes: (1) in God and that God will help him and his son. Alternate translation: “I believe in God” or “I believe that God will help us” (2) in Jesus and that Jesus will help him and his son. Alternate translation: “I believe in you” or “I believe that you will help us”

Help my unbelief

Quote: βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the man implies that he wants Jesus to Help him overcome or remove his unbelief. In other words, while the man does believe, he also has unbelief, and he wants Jesus to help him get rid of that unbelief. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Help me overcome the unbelief I still have” or “Assist me in removing my unbelief” or “Help me so that I always believe”

my unbelief

Quote: μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of unbelief, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “me with how I do not believe” or “me whenever I fail to believe”

Mark 9:25

a crowd is running to {them

Quote: ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase a crowd is running to {them} means that more people were running toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them”

saying to it

Quote: λέγων αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he told it”

Mute and deaf spirit

Quote: τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the Jesus implies that the spirit makes the boy mute and deaf, that is, unable to speak or hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Spirit that makes the boy mute and deaf”

come out from him, and never enter into him again

Quote: ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ μηκέτι εἰσέλθῃς εἰς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is commanding the demon to stop possessing or controlling the boy and to never start possessing or controlling him again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “cease controlling him, and never start controlling him again” or “cease possessing him, and never possess him again”

come out

Quote: ἔξελθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “go out”

Mark 9:26

having convulsed him much

Quote: πολλὰ σπαράξας, αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in 9:20. Alternate translation: “having caused him to have a powerful seizure”

it came out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that the demon stopped possessing or controlling the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it no longer controlled him” or “it ceased possessing him”

it came out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “it went out”

he became like a dead {person

Quote: ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Mark is saying that the boy was like a dead {person} because he was lying so still and quietly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he became so quiet and still that he was like a dead person” or “he lay completely still on the ground, like a dead person”

many

Quote: τοὺς πολλοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many of the people there”

said, “He has died

Quote: λέγειν ὅτι ἀπέθανεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “said that he had died”

Mark 9:28

he having gone

Quote: εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who went with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, going”

having gone

Quote: εἰσελθόντος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come”

were asking him privately, “Why were we not able to cast it out

Quote: κατ’ ἰδίαν ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν, ὅτι ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκβαλεῖν αὐτό? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked him privately why they were not able to cast it out.”

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, the speaker means himself and the rest of the disciples but not Jesus, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

it

Quote: αὐτό (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun it refers to the demon which Jesus cast out of the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the demon more directly. Alternate translation: “the demon”

Mark 9:29

This kind

Quote: τοῦτο τὸ γένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that he is speaking about a kind of demon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This kind of demon”

is able to come out by nothing except by prayer and fasting

Quote: ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is able to come out only by prayer and fasting”

to come out

Quote: ἐξελθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “to go out”

prayer and fasting

Quote: προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read prayer and fasting. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “prayer.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 9:30

having gone out

Quote: ἐξελθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come out”

would know

Quote: γνοῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus did not want anyone to know that he was passing through Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “would know that he was there”

Mark 9:31

The Son of Man is being handed over … him. … he will rise up

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται & αὐτόν & ἀναστήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am being handed over … me … I will rise up”

The Son of Man is being handed over

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Someone is handing the Son of Man over”

into the hands

Quote: εἰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The term hands represents power and control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the power” or “into the control”

of men

Quote: ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word men refers to people who have authority and who want to get rid of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of powerful people” or “of people who hate him”

having been killed

Quote: ἀποκτανθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after they have killed him”

he will rise up

Quote: ἀναστήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase rise up refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be restored to life” or “he will resurrect”

after three days

Quote: μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase after three days refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. See how you expressed this phrase in 8:31. Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from then”

Mark 9:32

the word

Quote: τὸ ῥῆμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents what Jesus said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he had just said” or “that teaching”

Mark 9:33

they came

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went”

in the house

Quote: ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the house where Jesus and his disciples were staying in Capernaum. It may have been Peter’s house (see 1:29). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into the house in which they were going to live”

them, “What were you discussing on the way

Quote: αὐτούς, τί ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ διελογίζεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “them what they had been discussing on the way.”

were you discussing

Quote: διελογίζεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word you here is plural.

Mark 9:34

they were silent, for they had been arguing with one another on the way about who {was} greatest

Quote: οἱ & ἐσιώπων, πρὸς ἀλλήλους γὰρ διελέχθησαν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, τίς μείζων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “they had been arguing with one another on the way about who was greatest, so they were silent”

who {was} greatest

Quote: τίς μείζων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, greatest refers to who was the greatest among the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them”

Mark 9:35

having sat down

Quote: καθίσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, teachers usually sat down when they were going to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having sat down to instruct them” or “having sat down as a teacher does”

the Twelve

Quote: τοὺς δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”

If anyone wants to be first, he will be last of all

Quote: εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Being first refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being last refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being first and of being the “least important” as being last. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be respected, he will be the least respected of all” or “If anyone wants to be significant, he will be the least significant of all”

first

Quote: πρῶτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as first, you can express the meaning behind the word first in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “number one”

he will be last of all and a servant of all

Quote: ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act like the last of all and a servant of all”

of all … of all

Quote: πάντων & πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”

Mark 9:36

him … him

Quote: αὐτὸ (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Here, the word translated him refers to the child without identifying whether the child was male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “this child … this child”

in the midst of them

Quote: ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples”

Mark 9:37

Whoever receives one of these little children in my name receives me

Quote: ὃς ἂν ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων δέξηται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐμὲ δέχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if people who receive one of these little children were actually receiving him. He means that these people, by receiving the little children, show that they would receive Jesus too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever receives one of these little children in my name, it is as if he or she received me” or “whoever receives one of these little children in my name proves that he or she would receive me”

one of these little children

Quote: ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to little children like the little child whom he set in their midst (see 9:36). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “any little child like the one standing here” or “any little child, like this one here,”

in my name

Quote: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the phrase in my name could mean that: (1) the person receives a little child because the person follows Jesus. Alternate translation: “because that person is acting as my disciple” (2) the person receives the little child because the little child follows Jesus. Alternate translation: “because the child is my disciple”

whoever receives me does not receive me but the one having sent me

Quote: ὃς ἂν ἐμὲ δέχηται, οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if people who receive him were actually receiving God, who sent him. He means that these people, by receiving him, show that they would receive God too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever receives me, it is as if he or she did not receive me but the one having sent me” or “the one receiving me proves that he or she would not only receive me but also the one having sent me”

does not receive me but the one having sent me

Quote: οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus says does not receive me here as an overstatement for emphasis. He means that the people who receive him are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “receives not just me but also the one having sent me” or “does not receive me only but also the one having sent me”

the one having sent me

Quote: τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the one having sent him is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God, the one who sent me”

Mark 9:38

we saw … we were preventing … with us

Quote: εἴδομέν & ἐκωλύομεν & ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

When John says we and us, he is speaking of himself and the other disciples, so we and us would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction.

in your name

Quote: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. The expression in your name means that the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority”

in your name,and we were preventing him

Quote: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου & καὶ ἐκωλύομεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read in your name, and we were preventing him. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “in your name who does not follow us, and we were preventing him.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

we were preventing him because he was not following with us

Quote: ἐκωλύομεν αὐτόν, ὅτι οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because he was not following with us, we were preventing him”

he was not following with us

Quote: οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, following does not seem to mean “to be one of Jesus’ disciples”, since this man was claiming to act in Jesus’ name. Here, following with us means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was not traveling with us in our group” or “he was not part of our group”

Mark 9:39-40

But Jesus said, “Do not prevent him, for there is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me … For whoever is not against us is for us

Quote: ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν, μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν; οὐδεὶς γάρ ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί με & ὃς γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 9:39 and 9:40 into a verse bridge in order to include the reasons for Jesus’ command not to prevent the man before including the command. Alternate translation: “But Jesus said, ‘Whoever is not against us is for us. In fact, there is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me. Therefore, do not prevent him”

Mark 9:39

Do not prevent him, for there is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me

Quote: μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν; οὐδεὶς γάρ ἐστιν ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου, καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “There is no one who will do a mighty work in my name and will be able soon afterwards to speak evil about me, so do not prevent him”

Do not prevent him

Quote: μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb prevent. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue”

Do not prevent

Quote: μὴ κωλύετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the command Do not prevent is plural.

will do … will be able

Quote: ποιήσει & δυνήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the future tense to describe something that is generally true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever form is natural for stating a general truth. Alternate translation: “does … is able”

in my name

Quote: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

See how you translated name in 9:38. Alternate translation: “on my behalf” or “as my representative” or “by my authority”

to speak evil about

Quote: κακολογῆσαί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evil, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to say evil things about”

Mark 9:40

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason for what Jesus has just told his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a statement, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “Here is why:”

is not against us is for us

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase against us describes people who attack or hate Jesus and his disciples. The phrase for us describes people who support or are friendly to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable phrases or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is not our enemy is our friend” or “is not attacking us is helping us”

us … us

Quote: ἡμῶν (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By us, Jesus means himself and his disciples, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

Mark 9:41

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an example that explains what Jesus has just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “Here is what I mean:”

whoever gives you a cup of water

Quote: ὃς & ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus speaks about giving someone a cup of water to drink as an example of one small way in which a person can help another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this is an example, or you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “whoever, for example, gives you a cup of water” or “whoever helps you in any way”

you … you are … to you

Quote: ὑμᾶς & ἐστε & ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is talking to his disciples, the word you throughout this verse is plural.

in the name that

Quote: ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase in the name that introduces the reason or basis for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground that” or “since”

you are Christ’s

Quote: Χριστοῦ ἐστε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first-person form. Alternate translation: “you belong to me, Christ”

he will certainly not lose

Quote: οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Jesus is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative phrase, certainly not, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, lose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “he will most certainly receive”

he will certainly not lose his reward

Quote: οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the pronouns he and his are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose his or her reward”

certainly not

Quote: οὐ μὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”

Mark 9:42

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces a situation that contrasts with the situation that Jesus described in the previous verse. In this verse, people are harming instead of helping Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “However,”

causes one of these little ones who believe in me to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes one of these little ones who believe in me to sin”

one of these little ones who believe in me

Quote: ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase these little ones could refer: (1) to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these unimportant people who believe in me” (2) to children who love Jesus and who are physically little compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (3) to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these people who recently believed in me”

it is better for him instead if

Quote: καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that what he is about to describe is better than being punished by God for causing one of these little ones to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “rather than being punished by God for doing that, it is better for him if”

for him … his … he has been thrown

Quote: αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & βέβληται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms him, his, and he are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “for that person … his or her … he or she has been thrown”

a millstone of a donkey is put around his neck and he has been thrown into the sea

Quote: περίκειται μύλος ὀνικὸς περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ, καὶ βέβληται εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that people might put a millstone of a donkey around his neck and throw him into the sea”

a millstone of a donkey

Quote: μύλος ὀνικὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A millstone was a round stone used for grinding grain into flour. The phrase of a donkey indicates that this kind of millstone was heavy enough that it took a donkey to turn it. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of stone, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a very large rock” or “a very heavy object”

is put around his neck

Quote: περίκειται & περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that someone would tie the millstone around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is attached to his neck”

Mark 9:43

if your hand causes you to stumble

Quote: ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical

Jesus is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that the disciples might experience their hand causing them to stumble. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “consider this situation: your hand causes you to stumble. If that were to happen”

your hand causes you to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here, Jesus speaks of your foot as if they were a person who could cause you to stumble. He means that the hand is the part of the body that is involved in the stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is your hand’s fault that you stumble” or “you stumble with your hand”

your … causes you to stumble, cut it off. … for you

Quote: σκανδαλίσῃ σε & σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν & σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd

Even though Jesus is speaking to many disciples, he is addressing an individual situation, so your and you throughout this verse as well as the command cut it off are singular. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who is speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. If you do so, you may also need to make some other words plural.

causes you to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλίσῃ σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to sin”

cut it off

Quote: ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here Jesus provides the most extreme response to sinning. He does not mean that this should be the normal way to deal with sin. You should preserve the extreme language Jesus uses, but you could use a form that indicates that this is the most extreme example. Alternate translation: “if necessary you should even cut it off!”

to enter into life

Quote: εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if life were a house into which someone could enter. He is referring to experiencing or receiving life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience life” or “to receive life”

to enter into life

Quote: εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be able to live”

life

Quote: τὴν ζωὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that this life is everlasting or undying life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “true life” or “everlasting life”

Gehenna

Quote: τὴν Γέενναν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus uses the name Gehenna to refer to hell. The valley named Gehenna was outside the city of Jerusalem and was a place where people threw out and burned garbage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley”

into the unquenchable fire

Quote: εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον (1)

Here, the phrase the unquenchable fire refers to Gehenna, or hell, and describes it as a very unpleasant place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which is as hot as unquenchable fire” or “a terrible place”

Mark 9:44

where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched

Quote: ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.

where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched

Quote: ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the author describes hell as if it were a place where there were worms and fire. He means that it is a very unpleasant place where people experience punishment and pain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “where it is as if their worm does not end, and it is as if the fire is not quenched” or “which is like a place where their worm does not end and the fire is not quenched”

their worm

Quote: ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun their refers to people who are in Gehenna. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the worm of the people there”

their worm

Quote: ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the author is using the possessive form to describe a worm that devours them. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worm that devours them”

worm does not end

Quote: ὁ σκώληξ & οὐ τελευτᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people were being devoured by only one worm, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “worms do not end”

does not end

Quote: οὐ τελευτᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

The author is referring to death in a polite way by using the word end. He means that the worm continues to devour the people there because it never dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “does not pass away” or “does not die” or “never ceases to devour”

the fire is not quenched

Quote: τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people do not quench the fire”

the fire

Quote: τὸ πῦρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the author implies that the fire burns the people who are in Gehenna. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the fire that burns them”

Mark 9:45

if your foot causes you to stumble, cut it off. It is better for you to enter into life lame than, having two feet

Quote: ἐὰν ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἀπόκοψον αὐτόν; καλόν ἐστίν σε εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν, ἢ τοὺς δύο πόδας ἔχοντα (1)

Here Jesus repeats what he said in 9:43 except he refers to a foot and being lame rather than a “hand” and being “crippled.” Express the idea as you did there, making the necessary changes to refer to a foot.

to be thrown

Quote: βληθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you”

Gehenna

Quote: τὴν Γέενναν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated Gehenna in 9:43. Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley”

Gehenna

Quote: τὴν Γέενναν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read Gehenna. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add the words “into the unquenchable fire” after Gehenna. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 9:46

where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched

Quote: ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. Since this verse is identical to 9:44, those who decide to include it should express the idea as they did there.

Mark 9:47

if your eye causes you to stumble

Quote: ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical

Jesus is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that the disciples might experience their eye causing them to stumble. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “consider this situation: your eye causes you to stumble. If that were to happen”

your eye causes you to stumble

Quote: ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here, Jesus speaks of your eye as if it were a person who could cause you to stumble. He means that the eye is the part of the body that is involved in the stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is your eye’s fault that you stumble” or “you stumble with your eye”

your … causes you to stumble, throw it out. … for you

Quote: σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν & σέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd

Even though Jesus is speaking to many disciples, he is addressing an individual situation, so your and you throughout this verse as well as the command throw it out are singular. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who is speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. If you do so, you may also need to make some other words plural.

causes you to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλίζῃ σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus is speaking of sinning as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to sin”

throw it out

Quote: ἔκβαλε αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here Jesus provides the most extreme response to sinning. He does not mean that this should be the normal way to deal with sin. You should preserve the extreme language Jesus uses, but you could use a form that indicates that this is the most extreme example. Alternate translation: “if necessary you should even throw it out!”

to be thrown

Quote: βληθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you”

Gehenna

Quote: τὴν Γέενναν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated Gehenna in 9:43. Alternate translation: “a place like the valley of Gehenna” or “hell, which is like Gehenna valley”

Mark 9:48

where their worm does not end, and the fire is not quenched

Quote: ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ, καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus describes hell as if it were a place where there were worms and fire. He means that it is a very unpleasant place where people experience punishment and pain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “where it is as if their worm does not end, and it is as if the fire is not quenched” or “which is like a place where their worm does not end and the fire is not quenched”

their worm

Quote: ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun their refers to people who are in Gehenna. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the worm of the people there”

their worm

Quote: ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a worm that devours them. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worm that devours them”

worm does not end

Quote: ὁ σκώληξ & οὐ τελευτᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people were being devoured by only one worm, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “worms do not end”

does not end

Quote: οὐ τελευτᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Jesus is referring to death in a polite way by using the word end. He means that the worm continues to devour the people there because it never dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “does not pass away” or “does not die” or “never ceases to devour”

the fire is not quenched

Quote: τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people do not quench the fire”

the fire

Quote: τὸ πῦρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the fire burns the people who are in Gehenna. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the fire that burns them”

Mark 9:49

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an explanation related to what Jesus has just said about using extreme means to make sure that one does not sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As a matter of fact,”

everyone will be salted

Quote: πᾶς & ἁλισθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone”

will be salted with fire

Quote: πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if people were food or sacrifices that will be salted with fire. In Jesus’ culture, people would put salt on their food and on sacrifices that they offered to God. The salt preserved the food and made it taste better. When someone is salted with fire, it most likely refers to that person experiencing difficult or painful situations that eventually help and sanctify that person. However, Jesus does not explain the metaphor, and Christians disagree on what it means. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. If necessary, you could state more explicitly that Jesus is referring to some form of suffering and its effects on people. Alternate translation: “will experience something like being salted with fire” or “will suffer as if they were being burned, and that will help them as if they were being salted”

with fire

Quote: πυρὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read with fire. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and every sacrifice will be salted with salt” after with fire. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 9:50

Salt is good

Quote: καλὸν τὸ ἅλας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the disciples, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: Salt is good”

if the salt becomes unsalty, with what

Quote: ἐὰν & τὸ ἅλας ἄναλον γένηται, ἐν τίνι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical

Jesus means that it is possible for salt to become unsalty, and he is speaking about what can or cannot happen after salt has become unsalty. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “suppose that the salt becomes unsalty. With what”

becomes unsalty

Quote: ἄναλον γένηται (1)

Alternate translation: “loses its salty taste”

with what will you season it

Quote: ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to show that no one can make ruined salt salty again. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you cannot season it with anything!” or “you are not able to season it.”

will you season it

Quote: αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε (1)

Alternate translation: “will you make it taste salty again”

will you season … Have … be at peace

Quote: ἀρτύσετε & ἔχετε & εἰρηνεύετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is talking to his disciples, the word you and the commands Have and be at peace are plural.

Have salt in yourselves

Quote: ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus commands his disciples to have salt in themselves. Just as salt makes food better in many ways, so Jesus’ disciples can make the world better in many ways. If possible, preserve the figure of speech or use simile form since it refers back to the illustration Jesus just gave. Alternate translation: “Be like food that has salt in it” or “Help others as if you had salt in yourselves”

be at peace

Quote: εἰρηνεύετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “act peaceably”

Mark 10

Mark 10 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus instructs his disciples and journeys toward Jerusalem (8:22–10:52)
   • Jesus teaches about marriage and divorce (10:1–12)
   • Jesus blesses little children (10:13–16)
   • Jesus talks with a rich man (10:17–22)
   • Jesus teaches about wealth, possessions, and the kingdom (10:23–31)
   • Jesus predicts his death and resurrection (10:32–34)
   • Jesus and the disciples speak about who will be great (10:35–45)
   • Jesus heals blind Bartimaeus (10:46–52)

Some translations set quotations farther to the right than the rest of the text to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations in 10:6–8, which are from Genesis 1:27 and Genesis 2:24.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Divorce

In 10:2, the Pharisees test Jesus by asking him about an issue that was controversial among Jewish religious leaders: divorce. More specifically, the religious leaders argued about whether men could divorce their wives and about what were valid grounds for divorce. So, they ask Jesus about this. When Jesus asks what Moses wrote in the Law, the Pharisees refer to Deuteronomy 24:1–4, which assumes that men do divorce their wives. Jesus responds that this section of the Law exists only because the Israelites were stubborn. He means that God knew that the Israelite men would sometimes divorce their wives, so he included a law about how to do it. Then Jesus argues that divorce is never what God wants, and he quotes from Genesis 1 and 2 to prove this. He further says that any divorced person who marries again is involved in adultery. Make sure that it is clear that both Jesus and the Pharisees are making arguments based on the Scriptures.

Rich people and the kingdom of God

In Jesus’ culture, many people thought that rich people had been specifically blessed by God. When Jesus said that it was extremely difficult for rich people to enter God’s kingdom (see 10:23–25), the disciples were shocked. They thought that if it was hard for rich people to enter the kingdom, it would be impossible for everyone else. That is why they ask the question, “And who is able to be saved?” (10:26). If your readers might not understand why the disciples respond in this way, you may need to include a footnote that explains some of this information.

Sitting at Jesus’ right and left hand

In 10:37 and 10:40, Jesus and James and John refer to sitting at Jesus’ right hand and at his left hand. They are referring to the places of honor at the right and left side of a king or ruler. The people who sit in these places have authority and are respected the most after the king or ruler. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation. See the notes on these two verses for translation options.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Drinking the cup

In 10:38–39, Jesus refers to a “cup” from which he is going to drink. He is using a figure of speech from the Old Testament that refers to experiencing suffering and pain (for example, see Psalm 75:8 and Isaiah 51:17). He means that he will experience suffering, and his disciples must be ready to experience it as well. Since this figure of speech is from the Old Testament, if possible you should preserve it or express the idea in simile form. (See: Metaphor)

Being baptized with a baptism

In 10:38–39, Jesus refers to a “baptism” with which he and his disciples will be “baptized.” He means that, just as people who are baptized are covered with water, he and his disciples will be overwhelmed by suffering and difficult circumstances. Since baptism is an important concept in the Bible, if possible you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Most of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in conversations, and many of the conversations are with one person. Because of this, the majority of the forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. So, you should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 5, 19, and 35. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 10:1

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”

he goes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, goes”

he goes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “comes” instead of goes. Alternate translation: “he comes”

from that place

Quote: ἐκεῖθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase that place refers to Capernaum (see 9:33). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from Capernaum”

beyond the Jordan

Quote: πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου (1)

Here, the phrase beyond the Jordan refers to regions to the east of the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the areas on the east side of the Jordan River”

come together

Quote: συνπορεύονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “go together”

he had been accustomed {to do

Quote: εἰώθει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was his custom” or “he generally did”

Mark 10:2

him whether it is lawful for a husband to divorce a wife, testing him

Quote: αὐτὸν, εἰ ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γυναῖκα ἀπολῦσαι? πειράζοντες αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Is it lawful for a husband to divorce his wife?’ testing him”

testing him

Quote: πειράζοντες αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Here, the word testing introduces the purpose for which the Pharisees asked Jesus this question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “which they asked to test him” or “with the goal of testing him”

Mark 10:3

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

said to them, “What did Moses command you

Quote: εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, τί ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Μωϋσῆς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked them what Moses commanded them.”

What did Moses command you

Quote: τί ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Μωϋσῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to what the Law that God gave the Israelites through Moses includes about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What laws about divorce did God give you through Moses” or “What did Moses write for you in the Law about divorce”

you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the word you here is plural.

Mark 10:4

Moses permitted him to write a certificate of divorce and to divorce her

Quote: ἐπέτρεψεν Μωϋσῆς βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι καὶ ἀπολῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the Pharisees are referring to a specific section in the law that God gave to Moses (see Deuteronomy 24:1–4). This passage discusses divorce and remarriage, and it mentions the use of a certificate of divorce. The Pharisees interpreted this passage to mean that men could divorce their wives, but they had to use a certificate of divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “In the Law, Moses permitted a husband to write a certificate of divorce and then to divorce his wife”

to write a certificate of divorce

Quote: βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the Pharisees imply that the husband must also give the certificate of divorce to his wife. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to write a certificate of divorce, to give it to her,”

a certificate of divorce

Quote: βιβλίον ἀποστασίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A certificate of divorce is a written document that makes the divorce official. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of document, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a paper that testifies to the divorce”

Mark 10:5

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

Because of your hardness of heart

Quote: πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase your hardness of heart refers to obstinacy or unwillingness to listen and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Because you are hardheaded” or “Because you are so stubborn”

Because of your hardness of heart

Quote: πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hardness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because your hearts are hard”

your … to you

Quote: ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the words your and you here are plural.

Mark 10:6-8

But from the beginning of creation, He made them male and female … Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother … and the two will be one flesh.’ So then, they are no longer two, but one flesh

Quote: ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς & ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα & καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν; ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But from the beginning of creation, as the Scriptures say, God made them male and female. The Scriptures say further that, because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh. So then, I tell you that they are no longer two, but one flesh”

Mark 10:6

from the beginning of creation

Quote: ἀπὸ & ἀρχῆς κτίσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase from the beginning of creation refers to when God created everything that exists. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the beginning of the world” or “at the time when God made the creation”

He made them male and female

Quote: ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Genesis 1:27. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “in the words of the Scriptures, ‘He made them male and female’” or “as the Scriptures say, ‘He made them male and female’”

Mark 10:7-8

Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother … and the two will be one flesh

Quote: ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα & καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Genesis 2:24. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Further, again in the words of the Scriptures, ‘Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh’” or “The Scriptures also say, ‘Because of this, a man will leave his father and mother, and the two will be one flesh’”

Mark 10:7

Because of this

Quote: ἕνεκεν τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The pronoun this refers to what the previous verse includes about how God created people male and female (see 10:6). If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to those ideas more directly. Alternate translation: “Because God created people that way”

a man will leave his father and mother

Quote: καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The word man represents men in general in general, not one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “men will leave their fathers and mothers” or “men will leave their parents”

a man will leave

Quote: καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the author of the quotation implies that this happens when the man gets married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he gets married, a man will leave”

will leave

Quote: καταλείψει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the future tense to speak about something that is generally true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is most naturally for expressing a general truth. Alternate translation: “leaves”

and mother

Quote: καὶ τὴν μητέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words after and mother. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and will be joined to his wife” after and mother. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 10:8

the two will be one flesh

Quote: ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the two are one flesh. He means that a husband and wife are so closely joined that it is as if they had one flesh or one body between them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the two will be like one flesh” or “the two will be as closely united as possible”

the two

Quote: οἱ δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the number two as a noun to refer to a husband and a wife together. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this number with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the two of them” or “the two spouses”

So then

Quote: ὥστε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the phrase So then introduces a conclusion or inference based on the words Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “As you can see”

they are no longer two, but one flesh

Quote: οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus repeats in different form the words from the figure of speech at the end of the quotation earlier in this verse. He means that a husband and wife are so closely joined that it is as if they had one flesh or one body between them. Express the idea as you did earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “it is as if they are no longer two, but they are like one flesh” or “they are no longer two separate people, but are as closely united as possible”

Mark 10:9

Therefore

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word Therefore introduces a conclusion or inference based on what Jesus has said about marriage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then”

what God joined together

Quote: ὃ & ὁ Θεὸς συνέζευξεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase what God joined together refers to any married couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those whom God has joined together as husband and wife” or “couples whom God has joined together”

let man not separate

Quote: ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “man should not separate”

man

Quote: ἄνθρωπος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Here, although the term man is masculine, it is used in a generic sense to refer to any person, male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person” or “humans”

Mark 10:10

in the house again, the disciples were asking him about this

Quote: εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν πάλιν, οἱ μαθηταὶ περὶ τούτου ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here, the word again could go with: (1) in the house. Alternate translation: “again in the house, the disciples were asking him about this” (2) asked. Alternate translation: “in the house, the disciples were asking him again about this”

in the house

Quote: εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase the house refers to the place where Jesus and his disciples were staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the house in which they were living”

this

Quote: τούτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The word this refers to the conversation that Jesus just had with the Pharisees about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the conversation he had just had with the Pharisees”

Mark 10:11

another

Quote: ἄλλην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective another as a noun to mean another woman. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “another person”

commits adultery against her

Quote: μοιχᾶται ἐπ’ αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of adultery, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “becomes an adulterer against her” or “does what is adulterous against her”

Mark 10:12

she

Quote: αὐτὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun she refers to any married woman. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to married women more directly. Alternate translation: “a wife”

another

Quote: ἄλλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective another as a noun to mean another man. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “another person”

she commits adultery

Quote: μοιχᾶται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of adultery, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “she becomes an adulteress” or “she does what is adulterous”

Mark 10:13

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And it happened that” or “After this,”

they were bringing

Quote: προσέφερον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “other people were bringing”

he might touch them

Quote: αὐτῶν ἅψηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Mark’s culture, when Jesus wouldtouch the little children, that would express God’s love for them and convey God’s blessing to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what laying his hands on them means. Alternate translation: “he might stretch out his hands toward them” or “he might touch them to bless them”

them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the people who were bringing the little children. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who were bringing the little children”

Mark 10:14

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the disciples were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,”

Permit the little children to come to me, and do not forbid them, for of the ones such as these is the kingdom of God

Quote: ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά; τῶν γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Of the ones such as these is the kingdom of God, so permit the little children to come to me, and do not forbid them”

Permit the little children to come to me, and do not forbid them

Quote: ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses. Alternate translation: “Permit the little children to come to me; yes, do not forbid them” or “Permit the little children to come to me”

Permit … do not forbid

Quote: ἄφετε & μὴ κωλύετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the commands Permit and do not forbid are plural.

to come

Quote: ἔρχεσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “to go”

of the ones such as these is the kingdom of God

Quote: τῶν & τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe people who belong in the kingdom of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God belongs to the ones such as these” or “the ones such as these belong in the kingdom of God”

of the ones such as these

Quote: τῶν & τοιούτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun these refers to the little children. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to the little children more directly. Alternate translation: “of the ones such as these little children”

of the ones such as these

Quote: τῶν & τοιούτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Jesus is referring to the little children and to people who are like them. He does not indicate exactly how these people are like the little children, so if possible express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “of people who are like these”

Mark 10:15

to you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word you here is plural.

whoever does not receive the kingdom of God as a little child will certainly not enter into it

Quote: ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν (1)

If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in positive form. Alternate translation: “only whoever receives the kingdom of God as a little child will enter into it”

as a little child

Quote: ὡς παιδίον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Jesus is saying that his disciples should be like a little child because little children are humble and thankfully receive gifts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a little child receives things” or “with humility like that of a little child”

certainly not

Quote: οὐ μὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”

Mark 10:16

placing his hands on them

Quote: τιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Mark’s culture, when Jesus placed his hands on the little children, that expressed God’s love for them and conveyed God’s blessing to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what having laid his hands on them means. See how you translated “touch them” in 10:13. Alternate translation: “stretching out his hands toward them” or “which he did by placing his hands on them”

Mark 10:17

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,”

he

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples,”

going out

Quote: ἐκπορευομένου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “coming out”

one, having run up to {him} and having knelt before him, was asking him

Quote: προσδραμὼν εἷς καὶ γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν, ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a man as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a man ran up to him. He knelt before him and was asking him”

having knelt before him

Quote: γονυπετήσας αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In this man’s culture, kneeling down before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what kneeling down means. Alternate translation: “having prostrated himself before him” or “having bowed down to him in respect”

I might inherit eternal life

Quote: ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the man speaks as if he were a child who would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that he wants to receive eternal life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I might receive eternal life” or “I might be given eternal life”

I might inherit eternal life

Quote: ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I might be able to live eternally”

Mark 10:18

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

Why are you calling me good? No one {is} good except one—God

Quote: τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “No one is good except one—God. So, why are you calling me good?”

Why are you calling me good

Quote: τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the man for calling another human good without thinking carefully about it. Jesus is not denying that he is good, but he wants the man to think about it more carefully. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are calling me good without thinking carefully.” or “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good!”

No one {is} good except one—God

Quote: οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Only one is good—God” or “No person is good—only God is good”

Mark 10:19

You know the commandments—do not kill, do not commit adultery, do not steal, do not testify falsely, do not defraud, honor your father and mother

Quote: τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes commands from the law that God gave to Moses. The first four commands and the sixth command come from either Exodus 20:12–16 or Deuteronomy 5:16–20. The fifth command is not directly quoted from the law that God gave Moses, but it may be a summary of the command found in Exodus 20:17 or Deuteronomy 5:21. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “You know the commandments—as you can read in the Scriptures, ‘Do not kill, do not commit adultery, do not steal, do not testify falsely, do not defraud, honor your father and your mother’”

do not kill, do not commit adultery, do not steal, do not testify falsely, do not defraud, honor your father and mother

Quote: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since in these commands God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the commands are singular.

do not commit adultery

Quote: μὴ μοιχεύσῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of adultery, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “do not be an adulterer or adulteress” or “do not do what is adulterous”

Mark 10:20

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

from my youth

Quote: ἐκ νεότητός μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of youth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “since the time when I was a young man” or “from when I was a child”

Mark 10:21

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

One thing you lack

Quote: ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ (1)

Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done”

give to the poor

Quote: δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the man should give the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “give what you earn to the poor”

to the poor

Quote: τοῖς πτωχοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective poor as a noun to mean poor people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor”

and

Quote: καὶ (3)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces the result that will follow if the man does sell what he owns and give to the poor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and as a result”

come, follow me

Quote: δεῦρο, ἀκολούθει μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the clause come, follow me is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “come with me as my student”

follow me

Quote: ἀκολούθει μοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts do not include any words after follow me. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “having taken up the cross” after the words follow me. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 10:22

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces how the man reacted in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “But then”

he, having become downcast at this word, went away being grieved, for he was having many possessions

Quote: ὁ & στυγνάσας ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ, ἀπῆλθεν λυπούμενος; ἦν γὰρ ἔχων κτήματα πολλά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the third clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “because he was having many possessions, having become downcast at this word, he went away being grieved”

having become downcast

Quote: στυγνάσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase having become downcast indicates that the man became sad and mournful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his face falling” or “having become mournful”

this word

Quote: τῷ λόγῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents what Jesus just said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ statement” or “the words that Jesus said”

being grieved

Quote: λυπούμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “being very sorrowful”

he was having many possessions

Quote: ἦν & ἔχων κτήματα πολλά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the young man did not want to sell these possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he was having many possessions that he did not want to sell”

Mark 10:23

How difficultly do the ones having riches enter into the kingdom of God

Quote: πῶς δυσκόλως οἱ τὰ χρήματα ἔχοντες, εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελεύσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

This is an exclamation that is emphasizing how difficult it is for rich people to enter into the kingdom of God. Use an exclamation that would communicate that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “You see that the ones having riches very difficultly enter into the kingdom of God!” or “Only with difficulty do the ones having riches enter into the kingdom of God!”

Mark 10:24

the disciples were astonished at his words

Quote: οἱ & μαθηταὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο ἐπὶ τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus’ words. Alternate translation: “his words astonished the disciples”

answering

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word answering indicates that Jesus is responding to how the disciples reacted to what he had said. He is not responding to something that they said to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “responding to their astonishment” or “in response”

Children

Quote: τέκνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus calls his disciples Children to indicate that they are under his spiritual care and that he cares for them. The disciples were not actually Jesus’ children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that a teacher or leader would use for the people whom that person teaches or leads. Alternate translation: “My dear disciples” or “Young men”

it is to enter

Quote: ἐστιν & εἰσελθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read it is to enter. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “it is for the ones trusting in riches to enter.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 10:25

It is easier for a camel to pass through an eye of a needle than for a rich {person} to enter into the kingdom of God

Quote: εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Here Jesus compares a rich {person} entering the kingdom of God with something that is impossible: a camel passing through an eye of a needle. Jesus does this to emphasize how hard it is for a rich {person} to enter into the kingdom of God. As 10:27 shows, Jesus does not think that this is completely impossible, however. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea here in such a way that it does not sound as if it is totally impossible for a rich {person} to enter into the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “Consider how difficult it is for a camel to pass through an eye of a needle. That illustrates how difficult it is for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God”

an eye of a needle

Quote: τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The phrase an eye of a needle refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing needle through which the thread passes. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of tool or the hole in it, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term for a small opening. Alternate translation: “the small hole at the end of a needle” or “a very small hole”

Mark 10:26

they were greatly astonished, saying

Quote: οἱ & περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “what the disciples heard astonished them greatly, and they said”

to him

Quote: πρὸς αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read to him. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “to themselves.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

And who is able to be saved

Quote: καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The disciples are using the question form to express their astonishment. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So it seems that no one is able to be saved.” or “So no one is able to be saved!”

who is able to be saved

Quote: τίς δύναται σωθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation: “who can receive salvation” or “whom will God save”

Mark 10:27

With men {it is} impossible, but not with God. For all things {are} possible with God

Quote: παρὰ ἀνθρώποις ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ; πάντα γὰρ δυνατὰ παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “All things are possible with God. Because of that, with men it is impossible, but not with God”

With men {… with God. … with God

Quote: παρὰ ἀνθρώποις & παρὰ Θεῷ & παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ. (1)

Alternate translation: “For men … for God … for God”

men

Quote: ἀνθρώποις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans”

it is} impossible

Quote: ἀδύνατον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring back to what the disciples asked about whether anyone can be saved (see 10:26). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “being saved is impossible”

but not with God

Quote: ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but it is not impossible with God”

Mark 10:28

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks the person to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Excuse me” or “Listen”

we

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

By we, Peter means himself and the disciples but not Jesus, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction.

have followed you

Quote: ἠκολουθήκαμέν σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase have followed you indicates that the disciples traveled with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have become your disciples” or “have traveled with you as your students”

Mark 10:29-30

there is no one who … who will not receive

Quote: οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς & ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase no one and the negative phrase who will not receive. Alternate translation: “everyone who … will receive”

Mark 10:29

to you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word you here is plural.

for the sake of me and of the gospel

Quote: ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

When Jesus says for the sake of me and of the gospel, he means that some people have left all these things because they are his disciples and because they believe the gospel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he is my disciple and believes the gospel” or “because he believes in me and in the gospel”

Mark 10:30

100 times {as much

Quote: ἑκατονταπλασίονα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers

Here Jesus is using a round number (100) indicates a large number of times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression for a large number or state more explicitly that 100 is a round number. Alternate translation: “very many times as much” or “something like 100 times as much”

now in this time: … in the age that is coming

Quote: νῦν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ & ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase this time refers to the time before God judges everyone and renews the world, and the phrase the age that is coming refers to the time after God judges everyone and renews the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable phrases or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “now in this life … in the life that is coming” or “now before God judges everyone … after God judges everyone” or “right now … later”

and lands with persecutions

Quote: καὶ ἀγροὺς, μετὰ διωγμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of persecutions, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and lands, although that person will be persecuted” or “and lands, along with being persecuted”

eternal life

Quote: ζωὴν αἰώνιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that person will live eternally”

Mark 10:31

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next thing, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Yes,” or “Indeed,”

many first will be last, and last, first

Quote: πολλοὶ & ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus is speaking of important or respected people as if they were first and of unimportant or non-respected people as if they were last. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many respected will be non-respected, and non-respected, respected” or “many significant will be insignificant, and insignificant, significant”

first … and last

Quote: πρῶτοι & καὶ ἔσχατοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjectives first and last as nouns to mean first and last people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “first people … and last people” or “people who are first … and people who are last”

and last, first

Quote: καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and many last will be first”

Mark 10:32

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word Now introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later on,” or “After that,”

going up

Quote: ἀναβαίνοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “coming up”

they were amazed

Quote: ἐθαμβοῦντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was how Jesus was going ahead of them. Alternate translation: “how he was going ahead amazed the disciples”

the ones following behind

Quote: οἱ & ἀκολουθοῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Some people were walking behind Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” or “the other people who were traveling with them”

the Twelve

Quote: τοὺς δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had chosen to be apostles”

Mark 10:33-34

the Son of Man … him … him … him … him … him … kill {him}, … he will rise

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἀποκτενοῦσιν & ἀναστήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, … me … me … me … me … me … kill me … I rise”

Mark 10:33

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention:” or “Listen”

we are going up

Quote: ἀναβαίνομεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

When Jesus says we, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so we would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form.

we are going up

Quote: ἀναβαίνομεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “we are coming up”

the Son of Man will be handed over

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone will hand the Son of Man over”

to death

Quote: θανάτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to die”

to the Gentiles

Quote: τοῖς ἔθνεσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is speaking specifically of Gentiles who rule or control the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Gentiles who rule” or “to the Gentiles who are in charge”

Mark 10:34

spit on him

Quote: ἐμπτύσουσιν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, people would spit on someone to insult that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “spit on him to dishonor him”

after three days

Quote: μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here, the phrase after three days refers to the day after tomorrow. People in Jesus’ culture counted the current day as day one, tomorrow as day two, and the day after tomorrow as day three. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the day after tomorrow. See how you expressed this phrase in 8:31. Alternate translation: “on the day after the next day” or “two days from then”

he will rise

Quote: ἀναστήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word rise refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be restored to life” or “he will resurrect”

Mark 10:35

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. It happened sometime soon after Jesus spoke the words recorded in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,” or “After Jesus said those things,”

we desire that whatever we ask you, you do for us

Quote: θέλομεν ἵνα ὃ ἐὰν αἰτήσωμέν σε, ποιήσῃς ἡμῖν (1)

Alternate translation: “if we ask you to do something for us, will you do it?” or “Please do for us whatever we ask you to do.”

we desire … we ask … for us

Quote: θέλομεν & αἰτήσωμέν & ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, the pronouns we and us refer only to James and John, and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.

Mark 10:36

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to James and John”

do you desire {… for you

Quote: θέλετε & ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the word you is plural throughout this verse.

Mark 10:37

they

Quote: οἱ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John”

Grant to us … we might sit

Quote: δὸς ἡμῖν & καθίσωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, the pronouns us and we refer only to James and John, so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.

Grant to us

Quote: δὸς ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you grant to us”

we might sit in your glory, one at your right hand and one at your left hand

Quote: εἷς σου ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου καθίσωμεν ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

When someone sits at the right hand or at the left hand of a ruler, this symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “we might in your glory sit down to rule, one at your right hand and one at your left hand” or “we might in your glory take the places of honor and authority, one at your right hand and one at your left hand”

in your glory

Quote: ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase in your glory refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with you when you rule gloriously” or “with you when you become a great ruler”

in your glory

Quote: ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with you when you are glorified” or “by you when you are glorious”

one at your right hand and one at your left hand

Quote: εἷς σου ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the phrases at your right hand and at your left hand refer to the places next to Jesus’ right and left hands, which would be the right side and the left side. In the Jesus’ culture, these sides were associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side” and “left side.” Make sure that your readers understand that these sides indicate that the two sons of Zebedee would have honor and authority when they sit there. Alternate translation: “one next to you on the right and one next to you on the left” or “one in the honorable place at your right and one in the honorable place at your left”

Mark 10:38

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what James and John asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

You do not know … you are asking. Are you able

Quote: οὐκ οἴδατε & αἰτεῖσθε & δύνασθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the words You and you are plural throughout this verse.

You do not know

Quote: οὐκ οἴδατε (1)

Alternate translation: “You do not understand”

to drink the cup which I drink

Quote: πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of experiencing pain and suffering as if it were drinking from a cup. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to drink the cup of suffering which I drink” or “to experience the pain that I am about to experience”

the cup

Quote: τὸ ποτήριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, cup represents the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would probably have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the drink” or “the wine in the cup”

to be baptized with the baptism with which I am being baptized

Quote: τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances and pain as if it were being baptized. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be baptized in the painful circumstances in which I am about to be baptized” or “to be overwhelmed by difficult things like I am about to be overwhelmed”

to be baptized with the baptism with which

Quote: τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ & βαπτισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression with the baptism with which contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “to be baptized as”

to be baptized … I am being baptized

Quote: ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “to have someone baptize you … someone will baptize me”

Mark 10:39

they … to them

Quote: οἱ & αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronouns they and them refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John”

We are able

Quote: δυνάμεθα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The James and John are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We are able to drink that cup and be baptized with that baptism” or “We are able to undergo those things”

But

Quote: δὲ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

The cup that I drink, you will drink

Quote: τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus continues to speak of experiencing pain and suffering as if it were drinking from a cup. See how you translated this figure of speech in 10:38. Alternate translation: “The cup of suffering that I drink, you will drink” or “The pain that I am about to experience, you will experience”

The cup

Quote: τὸ ποτήριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, cup represents the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would probably have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the idea in 10:38. Alternate translation: “the drink” or “the wine in the cup”

you will drink, … you will be baptized

Quote: πίεσθε & βαπτισθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to James and John, the word you is plural throughout this verse.

with the baptism with which I am being baptized, you will be baptized

Quote: τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus continues to speak of being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances and pain as if it were being baptized. See how you translated this figure of speech in 10:38. Alternate translation: “in the painful circumstances in which I am about to be baptized, you will be baptized” or “by the difficult things that I am about to be overwhelmed by, you will be overwhelmed”

with the baptism with which I am being baptized

Quote: τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression with the baptism with which contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. See how you expressed the idea in 10:38. Alternate translation: “as I am being baptized”

I am being baptized, you will be baptized

Quote: ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. See how you expressed the idea in 10:38. Alternate translation: “someone is baptizing me, someone will baptize you”

Mark 10:40

to sit at my right hand or at my left hand

Quote: τὸ & καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

When someone sits at the right hand or at the left hand of a ruler, this symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. See how you translated the similar phrases in 10:37. Alternate translation: “to sit down to rule at my right hand and at my left hand” or “to take the places of honor and authority at my right hand and at my left hand”

at my right hand or at my left hand

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the phrases at my right hand and at my left hand refer to the places next to Jesus’ right and left hands, which would be the right side and the left side. In the Jesus’ culture, these sides were associated with honor or authority. See how you expressed the idea in 10:37. Alternate translation: “next to me on the right or next to me on the left” or “in the honorable places at my right or at my left”

but for whom

Quote: ἀλλ’ οἷς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but it will be given to the ones for whom”

it has been prepared

Quote: ἡτοίμασται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word it refers to sitting in the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to sit in those places has been prepared” or “it has been prepared to do that”

it has been prepared

Quote: ἡτοίμασται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it”

Mark 10:41

having heard this

Quote: ἀκούσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the ten disciples heard about what James and John had asked Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having heard that James and John had asked to sit at Jesus’ right hand and left hand”

the ten

Quote: οἱ δέκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the number ten as a noun to refer to the other ten disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this number with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other ten disciples” or “the rest of the disciples”

Mark 10:42

You know

Quote: οἴδατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word You here is plural.

the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles lord it over them, and their great ones exercise authority over them

Quote: οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυριεύουσιν αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι αὐτῶν κατεξουσιάζουσιν αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than and in order to show that the second clause is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses Alternate translation: “the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles lord it over them; indeed, their great ones exercise authority over them” or “the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles and their great ones lord it over them”

the ones considered rulers of the Gentiles

Quote: οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Gentiles consider to be their rulers”

lord it over … exercise authority over

Quote: κατακυριεύουσιν & κατεξουσιάζουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The words translated lord it over and exercise authority over refer to using power to control and dominate others. The words do not indicate whether the rulers and the great ones are doing good or bad things with their power. If possible, use words or phrases that refer to total control and domination but that do not imply good or bad use of that control and domination. Alternate translation: “reign absolutely over … have complete authority over”

exercise authority over

Quote: κατεξουσιάζουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “rule over” or “control”

Mark 10:43

it is not this way

Quote: οὐχ οὕτως & ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Here Jesus could be using the present tense to: (1) give a command or instruction. Alternate translation: “It should not be this way” or “Let it not be this way” (2) state how things work differently among his disciples. Alternate translation: “That is not how it is”

you. … you … your

Quote: ὑμῖν & ὑμῖν & ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because is talking to the disciples, the words you, you, and your are plural.

Mark 10:43-44

whoever desires to become great among you will be your servant … and whoever desires to be first among you will be a slave of all

Quote: ὃς ἂν θέλῃ μέγας γενέσθαι ἐν ὑμῖν, ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος & καὶ ὃς ἂν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι πρῶτος, ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the sentences with a word other than and in order to show that the second sentence is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two sentences Alternate translation: “whoever desires to become great among you will be your servant; indeed, whoever desires to be first among you will be your slave” or “whoever desires to become first or great among will you be your servant or slave”

Mark 10:43

to become great

Quote: μέγας γενέσθαι (1)

Alternate translation: “to be highly respected” or “to be greatly respected”

will be

Quote: ἔσται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Jesus is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. See how you translated the similar form in 9:35. Alternate translation: “should be” or “has to be”

Mark 10:44

you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the disciples, the word you here is plural.

first

Quote: πρῶτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus is speaking of being important or respected as if it were being first. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated this word in 9:35. Alternate translation: “respected” or “significant”

will be

Quote: ἔσται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

Jesus is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. See how you translated the similar form in 9:35. Alternate translation: “should be” or “has to be”

will be a slave of all

Quote: ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus speaks of being a slave to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. Alternate translation: “will dedicate himself or herself to serve all” or “will work hard at helping all”

of all

Quote: πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the other disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all the other disciples” or “the rest of the disciples”

Mark 10:45

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why the disciples should act like servants and slaves for other disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for commands, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I command that because”

the Son of Man … his

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, … my”

did not come to be served, but to serve and to give his life as a ransom in exchange for many

Quote: οὐκ ἦλθεν διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι, καὶ δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “came to serve and to give his life as a ransom in exchange for many, not to be served”

did not come

Quote: οὐκ ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word come refers to the Son of Man entering this world as a human to do what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did not come to this world” or “is not acting”

to be served

Quote: διακονηθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “for people to serve him” or “to have people serve him”

but to serve

Quote: ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but he came to serve”

to give his life as a ransom in exchange for many

Quote: δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if his life were a price or ransom he would give to free many from someone or something that owned or controlled them. He means that he will obtain forgiveness for his people’s sins and will keep those sins from controlling them. This is an important biblical image, so if possible preserve the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “to offer his life as if it were a ransom to set many free from sin”

to give his life

Quote: δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to allow himself to die”

many

Quote: πολλῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”

Mark 10:46

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,”

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go”

he … going out

Quote: ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “coming out”

Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, son of Timaeus, was sitting beside the road

Quote: ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης, ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces Bartimaeus as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man sitting beside the road. His name was Bartimaeus, son of Timaeus. He was a blind beggar”

Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, son of Timaeus

Quote: ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase son of Timaeus could: (1) identify the father of Bartimaeus. Alternate translation: “Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, whose father was Timaeus” (2) explain what the name Bartimaeus means. Alternate translation: “Bartimaeus, which means ‘son of Timaeus,’ a blind beggar”

Bartimaeus, … of Timaeus

Quote: Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Bartimaeus and Timaeus are the names of men.

Mark 10:47

having heard that it is Jesus the Nazarene

Quote: ἀκούσας ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘It is Jesus the Nazarene,’”

Son of David

Quote: Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the word Son means a male descendant. It does not mean that Jesus was the direct son of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” or “You who are descended from David”

Son of David

Quote: Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

David was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title Son of David implicitly meant “Messiah.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Messiah”

have mercy on me

Quote: ἐλέησόν με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

The phrase have mercy is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add a word such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you have mercy on me”

have mercy on me

Quote: ἐλέησόν με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mercy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me”

have mercy on me

Quote: ἐλέησόν με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Bartimaeus assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “have mercy on me and heal me” or “be merciful to me by healing me”

Mark 10:48

many

Quote: πολλοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men”

was crying out much more

Quote: πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν (1)

The phrase was crying out much more could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. Alternate translation: “was crying out even louder” (2) that the blind man called out even more frequently or persistently. Alternate translation: “was crying out even more often” or “was crying out even more persistently”

Son of David, have mercy on me

Quote: Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με (1)

Here Bartimaeus says the same thing he said in 10:47 except he does not include the name Jesus. Express the idea as you did there. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David, I ask that you be merciful to me” or “You who are descended from David, please have mercy on me and heal me”

Mark 10:49

said, “Call him

Quote: εἶπεν, φωνήσατε αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “said to call him”

Call

Quote: φωνήσατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to some of the people in the crowd, the command Call is plural.

they call

Quote: φωνοῦσι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called”

Take courage

Quote: θάρσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of courage, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous”

Get up

Quote: ἔγειρε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people who are speaking to Bartimaeus imply that he should walk to where Jesus was after getting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Get up and walk over to him” or “Get up and go to where he is”

Mark 10:50

having thrown aside his coat

Quote: ἀποβαλὼν τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Bartimaeus’ coat would have been an outer garment that people could ordinarily take off in public. Bartimaeus probably took it off so that it would be easier for him to hurry to where Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make some or all of that information more explicit. Alternate translation: “having thrown aside his jacket” or “having thrown aside his coat so that he could move faster”

having sprung up

Quote: ἀναπηδήσας (1)

Alternate translation: “having quickly gotten to his feet” or “having immediately stood up”

came

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went”

Mark 10:51

said, “What do you desire {that} I might do for you

Quote: εἶπεν, τί σοι θέλεις ποιήσω? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked him what he desired him to do for him”

Rabbi, that

Quote: Ραββουνεί, ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Bartimaeus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, I desire that”

I might see again

Quote: ἀναβλέψω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, Bartimaeus could be implying: (1) that he once could see, and he wants to be able to see once more. Alternate translation: “I might regain my sight” (2) that he wants to be able to see for the first time. Alternate translation: “I might gain my sight” or “I might be able to see”

Mark 10:52

Your faith has saved you

Quote: ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You believed, and that has caused you to be saved”

Your faith has saved you

Quote: ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Jesus speaks of Bartimaeus’ faith as if it had actively saved him. He means that his faith was the necessary condition for the healing that he received from God. Alternate translation: “Because of your faith, you have been saved”

he saw again

Quote: ἀνέβλεψεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, much as in 10:51, Mark could be implying: (1) that Bartimaeus once could see, and now he can see once more. Alternate translation: “he regained his sight” (2) that Bartimaeus could see for the first time. Alternate translation: “he gained his sight” or “he was able to see”

he was following him on the road

Quote: ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the clause he was following him on the road could indicate that: (1) Bartimaeus walked with Jesus on the road. Alternate translation: “he walked with him on the road” or “he went with him on the road” (2) Bartimaeus traveled with Jesus and was his disciple. Alternate translation: “he became his disciple” or “he traveled with him on the road as his student”

Mark 11

Mark 11 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)
   • Jesus enters Jerusalem (11:1–11)
   • Jesus curses a fig tree, part one (11:12–14)
   • Jesus drives people out of the temple (11:15–19)
   • Jesus curses a fig tree, part two (11:20–26)
   • Jesus debates with the Jewish leaders about authority (11:27–33)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9–10, which includes a quotation from Psalm 118:26.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The young donkey

In 11:1–11, Mark narrates how Jesus rode on a colt, or young donkey, when he entered into Jerusalem. Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all write about this event. Mark and Luke write that the disciples brought Jesus a colt. John writes that Jesus found a donkey. Matthew writes that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey and a colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1–7, Mark 11:1–7, Luke 19:29–36, and John 12:14–15)

Hosanna

The word “Hosanna” is a Hebrew word spelled out how it sounds in Mark’s language. The word means “save us, please.” By the time of Jesus, however, people would use the word to praise or honor God and others. Consider whether to spell the word out as it sounds or state its meaning. See the notes on 11:9 and 11:10 for translation options. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Disrupting activity in the temple area

In 11:15–17, Jesus disrupts normal activity in the temple by driving out some people and by overturning the chairs and tables of others. Jesus performed this symbolic action to express a specific message. However, Christians debate exactly what the symbolic action means. Jesus could have been protesting against people who were buying and selling dishonestly. He could have been protesting against all buying and selling in the temple area. He could have been indicating that the temple would be destroyed. Your translation should state what Jesus did while allowing for all of these possible interpretations.

The baptism of John

In 11:29–33, Jesus and the chief priests, scribes, and elders discuss “the baptism of John.” Here they are referring to how John baptized people for repentance. Jesus asks them whether they think that John’s baptism came from heaven or from people, which means that he performed baptisms by God’s authority or by human authority. The Jewish leaders decide not to answer the question. See the notes on these verses for ways to refer to John’s baptism and to the authority behind it.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Most of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 4, 7, 15, 21, 22, 27, and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Verse 26

Many of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for 11:26. A few early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words: “But if you do not forgive, neither will your Father in the heavens forgive your trespasses.” Since a similar sentence appears in Matthew 6:15, it is likely that people who copied the manuscripts accidentally or intentionally added these words here in Mark. Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: Textual Variants)

Mark 11:1

And when

Quote: καὶ ὅτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And when introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Then”

they come near

Quote: ἐγγίζουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go near”

Bethphage

Quote: Βηθφαγὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Bethphage is the name of a village that was near Jerusalem.

to the Mount of Olives

Quote: πρὸς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Matthew implies that Bethphage and Bethany are near the Mount of Olives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “near the Mount of Olives” or “which are at the Mount of Olives”

Mark 11:2

Go

Quote: ὑπάγετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “Come” instead of Go. Alternate translation: “Come”

the village opposite you

Quote: τὴν κώμην τὴν κατέναντι ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, a village that is opposite someone means that it is directly in front of them. Jesus could be referring to Bethany, Bethphage, or some other village. However, it is most likely that he is referring to the village of Bethphage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the village directly in front of you” or “the village of Bethphage, which is before you”

you, … you will find

Quote: ὑμῶν & εὑρήσετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since the word you applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.

a colt tied up

Quote: πῶλον δεδεμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “a colt that a person has tied up”

a colt

Quote: πῶλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A colt is a young donkey that is no longer a baby but is not yet full grown. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of animal, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a donkey that is not yet fully grown” or “a young riding animal”

tied up

Quote: δεδεμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that someone has used a rope or tether to secure the donkey so that it cannot wander away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “secured with a tether”

no one of men

Quote: οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense, that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “no human” or “no one person”

has yet sat

Quote: οὔπω ἐκάθισεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using the term sat to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “has yet mounted” or “has yet used as a mount”

Mark 11:3

And if anyone says to you, ‘Why are you doing this?’ say, ‘The Lord has need of it and immediately he sends it back here

Quote: καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? εἴπατε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And if anyone asks you why you are doing this, say that the Lord has need of it and that immediately he sends it back here.”

are you doing

Quote: ποιεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

The person would be speaking to the two disciples, so you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.

Why are you doing this

Quote: τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase doing this refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt”

The Lord has need of it and immediately he sends it back here

Quote: ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε. (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the clause and immediately he sends it back here could be: (1) part of what Jesus wants the disciples to say. Alternate translation: “The Lord has need of it, and immediately the Lord sends it back here to you” (2) what Jesus predicts the person asking the question Why are you doing this? will do. Alternate translation: “The Lord has need of it,’ and immediately that person again sends it here”

has need of it

Quote: αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of need, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requires it”

he sends

Quote: ἀποστέλλει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe a future action that will happen very soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is natural in your language for referring to an event in the near future. Alternate translation: “he will send”

back

Quote: πάλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read back. The ULT follows that reading. In this case, it is more likely that the phrase and immediately he sends it is part of what Jesus wanted the disciples to say (see previous note on this whole sentence). Other ancient manuscripts do not include the word back. In this case, it is more likely that the phrase and immediately he sends it is what Jesus predicts that the people who asked the question will do (see previous note on this whole sentence). If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 11:4

they went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, they refers to the two disciples mentioned in 11:1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “those two disciples went away”

a colt

Quote: πῶλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated colt in 11:2. Alternate translation: “a donkey that was not yet fully grown” or “a young riding animal”

having been tied up

Quote: δεδεμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that a person had tied up”

having been tied up

Quote: δεδεμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that someone has used a rope or tether to secure the donkey so that it cannot wander away. See how you translated the similar phrase in 10:2. Alternate translation: “having been secured with a tether”

at a door outside on the street

Quote: πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἔξω ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀμφόδου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that the colt was standing outside on the street, but it was secured to a door, probably the door into a house or shop. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to someone’s door. It was standing outside on the street” or “near a door and standing in the street outside the door”

Mark 11:5

were saying to them, “What are you doing, untying the colt

Quote: ἔλεγον αὐτοῖς, τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες τὸν πῶλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “were asking them what they were doing by untying the colt.”

What are you doing, untying

Quote: τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people asking the question are asking the two disciples to provide a good reason for why they are untying the colt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “For what reason are you untying” or “Do you have permission to untie”

the colt

Quote: τὸν πῶλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated colt in 11:2. Alternate translation: “this donkey that is not yet fully grown” or “the young riding animal”

Mark 11:6

they let them go

Quote: ἀφῆκαν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the people let them take the young donkey away with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they let them untie the young donkey and lead it away” or “they let them go away with the young donkey”

Mark 11:7

the colt

Quote: τὸν πῶλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated colt in 11:2. Alternate translation: “the donkey that was not yet fully grown” or “the young riding animal”

throw their cloaks upon it

Quote: ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The disciples did this to show that the person riding the colt was special and important. In this culture, animals that important people rode were draped with rich fabrics. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “drape the colt with their cloaks as a sign of honor” or “throw their cloaks upon it to give him glory”

cloaks

Quote: τὰ ἱμάτια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word cloaks refers to outer garments. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “jackets” or “outer garments”

Mark 11:8

many … others

Quote: πολλοὶ & ἄλλοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjectives many and others as nouns to mean many people and other people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “many men and women … different men and women”

spread their cloaks on the road, and others, branches, having cut {them} from the fields

Quote: τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The people did these things to give Jesus honor and glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the meaning of these actions. Alternate translation: “spread their cloaks on the road to give him honor, and others, branches, having cut them from the field, to give him glory”

cloaks

Quote: ἱμάτια (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the word cloaks in 11:7. Alternate translation: “jackets” or “outer garments”

others, branches

Quote: ἄλλοι & στιβάδας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “others spread branches”

Mark 11:9

going before

Quote: προάγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “coming before”

Hosanna

Quote: ὡσαννά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Hosanna is a Hebrew word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Hosanna had an original meaning of “save now,” but by the time of this event it had become a way of praising God. In your translation you can spell Hosanna the way it sounds in your language, or you could translate it according to how the word was used. In this context, the people could be praising: (1) God. Alternate translation: “Glory to God” or “May God be honored” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Glory to this man” or “May this man be honored”

Blessed is the one coming in the name of the Lord

Quote: εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου! (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the crowds are quoting from Psalm 118:26. Since they do not introduce the words as a quotation from an important text, you also should not introduce them as anything more than what the crowds said. However, if it would be helpful for your readers, you could include this information in a footnote.

Blessed is the one coming in the name of the Lord

Quote: εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase Blessed is the one could be: (1) a request for God to bless Jesus. Alternate translation: “Let the one coming in the name of the Lord be blessed” (2) stating that God had already blessed Jesus. Alternate translation: “The one coming in the name of the Lord is blessed”

Blessed is

Quote: εὐλογημένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “Let God bless”

in the name of the Lord

Quote: ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word name refers primarily to the person who has that name, and it focuses especially on that person’s authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Lord”

Mark 11:10

Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David

Quote: εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase Blessed is the coming kingdom could be: (1) a request for God to bless the kingdom. Alternate translation: “Let the coming kingdom of our father David be blessed” (2) stating that God had already blessed the kingdom. Alternate translation: “The coming kingdom of our father David is blessed”

Blessed is

Quote: εὐλογημένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “Let God bless”

the coming kingdom of our father David

Quote: ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the people are using the possessive form to describe a kingdom that is like the one that David ruled. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the coming kingdom that is like our father David’s kingdom” or “the coming kingdom that once belonged to our father David”

the coming kingdom of our father David

Quote: ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word coming indicates that these people have been waiting for and expecting this kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of our father David that we have been waiting for” or “the long-expected kingdom of our father David”

of our father David

Quote: τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the people refer to David as if he were their father. They mean that David was an important ancestor of many Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our important ancestor, David” or “of David, from whom many of us are descended”

Hosanna

Quote: ὡσαννὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

See how you translated the word Hosanna in 11:9. Here, the people could be using the word to praise: (1) God, who sent Jesus. Alternate translation: “Hosanna to God” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Hosanna to this one”

the highest

Quote: τοῖς ὑψίστοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The people are using the adjective highest as a noun to mean the highest heavens, where God dwells. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the highest heavens”

Mark 11:11

temple

Quote: ἱερόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark means that Jesus entered into the temple area. He does not mean that Jesus went into the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “temple courtyard”

the hour already being late

Quote: ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the hour already being late indicates that it was evening, and the sun was about to set. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “since it was late in the day” or “the sun being about to set”

he went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came out”

the Twelve

Quote: τῶν δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”

Mark 11:12

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,”

having come out

Quote: ἐξελθόντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone out”

Mark 11:13

he went

Quote: ἦλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came”

if perhaps he will find anything on it

Quote: εἰ ἄρα τι εὑρήσει ἐν αὐτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus wanted to find some figs on the tree that he could eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “hoping to find some figs on it” or “wanting to find some fruit on it to eat”

And

Quote: καὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces what Jesus actually found on the tree in contrast to what Jesus wanted to find on the tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But”

having come to it, he found nothing except leaves, for it was not the season of figs

Quote: ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν, οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα; ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first two clauses describe. Alternate translation: “because it was not the season of figs, having come to it, he found nothing except leaves”

having come to it

Quote: ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone to it”

he found nothing except leaves

Quote: οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If it would in appear your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves”

it was not the season of figs

Quote: ὁ & καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων (1)

Alternate translation: “the time of year to pick figs had not yet arrived”

Mark 11:14

answering

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word answering indicates that Jesus was responding to what he saw. He was not answering a question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response” or “when he saw that”

May no one any longer eat fruit from you to eternity

Quote: μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe

Jesus is speaking to the fig tree that he knows cannot hear him. He is doing this to communicate to the people listening to him what he is going to do the tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as if he were speaking about the fig tree. Alternate translation: “May no one any longer eat fruit from this tree to eternity” or “As for this tree, may no one any longer eat fruit from it to eternity”

May no one any longer eat fruit from you to eternity

Quote: μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the fig tree will stop producing fruit, and that is why no one will eat fruit from the tree ever again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “May you no longer produce fruit that people will eat to eternity”

May no one any longer eat

Quote: μηκέτι & μηδεὶς & φάγοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated No one and any longer are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “May people no longer eat” or “No longer may there be anyone who will eat”

fruit

Quote: καρπὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns

In this verse, the word fruit is singular in form, but it refers to any fruits that the tree might produce as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”

you

Quote: σοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the fig tree, the word you here is singular.

to eternity

Quote: εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase to eternity means that something lasts forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “forever” or “again”

Mark 11:15

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go”

temple

Quote: ἱερὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark means that Jesus entered into the temple area. He does not mean that Jesus went into the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in 11:11. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”

to cast out

Quote: ἐκβάλλειν (1)

Alternate translation: “to throw out” or “to force out” or “to drive out”

the ones selling and the ones buying in the temple

Quote: τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Mark implies that merchants were selling animals and other items so that travelers could buy them and offer the proper sacrifices at the temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the ones selling and buying things in the temple for the sacrifices”

the tables of the money changers

Quote: τὰς τραπέζας τῶν κολλυβιστῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to people who exchanged the commonly used Greek and Roman money for special money that could be used at the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the tables of the people who exchanged money” or “the tables of the people who exchanged the temple currency”

the seats of the ones selling the doves

Quote: τὰς καθέδρας τῶν πωλούντων τὰς περιστερὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark refers to people who sold doves, which the poorest people would offer as sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the seats of the ones selling the doves to be sacrificed”

Mark 11:16

a container

Quote: σκεῦος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word translated container refers to any object that people use for a specific purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “any object” or “anything”

the temple

Quote: τοῦ ἱεροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark is referring to the temple area. He does not mean that people were passing through the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in 11:11. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”

Mark 11:17

them and saying

Quote: καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the people who were buying, selling, and exchanging things in the temple area. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who were buying and selling, and he was saying”

Has it not been written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’? But you have made it a ‘den of robbers

Quote: οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Has it not been written that God’s house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations? But you have made it, as it has been written, into a den of robbers.”

Has it not been written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations

Quote: οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people in the temple. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should have paid closer attention to what has been written: ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations.’” or “It has certainly been written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’!”

Has it not been written

Quote: οὐ γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

In Jesus’ culture, Has it not been written was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the book of Isaiah (see Isaiah 56:7). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Can you not read in the Scriptures” or “Does it not say in the book of Isaiah”

Has it not been written

Quote: οὐ γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through the prophet Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Has the prophet Isaiah not said” or “Has God not had a prophet write”

My house will be called

Quote: οἶκός μου & κληθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “They will call my house”

My house

Quote: οἶκός μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as My house because his presence is there. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My temple”

a house of prayer for all the nations

Quote: οἶκος προσευχῆς & πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, is using the possessive form to describe a house that is a place where people perform prayer. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a house where all the nations offer prayer” or “a place where there is prayer from all the nations”

you have made it a ‘den of robbers

Quote: ὑμεῖς & ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Jeremiah 7:11. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format or introduce these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “you have made it a ‘den of robbers,’ in the words of the Scriptures” or “you have made it, as the Scriptures say, ‘a den of robbers’”

a ‘den of robbers

Quote: σπήλαιον λῃστῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers to the temple as a den where robbers hide and plot their crimes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “a place where robbers live” or “like a cave where robbers hide”

Mark 11:18

they were seeking how they might destroy him, for they were fearing him, for all the crowd was being amazed at his teaching

Quote: ἐζήτουν πῶς αὐτὸν ἀπολέσωσιν; ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ αὐτόν, πᾶς γὰρ ὁ ὄχλος ἐξεπλήσσετο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the second clause describes, which in turn gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because all the crowd were being amazed at this teaching, they were fearing him, and so they were seeking how they might destroy him”

they were seeking how

Quote: ἐζήτουν πῶς (1)

Alternate translation: “they were looking for a way by which”

all the crowd was being amazed at his teaching

Quote: πᾶς & ὁ ὄχλος ἐξεπλήσσετο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “his teaching was astonishing all the crowd”

all the crowd

Quote: πᾶς & ὁ ὄχλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark says all here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most people in the crowd” or “most of the crowd”

Mark 11:19

when evening came

Quote: ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο (1)

Alternate translation: “in the evening”

they were going out

Quote: ἐξεπορεύοντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “they were coming out”

outside the city

Quote: ἔξω τῆς πόλεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they went outside the city of Jerusalem to spend the night in the village of Bethany, as they did the previous night (see 11:11). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “outside Jerusalem to Bethany” or “outside the city of Jerusalem, and they slept in the village of Bethany”

Mark 11:20

passing by

Quote: παραπορευόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus and his disciples were passing by the same route that they had traveled the previous morning, which means that they went past the same fig tree that they had gone past the previous morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “passing by on the same path” or “going by the same route”

the fig tree having withered from the roots

Quote: τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase the fig tree having withered from the roots means that the fig tree had completely shriveled up and dried out, including its roots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the entire fig tree having withered and having died” or “that the fig tree, including its roots, had dried up and died”

Mark 11:21

having been reminded, Peter

Quote: ἀναμνησθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what reminded Peter, it is clear from the context that it was seeing the fig tree. Alternate translation: “seeing the fig tree reminded Peter, and he” or “when he saw the fig tree, it reminded Peter, who”

behold

Quote: ἴδε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word behold is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks a person to look or to pay attention. Alternate translation: “see” or “look at that”

you cursed

Quote: κατηράσω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Peter is speaking to Jesus, the word you here is singular.

has withered

Quote: ἐξήρανται (1)

Alternate translation: “has shriveled up” or “has dried up”

Mark 11:22

Have faith in God

Quote: ἔχετε πίστιν Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Believe”

Mark 11:23

Truly I say to you that whoever says to this mountain, ‘Be taken up and be thrown into the sea,’ and does not doubt in his heart, but believes that what he says is happening, it will be for him

Quote: ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ ὅτι ὃ λαλεῖ γίνεται, ἔσται αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to show that a person who has faith can do amazing things, like casting a mountain into the sea. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Truly I say this to you: imagine that someone says to this mountain, ‘Be taken up and be thrown into the sea.’ If that person does not doubt in his heart, but believes that what he says is happening, it will be for him.”

whoever says to this mountain, ‘Be taken up and be thrown into the sea,’ and does not doubt

Quote: ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ μὴ διακριθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whoever tells this mountain to be taken up and to be thrown into the sea, and does not doubt”

to this mountain

Quote: ὄρει τούτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Here, the phrase this mountain could refer to: (1) the Mount of Olives, which Jesus and his disciples were near. Alternate translation: “to the Mount of Olives” or “to the mountain we are near” (2) any mountain. Alternate translation: “to a mountain”

Be taken up and be thrown into the sea

Quote: ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation: “May God take you up and throw you into the sea”

Be taken up and be thrown

Quote: ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since someone is talking to a mountain, the commands here are singular.

does not doubt in his heart, but believes that what he says is happening

Quote: μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ ὅτι ὃ λαλεῖ γίνεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than but in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “believes that what he says is happening without doubting in his heart” or “truly believes in his heart that what he says is happening”

in his heart

Quote: ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In Jesus’ culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “when he thinks about it”

his … he says … for him

Quote: αὐτοῦ & λαλεῖ & αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the terms his, he, and him are masculine, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her … he or she says … for that person”

is happening

Quote: γίνεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the present tense to refer to something that would happen in the near future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense would be natural to refer to an event that will soon happen. Alternate translation: “will happen”

it will be for him

Quote: ἔσται αὐτῷ (1)

Alternate translation: “God will make it happen”

Mark 11:24

Because of this

Quote: διὰ τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the phrase Because of this introduces a result or inference based on what Jesus has just said about faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a result or inference. Alternate translation: “So then” or “For that reason”

everything, as much as you pray

Quote: πάντα ὅσα προσεύχεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression everything, as much as you pray contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “everything that you pray”

you pray and request

Quote: προσεύχεσθε καὶ αἰτεῖσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

The two words pray and request express a single idea. The word pray tells how the disciples are making their requests. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a different way. Alternate translation: “you request in prayer” or “you request while praying”

you have received {it

Quote: ἐλάβετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the past tense to refer to something in the future. He does this to indicate that the disciples should believe so strongly that they will receive what they ask for that it is as if they had already received it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the present or future tense and indicate the certainty in other way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly receive it” or “you are certain to receive it”

it will be to you

Quote: ἔσται ὑμῖν (1)

Alternate translation: “God will make it happen”

Mark 11:25

when you stand praying

Quote: ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

In Jesus’ culture, people often would stand when praying to God. Jesus assumes that his readers would be familiar with this practice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the posture that people assume in your culture when praying, or you could simply refer to praying. Alternate translation: “when you kneel in prayer” or “when you pray”

you have something against anyone

Quote: τι ἔχετε κατά τινος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase you have something against anyone indicates that you have been offended or injured by anyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are upset with anyone” or “you have been offended by anyone”

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

The phrase so that introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says to forgive with the goal that your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”

your Father

Quote: ὁ Πατὴρ ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus speaks of his disciples as if God were their physical father. He means that they have a father-son relationship with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your spiritual Father” or “God, who is like a Father to you,”

in the heavens

Quote: ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase in the heavens identifies the location in which God the Father is specially present and from which he rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who is in the heavens”

your trespasses

Quote: τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of trespasses, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when you trespass”

Mark 11:26

But if you do not forgive, neither will your Father in the heavens forgive your trespasses

Quote: Εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε οὐδὲ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ἀφήσει τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.

do not forgive

Quote: οὐκ ἀφίετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that they might not forgive other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “do not forgive fellow humans” or “do not forgive people who have sinned against you”

your Father

Quote: ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated the phrase your Father in the previous verse (11:25). Alternate translation: “your spiritual Father” or “God, who is like a Father to you,”

in the heavens

Quote: ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated the phrase in the heavens in the previous verse (11:25). Alternate translation: “who is in the heavens”

your trespasses

Quote: τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of trespasses, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you when you trespass”

Mark 11:27

they come … come

Quote: ἔρχονται (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In contexts such as these, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go … go”

in the temple

Quote: ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark means that Jesus was walking in the temple area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in 11:11. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard”

Mark 11:28

By what authority do you do these things, or who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things

Quote: ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The question By what authority do you do these things and the question who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things could: (1) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, or who is the one who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things” (2) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If you choose this option, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who was it who gave you the authority to do these things?”

By what authority do you do these things, or who gave you this authority

Quote: ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “How are you empowered to do these things, and who empowered you in this way”

do you do … you … you might do

Quote: ποιεῖς & σοι & ποιῇς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the Jewish leaders are speaking to Jesus, the word you throughout this verse is singular.

do you do these things, … you might do these things

Quote: ταῦτα ποιεῖς & ταῦτα ποιῇς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In both places, the phrase these things refers to what Jesus has done since he arrived in Jerusalem, including driving people out of the temple, healing people, and teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “do you teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple … you teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple”

or

Quote: ἢ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word or introduces another similar question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related question, or you could leave or untranslated. Alternate translation: “and” or “or again,”

Mark 11:29

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the Jewish leaders asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

one word

Quote: ἕνα λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using the term word to refer to what he will ask. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one thing”

and you answer me, and I will tell you

Quote: καὶ ἀποκρίθητέ μοι, καὶ ἐρῶ ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that he will only tell them by what authority he acts if they answer him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in conditional form or in some other way that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “and if you answer me, then I will tell you” or “and as long as you answer me, I will tell you”

by what authority I do these things

Quote: ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you expressed the idea in 11:28. Alternate translation: “how I am empowered to do these things”

I do these things

Quote: ταῦτα ποιῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase these things refers to what Jesus has done since he arrived in Jerusalem, including driving people out of the temple, healing people, and teaching. See how you translated the similar phrase in 11:28. Alternate translation: “I teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple”

Mark 11:30

Was the baptism of John

Quote: τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου & ἦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of baptism, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “When John baptized people, was it”

the baptism of John

Quote: τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a kind of baptism that was performed by John. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed”

from heaven

Quote: ἐξ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, heaven represents God because it is where he dwells. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from God”

men

Quote: ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans”

from heaven, or from men

Quote: ἐξ οὐρανοῦ & ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is asking about where John’s authority came from. He indicates that it could be from God in heaven or from men on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “authorized by God from heaven or by men on earth”

Mark 11:31

with each other

Quote: πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase with each other could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were reasoning with one another. Alternate translation: “with one another” (2) that the Jewish leaders were thinking this without saying it. Alternate translation: “within themselves”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

If we say, ‘From heaven,’ he will say, ‘For what {reason} then did you not believe him

Quote: ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that it was from heaven, then he will ask us for what reason we did not believe him.”

If we say, ‘From heaven,’ he will say, ‘For what {reason} then did you not believe him

Quote: ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical

Here the Jewish leaders use an imaginary situation to help them decide how to answer the question. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Imagine that we say, ‘From heaven.’ In that case, he will say to us, ‘For what reason then did you not believe him?’”

From heaven

Quote: ἐξ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “John’s baptism was from heaven” or “It was from heaven”

From heaven

Quote: ἐξ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

See how you translated the similar phrase in 11:30. Alternate translation: “From God”

For what {reason} then did you not believe him

Quote: διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The Jewish leaders expect that Jesus would use the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you should have believed him.” or “You certainly should have believed him, then!”

Mark 11:32

But should we say, ‘From men

Quote: ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων? (1)

Here the Jewish leaders could be: (1) asking a rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “But can we really say, ‘From men’?” (2) using a conditional form that implies the result. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men.’”

But should we say, ‘From men

Quote: ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The Jewish leaders are using the question form to indicate that they think it is a bad idea to give the answer From men. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “But it is not possible for us to say, ‘From men.’” or “But we cannot say, ‘From men’!”

should we say, ‘From men

Quote: εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “should we say that it was from men”

From men

Quote: ἐξ ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “John’s baptism was from men” or “It was from men”

From men

Quote: ἐξ ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

See how you translated the similar phrase in 11:30. Alternate translation: “From humans”

They were afraid of the crowd, for they all held that John really was a prophet

Quote: ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background

Mark provides this background information to help readers understand why the Jewish leaders said what they did. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for they all held that John really had been a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men, because all the crowd held that John really was a prophet, and they were afraid of the crowd”

They were afraid of the crowd, for they all held that John really was a prophet

Quote: ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “The crowd held that John really was a prophet, so they were afraid of them all”

of the crowd

Quote: τὸν ὄχλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the Jewish leaders feared what the crowd would do if they answered in this way. The crowd might have rioted or attacked them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of what the crowd would do” or “that the crowd might riot”

they all held

Quote: ἅπαντες & εἶχον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word all refers to the people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for everyone in the crowd held” or “for all those who were in the crowd held”

they all held

Quote: ἅπαντες & εἶχον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Mark says all here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most of them held”

Mark 11:33

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces what the chief priests and scribes did as a result of what they said to each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result of an action. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,”

We do not know

Quote: οὐκ οἴδαμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John was from”

Nor do I tell you

Quote: οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

With the words Nor do I tell you, Jesus is indicating that this is the result of what the Jewish leaders told him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “Then I will not tell you” or “Well then, neither do I tell you”

by what authority I do these things

Quote: ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you expressed the idea in 11:28. Alternate translation: “how I am empowered to do these things”

I do these things

Quote: ταῦτα ποιῶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase these things refers to what Jesus has done since he arrived in Jerusalem, including driving people out of the temple, healing people, and teaching. See how you translated the similar phrase in 11:28. Alternate translation: “I teach, heal, and drive people out of the temple”

Mark 12

Mark 12 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)
   • The parable of the vineyard (12:1–12)
   • Jesus interacts with the religious leaders (12:13–37)
     • Jesus debates with the Pharisees and Herodians about taxes (12:13–17)
     • Jesus debates with the Sadducees about the resurrection (12:18–27)
     • Jesus speaks with a scribe about the greatest commandment (12:28–34)
     • Jesus teaches about the Christ (12:35–37)
   • Jesus warns against the scribe (12:38–40)
   • Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (12:41–44)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10–11, which is a quotation from Psalm 118:22–23, and the poetry in 12:36, which is a quotation from Psalm 110:1.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Renting out a vineyard

In 12:1–12, Jesus tells a story about a man who built a vineyard and then rented it out to farmers. Jesus is referring to a common arrangement in which a wealthy person who owned property would have poorer people use that property for farming or tending grapes. These poorer people would do the work and then sell the produce, and they would give the person who owned the property a portion of what they made. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of arrangement, make sure that your translation is clear about what is happening in the story.

The poll tax

The word translated “poll tax” refers to a specific amount of money that each adult person had to pay to the government. In Jesus’ time period, the Roman government required Jewish adults to pay a high tax. The Pharisees ask whether this tax that the Roman government required contradicted the law that God gave Moses. Make sure that your readers understand that the Pharisees are asking about a tax that the Roman government required each adult Jewish person to pay.

A man marrying his brother’s widow

In 12:19–23, the Sadducees question Jesus in regard to a hypothetical situation in which a woman marries seven brothers in succession. This situation is based on a command in the Jewish law that can be found in Deuteronomy 25:5–6. The law requires a woman who is widowed without children to marry a brother of her late husband. The first child that they have together will be considered the child of the dead man. In this way, that man’s family line would continue. The Sadducees present an extreme application of this law, with seven brothers successively marrying the same woman and dying without having children. They use this example to try to make the idea of resurrection look strange or silly. Make sure that your readers understand the example that the Sadducees present.

The great commandment

Jewish teachers sometimes debated which specific commandment was the greatest or most important one. This was important because, if commandments seemed to contradict each other in a specific situation, the greater one would be the correct one to obey. When the scribe asks Jesus about “the first commandment” in 12:28, he wants Jesus to offer an opinion about this debate. Make sure that your readers understand that this is what the scribe is asking about.

King David and the Christ

In 12:35–37, Jesus asks the people he is teaching about whether the Christ can be a descendant of David if David himself calls the Messiah “Lord” in Psalm 110:1. Since people in David’s culture called older and more important people “lord,” it does not make sense for David to call his own descendant “Lord.” When Jesus asks and teaches about this, he implies that the Christ is indeed King David’s descendant, but he is also more than that. Make sure that this teaching about calling the Christ “Lord” is clear to your readers.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

The parable of the vineyard

In 12:1–12, Jesus tells a story about a man who planted a vineyard and rented it out to farmers. When the man sends servants to collect the rent, the farmers refuse and injure or kill the servants. When the man sends his own son, the farmers kill him as well. So, man came and destroyed the farmers and rented the vineyard to other people. When he tells this story, Jesus implies that the Jewish religious leaders are like those farmers who will be destroyed. Jesus also implies that the vineyard represents the people of Israel, the servants represent God’s messengers, the son represents Jesus himself, and the man who owned the vineyard represents God. While you should not explain the meaning more than Jesus does, make sure that your translation fits with what Jesus is illustrating. (See: Parables)

The stone

In 12:10–11, Jesus quotes from Psalm 118:22–23, which refers to a specific “stone.” In the Psalm, this stone most likely represents the king of Israel, or it perhaps represents the Israelite people in general. When Jesus quotes this passage, he is implicitly identifying himself with the stone. Since the stone language comes from a quotation from the Psalms, you should preserve it in some form in your translation. Also, since Jesus does not explicitly claim to be the stone, you should keep that implicit in your translation. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in questions that people ask of Jesus or in speeches that Jesus directs to individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 13, 14, 16, 18, and 41. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 12:1

A man planted a vineyard

Quote: ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the Jewish leaders, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: A man planted a vineyard”

A man planted a vineyard

Quote: ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Jesus uses the phrase A man planted a vineyard to introduce the main character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing the main character in a story. Alternate translation: “There once was a man who planted a vineyard”

a hedge

Quote: φραγμὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A hedge is a thick wall made from bushy plants that were planted close together. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of wall, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a wall made of bushes” or “wall of plants”

rented it out to farmers

Quote: ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use his vineyard in exchange for a share of the crop”

to farmers

Quote: γεωργοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

While farmers is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”

Mark 12:2

at the time

Quote: τῷ καιρῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus refers to the time of year when the grape vines produced grapes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when it was almost harvest time,” or “when the grapes were almost ripe,”

farmers … farmers

Quote: γεωργοὺς & γεωργῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated farmers in 12:1. Alternate translation: “vine dressers … vine dressers” or “grape farmers … grape farmers”

he might receive from the farmers from the fruits of the vineyard

Quote: παρὰ τῶν γεωργῶν λάβῃ ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the man wants to receive the share of the fruits that the farmers agreed to pay him when he rented the vineyard to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he might receive from the farmers his portion of the fruits of the vineyard” or “he might receive from the farmers the fruits of the vineyard that they agreed to pay him”

the fruits of the vineyard

Quote: τῶν καρπῶν τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the word fruits could refer: (1) directly to the grapes that the vineyard produced. Alternate translation: “the grapes from the vineyard” (2) figuratively to what the farmers made when they sold the grapes. Alternate translation: “the money from what the vineyard produced”

Mark 12:3

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces what the farmers actually did in contrast to what the man who owned the vineyard wanted them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “But”

having seized him

Quote: λαβόντες αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the farmers did this once the servant arrived at the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “after the servant arrived, having seized him”

empty

Quote: κενόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container that was empty. He means that the farmers did not give him any of the fruit from the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “empty-handed” or “without any grapes”

Mark 12:4

they wounded in the head

Quote: ἐκεφαλίωσαν (1)

Alternate translation: “they hit in the head” or “they repeatedly struck on the head”

treated shamefully

Quote: ἠτίμασαν (1)

Alternate translation: “humiliated” or “dishonored”

Mark 12:5

another, … many others

Quote: ἄλλον & πολλοὺς ἄλλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjectives another and others as nouns to mean another servant and other servants. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “another one of his servants … many more of his servants”

and many others

Quote: καὶ πολλοὺς ἄλλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Jesus could be implying that many others: (1) were sent by the man. Alternate translation: “and he sent many others” (2) were harmed by the farmers. Alternate translation: “and they harmed many others”

beating some and killing others

Quote: οὓς μὲν δέροντες, οὓς δὲ ἀποκτέννοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the farmers were beating some servants and were killing other servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “but the farmers beat some and killed others”

Mark 12:6

Having one more

Quote: ἔτι ἕνα εἶχεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the man has one more person whom he could send to the farmers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Having one more person he could send” or “Having one more messenger”

a beloved son

Quote: υἱὸν ἀγαπητόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a son whom he loved”

he sent him to them last, saying, ‘They will respect my son

Quote: ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν ἔσχατον πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these two clauses. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘They will respect my son,’ he sent his son to them last”

saying, ‘They will respect my son

Quote: λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that they would respect his son”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and he thought”

They will respect my son

Quote: ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the man implies that respecting his son would also mean giving him the portion of the fruits that he and the farmers had agreed upon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “They will respect my son and give him my portion of the fruits”

Mark 12:7

But those farmers said to each other

Quote: ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that those farmers said this when they saw that the man’s son had arrived at the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “But when the son arrived, those farmers said to each other” or “But those farmers, when they saw the man’s son, said to each other”

farmers

Quote: γεωργοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated farmers in 12:1. Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”

said to each other, ‘This is the heir. Come, let us kill him, and the inheritance will be ours

Quote: πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος; δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ κληρονομία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said to each other that this man was the heir and that they should come and kill him so that the inheritance would be theirs”

Come

Quote: δεῦτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word Come is an exhortation to do something together with the speaker. The word does not necessarily mean that the people must travel somewhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that exhorts people to work together. Alternate translation: “Working together” or “Acting with one another”

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Here, the word and introduces the purpose for which the farmers plan to kill the son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “and that way”

the inheritance

Quote: ἡ κληρονομία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the farmers are referring primarily to the vineyard, which would be the son’s inheritance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the inheritance, this vineyard,”

the inheritance

Quote: ἡ κληρονομία (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of inheritance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what he would inherit”

Mark 12:8

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word And introduces what the farmers did as a result of what they said to each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result of an action. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,”

him

Quote: αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that they threw his dead body out of the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his dead body”

Mark 12:9

What then will the lord of the vineyard do

Quote: τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to introduce what the lord of the vineyard will do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do:” or “Let me tell you what the lord of the vineyard will do!”

What then

Quote: τί οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word then introduces a rhetorical question that Jesus asks based on the story that he has told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of question. Alternate translation: “In light of that story, what” or “Given all that, what”

the lord of the vineyard

Quote: ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a lord who owns the vineyard. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the lord who owned the vineyard” or “the man whose vineyard it is”

He will come

Quote: ἐλεύσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “He will go”

He will come

Quote: ἐλεύσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase He will come indicates that the lord of the vineyard will return to the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He will return” or “He will visit them”

farmers

Quote: γεωργούς (1)

See how you translated farmers in 12:1. Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”

will give the vineyard to others

Quote: δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here Jesus refers to the same kind of arrangement that he referred to in 12:1. Express the idea as you did there. Alternate translation: “will allow other farmers to use it”

to others

Quote: ἄλλοις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word others refers to other vine dressers who will care for the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to other farmers who will care for it”

Mark 12:10

And have you not read this scripture

Quote: οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach the Jewish leaders. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you have read this scripture:” or “Surely you have read this scripture!”

And have you not read this scripture

Quote: οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus introduces a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Psalms (see Psalm 118:22–23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And have you not read this in the book of Psalms” or “And have you never read what someone wrote in our Scriptures”

And have you not read

Quote: οὐδὲ & ἀνέγνωτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Jewish leaders, the word you here is singular.

A stone that the builders rejected, this has become the head of the corner

Quote: λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the author of the quotation speaks of a person whom others reject as if he were a stone that builders rejected. He speaks of this person gaining power and respect as if he became the head of the corner. Jesus is applying this quotation to himself, identifying himself with the stone. However, if possible, preserve the metaphor in your translation, or if that is not possible, express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “A person who is like a stone that the builders rejected, that person has become like the head of the corner”

A stone that the builders rejected

Quote: λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the author of the quotation is referring to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. In this case, the people do not want to use the stone for building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “A stone that the builders thought was not good enough to use for building”

the head of the corner

Quote: κεφαλὴν γωνίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase the head of the corner refers to a specific stone that is especially key or important for a structure. It could be a stone at the corner of a wall, a stone at the top of an arch, or another important stone. You could use a term for one of these kinds of stones, or you could refer generally to an important or essential stone. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the capstone” or “the most important stone”

Mark 12:11

This came about from the Lord

Quote: παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη (1)

Alternate translation: “The Lord has caused this”

in our eyes

Quote: ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, eyes represent a person’s judgement or evaluation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in our opinion” or “from our perspective”

Mark 12:12

And they were seeking to seize him, and they feared the crowd, for they knew that he spoke the parable against them. And having left him, they went away

Quote: καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον; ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν & καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the reason why the Jewish leaders were seeking to seize Jesus was that they knew that he spoke the parable against them. Also, the reason why they left Jesus without arresting him was because they feared the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the reasons before their results. Alternate translation: “And they knew that he spoke the parable against them, so they were seeking to seize him. However, they feared the crowd, so having left him, they went away”

they were seeking

Quote: ἐζήτουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in 11:27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were seeking”

and

Quote: καὶ (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, Mark uses the word and to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and the reason why they were not able to do so. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “yet” or “but”

the crowd

Quote: τὸν ὄχλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the chief priests and the Pharisees feared what the crowd would do if they seized Jesus. They might have rioted or attacked them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what the crowd would do” or “that the crowd might riot”

And having left him, they went away

Quote: καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the Jewish leaders did not seize Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “And they did not seize him, but instead, having left him, they went away”

they went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “they came away”

Mark 12:13

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

they send

Quote: ἀποστέλλουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in 11:27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders send”

the Herodians

Quote: τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The Herodians were a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a short phrase to describe them. Alternate translation: “people who wanted King Herod to continue to rule”

trap him

Quote: αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Mark is speaking as if the Pharisees and the Herodians intended to catch Jesus in a trap. He means that they wanted to get Jesus to say something that would allow them to accuse him of doing wrong. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “catch him” or “cause him to make an error”

with a word

Quote: λόγῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents something said in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in speech”

with a word

Quote: λόγῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase with a word could refer to things spoken by: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “in his words” (2) the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “with their words”

Mark 12:14

having come

Quote: ἐλθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

we know … Should we give, … should we … give

Quote: οἴδαμεν & δῶμεν & δῶμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The spies are speaking only of themselves, so we would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction.

it is not a concern to you about anyone, for you do not look at the face of men

Quote: οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός; οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “since you do not look at the face of men, it is not a concern to you about anyone”

it is not a concern to you about anyone

Quote: οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The Herodians and the Pharisees use this clause to say that Jesus does not care what others think and say about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not concern yourself with the opinions of others” or “you are not influenced by what others think of you”

it is not a concern to you about anyone

Quote: οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated not and anyone are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “it is a concern to you about no one”

it is not a concern to you

Quote: οὐ μέλει σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of concern, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nothing concerns you”

for you do not look at the face of men

Quote: οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, to look at the face of men refers to making decisions about how to treat people based on how they appear. People who look at the face of men treat wealthy and important people differently than they treat poor and unimportant people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for you do not judge men by appearances” or “for you do not treat people based on what they look like”

of men

Quote: ἀνθρώπων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term men is masculine, the Herodians and the Pharisees are using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans”

the way of God

Quote: τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the Herodians and the Pharisees are using the possessive form to describe a way that God desires or approves of. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way that pleases God”

the way of God

Quote: τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the Pharisees and Herodians use the word way to refer to behavior in life. More specifically, they mean that this behavior pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “behavior that pleases God”

on the basis of truth

Quote: ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “based on what is true”

Is it lawful

Quote: ἔξεστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word lawful could be referring to: (1) whether something is permitted by the Jewish law that God gave to Moses. Alternate translation: “Does the law that God gave to Moses permit us” (2) whether something is generally right or wrong. Alternate translation: “Is it right” or “Is it appropriate”

to Caesar

Quote: Καίσαρι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, Caesar represents the Roman leaders and government in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the Roman leaders” or “to the Roman empire”

not

Quote: οὔ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The Herodians and the Pharisees are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “is it not lawful to do so”

Should we give, or should we not give

Quote: δῶμεν ἢ μὴ δῶμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the Pharisees and the Herodians are asking about whether they should give or not give poll taxes to Caesar. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Should we give the poll tax, or should we not give it”

Mark 12:15

their hypocrisy

Quote: αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hypocrisy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that they were acting hypocritically” or “that they were being hypocritical”

Why do you test me

Quote: τί με πειράζετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Herodians and the Pharisees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you are testing me.” or “Stop testing me!”

do you test … Bring

Quote: πειράζετε? φέρετέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees and the Herodians, the word you and the command Bring are plural.

a denarius

Quote: δηνάριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney

A denarius was a silver coin equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “a silver coin” or “a coin worth one day’s wage”

Mark 12:16

they

Quote: οἱ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to the people who were there, more specifically the Herodians and the disciples of the Pharisees. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the disciples of the Pharisees and the Herodians” or “the people there”

image and inscription {is} this

Quote: ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, when governments made coins, they would usually put the face of the king or leader on one side, and they would usually have writing on the coin that honored that king or leader. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this practice more explicit. Alternate translation: “face and words of honor did the Roman government stamp on this coin”

inscription

Quote: ἡ ἐπιγραφή (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word inscription refers to a few words carved or pressed into a hard surface. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of writing, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “writing” or “written message”

Caesar’s

Quote: Καίσαρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The Herodians and the Pharisees are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “The image and inscription are Caesar’s”

Caesar’s

Quote: Καίσαρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the fact that the image and inscription on the coin are Caesar’s implies that they were created by the empire that Caesar ruled, the Roman empire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “They are of Caesar, the man who rules the Roman empire”

Mark 12:17

The things of Caesar, give back to Caesar

Quote: τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, Caesar represents the Roman leaders and government in general. See how you translated this word in 12:14, but make sure that the connection to the answer “Caesar’s” in 12:16 is clear. Alternate translation: “The things of the Roman leaders, give back to the Roman leaders” or “The things of the Roman empire, give back to the Roman empire”

give back

Quote: ἀπόδοτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees and the Herodians, the command give back is plural.

and the things of God, to God

Quote: καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things that belong to God”

Mark 12:18

And Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, come to him and were questioning him, saying

Quote: καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι; καὶ ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Mark is here introducing the Sadducees as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And some people approached him. They were Sadducees, who are a group who say that there is no resurrection. They were questioning him, saying”

And Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, come to him

Quote: καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark provides background information about the Sadducees that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Sadducees teach that there is no resurrection. Some of them come to him”

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection

Quote: Σαδδουκαῖοι & οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish

This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes that more explicit. Alternate translation: “Sadducees, men who believe that no one will rise from the dead”

there is no resurrection

Quote: ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people do not resurrect”

come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “go”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

Mark 12:19

Moses wrote to us

Quote: Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here, the Sadducees introduce a summary of a section of an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Deuteronomy (see Deuteronomy 25:5–6). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that the Sadducees are summarizing an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote to us in the book of Deuteronomy” or “Moses declared to us in the Law”

wrote to us that if someone’s brother dies and leaves behind a wife but does not leave a child, his brother should take the wife and raise up seed for his brother

Quote: ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον, ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “wrote to us, ‘If someone’s brother dies and leaves behind a wife but does not leave a child, his brother should take the wife and raise up seed for his brother’”

wrote to us

Quote: ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, the word us would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducees mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew.

that if someone’s brother dies and leaves behind a wife but does not leave a child, his brother should take

Quote: ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον, ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here Moses uses an imaginary situation to show what should happen when that kind of situation actually happens. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “to suppose that someone’s brother dies and leaves behind a wife but does not leave a child. In that situation, his brother should take”

someone’s brother

Quote: τινος ἀδελφὸς (1)

Alternate translation: “someone with a brother”

his brother should take the wife and raise up seed for his brother

Quote: ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Moses required that, when a man’s brother died without having any children even though he was married, the man had to marry his brother’s widow. The first child that they had would be considered offspring of the man’s deceased brother. That way, the deceased brother’s family line could continue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit in your translation, or you could include some of this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “his brother should marry the widow and raise up seed with her. The first child will continue the dead man’s family line”

his brother should take the wife

Quote: ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase take the wife means that the man should marry his brother’s widow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that man should marry his brother’s widow” or “he should marry his dead brother’s wife”

raise up seed

Quote: ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the author of the quotation is speaking of having a child as if it were raising up seed. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “produce offspring”

Mark 12:20

There were seven brothers, and the first

Quote: ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν; καὶ ὁ πρῶτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here the Sadducees use an imaginary situation to set up a question they want to ask Jesus. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Now imagine a family with seven brothers. The first”

the first

Quote: ὁ πρῶτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The Sadducees are using the number first as a noun to mean the first brother. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first brother” or “the oldest brother”

the first

Quote: ὁ πρῶτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number one”

took a wife

Quote: ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase took a wife indicates that the man got married. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “got married” or “married someone”

seed

Quote: σπέρμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the Sadducees are speaking of offspring as if they were seed. See how you translated the similar use of this word in 12:19. Alternate translation: “offspring”

Mark 12:21

the second

Quote: ὁ δεύτερος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The Sadducees are using the number second as a noun to mean the second brother. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the next brother” or “the second oldest brother”

the second

Quote: ὁ δεύτερος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number two”

took her

Quote: ἔλαβεν αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase took her indicates that the man married his brother’s widow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “got married to her” or “married her”

seed

Quote: σπέρμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the Sadducees are speaking of offspring as if they were seed. See how you translated the similar use of this word in 12:19. Alternate translation: “offspring”

and the third likewise

Quote: καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the third likewise took her and died, not having left seed” or “and the third likewise experienced the same things”

the third

Quote: ὁ τρίτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The Sadducees are using the number third as a noun to mean the third brother. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the next brother” or “the third oldest brother”

the third

Quote: ὁ τρίτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three”

Mark 12:22

the seven

Quote: οἱ ἑπτὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The Sadducees are using the number seven as a noun to mean the seven brothers. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers”

did not leave seed

Quote: οὐκ ἀφῆκαν σπέρμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the Sadducees imply that all seven brothers married the woman and died without leaving seed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all married her, one by one, and all of them died, not leaving seed”

seed

Quote: σπέρμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the Sadducees are speaking of offspring as if they were seed. See how you translated the similar use of this word in 12:19. Alternate translation: “offspring”

of all

Quote: πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The Sadducees are using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the people they have mentioned. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all those people”

Mark 12:23

In the resurrection, when they rise again

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, ὅταν ἀναστῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms resurrection and rise again mean similar things. The Sadducees are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “When they rise again” or “In the resurrection”

In the resurrection

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει (1)

The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In the supposed resurrection” or “If there is a resurrection”

In the resurrection

Quote: ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “When people resurrect”

they rise again

Quote: ἀναστῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase rise again refers to people who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will be restored to life” or “they will resurrect”

they rise again

Quote: ἀναστῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “men and women rise again”

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why the Sadducees ask their question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a question, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “We ask this question because” or “This is a problem, since”

the seven

Quote: οἱ & ἑπτὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The Sadducees are using the number seven as a noun to mean the seven brothers. See how you expressed the idea in 12:22. Alternate translation: “all seven of the brothers”

Mark 12:24

Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God

Quote: οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Sadducees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are most certainly being led astray because of this, not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God!” or “I tell you that you are being led astray because of this, not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God.”

Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God

Quote: οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Is it not because you do not know the Scriptures nor the power of God that you are being led astray”

Are you not being led astray

Quote: οὐ & πλανᾶσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is they themselves. Alternate translation: “Are you not going astray” or “Are you not leading yourselves astray”

Are you not being led astray

Quote: οὐ & πλανᾶσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Sadducees, the word you here is plural.

because of this, not knowing

Quote: διὰ τοῦτο & μὴ εἰδότες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here, the word this refers directly ahead to the phrase not knowing the Scriptures nor the power of God. Jesus expresses the idea in this way because it was powerful in his language. If using the word this to refer to what someone is about to say would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information and make the expression powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “because you do not know”

the power of God

Quote: τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the powerful things that God can do”

Mark 12:25

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an explanation related to how the Sadducees have been “led astray” (see 12:24). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “What you should know is that”

they rise … they neither marry … they are

Quote: ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν & εἰσὶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Both uses of the pronoun they refer to men and women in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “when men and women rise … they neither marry … they are”

they rise

Quote: ἀναστῶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word rise refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they are restored to life”

from the dead

Quote: ἐκ νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to refer to all people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people” or “from the corpses”

they neither marry nor are given in marriage

Quote: οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, it was customary to talk about men marrying and women being given in marriage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “men do not marry and women are not given in marriage” or “men and women do not get married”

are given in marriage

Quote: γαμίζονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Jesus implies that it is the people’s parents. Alternate translation: “do their parents give them in marriage”

but

Quote: ἀλλ’ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

What follows the word but here is in contrast to what is currently the case on earth. Jesus is using this contrast to show the Sadducees that they were mistaken to think that the existence of men and women in heaven would follow the same pattern or order of things as had their former lives on earth. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather”

but they are like angels in the heavens

Quote: ἀλλ’ εἰσὶν ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Jesus is saying that when people rise from the dead, they are like angels because neither of them marry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are like angels in the heavens, since they too do not marry”

Mark 12:26

But concerning the dead, that they are raised, did you not read

Quote: περὶ δὲ τῶν νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται, οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the phrase But concerning introduces the next topic that Jesus wants to talk about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next topic. Alternate translation: “Next, I will talk about the dead, that they are raised. Did you not read”

the dead

Quote: τῶν νεκρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to refer to all people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. See how you expressed the idea in 12:25. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses”

they are raised

Quote: ἐγείρονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word raised refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they are restored to life”

they are raised

Quote: ἐγείρονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God raises them”

did you not read in the book of Moses, at the bush, how God spoke to him, saying, ‘I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob

Quote: οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου, πῶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Θεὸς λέγων, ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach the Sadducees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you have read in the book of Moses, at the bush, how God spoke to him, saying, ‘I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob.’” or “Surely you have read in the book of Moses, at the bush, how God spoke to him, saying, ‘I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob’!”

did you not read

Quote: οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Sadducees, the word you here is plural.

the book of Moses

Quote: τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the book that Moses wrote and authorized, the Pentateuch (the first five books of the Old Testament). Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another. Alternate translation: “the book that Moses authorized” or “the books that come from Moses”

at the bush

Quote: ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to the passage in the book of Moses where God appears to Moses in a bush that is on fire but that does not burn up. This passage can be found in Exodus 3:2–6, and the quotation that follows is more specifically from Exodus 3:6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the passage about the bush” or “in the place in the book of Exodus where Moses encountered God in a bush”

saying, ‘I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob

Quote: λέγων, ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he is the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob?”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob

Quote: ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the author of the quotation is using the possessive form to describe the God whom Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob worship. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the God that Abraham honors, and the God that Isaac honors, and the God that Jacob honors”

Mark 12:27

He is not a God of the dead, but of the living

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “God is not a God of the dead, but he is a God of the living”

He is not a God of the dead, but of the living

Quote: οὐκ ἔστιν Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that, although Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob had already died by the time God spoke these words, God still called himself their God. Since God is not a God of the dead, but of the living, this means that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob must be alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God is not of the dead, but of the living, so Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob must live again after they died”

not a God of the dead, but of the living

Quote: οὐκ & Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two phrases here. Alternate translation: “a God of the living, not of the dead”

of the dead, but of the living

Quote: νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the God whom the living, not the dead, worship. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “honored by the dead, but by the living”

of the dead, … of the living

Quote: νεκρῶν & ζώντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjectives dead and living as nouns to mean people who are dead and living. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of dead people … of living people”

You are being much deceived

Quote: πολὺ πλανᾶσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is they themselves. Alternate translation: “You are misunderstanding much” or “You are deceiving yourselves much”

You are being much deceived

Quote: πολὺ πλανᾶσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to the Sadducees, the word You here is plural.

Mark 12:28

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

one of the scribes, having come up, having heard them discussing this together, having seen that he answered them well, questioned him

Quote: προσελθὼν εἷς τῶν γραμματέων, ἀκούσας αὐτῶν συνζητούντων, ἰδὼν ὅτι καλῶς ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς, ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces one of the scribes as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there a scribe there. When he came up, he heard them discussing this together. He saw that Jesus answered them well, and he questioned him”

having come up

Quote: προσελθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone up”

them discussing this together

Quote: αὐτῶν συνζητούντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the scribe heard Jesus and the Sadducees discussing whether people rise from the dead and what happens to them then. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “them discussing the resurrection of the dead together”

having seen

Quote: ἰδὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, Mark is using the word seen to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood” or “having observed”

Which is the first commandment of all

Quote: ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the scribe is using the word first to refer to what is most important. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Which is the most significant commandment of all” or “Which commandment is the greatest of all”

the first commandment of all

Quote: ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “commandment number one”

of all

Quote: πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The scribe is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the commandments. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of all the commandments”

Mark 12:29

The first

Quote: πρώτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the Jesus is using the word first to refer to what is most important. See how you translated the word first in 12:28. Alternate translation: “The most significant” or “The greatest”

The first

Quote: πρώτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective first as a noun to mean the first commandment. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “The first commandment”

The first

Quote: πρώτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Number one”

Mark 12:29-30

is, ‘Hear, Israel, the Lord our God is one Lord … And you will love the Lord your God from your whole heart, and from your whole soul, and from your whole mind, and from your whole strength

Quote: ἐστίν, ἄκουε, Ἰσραήλ, Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν & καὶ ἀγαπήσεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου, ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Deuteronomy 6:4–5. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “is this commandment from the book of Deuteronomy: ‘Hear, Israel, the Lord our God is one Lord. And you will love the Lord your God from your whole heart, and from your whole soul, and from your whole mind, and from your whole strength.’”

is, ‘Hear, Israel, the Lord our God is one Lord … And you will love the Lord your God from your whole heart, and from your whole soul, and from your whole mind, and from your whole strength

Quote: ἐστίν, ἄκουε, Ἰσραήλ, Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν & καὶ ἀγαπήσεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου, ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “is that Israel should hear that the Lord their God is one Lord and that they should love the Lord their God from their whole heart, and from their whole soul, and from their whole mind, and from their whole strength.”

Mark 12:29

Hear

Quote: ἄκουε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Hear draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Hear with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention”

Israel

Quote: Ἰσραήλ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word Israel refers to the people who are descended from a man named Israel. This man’s other name was Jacob. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Israelites” or “descendants of Israel”

the Lord our God is one Lord

Quote: Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν (1)

Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is one” or “the Lord is our God, the Lord is one”

the Lord our God is one Lord

Quote: Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase the Lord our God is one Lord could be: (1) an affirmation that the Lord our God is the only one whom the Israelites honored and worshiped as Lord and God. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God is our only Lord” or “the only Lord is the Lord our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of the Lord our God. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God is a unique Lord”

Mark 12:30

you will love … your … your … your … your … your

Quote: ἀγαπήσεις & σου & σου & σου & σου & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since in this command God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the words you and your are singular throughout this verse.

you will love

Quote: ἀγαπήσεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

The author of the quotation is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. Alternate translation: “you should love” or “you must love”

the Lord your God

Quote: Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, the author of the quotation is using the possessive form to describe the God whom the people of Israel worship. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Lord God whom you honor”

from your whole heart, and from your whole soul, and from your whole mind, and from your whole strength

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Here, the author of the quotation is referring to all of a human being by naming multiple parts of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with all of who you are” or “with your entire being”

from your whole heart

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

In Mark’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate heart by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “from all your desires” or “with all your feelings”

from … from … from … from

Quote: ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ & ἐξ (1)

Alternate translation: “with … with … with … with”

from your whole soul

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, soul represents a person’s life with special focus on that person’s identity and actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with everything you are” or “from all your inclinations”

from your whole strength

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of strength, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how strong you are” or “with everything that you are able to do”

Mark 12:31

The second

Quote: δευτέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the scribe is using the word second to refer to what is the second most important thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The next most significant” or “The second greatest”

The second

Quote: δευτέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective second as a noun to mean the second commandment. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “The second commandment”

The second

Quote: δευτέρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Number two”

is} this, ‘You will love your neighbor as yourself

Quote: αὕτη, ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Leviticus 19:18. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “is this commandment from the book of Leviticus: ‘You will love your neighbor as yourself.’”

is} this, ‘You will love your neighbor as yourself

Quote: αὕτη, ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “is that one should love one’s neighbor as oneself.”

You will love your … yourself

Quote: ἀγαπήσεις & σου & σεαυτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Since in this command God is addressing each specific person who is part of God’s people, the words You, your, and yourself are singular.

You will love

Quote: ἀγαπήσεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative

The author of the quotation is using the future form to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a form that expresses a command or obligation. Alternate translation: “You should love” or “You must love”

as yourself

Quote: ὡς σεαυτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The author of the quotation is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “as you love yourself”

as yourself

Quote: ὡς σεαυτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

The author of the quotation assumes that people love themselves, so he wants these people to love their neighbors just as much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as deeply as yourself”

There is no other commandment greater than these

Quote: μείζων τούτων ἄλλη ἐντολὴ οὐκ ἔστιν (1)

Alternate translation: “All other commandments are less important than these”

no other commandment

Quote: ἄλλη ἐντολὴ οὐκ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of commandment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nothing that God commanded us that is”

these

Quote: τούτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word these refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those two commandments”

Mark 12:32

Well

Quote: καλῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the scribe implies that he thinks that Jesus answered the question Well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “You have answered well”

On the basis of truth

Quote: ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Based on what is true” or “You have spoken what is true when”

he is one, and there is no other besides him

Quote: εἷς ἐστιν, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος πλὴν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “he is one, that is, there is no other besides him” or “he is one; indeed, there is no other besides him”

he is one

Quote: εἷς ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, just as in 12:29, the phrase he is one could be: (1) an affirmation that God is the only one whom the Israelites honored and worshiped as God. Alternate translation: “he is our only God” or “he alone is God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of God. Alternate translation: “he is unique”

he is … him

Quote: ἐστιν & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns he and him refer to God. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to him more directly. Alternate translation: “God is … God”

other

Quote: ἄλλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The scribe is using the adjective other as a noun to mean another god. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “other god”

Mark 12:33

from the whole heart and from the whole understanding and from the whole strength

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Here, the scribe is referring to all of a human being by naming multiple parts of it. See how you expressed the similar idea in 12:30. Alternate translation: “with all of who one is” or “with the entire being”

from the whole heart

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated the similar phrase in 12:30. Alternate translation: “from all the desires” or “with all one’s feelings”

from … from … from

Quote: ἐξ (-1)

Alternate translation: “with … with … with”

from the whole understanding

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of understanding, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from everything that one understands” or “with the whole mind”

from the whole strength

Quote: ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

See how you translated the similar phrase in 12:30. Alternate translation: “from how strong one is” or “with everything that one is able to do”

as oneself

Quote: ὡς ἑαυτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you expressed the similar idea in 12:31. Alternate translation: “as one love oneself”

as oneself

Quote: ὡς ἑαυτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

See how you expressed this idea in 12:31. Alternate translation: “as deeply as oneself”

is even more than

Quote: περισσότερόν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the scribe means that keeping these two commandments is more important or significant than offering burnt offerings and sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is more significant than”

all the whole burnt offerings and sacrifices

Quote: πάντων τῶν ὁλοκαυτωμάτων καὶ θυσιῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms whole burnt offerings and sacrifices mean similar things. The scribe is using the two terms together to include all the different kinds of sacrifices and offerings in his claim. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “all the various offerings” or “all sacrifices that anyone might offer”

Mark 12:34

having seen him, that

Quote: ἰδὼν αὐτὸν ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, Mark is using the word seen to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood that” or “having observed that”

You are not far from the kingdom of God

Quote: οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, Jesus speaks as if the man was physically not far from the kingdom of God. He means that the man is almost part of God’s kingdom. Jesus is speaking of the kingdom of God as if it were a physical place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are almost in the kingdom of God” or “You almost belong to the kingdom of God”

not far from

Quote: οὐ μακρὰν & ἀπὸ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes

Jesus is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, not, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, far. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “very close to”

no one any longer was daring

Quote: οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated no one and any longer are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “people no longer were daring”

Mark 12:35

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Sometime later,”

answering

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word answering indicates that Jesus asked this question in response to how the Jewish leaders had been trying to trick and trap him with their questions. Jesus was not directly responding to anyone’s question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response to how the Jewish leaders had been testing him” or “after the Jewish leaders had tested him”

temple

Quote: ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark means that Jesus was teaching in the temple area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in 11:11. Alternate translation: “temple courtyard”

How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David

Quote: πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

This is not a rhetorical question. Rather, Jesus’ listeners had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement.

the son of David

Quote: υἱὸς Δαυείδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the word son refers to a male descendant. It does not mean that the Christ is the direct son of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “descended from David” or “in the lineage of David”

Mark 12:36

David himself

Quote: αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Jesus uses the word himself here to emphasize that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who wrote the words in the quotation that follows. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom they call the father of the Christ”

in the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase in the Holy Spirit indicates that David wrote the words that follow as the Holy Spirit inspired him. In other words, the Holy Spirit prompted David to write this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “by the inspiration of the Spirit” or “prompted by the Spirit”

said, The Lord said to my Lord, Sit at my right hand, until I put your enemies under your feet

Quote: εἶπεν & εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right hand until he puts his enemies under his feet”

said

Quote: εἶπεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here Jesus introduces a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book of Psalms (see Psalm 110:1). This Psalm was written by David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “said in the book of Psalms” or “wrote in Scriptures”

The Lord said to my Lord

Quote: εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the term Lord does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance refers to God. The second instance refers to a person whom David respectfully calls “lord.” The ULT and UST capitalize this second instance of the word because it refers to the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord, said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord”

Sit at my right hand

Quote: κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

When someone sits at God’s right hand, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Sit to rule at my right hand” or “Take the place of honor and authority at my right hand”

at my right hand

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the phrase at my right hand refers to the place next to a person’s right hand, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that the Lord has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at my right side” or “at the honorable place next to me”

until I put your enemies under your feet

Quote: ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In the author’s culture, to put people under a person’s feet indicates that those people have been conquered and are powerless and shamed. So, this means that God will conquer and shame all the enemies of the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “until I make your enemies kneel before you” or “until I conquer and shame your enemies”

under your feet

Quote: ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read under your feet. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “as a footstool of your feet.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 12:37

David himself calls him ‘Lord,’ and how is he his son

Quote: αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον, καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, people would not call any of their descendants Lord, since this title was used for people who were more important or older. Jesus’ question assumes this practice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “David himself calls him ‘Lord,’ and no one calls his own son ‘Lord.’ So, how can he be his son”

David himself calls him ‘Lord

Quote: αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David himself calls the Messiah his Lord”

David himself

Quote: αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

See how you translated the phrase David himself in 12:36, where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom they call the father of the Christ,”

and how is he his son

Quote: καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Like the question in 12:35, this is a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones the Jewish leaders asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “so in what way can he be his son”

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word and introduces a question that is based on the previous statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “so”

his son

Quote: υἱός αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here, the word son refers to a male descendant. It does not mean that the Christ is the direct son of David. See how you expressed the idea in 12:35. Alternate translation: “descended from him” or “in his lineage”

Mark 12:38

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

Mark uses the word And to indicate that Jesus is still in the temple area talking to the people there, as he was in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes that more explicit. Alternate translation: “Then” or “At that time”

Watch out for the scribes

Quote: βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that people need to Watch out that they do not act like the scribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you are not like the scribes” or “Watch out that you do not behave like the scribes do”

Watch out

Quote: βλέπετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is teaching many people, the command Watch out is plural.

to walk in long robes

Quote: ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In this culture, long robes were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in long robes was to assert one’s right to high status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what it means to behave in this way. Alternate translation: “to walk around looking important in their long robes”

greetings

Quote: ἀσπασμοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that these would be respectful greetings in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “respectful greetings”

the marketplaces

Quote: ταῖς ἀγοραῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word marketplaces refers to large, open-air areas where people buy and sell goods. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of area, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the town squares” or “the parks”

Mark 12:39

first seats … first places

Quote: πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of the seats and places for the most important people as if they were first in a sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “important seats … important places”

first seats … first places

Quote: πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here or equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “the number one seats … the number one places”

Mark 12:40

the ones devouring the houses of the widows

Quote: οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if the scribes were devouring or eating the houses of widows. He means that they are taking the houses away from the widows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones taking the houses of widows” or “the ones defrauding widows of their houses”

the houses of the widows

Quote: τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus speaks of the houses of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. If it would be helpful in your language, you state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that widows own”

as a pretext

Quote: προφάσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase as a pretext could mean: (1) that the scribes and Pharisees are using long prayers to try to look godly. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly” (2) that the scribes are Pharisees are using their long prayers to hide or cover up how they devour the houses of widows. Alternate translation: “to cover that up” or “to disguise what they do”

will receive greater condemnation

Quote: λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of condemnation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be condemned more severely”

greater condemnation

Quote: περισσότερον κρίμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that these scribes will receive greater condemnation than they would have if they had not pretended to be godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “greater condemnation than people who did not pretend to be godly”

condemnation

Quote: κρίμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using the word condemnation to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned for doing something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “punishment”

Mark 12:41

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “After that,”

opposite the treasury

Quote: κατέναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, a place opposite the treasury is directly in front of the treasury. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the treasury in front of him” or “with the treasury before him”

the treasury, … the treasury

Quote: τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου & τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A treasury is a box or receptacle in which people can put and store money. More specifically, this word refers to the receptacles in the temple courtyard into which people could drop money that would be used to keep the temple operating. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of receptacle, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the temple money box … the temple money box” or “the chest for the gifts for the temple … the chest for the gifts for the temple”

rich

Quote: πλούσιοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective rich as a noun to mean rich people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “rich people”

much

Quote: πολλά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective much as a noun to mean much money. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “much money”

Mark 12:42

having come, one poor widow put in

Quote: ἐλθοῦσα μία χήρα πτωχὴ ἔβαλεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces one poor widow as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a woman arrived. She was a widow, and she was poor. She put in”

having come

Quote: ἐλθοῦσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

two lepta

Quote: λεπτὰ δύο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney

The word lepta is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value”

which is a quadrans

Quote: ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney

A quadrans was one of the smallest and least valuable coins in circulation in this place and time. It was equivalent to about an eighth of an hour’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of one of the least valuable coins in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “which is a nickel” or “which is not even an hour’s wage”

Mark 12:43-44

Truly I say to you that this poor widow put in more than all the ones putting into the treasury … For all put in from the things abounding to them, but she, from her poverty, put in everything, as much as she had, her whole life

Quote: ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ, πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον & πάντες γὰρ ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον, αὕτη δὲ, ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 12:43 and 12:44 into a verse bridge in order to include the reason for Jesus’ declaration before including his declaration. Alternate translation: “All put in from the things abounding to them, but this poor widow, from her poverty, put in everything, as much as she had, her whole life. Therefore, truly I say to you that she put in more than all the ones putting into the treasury”

Mark 12:43

to you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to his disciples, the word you here is singular.

this poor widow put in more than all

Quote: ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ, πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not express them as if they were figurative.

all the ones putting

Quote: πάντων & τῶν βαλλόντων (1)

Alternate translation: “everyone else who put money”

the treasury

Quote: τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated treasury in 12:41. Alternate translation: “the temple money box” or “the chest for the gifts for the temple”

Mark 12:44

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces the basis or reason for the claim that Jesus made in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “I say that because” or “Here is why:”

all

Quote: πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the people who were putting money into the treasury. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all these people” or “all those who have given money”

put in from the things abounding to them

Quote: ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον (1)

Alternate translation: “put in only some of the many things that they had”

she, from her poverty, put in everything, as much as she had

Quote: αὕτη & ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν (1)

Alternate translation: “she put in all of the few things that she had”

from her poverty

Quote: ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of poverty, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “although she was poor”

everything, as much as she had

Quote: πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression everything, as much as she had contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “everything that she had”

her whole life

Quote: ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if the woman had put in her whole life. He means that she put in all the money that she had to buy what she needed to live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all she had to live on” or “so that she had nothing left to buy even the necessities”

her whole life

Quote: ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that kept her alive”

Mark 13

Mark 13 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)
   • The disciples ask Jesus about the destruction of the temple (13:1–4)
   • Jesus teaches about the destruction of the temple (24:5–31)
     • Things that will happen in the time before the destruction of the temple (13:5–13)
     • Things that will happen immediately before the destruction of the temple (13:14–23)
     • The coming of the Son of Man (13:24–27)
     • When these things will happen (13:28–31)
   • Jesus teaches about his second coming (13:32–37)

When Jesus speaks about which topics

When the disciples speak to Jesus in 13:4, they ask about two things: first, they want to know when the temple will be destroyed, and second, they want to know what the sign will be that shows that the temple is about to be destroyed. Most Christians agree that Jesus answered these two questions but also included information about his second coming. However, Christians disagree about when Jesus is speaking about which topic. He could:

1. finish speaking about the destruction of the temple in 13:31 and then go on to speak about his second coming (the outline above follows this view)
2. finish speaking about the destruction of the temple (perhaps as a foreshadowing of the final tribulation) in 13:23 and then go on to speak about his second coming
3. speak about the destruction of the temple (perhaps as a foreshadowing of the final tribulation) in 13:5–23 and 13:28–31 and about his second coming in 13:24–27 and 13:32–37

Since Christians disagree over when Jesus is speaking about which topic, if possible format your translation so that several interpretations are possible.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The destruction of the temple

The temple in Jerusalem was a very impressive, large building. Despite that, Jesus predicted that it would be destroyed within the lifetime of those who heard him. In fact, about 40 years later, a Roman army conquered Jerusalem and destroyed the temple.

The Son of Man coming on the clouds of heaven

In 13:26, Jesus indicates that he, the Son of Man, will “come” in clouds. However, he does not indicate the location to which he will “come.” Christians debate whether Jesus is describing his return to earth or his enthronement in heaven. If possible, your translation should allow for both possibilities. See the notes on this verse for translation options.

“This generation” in 13:30

In 13:30, Jesus says that what he has described will happen before “this generation” passes away. Many interpretations have been proposed for the group of people to which “this generation” refers:

1. The people who were alive while Jesus was speaking these words
2. The people who would be alive when the signs of the end began
3. Christians throughout history
4. Jewish people in general throughout history
5. Humans in general

Since the word that Jesus uses primarily refers to people who are alive at the same time, if possible use a word or phrase that refers to such a group of people. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include some interpretations of the word in a footnote.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Most of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is teaching four of his disciples. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verse 13. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Mark 13:1

he

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples,”

going out

Quote: ἐκπορευομένου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “coming out”

temple

Quote: ἱεροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark means that Jesus left the temple area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See you translated this word in 11:11. Alternate translation: “temple courtyard”

look

Quote: ἴδε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word look is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks a person to look or to pay attention. Alternate translation: “see” or “look at that”

What manner of stones and what manner of buildings

Quote: ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί! (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

This is an exclamation that is emphasizing that the stones and buildings are large and impressive. Use an exclamation that would communicate that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “What impressive stones! What impressive buildings!” or “How impressive these stones and buildings are!”

What manner of stones

Quote: ποταποὶ λίθοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, stones refers to the very large stones with which the temple walls were built. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What manner of stones in the walls” or “What manner of building stones”

Mark 13:2

Do you see these great buildings

Quote: βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to draw the attention of the disciples to the buildings. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Consider these great buildings.” or “See these great buildings!”

Do you see

Quote: βλέπεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to one of his disciples, the word you here is singular.

A stone upon a stone will certainly not be left here, which will certainly not be torn down

Quote: οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus says that every stone will be torn down as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “Almost every stone upon a stone will not be left here, and almost none of them will not be torn down”

A stone upon a stone will certainly not be left here, which will certainly not be torn down

Quote: οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be invading enemies. Alternate translation: “An invading army will certainly not leave a stone upon a stone here, which they will not tear down”

A stone upon a stone will certainly not be left here, which will certainly not be torn down

Quote: οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ (1)

If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in positive form. Alternate translation: “Every stone will be toppled off the stone it is on, and each one will be torn down”

certainly not … certainly not

Quote: οὐ μὴ (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means … by no means”

Mark 13:3

he

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples,”

opposite the temple

Quote: κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, a place opposite the temple is directly in front of the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the temple in front of him” or “with the temple before him”

Mark 13:4

Tell

Quote: εἰπὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you tell”

Tell

Quote: εἰπὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the four disciples are speaking with Jesus, the command Tell is singular.

these things

Quote: ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase these things refers to the events that Jesus described in 13:2. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the events you have spoken about” or “that destruction”

all these things are about to be completed

Quote: μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase all these things could refer to: (1) the events that Jesus described in 13:2. Alternate translation: “all the events you have spoken about are about to be completed” (2) the end of the age, or the time when Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “this age is about to be completed” or “all things are about to end”

are about to be completed

Quote: μέλλῃ & συντελεῖσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are about to take place” or “are about to occur”

Mark 13:5

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word Now introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

leads you astray

Quote: ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus is speaking as if the disciples could literally be led astray, that is, led down the wrong path. He means that they could be deceived. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “causes you to believe what is wrong”

Mark 13:6

Many … many

Quote: πολλοὶ & πολλοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

In both places, Jesus is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “Many men and women … many men and women”

will come

Quote: ἐλεύσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “will go”

in my name

Quote: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the word name refers primarily to the person who has that name, and it focuses especially on that person’s authority. More specifically, Jesus could mean that: (1) these people claim to have the authority that Jesus properly has. Alternate translation: “in my authority” or “claiming to have the authority I have” (2) these people claim to represent Jesus. Alternate translation: “claiming to be my representatives” or “as if they were my representatives”

saying, ‘I am he!’ and

Quote: λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that they are him, and”

I am he

Quote: ἐγώ εἰμι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The implication is that these people are claiming to be the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am the Christ”

they will lead many astray

Quote: πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

See how you translated the similar expression in 13:5. Alternate translation: “they will cause many to believe what is wrong”

Mark 13:7

of wars and rumors of wars

Quote: πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase wars and rumors of wars could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. Alternate translation: “of wars that are happening and rumors about wars that might happen” (2) reports of wars that are already taking place nearby and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”

do not be troubled

Quote: μὴ θροεῖσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the wars and rumors of wars. Alternate translation: “do not let those things trouble you”

it is necessary {for this} to happen

Quote: δεῖ γενέσθαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that God has planned these things, and they will not change. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God has chosen that these things will happen”

the end {is} not yet

Quote: οὔπω τὸ τέλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus could be speaking about: (1) the end of the temple, which Jesus had predicted in 13:2. Alternate translation: “the end of the temple is not yet” or “what I have predicted will not yet happen” (2) the end of the age, which he will say more about later in his teaching. Alternate translation: “the end of the world is not yet” or “it is not yet the moment in the future when the current way of doing things will cease”

Mark 13:8

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces a further explanation of what is going to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Even more,”

nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom

Quote: ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “nation will rise against nation, yes, kingdom against kingdom” or “nation and kingdom rise against nation and kingdom”

nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom

Quote: ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The words nation and kingdom represents nations and kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom and nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “some nations will rise against other nations, and some kingdoms against other kingdoms”

nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom

Quote: ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the words nation and kingdom represent the people who live in them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of a nation will rise up against the people of another nation, and the people of a kingdom against the people of another kingdom”

will rise against

Quote: ἐγερθήσεται & ἐπ’ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase rise against referring to attacking someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fight against”

kingdom against kingdom

Quote: βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “kingdom will rise against kingdom”

famines

Quote: λιμοί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read famines. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “famines and troubles.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

These things {are

Quote: ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, These things refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “The things that I have just described are”

the beginning of birth pains

Quote: ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of the events that he has described as if they were the beginning of birth pains. He means that, just like birth pains, they are difficult and painful things that eventually lead to a happy and wonderful result. If possible, you should maintain the figure of speech or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “like the beginning of birth pains”

Mark 13:9

But you

Quote: δὲ ὑμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that Jesus will speak about, which is you, the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “As for you”

watch yourselves

Quote: βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. He means that they need to make sure that they are ready for what is going to happen to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “prepare yourselves” or “pay attention to yourselves”

They will hand you over to

Quote: παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase hand you over refers to putting someone under the authority and control of other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand before” or “they will bring you before”

They will hand you over

Quote: παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun They refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will hand you over”

you will be beaten

Quote: δαρήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people will beat you”

you will be made to stand

Quote: σταθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase you will be made to stand before refers to being arrested and accused before someone in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you will be seized and put on trial”

you will be made to stand

Quote: σταθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand”

for my sake

Quote: ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that these things will happen because the disciples are connected with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you follow me”

for a testimony

Quote: εἰς μαρτύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

Here, the phrase for a testimony could introduce: (1) the purpose for which God allows the disciples to be made to stand before governors and kings. Alternate translation: “and that way you can give testimony” (2) the result of the disciples being made to stand before governors and kings. Alternate translation: “and as a result you will give testimony”

for a testimony

Quote: εἰς μαρτύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimony, you could express the same idea in another way. Make sure that your translation matches the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “which will happen so that you can testify” or “and as a result you will testify”

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to the governors and kings mentioned in this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those governors and kings”

Mark 13:10

first

Quote: πρῶτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that what he describes in this verse will happen before the “end” he referred to in 13:7. As in 13:7, here Jesus could be referring to: (1) the end of the temple, which Jesus had predicted in 13:2. Alternate translation: “before the end of the temple” or “before what I have predicted about the temple happens” (2) the end of the age, which he will say more about later in his teaching. Alternate translation: “before the end of the world” or “before the current way of doing things ceases”

first

Quote: πρῶτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Make sure that your translation fits with the interpretation you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “prior to what I have predicted” or “prior to the end”

the gospel to be proclaimed

Quote: κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that believers will be the ones who proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “believers to proclaim the gospel” or “people to proclaim the gospel”

Mark 13:11

they lead you away

Quote: ἄγωσιν ὑμᾶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they refers to any person who leads the disciples away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “somebody leads you away” or “anyone leads you away”

handing {you} over

Quote: παραδιδόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase handing {you} over refers to putting someone under the authority and control of other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “seizing you” or “bringing you before the authorities”

you will say

Quote: λαλήσητε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the disciples will be required to speak in their defense after people hand them over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you will say when they accuse you” or “you will say in your defense”

But whatever is given to you in that hour, speak that; for you are not the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἀλλ’ ὃ ἐὰν δοθῇ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ, τοῦτο λαλεῖτε; οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clause, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Since you are not the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit, whatever is given to you in that hour, speak that”

whatever is given to you in that hour, speak that

Quote: ὃ ἐὰν δοθῇ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ, τοῦτο λαλεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here, the word that refers directly back to whatever is given to you in that hour. Jesus expresses the idea in this way to introduce whatever is given to you and then explain what they should do with it. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the word that would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “speak whatever is given to you in that hour”

is given

Quote: δοθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God, and more specifically the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit gives”

in that hour

Quote: ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase in that hour refers to the time when they have been handed over and need to say something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at that moment”

you are not the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit

Quote: οὐ & ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that they will not say whatever they think but will instead say what the Holy Spirit reveals to them. He does not mean that the Holy Spirit will use their bodies to project his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you are not speaking your own words, but the words you speak come from the Holy Spirit”

but the Holy Spirit

Quote: ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit is the one speaking through you”

Mark 13:12

brother will hand over brother to death, and a father, his child, and children will rise up against parents and put them to death

Quote: παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “unbelieving brother will hand over believing brother to death, and an unbelieving father, his believing child, and unbelieving children will rise up against believing parents and put them to death”

will hand over brother to death

Quote: παραδώσει & ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase hand over refers to putting someone under the authority and control of other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will seize brother to cause his death” or “will bring brother before the authorities to cause his death”

brother will hand over brother

Quote: παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term brother is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sibling will hand over sibling”

to death, … put them to death

Quote: εἰς θάνατον & θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be killed … cause them to die”

a father, his child

Quote: πατὴρ τέκνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “a father will hand over his child to death”

a father, his child

Quote: πατὴρ τέκνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term father is masculine, Jesus is probably using the word here in a generic sense that includes both fathers and mothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “parents, their children” or “a father or mother, his or her child”

will rise up

Quote: ἐπαναστήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase rise up against refers to rebelling against an authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will defy”

put them to death

Quote: θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the children will have someone else put their parents to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “have them put to death”

Mark 13:13

you will be hated by all

Quote: ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all will hate you”

all

Quote: πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all people” or “everyone”

all

Quote: πάντων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most people”

because of my name

Quote: διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, name represents the person whose name it is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of me”

the one having endured to the end, this one will be saved

Quote: ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

Here, the phrase this one refers directly back to the one having endured to the end. Jesus expresses the idea in this way to introduce people who endure to the end and then explain what happens to them. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the phrase this one would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “the one having endured to the end will be saved”

the one having endured

Quote: ὁ & ὑπομείνας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

Jesus is speaking of anyone who endures, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who endures”

to the end

Quote: εἰς τέλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase the end could refer to: (1) the time when the persecution of the person who is enduring ceases. Alternate translation: “to the end of the persecution” (2) the person’s death. Alternate translation: “until he or she dies” (3) the time when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “until when I return”

this one will be saved

Quote: οὗτος σωθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will save this one”

Mark 13:14

the abomination of desolation

Quote: τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase the abomination of desolation is found in Daniel 9:27, Daniel 11:31, and Daniel 12:11. Jesus’ audience would have been familiar with these passages, which prophesy about the abomination entering the temple and defiling it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the temple”

the abomination of desolation

Quote: τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe an abomination that causes desolation. If that is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the abomination that causes desolation” or “the abomination that leads to desolation”

the abomination of desolation

Quote: τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of abomination and desolation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the abominable thing that desolates”

standing where he should not be

Quote: ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the word translated standing is masculine, which is why the ULT uses the word he in this sentence. By using this form, Mark could be indicating that: (1) the abomination is a thing that is identified with a man. In this case, it could be a statue of a man or something that a man sets up or creates. You could express the idea by referring to the abomination with the pronoun it. Alternate translation: “standing it should not be” (2) the abomination is a man who can also be described as an abomination. You could express the idea by referring to the abomination with the pronoun he or by using some other form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “standing where that man of abomination should not be”

where he should not be

Quote: ὅπου οὐ δεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus’ audience would have known that the phrase where he should not be implicitly refers to the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where he should not be”

he should not be” (let the one reading understand), “then

Quote: οὐ δεῖ, ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω, τότε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, clause let the one reading understand could be: (1) written by Mark to anyone who reads this story. Use a form that clearly indicates that Mark is writing this, not reporting what Jesus spoke. Alternate translation: “he should not be” (and I, Mark, add: let the one who reads this story understand), “then” (2) spoken by Jesus to anyone who reads what Daniel wrote about the abomination of desolation. Alternate translation: “he should not be—let the one who has read the book of Daniel understand—then”

let the one reading understand

Quote: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase let the one reading understand could indicate that the one reading: (1) should be able to understand what the abomination of desolation is. In this case, Mark could be implying that the one reading needs to read the passages in the book of Daniel where this abomination is mentioned. Alternate translation: “you know what I mean” or “the one reading should understand from the book of Daniel” (2) should try to understand what the abomination of desolation is. Alternate translation: “let the one reading try to understand” or “reader, pay attention”

let the one reading understand

Quote: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one reading must understand”

let the ones in Judea flee

Quote: οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ, φευγέτωσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones in Judea must flee”

to the mountains

Quote: εἰς τὰ ὄρη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that people will be safer in the mountains than in Judea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the mountains where they will be safer”

Mark 13:15

but

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word but introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave but untranslated. Alternate translation: “and”

let the one on the housetop not go down nor go in to take anything from his house

Quote: ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

Here Jesus gives a command to one person, but he implies that it applies to any of his disciples who are in the situation that he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “let the ones on the housetops not go down nor go in to take anything from their houses”

let the one on the housetop not go down nor go in to take anything from his house

Quote: ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his hearers know this and that they know that the roofs were accessed by an exterior staircase at the back of the house, distant from the entry at the front. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “let the one who is on top of his roof escape immediately by the back stairway and not descend in order to go into his house to take anything”

let the one on the housetop not go down nor go in

Quote: ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with nor. The phrase go down tells how the person is able to go in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use nor. Alternate translation: “let the one on the housetop not go down to enter in order” or “let the one on the housetop not, after going down, go in”

let the one on the housetop not go down nor go in

Quote: ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use third-person imperatives in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one on the housetop must not go down nor go in”

let the one on the housetop not go down nor go in

Quote: ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of go. Alternate translation: “let the one on the housetop not come down nor come in”

his

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term his is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her”

Mark 13:16

let the one in the field not turn back to the things behind to get his cloak

Quote: ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, ἆραι τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

Here Jesus gives a command to one person, but he implies that it applies to any of his disciples who are in the situation that he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “let the ones in the fields not turn back to the things behind to get their cloaks”

let the one in the field not turn back to the things behind to get his cloak

Quote: ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, ἆραι τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

People in Jesus’ time often walked from their towns to the field that they worked in during the day. Jesus is saying that, when they see the abomination of desolation, they should not return to their town to get their cloaks. Instead, they should flee directly from the field that they are working in. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “let the one working the field not return to his town or house to get his cloak”

let the one in the field not turn back

Quote: ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one in the field must not turn back”

his

Quote: αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations

Although the term his is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “his or her”

cloak

Quote: τὸ ἱμάτιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word cloak refers to an outer garment. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “jacket” or “outer garment”

Mark 13:17

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now”

to the ones having in the womb

Quote: ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase having in the womb refers to being pregnant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ones who are with child” or “to the ones who are pregnant”

to the ones nursing

Quote: ταῖς θηλαζούσαις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This does not mean babies who are nursing but women who are nursing babies (providing their milk for them). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to mothers who are nursing their babies”

in those days

Quote: ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase those days refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at that time” or “during that time period”

Mark 13:18-19

But pray that it might not happen in winter … For there will be in those days tribulation—such as this kind has not happened from the beginning of creation which God created until now and will certainly not happen

Quote: προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένηται χειμῶνος & ἔσονται γὰρ αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι θλῖψις, οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη, ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεὸς, ἕως τοῦ νῦν, καὶ οὐ μὴ γένηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 13:18 and 13:19 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to give the reason for Jesus’ exhortation before including the exhortation. Alternate translation: “But there will be in those days tribulation—such as this kind has not happened from the beginning of creation which God created until now and will certainly not happen. Therefore, pray that it might not happen in winter”

Mark 13:18

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now”

it might not happen

Quote: μὴ γένηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus could be referring to: (1) the things he has predicted, including the appearance of the abomination and the destruction of the temple. Alternate translation: “these events might not happen” (2) how his disciples need to flee to the hills (see 13:14). Alternate translation: “your escape might not happen” or “that you do not need to flee”

in winter

Quote: χειμῶνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In the location to which Jesus is referring, winter is the time of year when it is cold and travel is difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which it would be difficult to travel, or you could translate winter with a general expression. Alternate translation: “in the rainy season” or “in the cold season”

Mark 13:19

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why the disciples should pray that they these things would not happen in winter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a command, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “You should pray that because” or “That is because”

there will be in those days tribulation

Quote: ἔσονται & αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι θλῖψις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in those days people will be greatly hurt” or “in those days people will be greatly afflicted”

in those days

Quote: ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase those days refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. See how you expressed the idea in 13:17. Alternate translation: “at that time” or “during that time period”

such as this kind has not happened

Quote: οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη (1)

Alternate translation: “of a kind that has not yet happened” or “which will be worse than any type of tribulation that has happened”

the beginning of creation which God created

Quote: ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression the beginning of creation which God created contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “the beginning of what God created” or “the beginning of God’s creation”

will certainly not happen

Quote: οὐ μὴ γένηται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that tribulation of this kind will not happen again after these events occur. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “will certainly not happen again after that”

certainly not

Quote: οὐ μὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”

Mark 13:20

if the Lord did not shorten the days, no flesh would be saved

Quote: εἰ μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary

Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Lord really has shortened the days. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “were the Lord not to shorten the days, no flesh would be saved” or “imagine that the Lord did not shorten the days. Then, no flesh would be saved”

the Lord did not shorten the days, no flesh would be saved

Quote: μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Jesus is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this because he knows that God has already decided to shorten the days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense, or you could refer to God’s decision. Alternate translation: “the Lord were not going to shorten the days, no flesh would be saved” or “the Lord had not already made the decision to shorten those days, no flesh would have been saved”

the days, … the days

Quote: τὰς ἡμέρας & τὰς ἡμέρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the days refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. See how you expressed the idea in 13:17. Alternate translation: “that time … that time” or “that time period … that time period”

no flesh would be saved

Quote: οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no flesh would remain” or “no flesh would continue to live”

flesh

Quote: σάρξ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus is using flesh to represent humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “humans”

the elect whom he chose

Quote: τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression the elect whom he chose contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “those whom he chose” or “his elect”

the elect

Quote: τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective elect as a noun to mean elect people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the elect people”

Mark 13:21-22

And then if anyone says to you, ‘Behold, here {is} the Christ! Behold, there!’ do not believe {it … For false Christs and false prophets will be raised up and will give signs and wonders, to lead astray, if possible, the elect

Quote: καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε & ἐγερθήσονται γὰρ ψευδόχριστοι καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται, καὶ δώσουσιν σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα, πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 13:21 and 13:22 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason for Jesus’ command before the command itself. Alternate translation: “And then false Christs and false prophets will be raised up and will give signs and wonders, to lead astray, if possible, the elect. So, if anyone says to you, ‘Behold, here is the Christ! Behold, there!’ do not believe it.”

Mark 13:21

then if anyone says to you

Quote: τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact

Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it will happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Then, although some people will say to you”

says to you, ‘Behold, here {is} the Christ! Behold, there!’ do not believe {it

Quote: ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “says to you that you should look because the Christ is here or that you should look because he is there, do not not believe it”

Behold, here {is} the Christ! Behold, there

Quote: ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is implying that these two statements are two examples of what people might say to the disciples. Jesus is not implying that the same person says these two sentences during the same conversation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes that idea moreexplicit. Alternate translation: “‘Behold, here is the Christ!’ or if anyone says to you, ‘Behold, there!’”

Behold, … Behold

Quote: ἴδε (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

In both places, the word Behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to look at something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to look, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Look … Look” or “Pay attention … Pay attention”

Behold, there

Quote: ἴδε, ἐκεῖ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Behold, there is the Christ”

Mark 13:22

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a basis for the command that Jesus gave in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a command, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “I say that since” or “That is because”

will be raised up

Quote: ἐγερθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be the false Christs and false prophets themselves. Alternate translation: “will rise up”

will be raised up

Quote: ἐγερθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase will be raised up refers to people beginning to do some task publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appear” or “will begin to lead”

signs and wonders

Quote: σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “amazing signs” or “impressive deeds”

to lead astray, if possible, the elect

Quote: πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus is speaking as if the false Christs and prophets could literally lead people astray. He means that they deceive others. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar expression in 13:5. Alternate translation: “to cause, if possible, the elect to believe what is wrong”

if possible

Quote: εἰ δυνατὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase if possible could mean: (1) that it is not actually possible to lead astray the elect. Alternate translation: “if it were possible” (2) that the false Christs and false prophets will try everything they can to lead astray the elect. Alternate translation: “if they can” or “by all possible means”

the elect

Quote: τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective elect as a noun to mean elect people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this word in 13:20. Alternate translation: “the elect people” or “the people whom God has elected”

Mark 13:23

But you

Quote: ὑμεῖς δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that Jesus will speak about, which is you, the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “As for you”

watch out

Quote: βλέπετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. He means that they need to make sure that they are ready for what is going to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in 13:9. Alternate translation: “be prepared” or “pay attention”

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Pay attention”

I have told you everything beforehand

Quote: προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα (1)

Alternate translation: “I have told you all these things ahead of time” or “I have told you all these things before they occur”

Mark 13:24

But

Quote: ἀλλὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But indicates that Jesus will now start speaking about new events. These events may contrast with the events that Jesus has previously described. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next thing that a speaker wants to describe. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “Further,”

in those days

Quote: ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase those days refers to the time period that Jesus has been describing. See how you expressed the idea in 13:17. Alternate translation: “at that time” or “during that time period”

after

Quote: μετὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential

Here, the word after indicates that the events Jesus will describe in 13:24–27 will come after the tribulation that Jesus mentioned in 13:19. The word after does not indicate how long it will be between the tribulation and the events that Jesus describes in 13:24–27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates sequence without indicating how close the events are to each other. Alternate translation: “following” or “sometime subsequent to”

that tribulation

Quote: τὴν θλῖψιν ἐκείνην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people are greatly hurt in those ways” or “people are greatly afflicted as I have foretold”

the sun will be darkened

Quote: ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “God will darken the sun”

the moon will not give its light

Quote: ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification

Here, Jesus speaks as if the moon were a person who could give something to someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the moon will become dark”

Mark 13:25

the powers in the heavens will be shaken

Quote: αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “God will shake the powers of the heavens”

the powers in the heavens

Quote: αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

Here, the phrase the powers in the heavens could refer to: (1) powerful spiritual beings that dwell in the heavens. Alternate translation: “the powerful beings in the heavens” (2) the heavenly bodies, including the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the sun, moon, and stars”

Mark 13:26

they will see

Quote: ὄψονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “men and women will see”

Mark 13:26-27

the Son of Man … he will send … he will gather together his

Quote: τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & ἀποστελεῖ & ἐπισυνάξει & αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, who am the Son of Man, … I will send … I will gather together my”

Mark 13:26

coming

Quote: ἐρχόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Christians debate exactly what it means in this verse for the Son of Man to be coming. Some think he is coming to God’s heavenly throne room. Others think he is coming back to earth. If possible, use a form that does not explicitly state where he is coming. Alternate translation: “traveling” or “going”

with much power and glory

Quote: μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of power and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as someone who is very powerful and glorious” or “very powerfully and gloriously”

Mark 13:27

he will gather together

Quote: ἐπισυνάξει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the Son of Man will cause the angels to gather together his elect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he will have them gather together” or “he will command them to gather together”

his elect

Quote: τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective elect as a noun to mean elect people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this word in 13:20. Alternate translation: “his elect people” or “the people whom he has elected”

from the four winds, from the end of the earth to the end of heaven

Quote: ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

These two phrases mean similar things. The phrase from the four winds indicates that the elect are gathered from every direction. The phrase from the end of the earth to the end of heaven indicates that they are gathered from the farthest places. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the two phrases and emphasize in another way the complete range of this gathering. Alternate translation: “from even the farthest points in every direction”

from the four winds

Quote: ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

The phrase the four winds refers to the four primary directions: north, south, east, and west, and so includes every place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the north, south, east, and west” or “from every place”

from the end of the earth to the end of heaven

Quote: ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the end of the earth to the end of heaven refers to the parts of the world that are the farthest away. Jesus means that the elect will be gathered from every place, no matter how far away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the nearest to the farthest places” or “from even the farthest places”

Mark 13:28

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word Now introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to speak about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next idea, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,”

learn the parable from the fig tree

Quote: ἀπὸ & τῆς συκῆς, μάθετε τὴν παραβολήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the disciples, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “learn from this illustration concerning the fig tree”

the fig tree: … its branch already becomes tender and it puts out leaves

Quote: τῆς συκῆς & ἤδη ὁ κλάδος αὐτῆς ἁπαλὸς γένηται, καὶ ἐκφύῃ τὰ φύλλα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The phrase fig tree represents fig trees in general, not one particular fig tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “fig trees … their branches already become tender, and they put out leaves”

its branch already becomes tender

Quote: ἤδη ὁ κλάδος αὐτῆς ἁπαλὸς γένηται (1)

Here, the clause its branch already becomes tender means that the fig tree has begun to grow new branches, which are tender when they are new. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it grows new twigs” or “it sprouts fresh branches”

the summer

Quote: τὸ θέρος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In the location to which Jesus is referring, summer is the time of year when trees and plants grow and produce fruit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which plants and trees grow. Alternate translation: “the time for things to grow” or “the hot season”

Mark 13:29

these things

Quote: ταῦτα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase all these things refers back to what Jesus has described in 13:5–23 or perhaps 13:5–27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the things I have told you about”

it is near

Quote: ἐγγύς ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word translated it could: (1) refer to the coming of the Son of Man and the gathering of the elect, as described in 13:26–27. Alternate translation: “his coming is near” or (if you expressed Son of Man in the first person) “my coming is near” (2) be translated as “he” and refer to the Son of Man. Alternate translation: “he is near” or (if you expressed Son of Man in the first person) “I am near”

at the doors

Quote: ἐπὶ θύραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase at the doors indicates that something or someone is very near and ready to enter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “ready to enter” or “about to arrive”

Mark 13:30

this generation

Quote: ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, generation represents the people who are part of the generation, which means that they are adults who are alive at the same time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of this generation”

this generation

Quote: ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Christians debate whom Jesus was referring to with the phrase this generation. See the chapter introduction for more information. Two possibilities are most likely. Jesus could be referring to: (1) the people who were alive while he was saying these words. Alternate translation: “people who are alive right now” (2) the people who will be alive when the things that he has described begin to happen. Alternate translation: “people who will be alive then”

will certainly not pass away

Quote: οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Jesus is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase pass away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not die”

will certainly not pass away

Quote: οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase certainly not and the negative verb pass away. Alternate translation: “will certainly remain”

certainly not

Quote: οὐ μὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”

all these things

Quote: ταῦτα πάντα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, as in 13:29, the phrase all these things refers back to what Jesus has described in 13:5–23 or perhaps 13:5–27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all the things I have told you about”

Mark 13:31

The heaven and the earth

Quote: ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism

Here Jesus refers two main components of creation, heaven and earth, to refer to all of creation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All creation” or “The universe”

my words

Quote: οἱ & λόγοι μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the phrase my words represents what Jesus has said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things I have spoken”

will certainly not pass away

Quote: οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase certainly not and the negative verb pass away. Alternate translation: “will always remain” or “will always be true”

certainly not

Quote: οὐ μὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”

Mark 13:32

But concerning that day or the hour

Quote: περὶ δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the phrase But concerning introduces the next topic that Jesus wants to talk about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next topic. Alternate translation: “Next, I will talk about that day or the hour. About them”

that day or the hour

Quote: τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms day and hour mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “that specific time”

that day or the hour

Quote: τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to the exact moment when he will return to this world, which will also be the end of the current time period. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the day or hour when I will return” or “the timing of my second coming”

no one knows, neither the angels in heaven, nor the Son, except the Father

Quote: οὐδεὶς οἶδεν; οὐδὲ οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ, οὐδὲ ὁ Υἱός, εἰ μὴ ὁ Πατήρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions

If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only the Father knows and no one else, neither the angels in heaven, nor the Son”

the Son, … the Father

Quote: ὁ Υἱός & ὁ Πατήρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Son and Father are important titles that describes the relationship between Jesus the Son and God the Father. Be sure to retain these titles in your translation.

the Son

Quote: ὁ Υἱός (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son”

Mark 13:33

Watch! Stay awake and pray,for you do not know when the time is

Quote: βλέπετε, ἀγρυπνεῖτε, καὶ προσεύχεσθε, οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Because you do not know when the time is, be alert! Stay awake and pray”

Watch

Quote: βλέπετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. He means that they need to make sure that they are ready for what is going to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in 13:9. Alternate translation: “Be prepared” or “Pay attention”

Stay awake and pray

Quote: ἀγρυπνεῖτε, καὶ προσεύχεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read Stay awake and pray. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “Stay awake.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Stay awake

Quote: ἀγρυπνεῖτε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of being alert and watchful as if it were staying awake. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be watchful” or “Remain vigilant”

the time is

Quote: ὁ καιρός ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus is referring to the exact moment when he will return to this world, which will also be the end of the current time period. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I will come back” or “my second coming will be”

Mark 13:34

As a man on a journey

Quote: ὡς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόδημος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables

To teach the disciples, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: It is as a man on journey”

As

Quote: ὡς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that what he has said about the need to be watchful and alert is like the parable he is about to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What I have told you is like this:” or “Your situation can be illustrated in this way:”

having given authority to his servants, to each his work

Quote: δοὺς τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having empowered his servants, each to do his work”

to each his work

Quote: ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the man gave his servants authority to do the specific tasks or work that he told each of them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to each servant authority over his own work”

the doorkeeper that he should stay alert

Quote: τῷ θυρωρῷ & ἵνα γρηγορῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “the doorkeeper, ‘Stay alert;’”

the doorkeeper

Quote: τῷ θυρωρῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A doorkeeper is a person who guards an entrance into a building and makes sure that only certain people can enter. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of guard, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the servant who guarded the door”

he should stay alert

Quote: γρηγορῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the man who owned the house commanded the doorkeeper to stay alert in general but especially to be ready for when he returned and wanted to enter into his house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he should stay alert for him to come back” or “he should stay alert for his return home”

Mark 13:35

therefore

Quote: οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word therefore indicates that Jesus is about to tell his disciples how to apply the story he told in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing an application. Alternate translation: “as a result” of “and so”

stay alert, because you do not know when the lord of the house is coming—whether evening or midnight or at rooster crowing or at morning

Quote: γρηγορεῖτε & οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ, πότε ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται, ἢ ὀψὲ, ἢ μεσονύκτιον, ἢ ἀλεκτοροφωνίας, ἢ πρωΐ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clauses give the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you do not know when the lord of the house is coming—whether evening or midnight or at rooster crowing or at morning—stay alert”

Mark 13:35-36

the lord of the house is coming … he might find

Quote: ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται & εὕρῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first-person form. Alternate translation: “I, the lord of the house, am coming … I might find”

Mark 13:35

the lord of the house is coming

Quote: ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus identifies himself with the man from the parable he just told. This man owned the house and left on a journey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am coming, just as the servants did not know when the lord of the house was coming”

at rooster crowing

Quote: ἀλεκτοροφωνίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A rooster is a large bird, a male chicken, which often calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “when the birds begin to sing”

at rooster crowing

Quote: ἀλεκτοροφωνίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

In Jesus’ culture, people referred to the period of the night soon before the sun rose as the time of rooster crowing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that refers to the hours before dawn. Alternate translation: “before dawn” or “in the hours before the sunrise”

Mark 13:36

he might find

Quote: εὕρῃ (1)

Alternate translation: “unexpectedly”

sleeping

Quote: καθεύδοντας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks of people who are not ready for his return as if they were sleeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like someone who is asleep” or “unprepared for his return” or “not being watchful”

Mark 13:37

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces a further development of what Jesus has been saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development in what someone is saying, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,”

to all

Quote: πᾶσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to every person” or “all men and women”

Mark 14

Mark 14 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ last days and death (14:1–15:47)
   • The chief priests and scribes plan to kill Jesus (14:1–2)
   • A woman anoints Jesus (14:3–9)
   • Judas agrees to hand Jesus over (14:10–11)
   • Jesus’ last meal with his disciples (14:12–25)
   • Jesus predicts that his disciples will deny him (14:26–31)
   • Jesus prays in Gethsemane (14:32–42)
   • Judas hands Jesus over, and the disciples flee (26:43–52)
   • Jesus’ trial before the Jewish council (14:53–65)
   • Peter denies Jesus three times (14:66–72)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, which is a quote from Zechariah 13:7.

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Perfumed oil

In 14:3–9, a woman anoints Jesus with perfumed oil. The kind that the woman uses was very expensive. People would use these oils to make themselves look and smell good. Also, they used oils to anoint corpses before they buried them, possibly to keep them from smelling. In this story, the woman uses the oil to honor Jesus, and Jesus also interprets it as a preparation for his burial. Make sure that your readers understand what anointing with this kind of oil means. (See: oil)

Denying Jesus

Throughout this chapter, Jesus and his disciples speak about “denying” Jesus. If a disciple denies Jesus, the disciple claims to have no connection with Jesus, neither knowing nor following him. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language.

Jesus’ trial before the Jewish council

In 14:53–65, Mark narrates Jesus’ trial before the Jewish council. Since Jerusalem was governed by the Roman empire, the Roman governor, Pilate, was the only one who could actually have someone executed. So, the Jewish council needed to find evidence against Jesus that proved that he did something for which the Roman governor would execute him. This trial, then, was a preliminary step. They first needed to find good evidence to condemn Jesus, and then they needed to present evidence to the Roman governor that would lead to him executing Jesus. While you should not explain all these details in your translation, make sure that your translation does fit with this general idea.

The Son of Man coming on the clouds of heaven

In 14:62, Jesus indicates that he, the Son of Man, will “come” on the clouds of heaven. However, he does not indicate the location to which he will “come.” Christians debate whether Jesus is describing his return to earth or his enthronement in heaven. If possible, your translation should allow for both possibilities. See the notes on this verse for translation options.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Body and bread, blood and cup

In 14:22–25, Jesus identifies bread as “my body” and wine in a cup as “my blood of the covenant.” These statements can be understood in at least three primary ways: (1) the bread and wine somehow become Jesus’ body and blood; (2) Jesus’ body and blood are present, physically or spiritually, in the bread and wine; or (3) the bread and wine memorialize or symbolize Jesus’ body and blood. Christians are divided on this question, and statements that link body and blood to bread and wine are very significant in the Bible and in Christian teaching. For these reasons, it is best to preserve these statements without expressing them as similes or in another nonfigurative way. If you must express them in another way, see the notes on 14:22–25 for translation possibilities. (See: Metaphor)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Many of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when Jesus is talking to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 13, 17, 27, 30, 32, 33, 34, 37, 41, 43, 45, 51, 53, 61, 63, 66, 67. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Abba, Father

In 14:36, Mark indicates that Jesus says “Abba, Father” when he prays. “Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds. The word that follows, which is the word for “father” in Greek, could be Mark’s explanation of what “Abba” means. On the other hand, Jesus might have used this Greek word in his prayer. If possible, spell out “Abba” as it sounds in your language and then use the word you use to translate “Father” when it refers to God. See the notes on this verse for translation options. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Judas’ kiss for Jesus

In 14:44–45, Mark describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. In this culture, when men greeted other men who were family or friends, they would kiss them, probably on one cheek or on both cheeks. If men would not greet each other with a kiss in your culture, you could explain the purpose of the kiss, or you could translate the expression in a more general way. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: kiss)

Mark 14:1

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,”

the Passover and the Festival of Unleavened Bread

Quote: τὸ Πάσχα καὶ τὰ Ἄζυμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark’s readers would have known that the Passover was a festival that took place on the first day of the week-long celebration named the Festival of Unleavened Bread, so Mark speaks of the two as one event. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread, the Passover,” or “the Passover, the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread,”

by deceit

Quote: ἐν δόλῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deceit, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “deceitfully” or “cleverly”

they might kill him

Quote: ἀποκτείνωσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the chief priests and elders would have other people kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might have him killed”

Mark 14:2

For

Quote: γάρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why the chief priests and scribes wanted to seize Jesus “by deceit.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “They were seeking a way to do this by deceit because” or “Here is why they needed to be deceptive:”

they were saying, “Not during the festival, so that there will not be a riot of the people

Quote: ἔλεγον & μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, μήποτε ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that they would not do it during the festival, so that there would not be a riot of the people”

they were saying

Quote: ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to “the chief priests and the scribes” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the chief priests and the scribes were saying”

Not during the festival

Quote: μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase Not during the festival refers to not arresting Jesus during the festival. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We must not arrest him during the festival”

the festival

Quote: τῇ ἑορτῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the festival refers to the Passover and the Festival of Unleavened Bread, as indicated in 14:1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the festival of Passover and Unleavened Bread” or “the Festival of Unleavened Bread, including the Passover”

of the people

Quote: τοῦ λαοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This means specifically the great crowds of people who were in the city of Jerusalem and who liked Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the people who listen to Jesus” or “of the people who are here who follow Jesus”

Mark 14:3

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. This event most likely happened about the same time as the chief priests and scribes were planning how to kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,”

And he being in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, he reclining to eat

Quote: καὶ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν Βηθανίᾳ, ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Both uses of the pronoun he refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “And Jesus being in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, Jesus reclining to eat”

of Simon the leper

Quote: Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that: (1) Simon had once been a leper but had been healed. Alternate translation: “of Simon, who had been healed of leprosy” (2) the house was owned by Simon, who was a leper, but he did not live there. Alternate translation: “owned by Simon the leper” (3) the leper was a nickname for Simon, who did not actually have leprosy. Alternate translation: “of Simon, who was nicknamed ‘the leper’”

of Simon

Quote: Σίμωνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Simon is the name of a man. This is a different man than Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot.

he reclining to eat

Quote: κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “he sitting down to eat” or “he eating”

a woman came, having an alabaster jar of very precious perfumed oil of pure nard

Quote: ἦλθεν γυνὴ ἔχουσα ἀλάβαστρον μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a woman into the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman who had an alabaster jar of very precious perfumed oil of pure nard. She came to Jesus”

an alabaster jar of very precious perfumed oil of pure nard

Quote: ἀλάβαστρον μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Mark is using the possessive form to describe an alabaster jar that is filled with very precious perfumed oil, which he identifies as pure nard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “an alabaster jar full of very precious perfumed oil, specifically nard”

an alabaster jar

Quote: ἀλάβαστρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word alabaster is the name of a soft, white stone. People stored precious and valuable items in jars made from alabaster. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of stone, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a white stone jar”

of very precious perfumed oil

Quote: μύρου & πολυτελοῦς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This oil had fragrant additives. To make themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Mark indicates that this was particularly precious oil. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of oil, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “of very precious oil with perfume in it”

very precious

Quote: πολυτελοῦς (1)

Alternate translation: “very expensive”

of pure nard

Quote: νάρδου πιστικῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here Mark indicates that the oil was made from the roots of a nard plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” If your readers would not be familiar with nard plants, you could use a descriptive phrase or a more general expression. Alternate translation: “of pure extract from spikenard roots” or “made only from plant roots”

Mark 14:4

But

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

being very angry within themselves

Quote: ἀγανακτοῦντες πρὸς ἑαυτούς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that: (1) the people spoke the following words to each other. Alternate translation: “being very angry and saying to one another” (2) the people thought the following words without saying them. Alternate translation: “being very angry and thinking”

Mark 14:4-5

within themselves, “For what has this waste of the perfumed oil happened … For this perfumed oil was able to be sold for more than 300 denarii and given to the poor.” And

Quote: πρὸς ἑαυτούς, εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν? & ἠδύνατο γὰρ τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων, καὶ δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς & καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “asking for what the waste of the perfumed oil had happened and saying that the perfumed oil was able to have been sold for more than 300 denarii and given to the poor. And”

Mark 14:4

For what has this waste of the perfumed oil happened

Quote: εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The people there are using the question form to show that they think the woman wasted the perfume. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is no reason for this waste of the perfumed oil.” or “What a waste of the perfumed oil!”

For what has this waste of the perfumed oil happened

Quote: εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν (1)

Alternate translation: “What is the purpose for this waste of the perfumed oil”

has this waste of the perfumed oil happened

Quote: ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of waste, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is she wasting this perfumed oil”

of the perfumed oil

Quote: μύρου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the phrase perfumed oil in 14:3. Alternate translation: “of the oil with perfume in it”

Mark 14:5

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why these people say that the woman wasted the perfume. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “We say that because” or “As a matter of fact,”

this perfumed oil was able to be sold for more than 300 denarii and given

Quote: ἠδύνατο & τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων, καὶ δοθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would have done the action, it is clear from the context that would have been the woman. Alternate translation: “she was able to sell this perfumed oil for more than 300 denarii and give it”

perfumed oil

Quote: τὸ μύρον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the phrase perfumed oil in 14:3. Alternate translation: “oil with perfume in it”

for more than 300 denarii

Quote: ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney

The word denarii refers to silver coins, each equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. See how you translated denarii in 6:37. Alternate translation: “for more than 300 silver coins” or “more than 300 days’ wages”

for more than 300 denarii and given

Quote: ἐπάνω δηναρίων τριακοσίων, καὶ δοθῆναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here these people imply that the perfumed oil could have been sold for more than 300 denarii, and this money is what would been given to the poor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for more than 300 denarii, which could have been given”

to the poor

Quote: τοῖς πτωχοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

These people are using the adjective poor as a noun to mean poor people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor”

And they were scolding her

Quote: καὶ ἐνεβριμῶντο αὐτῇ (1)

Alternate translation: “And they were criticizing her harshly because of what she had done”

Mark 14:6

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces how Jesus responded in contrast to how the other people there responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,”

Leave her alone

Quote: ἄφετε αὐτήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the command Leave her alone means that these people should stop rebuking and criticizing the woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Stop scolding her” or “Do not criticize her”

Why are you causing trouble for her

Quote: τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke these people for saying what they did about how the woman acted. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not cause trouble for her.” or “Stop causing trouble for her!”

are you causing trouble for her? … a good work

Quote: αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε? καλὸν ἔργον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of trouble and work, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “are you troubling her … something good”

in me

Quote: ἐν ἐμοί (1)

Alternate translation: “to me”

Mark 14:7

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why Jesus rebukes these people for saying that the woman should have given money to the poor instead of pouring the perfume on Jesus’ head. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a rebuke, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “I am rebuking you because” or “Here is why I say that:”

the poor

Quote: τοὺς πτωχοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective poor as a noun to mean poor people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor”

to do good to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς εὖ ποιῆσαι (1)

Alternate translation: “to give money to them”

Mark 14:8

What she had, she did

Quote: ὃ ἔσχεν ἐποίησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the woman did what she was able to do to serve and help Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “She did what she was able to do” or “What she could do, she did”

She anticipated

Quote: προέλαβεν (1)

Alternate translation: “She acted beforehand”

for burial

Quote: εἰς τὸν ἐνταφιασμόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of burial, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for when I am buried”

Mark 14:9

the gospel is preached … also what she did will be spoken

Quote: κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον & καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the actions, you could use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “people preach the gospel … they will also speak what she did”

in remembrance of her

Quote: εἰς μνημόσυνον αὐτῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of remembrance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that she is remembered” or “as a way to remember her”

Mark 14:10

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

of the Twelve

Quote: τῶν δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “of the 12 apostles” or “of the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”

went away

Quote: ἀπῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “came away”

so that he might hand him over to them

Quote: ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Judas did not hand Jesus over to the chief priests yet. Rather, he went to make arrangements with them about doing that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that he might arrange with them how he would hand him over to them” or “so that he might offer to hand him over to them”

Mark 14:11

having heard {it

Quote: ἀκούσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the chief priests heard that Judas wanted to hand Jesus over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having heard that Judas Iscariot wanted to betray Jesus to them”

promised to give him silver

Quote: ἐπηγγείλαντο αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the chief priests promised to give him silver if he handed Jesus over to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “promised to give him silver if he handed Jesus over to them”

silver

Quote: ἀργύριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, silver represents coins made from silver. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “silver coins”

Mark 14:12

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

on the first day

Quote: τῇ πρώτῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day one”

they were sacrificing

Quote: ἔθυον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun they refers to Jewish people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a word or phrase that refers to Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “Jewish people were sacrificing”

the Passover

Quote: τὸ Πάσχα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here Mark uses the name of the festival, Passover, to refer to the lamb that God had commanded Jews to kill and eat for their celebration meal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lambs for their Passover meals”

do you want {… you may eat

Quote: θέλεις & φάγῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the word you throughout this verse is singular.

having gone away

Quote: ἀπελθόντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come away”

you may eat

Quote: φάγῃς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the disciples imply that will eat the Passover with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we may eat”

the Passover

Quote: τὸ Πάσχα (2)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus’ disciples are using the name of the festival, Passover, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”

Mark 14:13

to them, “… you

Quote: αὐτοῖς & ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns them and you would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural.

Go

Quote: ὑπάγετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “Come” instead of Go. Alternate translation: “Come”

a pitcher of water

Quote: κεράμιον ὕδατος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the phrase pitcher refers to a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. This large jug was full of water. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “a jug full of water”

Mark 14:14

say to the master of that house, ‘The Teacher says, “Where is my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples

Quote: εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅτι ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there are not quotations within quotations. Alternate translation: “tell the master of that house that the Teacher wants to know where his guest room is, where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples”

to the master of that house

Quote: τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The master of that house is the man who owns the house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the man whose house it is”

Where is my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples

Quote: ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Jesus instructs the two disciples to ask about Where the guest room is, but this question always implies that the disciples are asking for permission to use the guest room. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Also, you could express the idea as a request rather than as a question. Alternate translation: “Will you allow me to use my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?” or “Please allow me to use my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples.”

my guest room

Quote: τὸ κατάλυμά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is instructing the disciples to use the possessive form to describe a guest room that has been reserved for Jesus. Jesus does not own this guest room. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the guest reserved for me” or “the guest room prepared for me”

the Passover

Quote: τὸ Πάσχα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus instructs his disciples to use the name of the festival, Passover, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in 14:13. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”

Mark 14:15

you

Quote: ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual

Since the word you applies to the two disciples, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.

a large upper room

Quote: ἀνάγαιον μέγα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal. Alternate translation: “a big hall” or “a large dining room”

furnished {and} ready

Quote: ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that the man who owned the house did it. Alternate translation: “one that he has furnished and made ready”

furnished {and} ready

Quote: ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms furnished and ready mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “ready for us to use” or “furnished with everything we need”

for us

Quote: ἡμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

Here, when Jesus says us, he is referring to himself and his disciples, including the two he is addressing here, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.

Mark 14:16

went

Quote: ἦλθον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “came”

they found {it} just as he said to them

Quote: εὗρον καθὼς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that what Jesus said to them is exactly what happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what he said to them is what occurred” or “it happened just as he said to them”

the Passover

Quote: τὸ Πάσχα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Jesus instructs his disciples to use the name of the festival, Passover, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar idea in 14:13. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”

Mark 14:17

he comes with the Twelve

Quote: ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus and the Twelve came to the room in the house in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he comes with the Twelve to the house”

he comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “he goes”

the Twelve

Quote: τῶν δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had chosen to be apostles”

Mark 14:18

reclining to eat

Quote: ἀνακειμένων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture. Since Mark clarifies that they are eating, you do not need to explain the meaning of the action. See how you expressed the similar phrase in 14:3. Alternate translation: “sitting down”

one eating with me

Quote: ὁ ἐσθίων μετ’ ἐμοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish

Here Jesus further describes the one who will hand him over as someone who is eating with him. Since all the disciples were eating with him, Jesus is not making distinctions between disciples. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “you who are eating with me”

Mark 14:19

They began to be grieved and

Quote: ἤρξαντο λυπεῖσθαι, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “What Jesus said began to grieve them, and they began”

one by one

Quote: εἷς κατὰ εἷς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The phrase one by one indicates that each of the disciples spoke to Jesus in sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one at a time”

Surely not I

Quote: μήτι ἐγώ? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Here the disciples could be using the question form: (1) to tell Jesus that they would never hand him over. In this case, you could express the idea as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not the one!” (2) to ask a hesitant question. In this case, they are unsure whether they would hand Jesus over. Alternate translation: “Can it really be me?”

Surely not I

Quote: μήτι ἐγώ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Surely it is not I who will hand you over”

Mark 14:20

And

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the disciples were asking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

of the Twelve

Quote: τῶν δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “of the 12 apostles” or “of the 12 men whom I have chosen to be apostles”

the one dipping with me into the bowl

Quote: ὁ ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Jesus describes one specific way of eating food in his culture to refer to eating in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one taking food from the same plate with me” or “the one participating in this meal with me”

the one dipping

Quote: ὁ ἐμβαπτόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish

Here Jesus is further describing the one of the Twelve who will hand him over. He is not identifying which one of the Twelve it will be. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “one of you who are dipping”

Mark 14:21

For

Quote: ὅτι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces a further explanation about what Jesus has said about one of the Twelve betraying him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Yes,”

the Son of Man departs just as it has been written about him, but woe to that man through whom the Son of Man is handed over

Quote: ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ; οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, depart just as it has been written about me. But woe to that man through whom I am handed over”

departs

Quote: ὑπάγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe a future event. He does this to emphasize that the future event is sure to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense here and express the certainty in another way. Alternate translation: “will surely depart”

departs

Quote: ὑπάγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Here, departs is a polite way to refer to dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable polite way to refer to dying, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “passes away” or “dies”

just as it has been written

Quote: καθὼς γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that what has been written can be found in the Old Testament Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written in the Scriptures”

it has been written

Quote: γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who wrote the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote” or “the Scriptures testify”

through whom the Son of Man is handed over

Quote: δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who hands over the Son of Man”

that man had not been born

Quote: οὐκ ἐγεννήθη ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the man’s mother. Alternate translation: “that man’s mother had not given birth to him”

Mark 14:22

bread

Quote: ἄρτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term bread refers to a loaf of bread, which is a lump of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. The bread referred to here was a flat loaf of unleavened bread that was eaten as part of the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “a loaf of unleavened bread”

having blessed

Quote: εὐλογήσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be implying that Jesus blessed: (1) God for providing the food. Alternate translation: “having blessed God” or “having praised God” (2) the food. Alternate translation: “having blessed it” or “having asked God to make it holy”

he broke {it

Quote: ἔκλασεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Matthew means that Jesus broke the bread in pieces so that it could be served to the disciples. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he divided the bread into servings” or “he broke the bread into smaller pieces”

Take

Quote: λάβετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Here Jesus implies that he wants the disciples to Take the pieces of bread that he gave to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Take these pieces of bread”

Take

Quote: λάβετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the disciples should eat the pieces of bread after they Take them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Take and eat”

This is my body

Quote: τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus identifies the bread as his body. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The bread could somehow become Jesus’ body, or Jesus’ body could be present in some way when people eat the bread, or the bread could represent or memorialize Jesus’ body. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This functions as my body”

Mark 14:23

a cup

Quote: ποτήριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark uses the word cup to refer both to it and to the drink inside the cup, which in Jesus’ culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a cup full of wine” or “some wine”

they all drank from it

Quote: ἔπιον ἐξ αὐτοῦ πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the disciples took turns drinking from the cup until they had all had a drink. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “each of them drank from it” or “one by one they all drank from it”

Mark 14:24

This is my blood of the covenant

Quote: τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus identifies the cup of wine as his blood of the covenant. This figure of speech has been interpreted in a number of ways. The wine could somehow become Jesus’ blood, or Jesus’ blood could be present in some way when people drink the wine, or the wine could represent or memorialize Jesus’ blood. Because of the variety of interpretations and the significance of this metaphor, you should preserve the metaphor if there is any way to do so. If you must express the metaphor in a different way, use a form that could fit with as many of the listed interpretations as possible. Alternate translation: “This functions as my blood of the covenant”

This

Quote: τοῦτό (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun This refers to the wine in the cup that Mark mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the wine more directly. Alternate translation: “The wine in this cup”

my blood of the covenant

Quote: τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe how his blood inaugurates or initiates the covenant. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “my blood that initiates the covenant”

of the covenant

Quote: τῆς διαθήκης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read of the covenant. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “of the new covenant.” The word “new” may have been accidentally added here because it appears in the parallel story in Luke (see Luke 22:20). If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

which is being poured out

Quote: τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus means that he will die and his blood will be poured out of his body. He is using words that people would use to describe how animals would be offered to God: these animals would be killed and then their blood would be poured out on or near the altar. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which, when I die, is being poured out” or “which is being shed”

is being poured out

Quote: ἐκχυννόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, Jesus implies that he himself does it when he dies. Alternate translation: “I am pouring out”

many

Quote: πολλῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Jesus is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”

Mark 14:25

I will certainly not any longer drink

Quote: οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ πίω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not any longer are three negative words. In this construction, the second and third negatives do not cancel the first. Instead, they give greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use three negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a triple negative here. If your language does not use three negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “I will by no means any longer drink” or “I will certainly no longer drink”

from the fruit of the vine

Quote: ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase fruit of the vine refers to wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “alcohol made from grapes” or “wine”

that day

Quote: τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Jesus uses the term day to refer to a particular moment in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that hour” or “the moment”

I drink it new

Quote: αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word new could go with: (1) drink. In this case, Jesus means that he will drink the wine in a new way. Alternate translation: “I drink it in a new way” or “I drink it anew” (2) the wine. In this case, Jesus means that he will drink new wine. Alternate translation: “I drink new wine”

Mark 14:26

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”

having sung a hymn

Quote: ὑμνήσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A hymn is a song or poem that is sung to praise God. The Jews would traditionally sing a psalm from Psalms 113–118 at the end of the Passover meal, so the hymn that Jesus and his disciples sang was likely one of these psalms. If your readers would not be familiar with a hymn, you could use the name for religious songs in your culture, if you have them, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “having sung a psalm” or “having sung a song of praise to God”

Mark 14:27

You all will be caused to stumble, for it is written, I will strike the shepherd, and the sheep will be scattered

Quote: πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε, ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clauses gives the basis for the claim that the first clause makes. Alternate translation: “It is written, ‘I will strike the shepherd and the sheep will be scattered.’ Therefore, you all will be caused to stumble”

You all will be caused to stumble

Quote: πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if his disciples were going to stumble. He means that they will reject and desert him because of what will happen to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You all will desert me” or “You all will run away from me”

You all will be caused to stumble

Quote: πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You all will stumble”

it is written

Quote: γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here, Jesus uses the phrase it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament passage of Scripture, (Zechariah 13:7). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “you can read in the Scriptures” or “it says in the book of Zechariah”

it is written

Quote: γέγραπται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God speaking through Zechariah. Alternate translation: “Zechariah wrote” or “God spoke through Zechariah”

it is written, I will strike the shepherd, and the sheep will be scattered

Quote: γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written that God will strike the shepherd and the sheep will be scattered”

I will strike the shepherd, and the sheep will be scattered

Quote: πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the Messiah were a shepherd and as if his people were sheep. He means that the Messiah is the leader, and his people are like helpless sheep without him. Since Jesus is quoting these words from the Old Testament, if possible preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “I will strike the person who is like a shepherd and those who are like sheep will be scattered”

I will strike

Quote: πατάξω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In this quotation, God is the one speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I, God, will strike”

I will strike

Quote: πατάξω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word strike means to hit someone hard enough to kill that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I will fatally strike” or “I will strike down”

the sheep will be scattered

Quote: τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the sheep will scatter”

Mark 14:28

I am raised up

Quote: ἐγερθῆναί με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase raised up refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am restored to life”

I am raised up

Quote: τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, Jesus could be implying that: (1) God will do it. Alternate translation: “God raises me up” (2) Jesus himself will do it. Alternate translation: “I raise myself up”

I will go before you into Galilee

Quote: προάξω ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that once he is in Galilee, his disciples will meet him there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I will go before you into Galilee, where you will be with me again”

I will go before

Quote: προάξω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of go. Alternate translation: “I will come before”

Mark 14:29

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what Peter said in contrast to what Jesus said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

Even if all will be caused to stumble

Quote: εἰ καὶ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical

Peter is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that all might be caused to stumble. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “Even were all to be caused to stumble”

will be caused to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλισθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Peter speaks as if all the disciples were going to stumble. He means that they will reject and desert Jesus because of what will happen to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you expressed the similar phrase in 14:27. Alternate translation: “will desert you” or “will run away from you”

will be caused to stumble

Quote: σκανδαλισθήσονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will stumble”

not I

Quote: οὐκ ἐγώ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not be caused to stumble”

Mark 14:30

to you … you

Quote: σοι & σὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to Peter, the word you is singular throughout this verse.

today—this night

Quote: σήμερον, ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word today refers to a period of 24 hours. In Jesus’ culture, people usually considered sunset to be the start of the next day. So, Jesus is indicating that Peter will deny him that night, before the sun rises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different phrase that refers to this period of time. Alternate translation: “during this very night,” or “before the sun rises again,”

a rooster crows

Quote: ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A rooster is a large bird, a male chicken, which often calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. See how you translated this word in 13:35. Alternate translation: “a bird sings”

will deny me three times

Quote: τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that Peter will deny that he knows Jesus and is his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you will deny three times that you know me” or “you will deny three times that you are my disciple”

Mark 14:31

emphatically

Quote: ἐκπερισσῶς (1)

Alternate translation: “insistently” or “forcefully”

Even if it were necessary for me to die with you

Quote: ἐὰν δέῃ με συναποθανεῖν σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical

Peter is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that it might be necessary to die with Jesus. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a situation that could happen. Alternate translation: “Even were it necessary for me to die with you”

Even if it were necessary for me to die with you

Quote: ἐὰν δέῃ με συναποθανεῖν σοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Peter means that if it were necessary for him to die if he remained faithful to Jesus, he would rather do that than deny him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Even if it were necessary for me, to keep from denying you, to die with you” or “Even if I would have to die with you if I stayed with you”

you, … you

Quote: σοι & σε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Peter is speaking to Jesus, the word you throughout this verse is singular.

I will certainly not deny you

Quote: οὐ μή σε ἀπαρνήσομαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Peter implies that he will certainly not deny that he knows Jesus and is his disciple. See how you expressed the similar phrase in 14:30. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not deny that I know you” or “I will certainly not deny that I am your disciple”

certainly not

Quote: οὐ μή (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated certainly not are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means”

they all also were speaking in the same manner

Quote: ὡσαύτως & καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase they all also were speaking in the same manner means that all of the disciples were saying the same thing that Peter said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they all also were saying the same kind of thing” or “they all also were declaring that they would not deny Jesus”

Mark 14:32

they come

Quote: ἔρχονται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “they go”

he says to his disciples, “Sit here while I pray

Quote: λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, καθίσατε ὧδε, ἕως προσεύξωμαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “tells his disciples to sit there while he prayed”

Mark 14:33

he takes along Peter and James and John with him and began to be distressed and greatly troubled

Quote: παραλαμβάνει τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην, μετ’ αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἤρξατο ἐκθαμβεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημονεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was something that Jesus was thinking about. Alternate translation: “he takes along Peter and James and John with him. And something began to distress and greatly trouble him” or “as he takes along Peter and James and John, what he was thinking began to distress and greatly trouble him”

to be distressed and greatly troubled

Quote: ἐκθαμβεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημονεῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms distressed and greatly troubled mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to be extremely distressed” or “to be very troubled”

Mark 14:34

My soul is very grieved

Quote: περίλυπός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was something that Jesus was thinking about. Alternate translation: “Something grieves my soul very much” or “What I am thinking grieves my soul very much”

My soul is

Quote: ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here, soul refers to the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It is I who am”

to death

Quote: ἕως θανάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole

Jesus is using the phrase to death to describe the extent of his grief. He uses this overstatement in order to show how very grieved he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “so much so that I cannot stand it much longer” or “as if I were about to die”

Mark 14:35

having gone a little farther

Quote: προελθὼν μικρὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come a little father”

he fell to the ground

Quote: ἔπιπτεν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Mark’s culture, falling to the ground refers to kneeling down and putting one’s face close to the ground. This was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he bowed down” or “he lay down to show respect”

was praying that, if it is possible, the hour might pass from him

Quote: προσηύχετο ἵνα, εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν, παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “was praying, ‘If it is possible, let the hour pass from me’”

the hour might pass from him

Quote: παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, when Jesus prays that he the hour might pass from him, he is praying that he would not experience the hour. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the hour might not happen to him” or “he might not have to endure the hour”

the hour

Quote: ἡ ὥρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, hour represents events that will take place during a specific period of time, described generally as an hour. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the coming events” or “the things that would happen soon”

Mark 14:36

Abba, Father

Quote: Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark uses an Aramaic word for Father (Abba) and then the normal word for Father in his language. He could be: (1) including the word that Jesus used (Abba) and then translating it for his readers. If possible, simply include both words in your translation. If it is necessary, you could use a form that indicates that Mark is translating the word that Jesus used. Alternate translation: “Abba—that is, Father—” (2) indicating that Jesus used both of these words in his prayer. Alternate translation: “Abba, my Father”

Abba

Quote: Ἀββά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Abba is an Aramaic word meaning Father. Jewish people used this word to address their fathers. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since the Aramaic word Abba is followed by the Greek word Father, it is best to transliterate Abba and then give its meaning in your language as Mark does.

Father

Quote: ὁ Πατήρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Father is an important title that describe the relationship between God the Father and Jesus his Son.

for you. Remove … you

Quote: σοι & παρένεγκε & σύ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to God the Father, the word you throughout this verse and the command Remove are singular.

Remove

Quote: παρένεγκε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “I ask that you remove”

this cup

Quote: τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Jesus is referring to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a cup of bitter-tasting liquid that he would have to drink. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this suffering that is like a cup full of poison” or “this suffering”

not what I will, but what you

Quote: οὐ τί ἐγὼ θέλω, ἀλλὰ τί σύ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not do what I will, but do what you will”

Mark 14:37

he comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “he goes”

them

Quote: αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John”

he says to Peter

Quote: λέγει τῷ Πέτρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus woke up Peter before speaking to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he wakes up Peter to say to him”

Simon, are you sleeping? Were you not able to be alert for one hour

Quote: Σίμων, καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke Peter. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “Simon, I see that you were sleeping. You were not able to be alert for one hour.” or “Simon, you were sleeping! You surely should have been able to be alert for one hour!”

are you sleeping? Were you not able

Quote: καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus is speaking to Peter, the word you throughout this verse is singular.

Mark 14:38

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase so that could introduce: (1) the purpose for which the disciples should pray. Alternate translation: “in order that” (2) what the disciples should pray. Alternate translation: “that”

you do not enter into temptation

Quote: μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Here Jesus speaks as if temptation were a location that someone could enter into. He is referring to experiencing temptation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not experience temptation” or “you are kept away from temptation”

you do not enter into temptation

Quote: μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of temptation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you are not tempted”

The spirit indeed {is} willing, but the flesh {is} weak

Quote: τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun

The words spirit and flesh represent people’s spirits and flesh in general, not one particular spirit and flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “People’s spirits indeed are willing, but their flesh is weak”

The spirit indeed {is} willing

Quote: τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, spirit represents a person’s desires and will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The will indeed wants to do it” or “Inside, you indeed are willing”

is} willing

Quote: πρόθυμον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the spirit is willing to do what is right, and more specifically what Jesus has asked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what I ask”

the flesh {is} weak

Quote: ἡ & σὰρξ ἀσθενής (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, flesh represents a person’s body and actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the body is weak” or “when you act you are weak”

Mark 14:39

having gone away

Quote: ἀπελθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come away”

the same word

Quote: τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents what Jesus prayed using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the same things he had prayed the first time” or “the same prayer as earlier”

Mark 14:40

And having come again, he found them sleeping, for their eyes were weighed down

Quote: καὶ πάλιν ἐλθὼν, εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the third clause gives the reason for the result that the second clause describes. Alternate translation: “And since their eyes were weighed down, when he came again, he found them sleeping”

having come

Quote: ἐλθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

them

Quote: αὐτοὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun them refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John”

their eyes were weighed down

Quote: ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the clause their eyes were weighed down indicates that the three disciples were very tired and sleepy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were exhausted” or “they were very tired”

their eyes were weighed down

Quote: ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their eyes were heavy” or “sleepiness weighed their eyes down”

they did not know what they might answer him

Quote: οὐκ ᾔδεισαν τί ἀποκριθῶσιν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus woke the disciples up, and then they did not know what they might answer him when he spoke to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he awakened them and spoke to them, they did not know what they might answer him”

Mark 14:41

And he comes the third time

Quote: καὶ ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Jesus went away and prayed and then returned to the disciples the third time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus again prayed some distance away, and then he comes the third time”

the third time

Quote: τὸ τρίτον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “time number three” or “yet again”

to them

Quote: αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun them refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to Peter, James, and John”

Are you still sleeping and resting

Quote: καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

This sentence could be: (1) a rhetorical question that Jesus uses to rebuke the disciples. In this case, Jesus is disappointed that the disciples continue to sleep. Alternate translation: “Do you continue to sleep and rest?” (2) a command to continue to sleep and rest. In this case, Jesus means that the time when they were supposed to be alert is over, and they might as well sleep and rest now. Alternate translation: “Go ahead and continue to sleep and rest!” or “You can continue to sleep and rest.”

Are you still sleeping and resting

Quote: καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke Peter, James, and John. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is sad that you are still sleeping and resting.” or “You should not still be sleeping and resting!”

Are you still sleeping and resting

Quote: καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The terms sleeping and resting mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Are you still taking your rest” or “Are you still sleeping soundly”

It is enough

Quote: ἀπέχει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Jesus implies that the disciples have slept enough, and they should wake up and be ready to act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “It is enough sleep”

The hour

Quote: ἡ ὥρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word hour refers to a specific moment in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the moment”

The hour

Quote: ἡ ὥρα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, Jesus implies that the hour is the time when he will suffer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the hour of my suffering”

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold draws the attention of the disciples and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen, or you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Pay attention:”

the Son of Man is handed over

Quote: παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am handed over”

the Son of Man is handed over

Quote: παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone hands the Son of Man over”

is handed over

Quote: παραδίδοται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense

Here Jesus uses the present tense to describe a future event that he knows will surely happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense and indicate the certainty in another way. Alternate translation: “will certainly be handed over”

into the hands

Quote: εἰς τὰς χεῖρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

The term hands represents power and control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how expressed the similar idea in 9:31. Alternate translation: “into the power” or “into the control”

Mark 14:42

Get up, let us go. Behold, the one handing me over has come near

Quote: ἐγείρεσθε, ἄγωμεν; ἰδοὺ, ὁ παραδιδούς με ἤγγικεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences. Alternate translation: “Behold, the one handing me over has come near. Get up, let us go”

Behold

Quote: ἰδοὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold draws the attention of the disciples and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen, or you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Pay attention:”

Mark 14:43

And immediately

Quote: καὶ εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And immediately introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”

of the Twelve

Quote: τῶν δώδεκα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

See how you translated the phrase the Twelve in 3:16. Alternate translation: “of the 12 apostles” or “of the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”

a crowd with him

Quote: μετ’ αὐτοῦ ὄχλος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “a large crowd arrived with him”

clubs

Quote: ξύλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A “club” is a hard piece of wood that a person uses to hit people. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of weapon, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “sticks for hitting people”

Mark 14:44

Now the one handing him over had given them a signal, saying, “Whomever I kiss is he. Seize him and lead {him} away securely

Quote: δεδώκει δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν σύσσημον αὐτοῖς λέγων, ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν; κρατήσατε αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀπάγετε ἀσφαλῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

To help his readers understand what happens next, Mark provides this background information about how Judas had arranged his betrayal of Jesus with the Jewish leaders. Here Mark uses the word Now to introduce the background information which he gives in the rest of this verse. Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Earlier, Judas, who was going to hand him over, had given them a signal. He had said, ‘Whomever I kiss is he. Seize him and lead him away securely’”

a signal

Quote: σύσσημον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to an action by which one person communicates to others. More specifically, Judas arranged with the crowd an action that would communicate to them which person was Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a signal to point out Jesus” or “a cue that would indicate whom to seize”

saying, “Whomever I kiss is he. Seize him and lead {him} away securely

Quote: λέγων, ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν; κρατήσατε αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀπάγετε ἀσφαλῶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying that whomever he kissed was he, and that they should seize him and lead him away securely”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

Whomever I kiss

Quote: ὃν ἂν φιλήσω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, close friends would greet each other with a kiss. In some cultures, a kiss as a greeting is appropriate, but in other cultures it is not appropriate. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what the kiss means, or you could refer to how close friends would greet each other in your culture. Alternate translation: “Whomever I greet with a kiss” or “Whomever I hug”

he

Quote: αὐτός (1)

Alternate translation: “the one you are seeking”

securely

Quote: ἀσφαλῶς (1)

Alternate translation: “under guard”

Mark 14:45

having come

Quote: ἐλθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

Rabbi

Quote: Ῥαββεί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Judas says Rabbi to greet Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Greetings, Rabbi”

he kissed him

Quote: κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, close friends would greet each other with a kiss. See how you expressed the idea in 14:44. Alternate translation: “he greeted him with a kiss” or “he hugged him”

Mark 14:46

they laid their hands on {him} and seized him

Quote: οἱ & ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism

The clauses they laid their hands on {him} and seized him mean similar things. Mark is using the two clauses together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “they seized him” or “they took hold of him to arrest him”

laid their hands on {him

Quote: ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, they laid their hands on {him} means that they grabbed and restrained Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they took hold of him” or “they grabbed him”

Mark 14:47

But

Quote: δέ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”

a certain one of the ones standing by

Quote: εἷς & τις τῶν παρεστηκότων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Mark uses this phrase to bring one of the characters in the story into the center of the action, but he does not identify the person by name. John indicates in his Gospel that it was Peter, but since Mark does not name him here, it would not be appropriate to use his name in your translation. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man who was standing nearby came forward and”

Mark 14:48

answering

Quote: ἀποκριθεὶς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word answering indicates that Jesus was responding to what had happened. He was not answering a question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in response to what had happened”

As against a robber have you come out with swords and clubs to seize me

Quote: ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συνλαβεῖν με? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were arresting him for how they were acting. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It was not necessary for you to come out as against a robber, bringing swords and clubs to seize me.” or “There was no reason for you to come out with swords and clubs to seize me, as if I were a robber!”

As against a robber

Quote: ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile

Jesus is saying that the crowds are acting like he is a dangerous robber because they have come to arrest him with many weapons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As you arm yourselves to seize a robber,” or “As if I were a bandit who needed to be subdued with force”

have you come out

Quote: ἐξήλθατε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “have you gone out”

clubs

Quote: ξύλων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated clubs in 14:43. Alternate translation: “sticks for hitting people”

Mark 14:49

the temple

Quote: τῷ ἱερῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here Mark means that Jesus was teaching in the temple area. He does not mean that Jesus was in the most sacred parts of the temple building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard”

But so that

Quote: ἀλλ’ ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “But all these events have happened so that” or “But what you have done has happened so that”

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the phrase so that could introduce: (1) a result from what has happened. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (2) a purpose for what has happened. Alternate translation: “in order that”

the Scriptures might be fulfilled

Quote: πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαί (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it might fulfill the Scriptures”

Mark 14:50

they all fled

Quote: ἔφυγον πάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective all as a noun to mean all the disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all of the disciples fled”

Mark 14:51

a certain young man was following him, wearing a linen garment over his naked body

Quote: νεανίσκος τις συνηκολούθει αὐτῷ, περιβεβλημένος σινδόνα ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces a certain young man as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain young man was there with Jesus. He was wearing a linen garment over his naked body”

a linen garment

Quote: σινδόνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term linen refers to a high-quality cloth made from the fibers of the flax plant. If your readers would be unfamiliar with linen, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a garment made of fine cloth”

over his naked body

Quote: ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the young man was not wearing anything except for the linen garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and nothing else”

they seize him

Quote: κρατοῦσιν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the men who arrested Jesus seized this young man by his garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the men seize him by his garment”

Mark 14:52

having left behind the linen garment

Quote: καταλιπὼν τὴν σινδόνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the young man, when the crowd seized his garment to arrest him, slipped out of it and left it behind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “letting go of his linen garment and leaving it behind”

the linen garment

Quote: τὴν σινδόνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated this phrase in 14:51. Alternate translation: “the garment made of fine cloth”

Mark 14:53

the high priest

Quote: τὸν ἀρχιερέα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the high priest represents the house where the high priest lived. This is clear from the next verse, which refers to “the courtyard of the high priest.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the house of the high priest”

Mark 14:54

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous

Here, the word And introduces something that was happening at the same time as what Mark narrated in the previous verse (Jesus being led to the house of the high priest). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a simultaneous action, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “While that was happening,”

Peter followed him from a distance, as far as

Quote: ὁ Πέτρος ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ, ἕως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Peter followed from a distance because he did not want anyone to see him and arrest him too. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Peter, because he did not want to be seen and arrested, was following him from a distance. He went as far as”

the officers

Quote: τῶν ὑπηρετῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word officers refers to servants and attendants in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that generally refers to servants and any others who do what they are told. Alternate translation: “the attendants” or “those who served there”

Mark 14:55

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word Now introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” or “Next,”

were seeking testimony against Jesus

Quote: ἐζήτουν κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ μαρτυρίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that the chief priests and the Sanhedrin were trying find evidence against Jesus. In other words, they needed to find people who were willing to say that Jesus had done something very wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “were seeking evidence against Jesus” or “were seeking proof that Jesus had done something wrong”

testimony

Quote: μαρτυρίαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimony, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “someone to testify”

to put him to death

Quote: εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could have him killed”

put him to death

Quote: τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Matthew implies that the chief priests and the Sanhedrin want to convince the Roman authorities to kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “have the Romans put him to death”

Mark 14:56

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word For introduces an explanation about how the Sanhedrin could not find any testimony against Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,”

many

Quote: πολλοὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Mark is using the adjective many as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many witnesses” or “many men”

and

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word and introduces something that contrasts with how many people were testifying falsely against Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “yet” or “but”

their testimonies

Quote: αἱ μαρτυρίαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of testimonies, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the things they testified to”

were not the same

Quote: ἴσαι & οὐκ ἦσαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that, because what the people were testifying about was not the same, the Jewish leaders could use the testimony as evidence to convict Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “were not same, and so they could not convict Jesus” or “were not the same, so they could not be used to accuse Jesus”

Mark 14:57

having stood up

Quote: ἀναστάντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, people would stand up when they were about to give official testimony. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having presented themselves to the Sanhedrin” or “having stood up before the court”

saying

Quote: λέγοντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”

Mark 14:58

We heard him saying, ‘I will destroy this temple made with hands, and in three days I will build another made without hands

Quote: ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος, ὅτι ἐγὼ καταλύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, τὸν χειροποίητον, καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “We heard him saying that he will destroy this temple made with hands and that in three days he will build another made without hands”

We

Quote: ἡμεῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive

The pronoun We refers to the people who falsely testified against Jesus. It does not include the people to whom they are speaking. If your language requires you to mark such forms, We would be exclusive here.

made with hands, … made without hands

Quote: τὸν χειροποίητον & ἀχειροποίητον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche

Here, the word hands refers to main part of the body that people use to make things. So the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “made by humans … made without humans” or “made by people … made without people”

made with hands, … made without hands

Quote: τὸν χειροποίητον & ἀχειροποίητον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that hands made … that hands did not make”

in three days

Quote: διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase in three days refers to a time period made up of three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “during a period of three days”

another

Quote: ἄλλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The witnesses are using the adjective another as a noun to mean another temple. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “a different temple”

made without hands

Quote: ἀχειροποίητον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase made without hands implies that God, not humans, will make this temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “made by God, not by human hands”

Mark 14:59

And not even in this manner

Quote: καὶ οὐδὲ οὕτως (1)

Alternate translation: “Yet not even in this case”

their testimony

Quote: ἡ μαρτυρία αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

See how you translated the word testimony in 14:55. Alternate translation: “what they testified to”

the same

Quote: ἴση (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, just as in 14:56, Mark implies that, because what the people were testifying about was not the same, the Jewish leaders could use the testimony as evidence to convict Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the same, and so they could not convict Jesus” or “the same, so it could not be used to accuse Jesus”

Mark 14:60

having stood up in the midst

Quote: ἀναστὰς & εἰς μέσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, people would stand up when they were about to make an official statement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of the Sanhedrin to say something” or “having stood up in the midst of the court”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

Do you not answer anything? What are these testifying against you

Quote: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? τί οὗτοί σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Here the high priest could be asking: (1) two questions. See the ULT and UST. (2) one question. Alternate translation: “Do you not answer anything to what these are testifying against you”

Do you not answer anything

Quote: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated not and anything are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “Do you answer nothing”

Do you not answer anything

Quote: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν (1)

Alternate translation: “Do you have no answer”

Do you not answer … you

Quote: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ & σου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the high priest is speaking to Peter, the word you throughout this verse is singular.

What are these testifying against you

Quote: τί οὗτοί σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the high priest is asking Jesus how he will defend himself against the people who have accused him of saying and doing wrong things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What is your defense against these testifying against you”

Mark 14:61

he was silent and did not answer anything

Quote: ὁ & ἐσιώπα, καὶ οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The phrases was silent and did not answer anything mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he did not reply to anything that was said against him!” or “he remained completely silent”

did not answer anything

Quote: οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated not and anything are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. See how you expressed the similar form in 14:60. Alternate translation: “answered nothing”

you

Quote: σὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the high priest is speaking to Jesus, the word you is singular.

the Son of the Blessed One

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Here, the title the Blessed One is a polite way of referring to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that the Blessed One is God. Alternate translation: “the Son of the Blessed God” or “the Son of God, the Blessed One”

the Son

Quote: ὁ Υἱὸς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

The word Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God.

of the Blessed One

Quote: τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, the high priest implies that he and other Jews do it. Alternate translation: “of the One whom we bless”

Mark 14:62

I am

Quote: ἐγώ εἰμι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis

Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I am that person” or “I am the Christ, the Son of the Blessed One”

the Son of Man

Quote: τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person

Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “me, who am the Son of Man,”

sitting at the right hand

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

When someone sits at the right hand, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sitting to rule at the right hand” or “taking the place of honor and authority at the right hand”

at the right hand of power

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν & τῆς δυνάμεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, the phrase at the right hand refers to the place next to a person’s right hand, which would be the “right side.” In the Jesus’ culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of power” or “at the honorable place of power”

at the right hand of power

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν & τῆς δυνάμεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word power could refer to: (1) the power that a person sitting at the right hand has. In this case, Jesus implies that the right hand is God’s. Alternate translation: “at the right hand with power” or “at the right hand of God, the place of power,” (2) God the Father by reference to the power that he has. Alternate translation: “at the right hand of the powerful God” or “at the right hand of the Almighty”

at the right hand of power

Quote: ἐκ δεξιῶν & τῆς δυνάμεως (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, and if you do not translate the word as a title for God, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “at the right hand, which is a powerful place,” or “powerfully at the right hand”

coming

Quote: ἐρχόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Christians debate exactly what it means in this verse for the Son of Man to be coming. Some think he is coming to God’s heavenly throne room. Others think he is coming back to earth. If possible, use a form that does not explicitly state where he is coming. Alternate translation: “traveling” or “going”

the clouds of heaven

Quote: τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo

The expression of heaven contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “the clouds”

Mark 14:63

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

having torn his tunics

Quote: διαρρήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture the act of tearing one’s clothing was a symbolic act done to show outrage or grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “having torn his tunics in outrage”

Why do we still have need of witnesses

Quote: τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

The high priest is using the question form to emphatically state that he thinks that they do not need more witnesses. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We do not still have need of witnesses.” or “We certainly do not still have need of witnesses!”

of witnesses

Quote: μαρτύρων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the high priest implies that they do not need more witnesses to prove that Jesus had done something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of witnesses to prove that he is guilty”

Mark 14:64

the blasphemy

Quote: τῆς βλασφημίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blasphemy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “him blaspheme” or “the blasphemous things he says”

What is evident to you

Quote: τί ὑμῖν φαίνεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the high priest is asking the rest of the Jewish council to state whether they think Jesus is guilty or innocent and what they should do with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “What is your verdict” or “What do you think we should do”

to be deserving of death

Quote: ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as someone who deserved to die”

Mark 14:65

certain ones

Quote: τινες (1)

Alternate translation: “some of those present” or “some of the people there”

to spit on him

Quote: ἐμπτύειν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, people would spit on someone to insult that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “to spit on him, dishonoring him,”

to blindfold his face

Quote: περικαλύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσωπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

To blindfold someone means to tie a thick cloth around the middle of a person’s head to cover the eyes and prevent that person from seeing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “to cover his face so that he could not see”

Prophesy

Quote: προφήτευσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

The guards did not believe that Jesus was a real prophet and could Prophesy. When they demanded that Jesus should Prophesy, they were challenging him to do something they believed he could not do. They were only asking Jesus to Prophesy in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Show us that you can prophesy” or “Prophesy to us if you really can”

Prophesy

Quote: προφήτευσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people telling Jesus to Prophesy are implying that they want him to identify who it was who had just hit him. Since he was blindfolded, this would be prophesying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Prophesy! Tell us who hit you.” or “Declare who struck you!”

Prophesy

Quote: προφήτευσον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because these people are speaking to Jesus, the command Prophesy is singular.

the officers

Quote: οἱ ὑπηρέται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word officers refers to servants and attendants in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that generally refers to servants and any others who do what they are told. See how you translated this word in 14:54. Alternate translation: “the attendants” or “those who served there”

received him

Quote: αὐτὸν ἔλαβον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the officers took charge of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “took charge of him” or “took him away”

Mark 14:66

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous

Here, the word And introduces something that was happening at the same time as what Mark narrated in 14:55–65 (Jesus’ trial). This story continues the narrative about Peter that Mark began in 14:54. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a simultaneous event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “During those events,” or “While that was happening,”

below in the courtyard

Quote: κάτω ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the room where the Sanhedrin was meeting was above the ground. The room could have been raised slightly above the ground above another room. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the courtyard below the room where Jesus was” or “in the courtyard, which was lower than the house”

comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “goes”

Mark 14:67

warming himself

Quote: θερμαινόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Peter was still warming himself by the fire in the courtyard of the high priest’s house (see 14:54). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “warming himself by the fire”

You also were with the Nazarene, Jesus

Quote: καὶ σὺ μετὰ τοῦ Ναζαρηνοῦ ἦσθα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the servant girl means that Peter was a disciple of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “You also were a disciple of the Nazarene, Jesus”

You

Quote: σὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because the servant girl is speaking to Peter, the word You is singular.

Mark 14:68

he denied {it

Quote: ὁ & ἠρνήσατο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Peter denied that he was with Jesus as his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he denied that he was with Jesus”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he declared”

Neither have I known, nor do I understand what you are saying

Quote: οὔτε οἶδα, οὔτε ἐπίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here Peter means that servant girl’s words do not apply to him. He does not mean that he was unable to know or understand what the servant girl said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “You are saying things that I neither know nor understand anything about” or “I have nothing to do with what you are talking about!”

Neither have I known, nor do I understand what you are saying

Quote: οὔτε οἶδα, οὔτε ἐπίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The phrase Neither have I known and the phrase nor do I understand mean basically the same thing. Peter is using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “I surely do not know what you are saying” or “I have no idea what you are talking about”

you

Quote: σὺ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Peter is speaking to the servant girl, the word you is singular.

he went out

Quote: ἐξῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “he came out”

the forecourt

Quote: τὸ προαύλιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A forecourt is an open area that leads into another open area (the “court”), which is more closely connected to the house. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of open area, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the outer court” or “the open area further away from the house”

the forecourt

Quote: τὸ προαύλιον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts do not include any more words in this verse after the phrase the forecourt. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts include the words “and a rooster crowed” after the forecourt. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 14:69

to the ones standing around, “This one is from them

Quote: τοῖς παρεστῶσιν, ὅτι οὗτος ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “to the ones standing around that he was from them.”

is from them

Quote: ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐστιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the servant girl means that Peter was one of the people who traveled with Jesus and were part of his group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is one of them” or “is a follower of Jesus”

them

Quote: αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronoun them refers to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples”

Mark 14:70

was denying {it} again

Quote: πάλιν ἠρνεῖτο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Peter was denying that he was with Jesus as his disciple. See how you expressed the similar idea in 14:68. Alternate translation: “was denying again that he was with Jesus”

Truly you are from them, for also you are a Galilean

Quote: ἀληθῶς ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ, καὶ γὰρ Γαλιλαῖος εἶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “You also are a Galilean, so truly you are from them”

you are from them

Quote: ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here the people mean that Peter was one of the people who traveled with Jesus and were part of his group. See how you expressed the similar phrase in 14:69. Alternate translation: “you are one of them” or “you are a follower of Jesus”

you are … you are

Quote: εἶ (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because these people are speaking to Peter, the word you throughout this verse is singular.

them

Quote: αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The pronoun them refers to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples”

for also you are a Galilean

Quote: καὶ γὰρ Γαλιλαῖος εἶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people standing around imply that, since Peter was a Galilean, he must have been with Jesus, who also was a Galilean. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for you, like Jesus, are a Galilean” or “for Jesus is a Galilean, and you are one also”

Mark 14:71

he began to curse and to swear, “I do not know

Quote: ὁ & ἤρξατο ἀναθεματίζειν καὶ ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα (1)

Alternate translation: “he began to say, ‘I call a curse down on myself and swear that I do not know”

to curse

Quote: ἀναθεματίζειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase to curse could mean that: (1) Peter asks God to curse him if he is lying. Alternate translation: “to ask God to curse him if he was speaking falsely” or “to invoke a curse on himself” (2) Peter curses Jesus. Alternate translation: “to curse Jesus”

to swear, “I do not know this man whom you are talking about

Quote: ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον, ὃν λέγετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “to swear that he did not know the man whom they were talking about”

Mark 14:72

a rooster crowed

Quote: ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated rooster and “crow” in 13:30. Alternate translation: “a bird sang”

a second time

Quote: ἐκ δευτέρου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “time number two”

word

Quote: ῥῆμα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here, word represents what Jesus just said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “statement” or “words”

said to him: “Before a rooster crows twice, you will deny me three times,” and

Quote: εἶπεν αὐτῷ & ὅτι πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι δὶς, τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ; καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “said to him, that before a rooster crowed twice, he would deny him three times, and”

Before a rooster crows twice, you will deny me three times

Quote: πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι δὶς, τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ (1)

This clause is basically identical to what Jesus said in 14:30, so express the idea as you did there.

you will deny

Quote: ἀπαρνήσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Jesus spoke these words to Peter, the word you is singular.

having broken down, he was weeping

Quote: ἐπιβαλὼν, ἔκλαιεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

The word translated as having broken down could indicate that: (1) Peter became overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. Alternate translation: “having become overwhelmed with grief, he was weeping” or “having lost control of his emotions, he was weeping” (2) Peter was thinking about what had happened. Alternate translation: “having reflected on what had happened, he was weeping” or “having thought about what he had just done, he was weeping” (3) Peter fell down on the ground because of how upset he was. Alternate translation: “having cast himself on the ground, he was weeping” or “having fallen down, he was weeping” (4) Peter began to weep. Alternate translation: “he began weeping”

Mark 15

Mark 15 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ last days and death (14:1–15:47)
   • Jesus’ trial before Pilate (15:1–15)
   • Jesus is crucified (15:16–41)
     • The soldiers mock Jesus (15:16–20)
     • Jesus is crucified, and people mock him (15:21–32)
     • Jesus dies (15:33–41)
   • Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus’ body (15:42–47)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

Golgotha

As Mark indicates in 15:22, “Golgotha” means “Place of a Skull.” The reason why this place was called Place of a Skull is not known. It could have been named this because the appearance of this place resembled a skull. Or, it could have been named this because it was the site of so many executions, in which case the word “Skull” is being used as metonymy to refer to death. Because the reason that this location was called Place of a Skull is unknown, you should translate this phrase in a way that allows for either meaning, as modeled by the ULT and UST.

The drinks that people offered to Jesus

In 15:23, some people offer Jesus “wine having been mixed with myrrh.” In 15:36, someone offers Jesus “vinegar.” In both cases, scholars debate whether people offered these drinks to help Jesus by easing the pain or quenching his thirst or whether they offered these drinks to torment Jesus by giving him a bad-tasting drink or to mock him. Since it is not obvious what the purpose of the drinks was, if possible express the idea in such a way that your readers could draw either conclusion. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include some extra information in a footnote. See the notes on these verses for translation options.

Calling Elijah

In 15:34, Jesus calls out “Eloi, Eloi,” which is how Jesus said “My God, my God” in his language. Some of the people standing there misheard him and thought that he was calling out to “Elijah,” a prophet with a name that sounds like “Eloi.” There is a story about this Elijah in 2 Kings 2:11–12, where God takes him into heaven. So, some people believed that Elijah did not die and would someday return. The people who thought Jesus was calling to Elijah thought that he was asking Elijah to return and rescue him. If your readers would not understand why the people standing near Jesus speak about Elijah, you could include some extra information in your translation or include this information in a footnote. (See: Elijah)

The curtain of the temple tearing from top to bottom

The “curtain” to which Mark refers in 15:38 could be either the curtain that separated the Most Holy Place from the rest of the temple, or it could be the curtain that separated the Holy Place from the rest of the temple area. Mark indicates that this curtain tore from the top to the bottom, which means that a person did not do it. Christians debate what the tearing of this curtain might have symbolized. There are at least three major options:

1. the tearing of the curtain could indicate that access to God is now available to everyone.
2. the tearing of the curtain could indicate that God is going to destroy the temple.
3. the tearing of the curtain could indicate that God is revealing something.

Since Mark does not explain what the tearing of the curtain means, you should not explain it in your translation. However, if it would be helpful for your readers, you could include what it might mean in a footnote.

The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (15:46) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a large hole or room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

Sarcasm

In this chapter, people mock Jesus several times. First, in 15:16–19, the soldiers pretend like Jesus is a king. They give him a purple robe, a crown of thorns, and they pretend to greet him and honor him as a king. They do not actually believe that Jesus is a king, so they are doing these things sarcastically to make fun of Jesus. Second, in 15:29–32, people walking by and the Jewish leaders tell Jesus to save himself and to come down from the cross. They do not actually believe that he can do these things, so they are speaking sarcastically to make fun of Jesus. Make sure that it is clear in your translation that these are sarcastic actions done to make fun of Jesus. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: Irony)

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

Most of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear when people are speaking to Jesus. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 16, 17, 20, 21, 22, and 27. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

Eloi, Eloi, lema sabachthani?

In 15:34, Mark spells out the sounds of the words that Jesus spoke in his own language, which in this case could have been Aramaic or Hebrew. Either way, Mark translates the words later on in the verse as “My God, my God, why did you forsake me?” You can express the idea as Mark did by spelling out how the words sound and then translating their meaning in your language. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Verse 28

Many of the earliest manuscripts do not include anything for 15:28. A few early manuscripts and many later manuscripts include the following words: “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘And he was counted with lawless ones.’” Since a similar sentence appears in Luke 22:37, it is likely that people who copied the manuscripts accidentally or intentionally added these words here in Mark. Since the earliest manuscripts do not include these words, the ULT and UST include these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to omit these words. If it would be helpful, you could put the words in brackets or in a footnote. (See: Textual Variants)

Mark 15:1

And immediately

Quote: καὶ εὐθὺς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the phrase And immediately introduces the next major event in the story. Mark means that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”

having made counsel

Quote: συμβούλιον ποιήσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase having made counsel indicates that the Jewish leaders were working together to figure something out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made plans” or “having come up with an idea”

and the entire Sanhedrin

Quote: καὶ ὅλον τὸ Συνέδριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the rest of the Sanhedrin. He does not mean that the chief priests, elders, and scribes whom he has previously mentioned were not part of the Sanhedrin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and the rest of the entire Sanhedrin” or “all the other members of the Sanhedrin”

having bound Jesus

Quote: δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the Jewish council commanded guards to bind Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having commanded the guards to bind Jesus”

led {him} away

Quote: ἀπήνεγκαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the Jewish council led Jesus away from the high priest’s house and to the place where Pilate was staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they led him away from the high priest’s house”

handed {him} over to Pilate

Quote: παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the Jewish leaders brought Jesus to Pilate because they wanted Pilate to judge him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “handed him over to Pilate to be judged by him”

Mark 15:2

But he, answering him, says

Quote: ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ λέγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the two words answering and says mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “But he responded to him” or “But he said to him”

You say {it

Quote: σὺ λέγεις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase You say {it} indicates that the speaker acknowledges the truth of what the other person said. Jesus uses this phrase to indirectly indicate that Pilate is right to suggest that Jesus is the King of the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that gives an indirect positive response to a request. If necessary, you could express the idea more directly, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “That is what you say” or “Your words show what is true”

Mark 15:3

were accusing him of many things

Quote: κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ & πολλά (1)

Alternate translation: “were saying that Jesus had done many wrong things” or “were telling Pilate that Jesus had frequently done what was wrong”

of many things

Quote: πολλά (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word translated of many things could: (1) indicate that the chief priests accused Jesus of doing many different things. Alternate translation: “of many crimes” (2) indicate that the chief priests accused Jesus many times. Alternate translation: “repeatedly” or “again and again”

Mark 15:4

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word Now introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he asked”

Do you not answer anything? See how many things they are accusing you

Quote: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? ἴδε, πόσα σου κατηγοροῦσιν! (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the question in the first sentence. Alternate translation: “See how many things they are accusing you! Do you not answer anything?”

Do you not answer anything

Quote: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated not and anything are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “Do you answer nothing”

Do you not answer anything

Quote: οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? (1)

Alternate translation: “Do you have no answer”

See

Quote: ἴδε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy

Here Pilate uses the word See to refer to hearing or paying attention to something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Hear” or “Consider”

Mark 15:5

Jesus no longer answered anything

Quote: ὁ & Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated no longer and anything are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “Jesus answered nothing at all”

Jesus no longer answered anything

Quote: ὁ & Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη (1)

Alternate translation: “But Jesus gave no more answers”

so as to amaze

Quote: ὥστε θαυμάζειν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the phrase so as to introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “so that he amazed”

Mark 15:6

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here Mark provides background information about something that Pilate, the governor, normally did. This background information will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Here is some important information:”

the festival

Quote: ἑορτὴν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase the festival refers to the Passover and the Festival of Unleavened Bread, as indicated in 14:1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed festival in 14:2. Alternate translation: “the festival of Passover and Unleavened Bread” or “the Festival of Unleavened Bread, including the Passover”

he was releasing

Quote: ἀπέλυεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Pilate normally or customarily did this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he customarily released” or “it was his custom to release”

to them … they were requesting

Quote: αὐτοῖς & παρῃτοῦντο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

The pronouns them and they refer to the people who were in Jerusalem at during the festival. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “to the people … they were requesting” or “to the people there … those people were requesting”

Mark 15:7

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Here, the word Now marks a continuation of the break in the main story line which began in the preceding verse. Mark is introducing more background information, this time about Barabbas, to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And” or “Here is some more important information:”

there was the one called Barabbas, having been bound with the rebels

Quote: ἦν & ὁ λεγόμενος Βαραββᾶς, μετὰ τῶν στασιαστῶν δεδεμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces Barabbas as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man called Barabbas. He had been bound with the rebels”

called

Quote: λεγόμενος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called”

having been bound

Quote: δεδεμένος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Roman authorities. Alternate translation: “whom the Roman soldiers had bound” or “whom the Roman authorities had bound”

had committed murder

Quote: φόνον πεποιήκεισαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of murder, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “had murdered others”

in the insurrection

Quote: ἐν τῇ στάσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark refers to an insurrection that his readers were familiar with. Most likely, this insurrection occurred soon before this story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the recent insurrection” or “in the insurrection that had just happened”

in the insurrection

Quote: ἐν τῇ στάσει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of insurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while they were revolting”

Mark 15:8

having come up

Quote: ἀναβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark indicates that the crowd walked up to where Pilate was. Most likely, this place was on top of a hill in the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come up to the place where Pilate was” or “having walked up a hill to Pilate”

having come up

Quote: ἀναβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone up”

having come up

Quote: ἀναβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read having come up. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “having cried out.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

to request just as

Quote: αἰτεῖσθαι καθὼς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the crowd asked Pilate to release a prisoner, just as he usually did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to request that he release a prisoner, just as”

he was doing

Quote: ἐποίει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark refers to what Pilate normally or customarily did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he customarily did” or “it was his custom to do”

Mark 15:9

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”

Do you want {… to you

Quote: θέλετε & ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Pilate is speaking to the crowd in Jerusalem, the word you throughout this verse is plural.

the King of the Jews

Quote: τὸν Βασιλέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Pilate uses the same title for Jesus that he used in 15:2. He does not indicate whether he thinks that Jesus really is the King of the Jews, but he uses the title because Jesus apparently accepted it in 15:2. Alternate translation: “the one who is called the King of the Jews”

Mark 15:10

For

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For introduces a reason why Pilate asked the question that he just asked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a question, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “Pilate did that because”

because of envy

Quote: διὰ φθόνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of envy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they envied him” or “they were upset that everyone liked him”

Mark 15:11

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces how the chief priests and elders were trying to have Jesus executed in contrast to Pilate, who wanted to release Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “In contrast,”

stirred up

Quote: ἀνέσεισαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor

Mark speaks of the chief priests as if they had stirred a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the chief priests encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “influenced” or “incited”

so that he would release

Quote: ἵνα & ἀπολύσῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the crowd would ask or demand that Pilate release Barabbas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that they would demand that he release”

instead

Quote: μᾶλλον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they asked for Barabbas instead of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “instead of releasing Jesus”

Mark 15:12

Pilate, answering again, was saying to them

Quote: Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Together the two terms answering and was saying mean that Pilate was responding to what the crowd asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent phrase or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Pilate responded to them” or “Pilate said to them”

again

Quote: πάλιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Mark uses the word again here because Pilate had already spoken to them regarding this matter in 15:9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second time” or “once more”

What therefore

Quote: τί οὖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word therefore indicates that Pilate asks this question in response to the crowd, who were asking that he release Barabbas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Once I release Barabbas, what”

with the one} you call

Quote: λέγετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because Pilate is speaking to the crowd in Jerusalem, the word you is plural.

with the one} you call

Quote: λέγετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Many ancient manuscripts read {with the one} you call. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “{with}.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

Mark 15:13

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

cried out again

Quote: πάλιν ἔκραξαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word again could indicate: (1) that the crowd had already cried out for Pilate to release Barabbas, as Mark implies in 15:11. In this case, you could make the idea more explicit or leave again untranslated. Alternate translation: “cried out a second time” (2) that the crowd is replying to what Pilate said. Alternate translation: “yelled back” or “shouted back at Pilate”

Crucify him

Quote: σταύρωσον αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the crowd means that they want Pilate to command his soldiers to Crucify him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Command some soldiers to crucify him”

Crucify him

Quote: σταύρωσον αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative

This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a request or a demand rather than as a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that would express a demand or request. Alternate translation: “We want you to crucify him”

Mark 15:14

But … But

Quote: δὲ (-1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

In both places, the word But introduces what Pilate or the crowds say in contrast to what the other person or people said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “In response, … In response,” or “However, … Yet”

For what evil did he do

Quote: τί γὰρ κακόν ἐποίησεν? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion

Pilate is using the question form to emphasize that he thinks that Jesus has not done any evil. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Despite what you say, he did not do evil.” or “Yet he has certainly not done evil!”

For what

Quote: τί γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

Here, the word For indicates that Pilate is asking for a reason why the crowd wants him to crucify Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a question is asking for a reason for something. Alternate translation: “Why? What” or “What is your reason for that? What”

evil

Quote: κακόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Pilate is using the adjective evil as a noun to mean an evil thing. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “evil thing”

Crucify him

Quote: σταύρωσον αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

See how you translated the phrase Crucify him in 15:13. Alternate translation: “We ask that you command some soldiers to crucify him”

Mark 15:15

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word Now introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

to do {what} was pleasing to the crowd

Quote: τῷ ὄχλῳ τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιῆσαι (1)

Alternate translation: “to make the crowd happy by doing what they wanted him to do”

handed Jesus over

Quote: παρέδωκεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Pilate handed Jesus over to his soldiers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he handed Jesus over to his soldiers”

having flogged {him

Quote: φραγελλώσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Pilate had his soldiers flog Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having commanded his soldiers to flog him”

having flogged {him

Quote: φραγελλώσας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Flogging was a Roman penalty in which soldiers whipped a person with a whip to which were attached pieces of bone and metal to increase the whip’s capacity to do harm to the person being flogged. If your readers would not be familiar with this form of punishment, you could explain explicitly what flogging was. Alternate translation: “having whipped him with a whip to which were attached pieces of bone and metal”

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

The phrase so that introduces a purpose for which Pilate handed Jesus over. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”

he might be crucified

Quote: σταυρωθῇ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Pilate’s soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers might crucify him”

Mark 15:16

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word Now introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”

the courtyard (that is, the Praetorium) and

Quote: τῆς αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον, καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark provides an explanation of what this specific courtyard was. Use a form that shows that Mark is giving more information about the courtyard. Alternate translation: “the courtyard—that is, the Praetorium—and” or “the courtyard. This courtyard was part of the Praetorium. They”

the courtyard

Quote: τῆς αὐλῆς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the word translated courtyard could refer to: (1) the open area that was part of the Praetorium. Alternate translation: “the open area that belonged to the Roman soldiers” (2) Pilate’s palace or residence. Alternate translation: “the palace”

the Praetorium

Quote: πραιτώριον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The Praetorium was where the Roman governor stayed when he was in Jerusalem and where the soldiers in Jerusalem lived. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of structure, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the government building” or “the governor’s residence”

the whole cohort

Quote: ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The word cohort is a military term. Each cohort is a group of about 600 soldiers, which is a tenth of a legion. Most likely, Mark is referring to all the soldiers who were stationed in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable military term in your language or a more general term. Alternate translation: “the whole company” or “all the soldiers stationed there”

Mark 15:17

put on him a purple robe and place on him, having woven {it} together, a crown of thorns

Quote: ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν πορφύραν, καὶ περιτιθέασιν αὐτῷ πλέξαντες ἀκάνθινον στέφανον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Roman culture, a purple robe was like the expensive clothing worn by kings, and in that culture a king usually wore a crown. The soldiers put a purple robe and a crown of thorns on Jesus to pretend that he was a king, even though they did not think that he really was a king. They did this to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “put on him a purple robe in mockery and place on him, having woven it together, a crown of thorns as if he were a king” or “put on him a purple robe and place on him, having woven it together, a crown of thorns. They did these things in order to mock him by pretending that they believed he really was a king”

and put on him

Quote: καὶ ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

As 15:20 indicates, the soldiers took Jesus’ own clothes off before putting the purple robe on him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that more explicitly here. Alternate translation: “and, having taken off his garments, put on him”

a purple robe

Quote: πορφύραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word purple refers to a color that is a combination of blue and red. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the color purple, you could refer to a similar color. Alternate translation: “a lavender robe” or “a reddish-blue robe”

a crown of thorns

Quote: ἀκάνθινον στέφανον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Mark is using the possessive form to describe a crown that is made from branches with thorns on them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a crown made from thorns”

of thorns

Quote: ἀκάνθινον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Mark uses the word thorns to refer to small branches with thorns on them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of thorny branches”

Mark 15:18

Rejoice, King of the Jews

Quote: Χαῖρε, Βασιλεῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Here the soldiers mock Jesus by greeting him as if he were King of the Jews when they do not believe that he actually is. They actually meant to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that this is irony. Alternate translation: “Rejoice, you so-called King of the Jews”

Rejoice

Quote: Χαῖρε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

In Jesus’ culture, people commonly greeted each other with the word Rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that people use to greet each other. Alternate translation: “Hello”

Mark 15:19

spitting on him

Quote: ἐνέπτυον αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, people would spit on someone to insult that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “spitting on him to dishonor him”

bending the knee, they were bowing down to him

Quote: τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

In Jesus’ culture, bending the knee and bowing before someone was a way to respect a greater person, especially when asking the greater person to do a favor. Here, the soldiers perform this action to mock Jesus by pretending that he is a king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what kneeling means. Alternate translation: “they were prostrating themselves before him” or “they were kneeling down before him as if he were a king”

bending the knee, they were bowing down to him

Quote: τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet

The phrases bending the knee and bowing down mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “they were bowing down low to him” or “they were formally bending the knee to him”

Mark 15:20

purple robe

Quote: πορφύραν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the phrase purple robe in 15:17. Alternate translation: “lavender robe” or “reddish-blue robe”

lead him out

Quote: ἐξάγουσιν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that the soldiers led Jesus out from the Praetorium. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “led him out of the Praetorium”

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

The phrase so that introduces the purpose for which Jesus was led out, namely that they might crucify him. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”

Mark 15:21

And they press into service a certain passerby, Simon, a Cyrenean (the father of Alexander and Rufus), coming from the country, so that he might carry his cross

Quote: καὶ ἀγγαρεύουσιν, παράγοντά τινα Σίμωνα Κυρηναῖον, ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ, τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου, ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces Simon as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And a certain man was passing by, Simon, a Cyrenean (the father of Alexander and Rufus). He was coming from the country. They pressed him into service so that he might carry his cross”

they press into service

Quote: ἀγγαρεύουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

According to Roman law, Roman soldiers could press someone into service, which means that they could force a person to carry a load for them or work for them. In this case, they forced Simon to carry Jesus’ cross. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of forced service, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “they conscripted” or “they compelled to work for them”

they press into service

Quote: ἀγγαρεύουσιν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of service, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they forced to serve them”

Simon, … of Alexander … Rufus

Quote: Σίμωνα & Ἀλεξάνδρου & Ῥούφου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The words Simon, Alexander, and Rufus are the names of men.

a Cyrenean (the father of Alexander and Rufus

Quote: Κυρηναῖον & τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

The phrases a Cyrenean and the father of Alexander and Rufus include background information about the man whom the soldiers forced to carry Jesus’ cross. Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “who was a Cyrenean and who was the father of Alexander and Rufus”

coming from the country

Quote: ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Simon was coming from the farmlands outside Jerusalem and going toward Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “coming into Jerusalem from outside the city”

coming

Quote: ἐρχόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of coming. Alternate translation: “going”

so that

Quote: ἵνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal

The phrase so that introduces the purpose for which they pressed Simon into service, namely so that they could require him to carry Jesus’ cross. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”

Mark 15:22

Golgotha

Quote: Γολγοθᾶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

The word Golgotha is an Aramaic word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means later in the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.

which is translated

Quote: ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which one can translate as”

Mark 15:23

they were giving

Quote: ἐδίδουν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns

Here, the pronoun they could refer: (1) the soldiers. Alternate translation: “some of the soldiers were giving” (2) to some people who were nearby. Alternate translation: “some people there were giving”

wine having been mixed with myrrh

Quote: ἐσμυρνισμένον οἶνον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo

Scholars do not agree on why myrrh would be mixed with wine for Jesus to drink. It could be to make the wine smell or taste special, in which case the soldiers are continuing to mock Jesus as a king. It could be that people thought that the myrrh would lessen the pain that Jesus was going to experience. If possible, refer to the myrrh without explaining why it would be mixed in. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include some of this information in a footnote.

having been mixed with myrrh

Quote: ἐσμυρνισμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The word myrrh refers to a fragrant resin or gum that is collected from trees. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of resin or gum, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “having been mixed with a fragrant gum” or “having been mixed with myrrh, a sweet-smelling resin”

having been mixed with myrrh

Quote: ἐσμυρνισμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who offered the wine to Jesus. Alternate translation: “that people had mixed with myrrh”

Mark 15:24

also they divide his garments, casting a lot for them, who would take what

Quote: καὶ διαμερίζονται τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ, βάλλοντες κλῆρον ἐπ’ αὐτὰ, τίς τί ἄρῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange these clauses so that the events they describe are in sequence. Alternate translation: “also they cast a lot for his garments, who would take what, and then they divided his garments”

they divide his garments

Quote: διαμερίζονται τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that the soldiers took the clothes that Jesus had been wearing and divided them up by giving each piece of clothing to a soldier. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they take his clothes and distribute them among them”

casting a lot for them

Quote: βάλλοντες κλῆρον ἐπ’ αὐτὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term lot refers to an object with different markings on various sides that was used to decide randomly among several possibilities. It would be tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with a lot, you could refer to a similar practice in your culture, or you could use a more general expression for gambling. Alternate translation: “rolling dice for them” or “deciding randomly about them”

them, who would take what

Quote: αὐτὰ, τίς τί ἄρῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that this is the purpose for which they were casting a lot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “them to decide who would take what” or “them in order to choose which soldier would take which piece of clothing”

Mark 15:25

Now it was

Quote: ἦν δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark uses the word Now to introduce background information, which is the time of day when Jesus was crucified. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “This all happened during” or “As for the time, it was”

the third hour

Quote: ὥρα τρίτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. So, the third hour would be around nine o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “9:00 AM”

the third hour

Quote: ὥρα τρίτη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “hour three”

Mark 15:26

the inscription of his charge

Quote: ἡ ἐπιγραφὴ τῆς αἰτίας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession

Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe an inscription that states the charge that was made against Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the inscription that stated the charge against him”

inscription

Quote: ἐπιγραφὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word inscription refers to a few words written to identify something. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of writing, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “written description” or “identification”

having been written

Quote: ἐπιγεγραμμένη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “which one of the soldiers had written”

The King of the Jews

Quote: ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Here the soldiers continue mock Jesus by referring to him as if he were King of the Jews when they do not believe that he actually is. They actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that this is irony. See how you expressed the similar idea in 15:18. Alternate translation: “The so-called King of the Jews”

Mark 15:27

one at his right and one at his left

Quote: ἕνα ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ ἕνα ἐξ εὐωνύμων αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

Here, Mark uses the adjectives right and left as nouns to refer to Jesus’ right and left sides. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one on his right side and one on his left side”

Mark 15:28

And the scripture was fulfilled that says, “And he was counted with lawless ones

Quote: Καὶ ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ ἡ λέγουσα Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The notes below discuss translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it.

the scripture was fulfilled that says

Quote: ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ ἡ λέγουσα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Here the author quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from Isaiah 53:12. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “the passage in Isaiah was fulfilled that says” or “what Isaiah the prophet wrote was fulfilled. He wrote”

the scripture was fulfilled

Quote: ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers crucifying Jesus with two robbers. Alternate translation: “that fulfilled the scripture” or “when the soldiers crucified those two robbers with Jesus, it fulfilled the scripture”

And he was counted with lawless ones

Quote: Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “And they counted him with lawless ones” or “And others counted him with lawless ones”

Mark 15:29

wagging their heads

Quote: κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὐτῶν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

The people’s action of wagging their heads at Jesus showed that they felt disdain for him and that they disapproved of him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, or you could indicate what the gesture means. Alternate translation: “showing disdain for him by wagging their heads” or “wagging their heads to mock him”

Aha

Quote: οὐὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Aha expresses mock surprise. In other words, the people are pretending to be surprised that Jesus is on the cross in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea in your language. Alternate translation: “Wow” or “What”

The one destroying the temple and rebuilding {it} in three days

Quote: ὁ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ οἰκοδομῶν ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the people refer to Jesus by what the false witnesses testified during his trial that he had said (see 14:58). If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate more explicitly that the people are describing Jesus. Alternate translation: “You who said that you would destroy the temple and rebuild it in three days”

in three days

Quote: ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the phrase in three days refers to a time period made up of three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in 14:58. Alternate translation: “during a period of three days”

Mark 15:30

having come down

Quote: καταβὰς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone down”

Mark 15:31

mocking {him} to each other

Quote: ἐμπαίζοντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους (1)

Alternate translation: “saying mocking things about Jesus among themselves”

He saved others

Quote: ἄλλους ἔσωσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In context, the Jewish leaders are implicitly referring to how Jesus saved others by healing their diseases, releasing them from demon-possession, and saving them from other physical problems. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He saved others by curing or exorcising them”

others

Quote: ἄλλους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj

The Jewish leaders are using the adjective others as a noun to mean other people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “other men and women”

Mark 15:32

Let the Christ, the King of Israel, come down now from the cross so that we might see and might believe

Quote: ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ, ἵνα ἴδωμεν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo

Here the Jewish leaders use what they think is an imaginary situation to prove that Jesus is not really the Christ, the King of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “Imagine he really were the Christ, the King of Israel. In that case, he should come down now from the cross so that we might see and might believe” or “If he is the Christ, the King of Israel, let him come down now from the cross. Then, we will see and believe”

Let the Christ, the King of Israel, come down

Quote: ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony

Here the Jewish leaders mock Jesus by speaking about him as if he were the Christ, the King of Israel when they do not believe that he actually is. They actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words, as Mark indicated when he says that they mocked Jesus (see 15:31). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that this is irony. Alternate translation: “Let the so-called Christ, the King of Israel, come down” or “He calls himself the Christ, the King of Israel. Let him come down”

Let the Christ, the King of Israel, come down

Quote: ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p

If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Christ, the King of Israel, must come down”

Let the Christ, the King of Israel, come down

Quote: ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of come. Alternate translation: “Let the Christ, the King of Israel, go down”

we might see and might believe

Quote: ἴδωμεν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the Jewish leaders imply that they might see Jesus coming down from the cross and then they might believe that he really is the Christ, the King of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “we might see him come down and might believe that he really is the Christ”

having been crucified

Quote: συνεσταυρωμένοι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate’s soldiers were crucifying”

Mark 15:33

the sixth hour … the ninth hour

Quote: ὥρας ἕκτης & ὥρας ἐνάτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. So, the sixth hour would be around noon, and the ninth hour would be around three o’clock in the afternoon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated the similar time reference in 15:25. Alternate translation: “12:00 PM … 3:00 PM”

the sixth hour … the ninth hour

Quote: ὥρας ἕκτης & ὥρας ἐνάτης (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here or equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “hour six … hour nine”

darkness happened

Quote: σκότος ἐγένετο (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of darkness, you could express it in a different way. Alternate translation: “the sky darkened” or “the light dimmed”

over the whole land

Quote: ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the whole land could refer to: (1) the entire area around where Jesus was crucified. This could include just the city of Jerusalem or all of Palestine. Alternate translation: “over that whole region” (2) the entire earth. Alternate translation: “over the whole earth”

Mark 15:34

at the ninth hour

Quote: τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

See how you translated the phrase the ninth hour in 15:33. Alternate translation: “3:00 PM”

at the ninth hour

Quote: τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “at hour nine”

cried out with a loud voice

Quote: ἐβόησεν & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase cried out with a loud voice means that Jesus raised the volume of his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “yelled loudly”

Eloi, Eloi, lema sabachthani

Quote: Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate

This phrase is what Jesus cried out in his own language, either Aramaic or Hebrew. Mark has spelled the words out using Greek letters so his readers would know how they sounded. Since Mark states what these words mean later in the verse, you also should spell them out the way they sound in your language.

which is translated

Quote: ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you expressed this construction in 15:22. Alternate translation: “which one can translate as”

My God, my God

Quote: ὁ Θεός μου, ὁ Θεός μου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication

Here Jesus repeats the phrase My God to express the urgency and emotion of his question. If repeating this phrase would not express urgency or emotion in your language, you could eliminate the repetition and express the urgency and emotion in another way. Alternate translation: “Please, my God”

Mark 15:35

having heard {it

Quote: ἀκούσαντες (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Mark implies that the people did not understand what Jesus said. They heard him say “Eloi,” which means “My God,” but they thought it sounded like the name Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly that these people misunderstood Jesus. Alternate translation: “having heard Jesus speaking without understanding him”

Behold

Quote: ἴδε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word Behold draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express Behold with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Pay attention” or “See”

Mark 15:36

a sponge

Quote: σπόγγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

A sponge is a soft, porous object that can soak up and hold liquid, which comes out of it when the sponge is squeezed. If your readers would not be familiar with this object, you could use the name of something your readers would use for soaking up liquid, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something used to soak up liquid”

with vinegar

Quote: ὄξους (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, vinegar refers to the inexpensive and sour wine that common people in Jesus’ culture would usually drink. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of beverage, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with cheap wine” or “with an inexpensive alcoholic beverage”

having put {it} around a reed, was giving {it} to him to drink

Quote: περιθεὶς καλάμῳ, ἐπότιζεν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The person put the sponge on a reed, or long stick, so that he could hold the sponge up to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having put it around a reed, used the reed to lift the sponge up to Jesus to give it to him to drink”

saying

Quote: λέγων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations

Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he declared”

Leave {him

Quote: ἄφετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, the clause Leave {him} means that no one should do anything more to or for Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Wait” or “Stay away from him”

Leave {him

Quote: ἄφετε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular

Because this person is speaking to the other people there, the command Leave {him} is plural.

comes

Quote: ἔρχεται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of comes. Alternate translation: “goes”

to take him down

Quote: καθελεῖν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the man implies that Elijah might take him down from the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to take him down from the cross”

Mark 15:37

having let out a loud voice

Quote: ἀφεὶς φωνὴν μεγάλην (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase having let out a loud voice means that Jesus shouted loudly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in 15:34. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”

expired

Quote: ἐξέπνευσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

Mark is referring to death in a polite way by using the word expired. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state the meaning. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died”

Mark 15:38

the curtain of the temple was split

Quote: τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God split the curtain of the temple”

the curtain of the temple

Quote: τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark could be referring to the curtain: (1) that separated the Most Holy Place from the rest of the temple. Alternate translation: “the curtain that marked off the Most Holy Place in the temple” (2) that separated the Holy Place from the rest of the temple area. Alternate translation: “the curtain that marked off the temple building”

Mark 15:39

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word Now introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

opposite him

Quote: ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, a place opposite him is directly in front of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Jesus in front of him” or “with Jesus before him”

he expired in this way

Quote: οὕτως ἐξέπνευσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants

Some ancient manuscripts read he expired in this way. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “crying out in this way he expired.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.

he expired

Quote: ἐξέπνευσεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism

See how you translated the word expired in 15:37. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or “he died”

a Son of God

Quote: Υἱὸς Θεοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples

Son of God is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.

Mark 15:40

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens later in the story. The word does not introduce the next event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “During all those things,”

also Mary Magdalene and Mary the mother of James the little and of Joses and Salome

Quote: καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Consider how you might naturally include a list of three women with descriptions of them. The UST has moved Salome earlier in the list so that it is clear that she is not one of the children of Mary. Alternate translation: “also Mary Magdalene and Salome and Mary the mother of James the little and of Joses”

Mary the mother

Quote: Μαρία ἡ & μήτηρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Mary is the name of a woman. This Mary was not Mary Magdalene nor Mary the mother of Jesus. Mark identifies her instead as the mother of James the younger and of Joses.

of James the little and of Joses

Quote: Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word James is the name of a man. This James is not James the brother of Jesus, James son of Zebedee, or James son of Alphaeus. The word Joses is also the name of a man. This Joses is not Jesus’ brother.

of James the little

Quote: Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

When Mark refers to James as the little, he could mean that: (1) he was younger than one or more other people named James. Alternate translation: “of James the young” or “of the younger James” (2) he was less well-known than one or more other people named James. Alternate translation: “of James the less” or “of the less famous James” (3) he was a short man. Alternate translation: “of James the short”

Salome

Quote: Σαλώμη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Salome is the name of a woman.

Mark 15:41

who, when he was in Galilee, were following him and serving him

Quote: αἳ ὅτε ἦν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

Mark uses the statement who, when he was in Galilee, were following him and serving him to give his readers background information about the relationship that the three women mentioned in 15:40 had with Jesus. Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to delete the comma at the end of verse 40. Alternate translation: “(these three women had followed him and served him when he was in Galilee)”

were following him

Quote: ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase were following him indicates that these three women had traveled with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were traveling with him as his students”

who had come up with

Quote: αἱ συναναβᾶσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going up to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “gone up” rather than come up in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “who had gone up with”

Mark 15:42-43

And evening already having come, because it was the Day of Preparation, that is, the day before the Sabbath … Joseph, the one from Arimathea, a respected member of the council who also himself was waiting for the kingdom of God, having come, having dared, entered in to Pilate and asked for the body of Jesus

Quote: καὶ ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον & ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν Πειλᾶτον καὶ ᾐτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine 15:42 and 15:43 into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to introduce Joseph of Arimathea before stating what he did and why he did it. Alternate translation: “And Joseph, the one from Arimathea, a respected member of the council who also himself was waiting for the kingdom of God, came. And evening already having come, because it was the Day of Preparation, that is, the day before the Sabbath, having dared, he entered in to Pilate and asked for the body of Jesus”

Mark 15:42

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Then,”

evening already having come, because it was the Day of Preparation, that is, the day before the Sabbath

Quote: ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark indicates that Joseph of Arimathea acted as he did (see 15:43) because it was the Day of Preparation. Mark assumes that his readers will know that Jews would not move or bury a body on the Sabbath (the next day). He also assumes that his readers will know that the law includes a command to bury on the same day anyone who was executed as Jesus was (see Deuteronomy 21:22–23). So, if he wanted bury Jesus’ body, Joseph needed to receive the body and bury it quickly, before the next day began. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include this information in a footnote or make some of it more explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “evening already having come, because it was the Day of Preparation, that is, the day before the Sabbath when no one could bury anyone”

the Day of Preparation, that is, the day before the Sabbath

Quote: παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here, as Mark indicates the Day of Preparation is the day before the Sabbath. On this day, Jews would prepare for the Sabbath so that they would not have to do work on that day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the day on which Jews prepared for the Sabbath, that is, the day before the Sabbath” or “the day before the Sabbath, the day on which Jews prepared for the Sabbath”

Mark 15:43

Joseph, the one from Arimathea, a respected member of the council who also himself was waiting for the kingdom of God, having come, having dared, entered in

Quote: ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants

Here Mark introduces Joseph as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a man from Arimathea came. He was named Joseph, and he was a respected member of the council who also himself was waiting for the kingdom of God. Having dared, he entered in”

Joseph, the one from Arimathea

Quote: Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Joseph is the name of a man, and the word Arimathea is the name of the city he was from.

a respected member of the council

Quote: εὐσχήμων βουλευτής (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “an honorable member of the council” or “a member of the council whom others thought highly of,”

who also himself was

Quote: ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns

Mark uses the word himself to emphasize that Joseph was one of the people who was waiting for the kingdom of God. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “who, he too, was” or “who indeed also was”

having come

Quote: ἐλθὼν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

asked for the body of Jesus

Quote: ᾐτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The reason that Joseph asked Pilate for the body of Jesus was so that he could bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “asked for the body of Jesus so that he could bury it”

Mark 15:44

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word But introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”

if he had already died

Quote: εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark means that Pilate was not sure whether Jesus had already died, but he marveled that it might be true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates this kind of possibility. Alternate translation: “because it was possible that Jesus had already died”

the centurion

Quote: τὸν κεντυρίωνα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that this is the same centurion who was in charge of crucifying Jesus (see 15:39). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the centurion who was in charge of Jesus’ crucifixion” or “the centurion who oversaw Jesus’ execution”

he questioned him, whether he had already died

Quote: ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτὸν εἰ πάλαι ἀπέθανεν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he asked him, ‘Has he already died?’”

Mark 15:45

having learned from the centurion

Quote: γνοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ κεντυρίωνος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Pilate learned that Jesus really was dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having learned from the centurion that Jesus had already died”

he gave the corpse to Joseph

Quote: ἐδωρήσατο τὸ πτῶμα τῷ Ἰωσήφ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Pilate commanded his soldiers to give the corpse to Joseph. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he told his soldiers to let Joseph have the corpse” or “he permitted Joseph to take the corpse”

Mark 15:46

a linen cloth, … in the linen cloth

Quote: σινδόνα & τῇ σινδόνι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

The term linen cloth refers to a high-quality cloth made from the fibers of the flax plant. If your readers would be unfamiliar with linen, you could use a general expression. See how you translated linen in 14:51. Alternate translation: “a fine cloth … in the fine cloth”

having taken him down, he wrapped {him} in the linen cloth and put him in a tomb, which was having been cut from rock. And he rolled a stone against the door of the tomb

Quote: καθελὼν αὐτὸν, ἐνείλησεν τῇ σινδόνι, καὶ ἔθηκεν αὐτὸν ἐν μνήματι ὃ ἦν λελατομημένον ἐκ πέτρας; καὶ προσεκύλισεν λίθον ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν τοῦ μνημείου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that other people helped Joseph when he took Jesus’ body down from the cross, prepared it for the tomb, laid it in the tomb, and rolled a stone against the entrance to the tomb in order to close it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Joseph and the people who helped him took Jesus’ body down, wrapped the body in the linen cloth, and put it in a tomb, which was having been cut from rock. And they rolled a stone against the door of the tomb”

having taken him down

Quote: καθελὼν αὐτὸν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that Joseph took Jesus’ body down from the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having taken him down off the cross”

he wrapped {him} in the linen cloth

Quote: ἐνείλησεν τῇ σινδόνι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

This was the burial custom in this culture. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could indicate that more explicitly, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “he wrapped him in a linen burial cloth” or “he prepared him for burial”

was having been cut from rock

Quote: ἦν λελατομημένον ἐκ πέτρας (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here Mark means specifically a burial place that had been cut or chiseled out of rock, most likely into the face of a cliff. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of burial place, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “was having been chiseled into the rock” or “which had been specially prepared”

was having been cut

Quote: ἦν λελατομημένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that it was people whom Joseph had hired. Alternate translation: “people had previously cut” or “Joseph had had people cut”

he rolled a stone against the door of the tomb

Quote: προσεκύλισεν λίθον ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν τοῦ μνημείου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Matthew implies that Joseph rolled the stone to close up the tomb. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he rolled a stone against the door of the tomb to close it up”

Mark 15:47

Now

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous

Here, the word Now introduces something that was happening at the same time as what Mark narrated in the previous verse (Joseph burying Jesus’ body). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a simultaneous action, or you could leave Now untranslated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “While Joseph was doing those things,”

Mary the {mother} of Joses

Quote: Μαρία ἡ Ἰωσῆτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Mary is the name of a woman, the same woman whom Mark referred to in 15:40. This Mary was not Mary Magdalene nor Mary the mother of Jesus. Mark identifies her instead as the {mother} of Joses.

of Joses

Quote: Ἰωσῆτος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Joses is also the name of a man, the same man whom Mark referred to in 15:40. This Joses is not Jesus’ brother.

he had been put

Quote: τέθειται (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Joseph of Arimathea. Alternate translation: “Joseph of Arimathea had put him”

Mark 16

Mark 16 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ resurrection (16:1–8)

Special Concepts in this Chapter

The “young man”

Mark indicates that a “young man” clothed in white was sitting inside the tomb. He implies that this “young man” was an angel who appeared in human form. This is supported by how Matthew tells the story, since he indicates explicitly that an angel was at the tomb (see Matthew 28:2–7). Both Luke mentions two men at the tomb, whom he implies are angels (Luke 24:4–7), and John refers to two angels (John 20:12–13). It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include some information about these men, or angels, in a footnote.

The resurrection

Mark does not narrate the resurrection, but he does indicate that the stone was rolled away from the tomb and that an angel in the form of a young man told the women that Jesus had resurrected. It is not clear exactly when Jesus actually rose from the dead, although it is clear that this happened before the tomb was opened. When Jesus rose from the dead, he was a living human being again, and he could never die again. Make sure that it is clear that Jesus came back to life as a living human being.

Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

Singular and plural forms of “you”

All the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in speeches that are given to groups of people. Because of this, all forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 2, 4, and 6. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: Irregular Use of Tenses)

The ending of Mark’s gospel

There are at least four different endings to Mark’s Gospel that are found among various ancient manuscripts. However, only two of those are found among the earliest and most reliable manuscripts. One of these endings is the text of 16:9–20, which is found in some early manuscripts and many later manuscripts. The other ending, the one found in the early manuscripts that scholars consider to be the most reliable, stops at 16:8 and does not include any further words. The ULT and UST include 16:9–20 in brackets, and there are no translation notes on these verses. If you do include these verses in your translation, it is recommended that you put them in a footnote or in brackets to indicate that some of the earliest manuscripts do not include them.

Mark 16:1

And

Quote: καὶ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent

Here, the word And introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave And untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”

the Sabbath having passed

Quote: διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark indicates that the sun had set on Saturday, which meant that the Sabbath had ended. The three women were now permitted to do work, like buying spices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when it was evening and the Sabbath had ended” or “the Sabbath having passed at sunset and the period of rest having ended”

Mary Magdalene and Mary the {mother} of James and Salome

Quote: ἡ Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου, καὶ Σαλώμη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure

Consider how you might naturally include a list of three women with descriptions of them. The UST has moved Salome earlier in the list so that it is clear that she is not one of the children of Mary. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene and Salome and Mary the mother of James”

Mary the {mother} of James

Quote: Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Mary is the name of a woman, the same woman whom Mark referred to in 15:40 and 15:47. This Mary was not Mary Magdalene nor Mary the mother of Jesus. Mark identifies her instead as the {mother} of James.

of James

Quote: Ἰακώβου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word James is the name of a man, the same man whom Mark referred to in 15:40. This James is not James the brother of Jesus, James son of Zebedee, or James son of Alphaeus.

Salome

Quote: Σαλώμη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names

The word Salome is the name of a woman. She is the same woman whom Mark referred to in 15:40.

spices

Quote: ἀρώματα (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown

Here, the word spices refers to any good-smelling herbs, ointments, and oils. In Jesus’ culture, it was customary to put these good-smelling things on dead bodies to cover up bad smells and to honor the people who had died. Since the women plan to anoint Jesus with these spices, the spices must be herbs mixed with oil or some kind of ointment. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of good-smelling item, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “pleasant herbs” or “good-smelling oils”

having come

Quote: ἐλθοῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of come. Alternate translation: “having gone”

they might anoint him

Quote: ἀλείψωσιν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

In Jesus’ culture, it was customary for people to anoint dead bodies when they were buried. Joseph of Arimathea had not done this because he had to bury Jesus quickly before the Sabbath began. These three women now plan to finish the customary burial preparations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might anoint him to complete the burial customs”

Mark 16:2

very early on the first of the week

Quote: λείαν πρωῒ τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark refers to sunrise on the first of the week, that is, Sunday. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “very early in the morning on the first of the week, that is, Sunday”

on the first

Quote: τῇ μιᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Mark is using the adjective first as a noun to mean the first day. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “on the first day”

on the first

Quote: τῇ μιᾷ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day one”

the sun having come up

Quote: ἀνατείλαντος τοῦ ἡλίου (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the phrase the sun having come up refers to sunrise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to sunrise. Alternate translation: “the sun having risen” or “the sun having appeared above the horizon”

Mark 16:3

And they were saying

Quote: καὶ ἔλεγον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark implies that they were saying this while they were going to the tomb. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “And as they were going to the tomb, they were saying”

they were saying to one another, “Who will roll away the stone for us from the door of the tomb

Quote: ἔλεγον πρὸς ἑαυτάς, τίς ἀποκυλίσει ἡμῖν τὸν λίθον ἐκ τῆς θύρας τοῦ μνημείου? (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations

It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were asking one another about who would roll away the stone for them from the entrance of the tomb.”

Mark 16:4

the stone has been rolled away

Quote: ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “somebody had rolled the stone away”

for

Quote: γὰρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases

Here, the word for could introduce: (1) further information about the stone. Alternate translation: “and as for that stone,” (2) a reason why the women were able to see the stone from far away when they looked up. Alternate translation: “which they could observe because” (3) a reason why the women were concerned about who would roll the stone away for them (see 16:3). Alternate translation: “and they had been asking each other about the stone because”

Mark 16:5

on the right side

Quote: ἐν τοῖς δεξιοῖς (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here Mark is referring to the right side of the tomb from the women’s perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “inside the tomb on the right side from their perspective”

dressed in a white robe

Quote: περιβεβλημένον στολὴν λευκήν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with a white robe on”

they were alarmed

Quote: ἐξεθαμβήθησαν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what the women saw. Alternate translation: “these things alarmed them”

Mark 16:6

But

Quote: δὲ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces what the young man says in contrast to how the women reacted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”

Do not be alarmed

Quote: μὴ ἐκθαμβεῖσθε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be what the women saw. See how you expressed the similar phrase in 16:5. Alternate translation: “These things must not alarm you”

the one having been crucified

Quote: τὸν ἐσταυρωμένον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Pilate’s soldiers. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate’s soldiers crucified”

He was raised up

Quote: ἠγέρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, the word raised refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He was restored to life”

He was raised up

Quote: ἠγέρθη (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive

If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the young man could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him up” (2) Jesus himself did it. Alternate translation: “He rose up”

Behold

Quote: ἴδε (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations

Here, the word behold draws the attention of the three women and asks them to look at something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express behold with a word or phrase that asks someone to look or pay attention. Alternate translation: “See” or “Observe”

this is} the place where they put him

Quote: ὁ τόπος ὅπου ἔθηκαν αὐτόν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

Here the young man refers to the place within the tomb where Joseph of Arimathea and his helpers put Jesus’ body. This place was probably a shelf or ledge. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this is the flat area where they put his body” or “this is the ledge within this tomb where they put him”

Mark 16:7

But

Quote: ἀλλὰ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast

Here, the word But introduces a command that contrasts with what the young man said in the previous verse about seeing where Jesus’ body lay. Now, in contrast, the angel commands the women to leave the tomb. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” or “But do not stay here. Instead,”

to his disciples and to Peter

Quote: τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ Πέτρῳ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit

The phrase and to Peter is not making a distinction between Peter and the disciples by indicating that Peter is not part of the group of Jesus’ disciples. Rather, the phrase and Peter is being used to emphasize that of all of the disciples of Jesus, these women should take special care to tell Peter the information that follows this phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to Peter and to the rest of his disciples” or “to his disciples, and particularly to Peter”

to Peter, ‘He is going before you to Galilee. There you will see him, just as he said to you

Quote: Πέτρῳ, ὅτι προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν; ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε, καθὼς εἶπεν ὑμῖν (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to Peter that Jesus is going before them to Galilee and that they will see him there, just as he said to them”

He is going before

Quote: προάγει (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of going. Alternate translation: “He is coming before”

Mark 16:8

having gone out, they fled from the tomb, for trembling and amazement was gripping them

Quote: ἐξελθοῦσαι, ἔφυγον ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου; εἶχεν γὰρ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because trembling and amazement was gripping them, having gone out, they ran from the tomb”

having gone out

Quote: ἐξελθοῦσαι (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go

In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of gone. Alternate translation: “having come out”

trembling and amazement was gripping them

Quote: εἶχεν & αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom

Here, when trembling and amazement are gripping people, it means that these people are overcome by trembling and amazement. In other words, they cannot help but experience these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were overcome by trembling and amazement” or “they could not help but experience trembling and amazement”

trembling and amazement was gripping them

Quote: εἶχεν & αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of amazement, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were trembling and greatly amazed”

trembling and amazement

Quote: τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys

Here Mark implies that the women were trembling because of their amazement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “trembling because of amazement”

they said nothing to anyone, for they were afraid

Quote: οὐδενὶ οὐδὲν εἶπον; ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because they were afraid, they said nothing to anyone”

they said nothing to anyone

Quote: οὐδενὶ οὐδὲν εἶπον (1)
Support Reference: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives

The words translated nothing and to anyone are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “they told no one anything”